Some symbolic expressions for the yellow colour
CONTENS
अमृत अरुण अवदात असित आपीत उकनाह उकानहः ऊर्ध्वपुण्ड्र एक एकपिङ्ग कंकुष्ठः कङ्कुष्ठ कर्बूर कषाय काल गव्य गो गौर चित्र चित्राङ्ग जरठ तालकम् पत्रम् पांडु पांडुकः पाण्डु पाण्डुक पाण्डुत्व पाण्डुर पिंग पिंगल पिंजर पिंजरित पिङ्ग पिङ्गल पिङ्गलत्व पिङ्गलिमन् पिङ्गिमन् पिण्जर पिण्जरय पिण्जरिक पिञ्जर पिञ्जरय् पिञ्जरय पिशङ्ग पीत पीतक पीतता पीतरक्त पीतराग पीतल पीतवर्ण पीतहरितच्छाय पीतिमन् ब्रध्न मण्जरीपिण्जरित मलीमस मांश्चतु राज्णी रुचिः रोहित रौचनिक वर्णः वर्णद वर्णिन् विपाण्डु विशद शवल शार शारत्व शाव शिलाधातु शोण शोभा सितरण्जन सु सुवर्ण सुवर्णक हरि हरिक हरिकः हरिण हरिणी हरित् हरित हरितत्व हरिताल हरिद्रा हरिद्राभ हरिद्वर्ण हरिनेत्र हरिपिङ्ग हरिमन् हरिम्भर हरिय हरियः हरिवर्पस् हरिश्चन्द्र हरिश्री हारिद्र हारिद्रः हालक हालकः हेमगौर हैम
अमृत – amṛta | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899amṛta “a-mṛta” (cf. mfn. not dead ; immortal &c.; imperishable ;
beautiful, beloved ; m. an immortal, a god &c.; N. of śiva; of Viṣṇu ; of Dhanvantari ; the plant Phaseolus Trilobus Ait.; the root of a plant ; (“ā”) f. a goddess &c.; spirituous liquor ; Emblica Officinalis, Terminalia Citrina Roxb., Cocculus Cordifolius, Piper Longum, Ocymum Sanctum; N. of the mother of Parikshit ; of Dākṣāyaṇī ; of a sister of Amṛitodana ; of a river ; of the first “kalā” of the moon ; n. collective body of immortals ; world of immortality, heaven, eternity ; (also “āni” n. pl. ; immortality ; final emancipation ; the nectar (conferring immortality, produced at the churning of the ocean), ambrosia (or the voice compared to it, N. ; nectar-like food; antidote against poison ; N. of a medicament , medicament in general ; the residue of a sacrifice (cf. “amṛeta-bhuj”); unsolicited alms , water ; milk clarified butter (cf. “paṇāmṛta”), boiled rice ; anything sweet, a sweetmeat ; a pear ; food ; gold ; quicksilver ; poison ; a particular poison ; a ray of light N. of a metre ; of a sacred place (in the north) 14095, of various conjunctions of planets (supposed to confer long life) ; the number, “four” Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 amṛta a. (1) Not dead; amṛte jārajaḥ kuṁḍaḥ Ak. (2) Immortal; apāma somamamṛtā abhūma Rv. 8. 48. 3; U. 1. 1; Bg. 14. 27. (3) Imperishable, indestructible, eternal. (4) Causing immortality. (5) Beautiful, agreeable, desired. –taḥ (1) A god, an immortal, deity. (2) N. of Dhanvantari, physician of the gods; also N. of Indra, of the sun, of Prajāpati, of the soul, Viṣṇu and Śiva. (3) N. of a plant (vanamudga). (4) N. of the root of a plant (vārāhīkaṁda). –tā (1) Spirituous liquor. (2) N. of various plants; e. g. āmalakī, harītakī, guḍūcī; māgadhī; tulasī, iṁdravāruṇī, jyotiṣmatī, gorakṣadugdhā; ativiṣā; raktatrivṛt; dūrvā, sthūlamāṁsaharītakī. (4) N. of one of the Nāḍīs in the body; Mal. 5. 2. (5) One of the rays of the sun; R. 10. 58. –taṁ (1) (a) Immortality, imperishable state; na mṛtyurāsīdamṛtaṁ na tarhi Rv. 10. 129. 2; Ms. 12. 85. (b) Final beatitude, absolution; tapasā kilbiṣaṁ haṁti vidyayāmṛtamaśnute Ms. 12. 104; sa śriye cāmṛtāya ca Ak. (2) The collective body of immortals. (3) (a) The world of immortality, Paradise, Heaven; the power of eternity, immortal light, eternity. (4) Nectar of immortality, ambrosia, beverage of the gods (opp. viṣa) supposed to be churned out of the ocean; devāsurairamṛtamaṁbunidhirmamaṁthe Ki. 5. 30; viṣādaṣyamṛtaṁ grāhyaṁ Ms. 2. 239; viṣamapyamṛtaṁ kvacidbhavedamṛtaṁ vā viṣamīśvarecchayā R. 8. 46; oft. used in combination with words like vāc, vacanaṁ, vāṇī &c; kumārajanmāmṛtasaṁmitākṣaraṁ R. 3. 16; āpyāyitosau vacanāmṛtena Mb.; amṛtaṁ śiśire vahniramṛtaṁ kṣīrabhojanaṁ Pt. 1. 128 the height of pleasure or gratification. (5) The Soma juice. (6) Antidote against poison. (7) The residue or leavings of a sacrifice; (yajñaśeṣa) Ms. 3. 285. (8) Unsolicited alms, alms got without solicitation; mṛtaṁ syādyācitaṁ bhaikṣyamamṛtaṁ syādayācitaṁ Ms. 4. 4-5. (9) Water; amṛtādhmātajīmūta U. 6. 21; amṛtādunmathyamānāt K. 136; cf. also the formulas amṛtopastaraṇamasi svāhā and amṛtāpidhānamasi svāhā repeated by Brāhmaṇas at the time of sipping water before the commencement and at the end of meals. (10) A drug. (11) Clari fied butter; amṛtaṁ nāma yat saṁto maṁtrajihveṣu juhvati Śi. 2. 107. (12) Milk. (13) Food in general. (14) Boiled rice. (15) Any thing sweet, any thing lovely or charming; a sweetmeat. (16) Property. (17) Gold. (18) Quicksilver. (19) Poison. (20) The poison called vatsanābha. (21) The Supreme Spirit (brahma). (22) N. of a sacred place. (23) N. of particular conjunctions of Nakshatras (lunar asterisms) with week days (vāranakṣatrayoga) or of lunar days with week days (tithivārayoga). (24) The number four. (25) Splendour, light. [cf. Gr. ambrotos, ambrosia; L. immortalis]. — Comp. –aṁśuḥ, –karaḥ, –dīdhitiḥ, –dyutiḥ, –raśmiḥ &c. epithets of the moon; amṛtadīdhitireṣa vidarbhaje N. 4. 104; amṛtāṁśūdbhava born from the moon; from whom was born the moon, N. of Viṣṇu. –akṣara a. immortal and imperishable; kṣaraṁ pradhānamamṛtākṣaraṁ haraḥ Śvet. Up. –aṁdhas, –aśanaḥ, –āśin m. ‘one whose food is nectar’; a god, an immortal. –asu a. whose soul is immortal. –āśaḥ 1. N. of Viṣṇu. –2. a god. –āsaṁgaḥ a sort of collyrium. –āharaṇaḥ N. of Garuḍa who once stole Amṛta. –iṣṭakā a kind of sacrificial brick shaped like the golden head of men, beasts &c. (paśuśīrṣāṇi). –īśaḥ, –īśvaraḥ N. of Śiva. –utpannā a fly. (–nnaṁ), –udbhavaṁ a kind of collyrium (kharparītutthaṁ), (–vaḥ) N. of the Bilva tree. –kuṁḍaṁ a vessel containing nectar. –kṣāraṁ sal ammoniac. –gatiḥ N. of a metre consisting of 40 syllables. –garbha a. filled with water or nectar; ambrosial. ( –rbhaḥ) 1. the individual soul –2. the supreme soul. –citiḥ f. an arrangement or accumulation of sacrificial bricks conferring immortality. –ja a. produced by or from nectar. ( –jaḥ) a sort of plant, Yellow Myrobalan. –jaṭā N. of a plant (jaṭāmāṁsī). –taraṁgiṇī moonlight. –tilakā N. of a metre of 4 lines, also called tvaritagati. –drava a. shedding nectar. ( –vaḥ) flow of nectar. –dhāra a. shedding nectar. ( –rā) 1. N. of a metre. –2. flow of nectar. –paḥ 1. a drinker of nectar, a god or deity. –2. N. of Viṣṇu. –3. one who drinks wine; bhruvamamṛtapanāmavāchaṁyāsāvadharamamuṁ madhupastavājihīte Śi. 7. 42 (where a- has sense 1. also). –pakṣaḥ 1. having golden or immortal wings, a sort of hawk. –2. the immortal or golden wings of sacrificial fire. –3. fire itself. –phalaḥ N. of two trees paṭola and pārāvata. (–lā) 1. a bunch of grapes, vine plant, a grape (drākṣā). –2. = āmalakī. (–laṁ) a sort of fruit (ruciphala) found in the country of the Mudgalas according to Bhava P. –baṁdhuḥ Ved. 1. a god or deity in general. –2. a horse or the moon. –bhallātakī a sort of medicinal preparation of ghee mentioned by Chakradatta. –bhuj m. an immortal, a god, deity; one who tastes the sacrificial residues. –bhū a. free from birth and death. –mati = -gati q. v. –maṁthanaṁ churning (of the ocean) for nectar. –mālinī N. of Durga. –yogaḥ see under amṛta. –rasaḥ 1. nectar, ambrosia; kāvyāmṛtarasāsvādaḥ H. 1; vividhakāvyāmṛtarasān pibāmaḥ Bh. 3. 40. — 2. the Supreme spirit. ( –sā) 1. dark-coloured grapes. –2. a sort of cake (Mar. anarsā). — latā, –latikā a nectar-giving creeping plant (guḍūcī). –vāka a. producing nectar-like sweet words. –saṁyāvaṁ a sort of dish mentioned in Bhava P. –sāra a. ambrosial; -rāṇi prajñānāni U. 7. ( –raḥ) 1. clarified butter. –2. a sort of ayaḥ pāka. -jaḥ raw sugar, molasses (guḍa). –sūḥ, –sūtiḥ 1. the moon (distilling nectar). –2. mother of the gods. –sodaraḥ 1. ‘brother of nectar,’ the horse called uccaiḥśravas. –2. a horse in general. –sravaḥ flow of nectar. ( –vā) N. of a plant and tree (rudaṁtī). –srut a. shedding or distilling nectar; Ku. 1. 45. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch amṛta (3. a + mṛta) P. 6, 2, 116. 1) adj. f. ā. a) “nicht gestorben” BRĀHMAṆ. 3, 18. — b) “unsterblich” Kār. zu P. 3, 2, 188. yadyūyaṁ pṛśnimātaro martāsaḥ syātana. stotā vo amṛtaḥ syāt.. ṚV. 1, 38, 4. marteṣvagniramṛto ni dhāyi 7, 4, 4. apāma somamamṛtā abhūma 8, 48, 1. 1, 166, 3. 3, 20, 3. 4, 35, 8. u. s. w. ŚAT. BR. 2, 2, 2, 8. wie die Götter “unsterblich” wurden 9, 5, 1, 7. 11, 2, 3, 6. “unsterblich” wird man nur karmaṇā vidyayā vā 10, 4, 3, 9. tasya ha prajāpateḥ. ardhameva martyamardhamamṛtam 1, 3, 2. 4, 1. BṚH. ĀR. UP. 1, 4, 6. ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 3, 1. BHAG. 14, 27. subst. “ein unsterbliches, gottähnliches Wesen” H. an. 3, 236. MED. t. 77. tamā no arkamamṛtāya juṣṭamime dhāsuramṛtāsaḥ purājāḥ ṚV. 7, 97, 5. kasya nūnaṁ katamasyāmṛtānāṁ manāmahe cāru devasya nāma 1, 24, 1. 72, 2. 10. 189, 3. 3, 21, 1. 4, 42, 1. u. s. w. fem.: yadāsu marto amṛtāsu nispṛk 10, 95, 9. 17, 2. — c) “unvergänglich”: kuvinme vasvo amṛtasya śikṣāḥ ṚV. 3, 43, 5. īśe hyāgniramṛtasya bhūrerīśe rāyaḥ suvīryasya dātoḥ 7, 4, 6. idaṁ tyatpātramindrapānamindrasya priyamamṛtamapāyi 6, 44, 16. VS. 4, 18. 26. yajjyotirantaramṛtaṁ prajāsu 34, 3. Auf solche Stellen mag zum Theil die Bedeutung “Gold” gegründet sein; vgl. 4, 1. — d) = sundara “schön” und = atihṛdya “sehr lieblich” VYĀḌI im ŚKDR. (hier als m.). — 2) m. a) “Gott”, s. u. 1,b. — b) N. einer Wurzel (vārāhīkanda) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) N. einer Pflanze, “Phaseolus trilobus Ait.” (vanamudga) id. — d) ein Bein. Śiva’s ŚIV. — e) ein Bein. Dhanvantari’s H. an. 3, 236. MED. t. 77. — 3) f. -tā. a) “ein berauschendes Getränk” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — b) N. verschiedener Pflanzen: a) “Emblica officinalis Gaertn.” (āmalakī) AK. 2, 4, 2, 38. TRIK. 3, 3, 143. H. an. 3, 237. MED. t. 77. RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. AINSLIE, Mat. ind. 2, 245. — b) “Terminalia citrina Roxb.” (harītakī, pathyā) AK. 2, 4, 2, 39. TRIK. 3, 3, 143. H. an. 3, 237. MED. t. 77. RĀJAN. = campādeśajasthūlamāṁsā harītakī. sā virecano (sic) praśastā RĀJAVALLABHA im ŚKDR. — g) “Cocculus cordifolius DC.” (guḍūcī) AK. 2, 4, 3, 1. TRIK. 3, 3, 143. H. 1157. H. an. MED. t. SUŚR. 2, 106, 2. 8. 116, 7. 207, 8. 256, 3. 522, 4. Vgl. amṛtavallī. — d) “Piper longum L.” (māgadhī) H. an. MED. — e) “Ocymum sanctum L.” (tulasī) ŚABDAM. im ŚKDR. — z) “Cucumis colocynthis” (indravāruṇī) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — h) “Halicacabum cardiospermum” (jyotiṣmatī) id. — J) = gorakṣadugdhā id. — i) = ativiṣā id. — c) = raktatrivṛt id. — l) “Panicum dactylon” (dūrvā) id. — c) N. pr. Mutter von Parīkṣit MBH. 1, 3794. LIA. I, Anh. XXIV. Tochter Siṁhahanu’s und Schwester Amṛtodana’s SCHIEFNER, Lebensb. 233 (3). — 4) n. a) “das Unsterbliche”, d. i. “die Gesammtheit der Unsterblichen”: niveśayannamṛtaṁ martyaṁ ca ṚV. 1, 35, 2. (stṛṇīta barhiḥ) yatrāmṛtasya cakṣaṇam 13, 5. tatrāmṛtasya cetanam 170, 4. — b) “Unsterblichkeit”: devebhyaḥ kamavṛṇīta mṛtyuṁ prajāyai kamamṛtaṁ nāvṛṇīta ṚV. 10, 13, 4. na mṛtyurāsīdamṛtaṁ na tarhi 129, 2. dakṣiṇāvanto amṛtaṁ bhajante 1, 125, 6. sūryasya bhāge amṛtasya loke AV. 8, 1, 1. ṚV. 1, 83, 15. 10, 121, 2. ŚAT. BR. 7, 3, 1, 46. u.s.w. 14, 9, 1, 30 (= BṚH. ĀR. UP. 1, 3, 28). ĪŚOP. 11. prajātiramṛtamānanda ityupasthe TAITT. UP. 3, 10, 3. M. 12, 85. 104. — c) “die Welt der Unsterblichkeit, das ewige Reich, die Ewigkeit”: uṣaḥ pratīcī bhuvanāni viśvordhvā tiṣṭhasyamṛtasya ketuḥ ṚV. 3, 61, 3. amṛtasya panthām 4, 35, 3. amṛtasya nābhiḥ 58, 1. śṛṇvantu viśve amṛtasya putrāḥ 10, 13, 1. 1, 91, 18. amṛtasya patnī heissen “die Morgenröthen” 4, 5, 13. “die Wasser” VS. 6, 34. Aditi 21, 5. Kuhū AV. 7, 47, 2. dvitā vyūrṇvannamṛtasya dhāma ṚV. 9, 94, 2. devā ivāmṛtaṁ rakṣamāṇāḥ AV. 3, 30, 7. pl. “die Kräfte der Ewigkeit”: viśvarūpo amṛtāni tasthau ṚV. 3, 38, 4. satrā cakrāṇo amṛtāni viśvā 1, 72, 1. — d) “der Trank der Unsterblichkeit, Lebensessenz”, greek AK. 1, 1, 1, 44. 3, 4, 104. TRIK. 3, 3, 143. H. 89. an. 3, 235. MED. t. 76. apsvāntaramṛtamapsu bheṣajam ṚV. 1, 23, 19. manye bhejāno amṛtasya tarhi hiraṇyavarṇā atṛpaṁ yadā vaḥ AV. 3, 13, 6. goṣu priyamamṛtaṁ rakṣamāṇā ṚV. 1, 71, 9. apāra ūrve amṛtaṁ duhānāḥ 3, 1, 14. 1, 112, 3. 164, 21. VS. 2, 34. AV. 3, 12, 8. amṛtāhutiḥ AIT. BR. 2, 14. M. 2, 162. 239. INDR. 1, 27. amṛtahrada ŚĀK. 100, 17. phalānyamṛtakalpāni R. 5, 74, 6. pātālādamṛtamānīya catvāro ‘pi jīvāpitāḥ VET. 33, 20. Häufig wird “die Rede” oder “die Stimme” mit amṛta verglichen: vācaṁ tāmamṛtopamām N. 12, 42. RAGH. 3, 16. -vāṇī ŚRUT. 5. -rutā 35. vacanāmṛta HIT. 25, 2. “der Gipfel aller Genüsse”: amṛtaṁ śiśire vahniramṛtaṁ priyadarśanam. amṛtaṁ rājasanmānamamṛtaṁ saṁgatiḥ satām.. PAÑCAT. I, 144. Entsteht bei der Quirlung des Oceans MBH. 1, 1094. fgg. R. 1, 45. HARIV. 12185. VP. 75. fgg. befindet sich im Monde 238. fgg. Vgl. amṛtataraṁgiṇī, amṛtadīdhiti, amṛtadyuti, amṛtasū. — e) N. einer Mixtur gegen Vergiftung SUŚR. 2, 250, 17. 285, 9. = rasāyana H. an. 3, 236. = auṣadha RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — f) “Ueberbleibsel eines Opfers” AK. 2, 7, 28. TRIK. 3, 3, 143. H. 834. an. 3, 235. MED. t. 76. vighasāśī bhavennityaṁ nityaṁ vāmṛtabhojanaḥ. vighaso bhuktaśeṣaṁ tu yajñaśeṣaṁ tathāmṛtam.. M. 3, 285. — g) “unerbettelte, freiwillig dargebotene Almosen” AK. 2, 9, 3. TRIK. 3, 3, 143. H. 866. an. 3, 235. MED. t. 77. ṛtāmṛtābhyāṁ jīvettu u. s. w. amṛtaṁ syādayācitam M. 4, 4. 5. — h) N. pr. eines Ortes: kṣīrodasyottare kūle udīcyāṁ diśi devatāḥ. amṛtaṁ nāma paramaṁ sthānamāhurmanīṣiṇaḥ.. HARIV. 14095. amṛteśaya erscheint ebend. S. 927, Z. 4, v. u. als ein Beiname Viṣṇu’s. Die Lexicographen führen noch folgende Bedeutungen an: i) “Wasser” NAIGH. 1, 12. AK. 1, 2, 3, 3. 3, 4, 14, 78. TRIK. 3, 3, 143. H. 1069. an. 3, 235. MED. t. 76. — k) “Gold” NAIGH. 1, 2. H. an. 3, 236. Vgl. 1,c. und amṛteṣṭakā. — l) “geklärte Butter” (ghṛta) H. an. 3, 236. MED. t. 76. — m) “Milch” H. an. RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. “warme Milch” H. ś. 98. — n) “Speise” (jagdhi) H. an. — o) “gekochter Reis” (anna) id. — p) “Süssigkeit” (svādu) id. — q) “Liebliches” (hṛdya) id. — r) “Eigenthum” (sva) id. — s) “eine Art Gift”, viṣasāmānya und vatsanābha RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — t) “Quecksilber” id. — u) “Strahl” YĀDAVA bei MALLIN. zu RAGH. 10, 59. ŚAṁKAR. zu BṚH. ĀR. UP. 4, 4, 16. — v) “die letzte Befreiung” (mokṣa) AK. 1, 1, 4, 15. TRIK. 1, 1, 134. 3, 3, 143. H. 74. an. 3, 235. MED. t. 77. amṛta 1) a) hatvā cainaṁ nāmṛtaḥ syādayaṁ me MBH. 13, 23. — b) Z. 3 lies 8, 48, 3 st. 8, 48, 1. subst. “ein unsterbliches Wesen, ein Gott” Spr. 4302. — 3) b) l) sarvauṣadhīnāmamṛtā (= dūrvā Schol.) pradhānā Spr. 5208. — d) Bein. der Dākṣāyaṇī Verz. d. Oxf. H. 39,b,19. 31. — e) N. “der ersten” Kalā “des Mondes” Verz. d. Oxf. H. 18,b,24. — 4) b) Spr. 3561. 4302. 4331. — e) “ein best. Heilmittel” ŚIŚ. 9, 36. “Arzenei” überh. WASSILJEW 199. — p) yathāmṛtaghaṭaṁ daṁśāḥ (viśanti) R. 7, 7, 3. amṛta = kṣaudra Schol. — u) saurībhiriva nāḍībhiramṛtākhyābhiḥ RAGH. 10, 59. — v) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 258,b,10. — w) “ein Metrum von 4 x 54 Silben” ṚV. PRĀT. 17, 4. Ind. St. 8, 107. 111. amṛta 4) m) Spr. (II) 2986. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 amṛta a-mṛta. I. adj., f. tā, Immortal, Bhag. 14, 27. II. m. 1. A god. 2. The soul. III. n. 1. The beverage of the gods, nectar. 2. A medicine preventing old age, prolonging life, and awakening the dead, Lass. 33, 20. 3. A medicament; nectar and medicament, Śiś. 9, 36. 4. The residue of sacrificial food, Man. 3, 285. 5. Unsolicited alms, Man. 4, 4. — Comp. gava-, n. amṛta, consisting of rays, MBh. 3, 17351. — Cf. [greek] Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 amṛta m. immortal. m. a god. n. immortality (also concr. = the gods); the drink of the gods, i.e. nectar; anything sweet, delightful, or wholesome, e.g. water, milk, medicine, the remainder of sacrifice, alms unasked. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 amṛta a-mṛta, pp. not hvg. died; immortal; m. god; ā, f. goddess; a herb; n. immortality; world of immortals; nectar; a certain remedy; medicine; remnant of a sacrifice; water; milk; ray; -kara, m. moon; -kiraṇa, m. id.; -tejas, m. N. of a fairy prince; -tva, a. immortality; condition of ambrosia; -dīdhiti, m. moon; -drava, a. flowing with nectar; -dhāyin, a. sipping –; -pāyin, a. drinking nectar = hearing fine speeches; -prabha, m. N. of a fairy; ā, f. N.; -bhavana, n. N. of a monastery; -bhāṣ-aṇa, n. nectar-like speech; -bhuj, m. god; -bhojana, a. eating the remnants of sacrifices; -maya, a. (ī) immortal; nectar-like; consisting of nectar; -raśmi, m. moon; -rasa, m. nectar; a. tasting like nectar; -latā, f. creeper yielding nectar; -loka, m. world of the immortals; -varṣin, a. raining nectar; -hrada, m. lake of nectar. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 amṛta tri° na mṛtaḥ . 1 maraṇaśūnye jīvite amṛte jārajaḥ kuṇḍaḥ amaraḥ apāma somamamṛtā abhūma iti śrutiḥ maraṇañcātra ābhūtasaṁplavasthānamamṛtatvaṁ hi bhāṣyate iti viṣṇu pu° uktam mahākalpāvasthāyitvaṁ, devānāmapi tathaivāmṛtatvam kāryātyaye tadadhyakṣeṇa sahātaḥ paramāmnāyāt śā° sū° kāryabrahmaṇā saha sarveṣāṁ layābhidhānāt . na mṛtaṁ maraṇaṁ yasmāt . 2 pīyūṣe tatsevane hi amṛtatvaṁ bhāratādau prasiddham . tacca prathamaṁ pṛthūpadiṣṭairdairvarindraṁ vatsaṁ kṛtvā gorūpadharāyāḥ pṛthvā dugdham paścācca durvāsaḥśāpāt samudramadhyaṁ gatam tato devāsuraiḥ samudre mathite punarutpannamiti paurāṇikī kathānusandheyā devāsurairamṛtamasvunidhirmamante kirā° na vai devā aśnanti pibanti etadevāmṛtaṁ dṛṣṭvā tṛpyanti cā° u° . amṛtadīdhitireṣa vidarbhaje . bhajasi tāpamanuṣyakimaṁśubhiḥ . yadi bhavanti mṛtāḥ sakhi! candrikāḥ iti naiṣadham . 3 jale tasya prāṇahetutvāt amṛtatvam . annamayaṁ hi saumya! mana āpomayaḥ prāṇaḥ ityupakramya ṣoḍaśakalaḥ saumya! puruṣaḥ pañcadaśāhāni māśīḥ kāmamapaḥ pibāpomayaḥ prāṇo na pibato vicchetsyate chā° u° . jalapānābhāve prāṇavicchedaukteḥ tatpāne ca prāṇavṛddheḥ jalasya maraṇāhetutvam . amṛtopastaraṇamasi svāhā amṛtāpidhānamasi svāheti āpośanamantraḥ . 4 ghṛte tasya, āyurvai ghṛta mityukterāyurjanakatvāt maraṇāhetutvāttathātvam . amṛtaṁ nāma yat santomantrajihveṣu juhvati . śobhaiva mandarakṣuvdhakṣubhitāmbhodhivarṇanā māghaḥ . 5 pārade tasya ca rasāyanādinā pāne abhrakastava vījantu mama vojantu pāradaḥ anayormelanaṁ devi! mṛtyudāridryanāśanam ityukteḥ bahukālajīvanahetutvāt tathātvam raseśvaranarśane vivaraṇam . 6 yajñaśiṣṭe dravye yajñaśeṣo’mṛtaṁ smṛta mityuktestathātvam . 7 ayācite vastuni mṛtaṁ svādyācitaṁ bhaikṣyamamṛtaṁ syāddayācitam manūktestasya maraṇarūpāpamānahetuyācanaśūnyatvāt tathātvam . ṛtāmṛtābhyāṁ jīveta manuḥ . 8 dugdhe tasya dehadhārakatvena maraṇāhetutvāt tathātvam . 9 anne annamūlaṁ hi jīvana mityuktestathātvam . na mriyate kṣīyate . 10 svarṇe . agnau suvarṇamakṣīṇamiti yā° uktestasya vahnau bahutāpane’pi akṣīṇatvāttathātvam ataeva tasya taijasatvaṁ svarṇaṁ taijasamatyantānalasantāpe’pi anāśyatvādityanumānena si° mu° sādhitam . evadabhiprāyeṇaiva amṛtaṁ vai hiraṇyamityuktamā śata° brā° . 11 bhakṣaṇīyadravyamātre, tasyānnavattathātvam 12 svādudravye amṛtatulyasvādavattvāt . 13 tatsādhane dravyetri° ādityovai devamadhu ityādi madhuvidyāyām tā evāsyāmṛtāmadhunāḍyaḥ chā° u° pañcakṛtvaḥ pāṭhaḥ . 14 hṛdye amṛtavadāhlādakatvāt tathātvam 15 viṣe 16 vatsanābhe viṣe tayoḥ vaidyakoktadiśā śodhane amaraṇahetutvāttathā . ataeva viṣamaṣyamṛtaṁ kvacidbhavediti raghuḥ 17 mokṣe bidyayāmṛtamaśnute iti śrutiḥ kṣayaśūnyatvāttathā amṛtasyaiṣa seturiti śrutiḥ sa śriye cāmṛtāya ca amaraḥ . 18 amṛtatulye ānandakaratvāttathā . amṛtaṁ vālabhāṣitamiti hito° . āpyāyito’sau vacanāmṛtena udbhaṭaḥ . amṛtamastyasya svāmitvena bhakṣakatvena vā arśa° ac . 19 dhanvantarau sahi samudramathā nasamaye amṛtaṁ bibhradutthitaḥ iti purāṇe prasiddham . 20 deve tadbhakṣatvena tathātvam . devānāñcāmṛtadarśanenaiva tṛptatvam na vai devā aśnanti pibanti etardevāmṛtaṁ dṛṣṭvā tṛpyantoti chā° u° ukteḥ rathenāmṛtaṁ martyañca ya° 33, 40 amṛtaṁ devādikamiti ve° dī° . na sriyate sma kartari kta . 21 vārāhīkandeṣu tasya bahucchedane’pi punaḥprarūḍhatvāttathā 22 vanamudge ca tasya oṣadhitayā phalapākāntatve’pi chinnaprarūḍhatvāttathātvam . 23 śuḍūcyām . 24 indravāruṇyāṁ 25 jyotiṣmanyām 26 gorakṣadugdhāyām 27 ativiṣāyāṁ 28 raktatrivṛti 29 dūrvāyām 30 āmalakyāṁ 31 harītakyāṁ 32 tulasyāṁ 33 pippalyāṁ 34 sthūlamāṁsaharītakyāñca strī . etāsāṁ yathāyathaṁ roganivārakatvena tathātvam . amṛtena sahotpannatvāt amṛtatulyāsvādavattvācca 35 surāyāṁ strī . 36 sūryaraśmibhede strī tāsāṁ śatāmi catvāri raśmīnāṁ vṛṣṭisarjane . śatatrayaṁ himotsarge tāvadgarbhasya sarjane . ānandāśca hi meghāśca bhūtanāḥ pṛtanā iti . catuḥśataṁ vṛṣṭivāhāḥ sarvāstā amṛtā striyaḥ malli° yādavaḥ . tāsāñcāmṛtasya jalasya dāyitvāttathā . saurībhiriva nāḍībhiramṛtākhyābhirammayaḥ raghuḥ . 37 maraṇaśūgye viṣṇau pu° amṛtaḥ śāśvataḥ sthāṇuḥ vi° sa° . nāsti mṛtaṁ maraṇaṁ yasmāt . 38 ajaramaratvaprade tri° . indriyasyendriyamidaṁ payo’mṛtaṁ madhu yaju° 19, 72, 73, 74, 75 . amṛtamajarā mṛtyupradatvāt ānandakaram amṛtatulyam ve° dī° nandā bhaumārkayorbhadrā śukrendvośca jayā budhe . śubhayogā gurau riktā pūrṇā mande’mṛtāhvayā . ādityabhaumayornandā bhadrā śukraśaśāṅkayoḥ jayā jñosyād gurau riktā pūrṇārke cāmṛtā śubheti iti jyotiṣokte 39 tithivārayogarūpe yogabhede dhruvagurukaramūlā pauṣṇabhānyarkaśāre hariyugavidhiyugme phalgunībhādrayugme . divasakaraturaṅgau śarvarīnāthavāre . guruyumanalavātopāntyapauṣṇāni kauje . dahanavidhiśatākhyāmaitrabhaṁ saumyavāre . marudaditibhapuṣyā maitrabhaṁ jīvavāre . bhagayugajayugaśvoviṣṇumaitre sitāhe . śvasanakamalayonī saurivāre’mṛtāni rāja mā° ukte ādityahastā gurupuṣyayuktā budhānurādhā śanirohiṇī ca . some ca viṣṇuḥ kujarevatī ca śukrāśvinī cāmṛtayogavargāḥ . ukte ca 40 vāranakṣatrayogaje yogabhede yadi viṣṭivyatīpātau dinaṁvāpyaśubhaṁ bhavet . hanyate’mṛtayogena bhāskareṇa tamo yathā jyoti° . 41 brahmaṇi na° . |
अरुण – aruṇa | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899aruṇa mf (“ā” [ v, 63, 6, &c.] or “ī” [ x, 61, 4, &, (nom. pl. “aruṇayas”)
95, 6]) n. ( “ṛ” , reddish-brown, tawny, red, ruddy (the colour of the morning opposed to the darkness of night) &c. mf (“ā”) n. perplexed aruṇa mf (“ā”) n. dumb aruṇa m. red colour aruṇa m. the dawn (personified as the charioteer of the sun) aruṇa m. the sun aruṇa m. a kind of leprosy (with red [cf. spots and insensibility of the skin) aruṇa m. a little poisonous animal aruṇa m. the plant Rottleria Tinctoria aruṇa m. molasses aruṇa m. N. of a teacher aruṇa m. of the composer of the hymn (with the patron. Vaitahavya) aruṇa m. of the Nāga priest Aṭa aruṇa m. of a son of Kṛiṣṇa aruṇa m. of the Daitya Mura aruṇa m. of an Asura “varuṇa”), of the father of the fabulous bird Jaṭāyu aruṇa (“aruṇa”) m. pl. N. of a pupil of Upaveśi (cf. “aruṇa” m. above) , m. pl. N. of a class of Ketus (seventy seven in number) aruṇa m. (named as the composers of certain Mantras). aruṇa (“ā”) f. the plants Betula, madder (Rubia Manjith), Tori, a black kind of the same, Colocynth or bitter apple, the plant that yields the red and black berry used for the jewellers weight (called Retti) aruṇa m. N. of a river , (“īs”) f. red cow (in the Vedic myths) and aruṇa m. the dawn aruṇa (“am”) n. red colour aruṇa m. a ruby Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 aruṇa a. (ṇā, –ṇī f.) [ṛ-unan; cf. Uṇ. 3. 60] (1) Reddish brown, tawny, red, ruddy (of the colour of the morning as opposed to the darkness of night); pratyākhyātaviśeṣakaṁ kurabakaṁ śyāmāvadātāruṇaṁ M. 3. 5; nayanānyaruṇāni ghūrṇayan Ku. 4. 12. (2) Perplexed, embarrassed. (3) Dumb. –ṇaḥ (1) Red colour, the colour of the dawn or morning twilight. (2) The dawn personified as the charioteer of the sun; āviṣkṛtāruṇapuraḥsara ekatorkaḥ S. 4. 1, 7. 4; vibhāvarī yadyaruṇāya kalpate Ku. 5. 44; R. 5. 71. [Aruṇa is represented as the elder brother of Garuḍa, being the son of Vinatā by Kaśyapa. Vinatā prematurely hatched the egg and the child was born without thighs, and hence he is called Anūru ‘thighless’, or Vipāda ‘footless.’ He cursed his mother that since she had brought him forth before the due season she would be a slave to her rival Kadrū; but at her earnest entreaties, he modified the curse and said that her next son would deliver her from bondage. Aruṇa now holds the office of the charioteer of the sun. His wife was Śyeni, who bore him two sons Sampāti and Jaṭayu]. (3) The sun; rāgeṇa bālāruṇakomalena Ku. 3. 30, 5. 8; saṁsṛjyate sarasijairaruṇāṁśubhinnaiḥ R. 5. 69; S. 1. 32. (4) A kind of leprosy with red spots and insensibility of the skin. (5) A little poisonous creature. (6) N. of a plant puṁnāga; also a synonym of arka q. v. (7) Molasses (guḍa) (8) N. of a peak of the Himālaya situated to the west of Kailāsa. (9) N. of one of the 12 Ādityas, the one presiding over Magha. –ṇā (1) N. of several plants (a) ativiṣā (Mar. ativikha); (b) Madder (maṁjiṣṭhā); (c) trivṛt commonly called Teori; (d) a black kind of the same (śyāmākā); (e) bitter apple (iṁdravāruṇī); (f) the Gunja plant that yields the red and black berry (guṁja) used as a weight by jewellers &c. (g) muṁḍatiktā. (2) N. of a river. –ṇī (1) A red cow (Nir.). (2) The early dawn. –ṇaṁ (1) Red colour. (2) Gold. (3) Saffron. — Comp. –agrajaḥ N. of Garuḍa (aruṇaḥ agrajo yasya). –anujaḥ, –avarajaḥ N. of Garuḍa, younger brother of Aruṇa. –arcis m. the sun. –aśva a. having red horses, epithet of the Maruts. –ātmajaḥ 1. son of Aruṇa, N. of Jaṭāyu. –2. N. of Saturn, Savarṇi Manu, Karṇa, Sugrīva, Yama and the two Aśvins. ( –jā) N. of Yamuna and Tāpti. –īkṣaṇa a. red-eyed. –udakaṁ N. of a lake. ( –kā) N. of a river. –udayaḥ break of day, dawn; catasro ghaṭikāḥ prātararuṇodaya ucyate. –upalaḥ a ruby. –kamalaṁ a red lotus. –jyotis m. N. of Śiva. –dūrvā reddish fennel. –priya a. ‘beloved of red flowers and lotuses’, N. of the sun. ( –yā) 1. the sun’s wife. –2. shadow. –psu a. [aruṇaṁ psu rūpaṁ yasya] Ved. of reddish shape or colour. –babhru a. reddish-yellow. –yuj a. furnished with red rays of light, epithet of the dawn. –locana a. red-eyed. ( –naḥ) a pigeon. –sārathiḥ ‘having Aruṇa for his charioteer,’ the sun. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch aruṇa Uṇ. 3, 60. 1) adj. f. ā und ī (ved.). a) “röthlich, rothbraun; die Farbe des Morgens” im Gegensatz “zum Schwarz der Nacht”: kṛṣṇaṁ ca varṇamaruṇaṁ ca saṁ dhuḥ ṚV. 1, 73, 7 (AV. 12, 1, 52). der Strahlen, Rinder, Rosse der Morgenröthe 92, 2. 15. 113, 14. 124, 11. 5, 80, 3. des Soma und der Soma-Pflanze: vṛkṣasya śākhāmaruṇasya bapsataḥ 10, 94, 3. 7, 98, 1. 9, 45, 3. des Wolfs 1, 105, 18. des Aussatzes (vgl. 2,c.) AV. 5, 22, 3. 6, 20, 3. — ṚV. 1, 134, 3. 2, 1, 6. 4, j, 16. 8, 90, 6. VS. 16, 6. 39. 24, 3. 11. 29, 58. AV. 10, 2, 11. 11, 5, 12. 10, 2. 13, 2, 26. ŚAT. BR. 3, 3, 1, 15. KĀTY. ŚR. 7, 6, 14. 22, 9, 13. aruṇapuṣpa ŚAT. BR. 4, 5, 10, 2. KĀTY. ŚR. 25, 12, 18. prācī digiyamabhavattāvadaruṇā ŚṚÑGĀRAT. 8. kuravakaḥ AK. 2, 4, 2, 55. pallava BRAHMA-P. in LA. 59, 10. kapotāṅgāruṇo dhūmaḥ R. 3, 5, 7. bhasmāruṇam – dagdhāsthisthānamaṇḍalam 2, 77, 8. pāṇḍarāruṇavarṇāni nīlalohitakāni ca – mahābhrāṇi cakāśire 5, 55, 15. pāṇḍurāruṇavarṇāni srotāṁsi vimalānyapi. susruvurgiridhātubhyaḥ sabhasmāni bhujaṁgavat.. DAŚ. 1, 18. (meghāḥ) gardabhāruṇāḥ R. 3, 30, 4. himāruṇāḥ. śītavṛddhatarāyāmāstriyāmā bhānti sāṁpratam (hemante), tuṣārāruṇamaṇḍalaḥ saniḥśvāsa ivādarśacandramā na prakāśate 3, 22, 12. 13. tāṁ nirīkṣya – kṣitau kṣitirajo’ruṇām 5, 33, 2. karau ca tava – padmapatrāruṇau śubhau 3, 52, 31. nakha ŚĀK. 138. kopādaruṇalocanaḥ DEV. 3, 7. KUMĀRAS, 4, 12. AMAR. 44. Ueber die Personification der aruṇāḥ ketavaḥ s. u. ketu. Die Lexicographen bestimmen die Farbe durch folgende Umschreibungen: avyaktarāga AK. 1, 1, 4, 25. H. an. 3, 192. MED. ṇ. 33. bālasaṁdhyābha H. 1396. saṁdhyārāga H. an. MED. piṅga H. an. 3, 191. kapila MED. ṇ. 34. gaura AK. 3, 4, 25, 191. ārakta TRIK. 3, 3, 120. Das m. bezeichnet die “rothe Farbe” in abstr. — b) “verwirrt” (vyākula) TRIK. 3, 3, 120. — c) “stumm” H. an. 3, 192. MED. ṇ. 34, — 2) m. a) “Morgenröthe”, personif. “der Wagenlenker der Sonne” AK. 1, 1, 2, 33. TRIK. 3, 3, 119. H. 102. an. 3, 191. MED. ṇ. 33. aruṇodaye M. 10, 33. R. 2, 71, 17. bālāruṇa KUMĀRAS. 3, 30. aruṇāṁśa RAGH. 5, 69. āviṣkṛtāruṇapuraḥsaraḥ (arkaḥ) ŚĀK. 77. kiṁ vābhaviṣyadaruṇastamasāṁ vibhettā taṁ cetsahasrakiraṇo dhuri nākariṣyat 163. KUMĀRAS. 5, 44. ein Sohn der Vinatā und Bruder Garuḍa’s R. 3, 20, 33. HARIV. 224. 2499. 11556. 12507. 14175. VP. 149. Schüler des Sūrya Verz. d. B. H. No. 939. — b) “Sonne” AK. 1, 1, 2, 31. 3, 4, 13, 51. TRIK. 1, 1, 100. 3, 3, 119. H. 95. an. 3, 191. MED. ṇ. 33. pariṇatāruṇaprakāśaḥ śalabhasamūha iva ŚĀK. 31. — c) “eine Art Aussatz” H. an. MED. Vgl. u. 1,a. — d) N. eines kleinen giftigen Thieres (mūṣika) SUŚR. 2, 279, 20. — e) N. einer Pflanze, “Rottleria tinctoria” (puṁnāga) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. Als Synonym von arka “Sonne” auch ein Name für die “Pflanze” arka ŚKDR. — f) “Melasse” (guḍa) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — g) N. pr. ein Lehrer mit dem Bein. Aupaveśi ŚAT. BR. 2, 2, 2, 20. Aupaveśi Gautama 10, 6, 1, 1. Schüler des Upaveśi 14, 9, 4, 33 (hier proparox.) = BṚH. ĀR. UP. 6, 5, 3. WEBER, Lit. 129. Vater von Uddālaka COLEBR. Misc. Ess. I, 37. 54. 83. 84. 87. Sohn Vītadravya’s ṚV. ANUKR. zu 10, 91. Vgl. āruṇi. — ein Asura (trailokye mahābādhāṁ kariṣyati) DEV. 11, 49. — Aruṇa Āṭa ein Schlangenpriester PAÑCAV. BR. in Ind. St. 1, 35. — ein König aus dem Sonnengeschlecht LIA. I, Anh. CVI (zu S. VI, N. 8). — 3) f. -ṇā. a) N. verschiedener Pflanzen: a) = ativiṣā, eine “Birkenart” AK. 2, 4, 3, 18. TRIK. 3, 3, 119. H. an. 3, 192. MED. ṇ. 34. — b) “Grapp, Färberröthe” (mañjiṣṭhā) TRIK. H. an. MED. — g) “Ipomoea Turpethum R. Br.” (oder wohl eine andere “rothblühende” Species), trivṛt H. an. MED. — d) “Abrus precatorius” (guñjā), mit “rothen” Beeren RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — e) “die Koloquinthe” (indravāruṇī) id. — z) = muṇḍitikā id. — h) = śyāmā H. an. MED. — b) N. eines Flusses LIA. I, 59. — 4) f. -ṇī. a) (sc. go) “die röthliche Kuh”, vom Gespann der Morgenröthe und den Kühen im Indra-Mythus: kṣāmā bhindanto aruṇīrapa vran ṚV. 4, 2, 16. 1, 112, 19. 121, 3. sajūruṣā aruṇībhiḥ VS. 12, 74. Vgl. NAIGH. 1, 15. — b) “die Morgenröthe”: āvahantyaruṇīrjyotiṣāgāt ṚV. 4, 14, 3. — 5) n. a) “Röthe”: divispṛgyātyaruṇāni kṛṇvan ṚV. 10, 168, 1. 2, 34, 12. — b) “Gold”: aruṇaṁ rajatam AV. 13, 4, 5, 6. — Vgl. aruṣa. aruṇa 1) a) aruṇāḥ ketavaḥ als Verfasser von Mantra Ind. St. 3, 459; vgl. 386. 391, weiter unten u. 2) i) und u. ketu 7). — 2) a) Vater des Jaṭāyu MBH. 3, 16045. — d) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 309,a,20. — g) Aupaveśi TS. 6, 1, 9, 2. 4, 5, 1. TBR. 2, 1, 5, 11. Vaitahavja (lies Vītahavya st. Vītadravya) Ind. St.3,203,b. ein Sohn Kṛṣṇa’s BHĀG. P. 10, 90, 33. des Daitja Mura 59, 12. — h) “Röthe, rothe Farbe” BHĀG. P. 10, 29, 2. — i) Bez. “bestimmter” Ketu (77 an der Zahl) VARĀH. BṚH. S. 11, 24; vgl. oben u. 1, a). — 3) b) MBH. 9, 2429. fg. — 5) c) “Rubin” BHĀG. P. 4, 25, 15. aruṇa 2) g) N. pr. eines Asura MBH. 16, 119 nach der Lesart der ed. Bomb., varuṇa ed. Calc. — 3) b) MBH. 3, 7022. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 aruṇa 1 I aruṇa 2 II A king of the solar dynasty, and father of Triśaṅku. (Devī Bhāgavata, Saptama Skandha). aruṇa 3 III A sage in ancient India. A community of Ṛṣis was denoted by this name. Those Ṛṣis were called Aruṇas. The Ajas, Pṛśnis, Sikatas, Ketus and Aruṇas-they attained Svarga by self study. (M.B., Śānti Parva, Chapter 26, Verse 7). aruṇa 4 IV A serpent. Karkkoṭaka, Vāsuki, Takṣaka, Pṛthuśravas, Aruṇa, Kuñjara, Mitra, Śaṁkha, Kumuda, Puṇḍarīka, and the chief of serpents, Dhṛtarāṣṭra. (M.B., Mausala Parva, Chapter 4, Verse 15). aruṇa 5 V A Ṛṣi. Taittarīya Āraṇyaka refers to him as born from the flesh of Brahmā at the time of creation. aruṇa 6 VI A Dānava (Asura) born in the dynasty of Vipracitti. He did tapas for long years repeating the Gāyatrī mantra, and got from Brahmā the boon not to die in war. Becoming very arrogant on account of this boon he left Pātāla (nether region) for the earth and deputed a messenger to challenge Indra for war. At that time a heavenly voice called out that as long as Aruṇa did not give up the Gāyatrī he could not be worsted in war. Then the Devas sent Bṛhaspati to Aruṇa to make him give up Gāyatrī. Aruṇa questioned Bṛhaspati as to why he of the enemy camp had come to him (Aruṇa). Bṛhaspati replied: “You and I are not different; both of us are worshippers of Gāyatrī Devī. Being told so Aruṇa gave up worship of Gāyatrī Devī, and she felt offended at this and sent thousands of beetles against him. Thus, without fighting Aruṇa and his army were extinguished. (Devī Bhāgavata). aruṇa 7 VII A son of Narakāsura. When Narakāsura was killed Aruṇa along with his six brothers fought against Śrī Kṛṣṇa and was killed. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 aruṇa aruṇa (akin to arus, cf. aruṣa). I. adj., f. ṇā and ṇī, Tawny, dark red, Chr. 293, 2 = Rigv. i. 88, 2; Rām. 3, 5, 7. II. m. 1. The dawn, Man. 10, 33. 2. The sun, Śāk. d. 31 (pariṇata-, The setting sun). 3. A proper name, Dev. 11, 49. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 aruṇa f. ā (ved. also ī) ruddy, light-brown, yellowish. m. redness, pers. as Aruṇa, the Dawn, conceived as the charioteer of the Sun; the Sun itself; N. of an old teacher etc. f. ī a red cow; the dawn. n. redness, gold, ruby. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 aruṇa ar-uṇa, a. (ā; V. also ī) ruddy; lightbrown; golden; m. redness; dawn (personified as charioteer of the sun); sun; -kara, m. sun; -tā, f. redness; -psu, a. ruddy. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 aruṇa pu° ṛ–unan . 1 sūrye, 2 sūryasārathau, 3 guḍe, 4 sandhyārāge 5 niḥśabde, 6 dānavabhede 7 kuṣṭhabhede, 8 punnāgavṛkṣe . 9 avyaktarāge 10 kṛṣṇamiśritaraktavarṇe ca 11 tadvati tri° . 12 kuṅkume, 13 sindūre ca na° . 14 mañjiṣṭhāyām 15 śyāmākāyām, 16 ativiṣāyām 17 nadībhede 18 kadambapuṣpāyāñca strī . 19 trivṛtāyāṁ medi° 20 indravāruṇyām 21 guñjāyāṁ rājani° 22 muṇḍatiktāyām ca strī . tatra anūrau vibhāvarī yadyaruṇāya kalpate kumā° yāvat pratāpanidhirākramate na bhānurahnāya tāvadaruṇena tamonirastam raghuḥ . tārkṣyaścāriṣṭanemiśca garuḍaśca mahābalaḥ aṁruṇaścāruṇiścaiva vinatāyāḥ sutāḥ smṛtāḥ hari° aruṇogaruḍabhrātā javāpuṣpasamaprabhaḥ . yogānāñcaiva sarveṣāṁ sādhyānāmadhipaḥ kṛtaḥ hariva° . tadutpattyādikathā anūruśabde 191 uktā . sūrye saṁsṛjyate sarijairaruṇāśubhinnaiḥ raghuḥ rāgeṇa bālāruṇakomalena kumā° . varṇe tadvati ca nayanānyaruṇāni ghūrṇayan kumā° aruṇapuṣpāṇi phālgunāni śata° brā° . dadhat sandhyāruṇavyomasphurattārānukāriṇīḥ māghaḥ . dvādaśādityamadhye māghamāsādhipe 23 ādityabhede aruṇo māghamāse vai ādityahṛdayam vivaraṇamādityaśabde . 24 deśabhede pu° . dhūmādi° vuñ . āruṇakaḥ tadbhave tri° guṇavacanāt bhāve imanic aruṇimā pu° ṣyañ āraṇyam na° . tal aruṇatā strī tva aruṇatvam na° . raktādivarṇe . apatye iñ . āruṇiḥ jaṭāyau sūryaputremande yame karṇevaivasvatamanau sugrīve ṛṣibhede ca . aśvinākumārayoḥ dvi° va° yamunāyāṁ tapatyāṁ ca strī guṇavacanāt bhṛśā° abhūtatdbhāvekyaṅ aruṇāyate aruṇāyamānaḥ . gaurā° ṅīṣ . 25 aruṇavarṇāyāṁ gavi strī . aruṇyogāva uṣasāsamiti niruktoktāyām 26 ūṣāyāmapi strī . 27 mandaragiristhe sarovare tasya cāruṇajalatvāttathātvam sarāṁsyathaiteṣvaruṇañca mānasaṁ mahāhradaḥ śvetajalaṁ yathākramāt si° śi° . eteṣu mandarādiviṣkambhaśaileṣu guḍakuṅkumasindūrādīnāñcāruṇavarṇatvāttathātvam . |
अवदात – avadāta | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899avadāta “ava-dāta” mfn. ( “das”), cleansed, clean, clear
mfn. pure, blameless, excellent &c., of white splendour, dazzling white mfn. clear, intelligible avadāta “ava-dāta” m. white colour Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 avadāta a. [ava-dai-kta] (1) Beautiful; avadātakāṁtiḥ Dk. 107, 37. (2) Clean, clear, pure, spotless, refined, purified, polished; sarvavidyāvadātacetāḥ K. 36; so vidyāvadātaṁ mukhaṁ; śāstra-. (3) Bright, white; āpiśaṁgāvadātayā dehaprabhayā K. 36, 65, 128, 187, 189, 43, 62, 95; rajanikarakalāvadātaṁ kulaṁ K. 233; kuṁdāvadātāḥ kalahaṁsamālāḥ Bk. 2. 18; cf. also Bh. 2. 25; Ki. 11. 75, 3. 25; 13. 37; Śānti. 3. 14. (4) Virtuous, meritorious; anyasmiñ janmani na kṛtamavadātaṁ karma K. 62. (5) Yellow. –taḥ White or yellow colour. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch avadāta (von dā, dāyati mit ava) adj. 1) “rein” AK. 3, 4, 83. H. 1436. an. 4, 92. MED. t. 178. karuṇāvadāte (hṛdi) ŚĀNTIŚ. 3, 14. PRAB. 35, 10. DHŪRTAS. 67, 3. BHAṬṬ. 2, 18. — 2) “weiss” oder “gelb” AK. 1, 1, 4, 22. 3, 4, 83. H. 1393. an. MED. śyāmāvadāta SĀV. 5, 8. R. 5, 14, 23. Als m. die Farbe in abstr. — 3) “angenehm” (manojña) H. an. avadāta 4) “klar, deutlich, verständlich” SĀH. D. 124, 14. 268, 11. — Vgl. u. 7. dā mit ava. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 avadāta a. clean, pure, white, clear. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 avadāta ava-dāta, pp. pure, white, clear: -tā, f. whiteness; -dāna, n. heroic deed; -dā-ra, m. breach: -ṇa, n. a. rending; bursting. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 avadāta pu° ava + dai–kta . 1 śubhre, 2 pīte ca varṇe . 3 tadvati 4 viśuddhe anyasmin janmani ca na kṛtamavadātam kāda° . 5 manojñe ca tri° . |
असित – asita | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899asita “a-sita” mfn. unbound
asita mf (“ā”; Ved. “asiknī”) n. (“sita”, “white”, appears to have been formed from this word, which is probably original, and not a compound of “a” and “sita”; cf. “asura” and “sura”), dark-coloured, black &c. asita m. the planet Saturn asita m. a poisonous animal (said to be a kind of mouse) asita m. N. of the lord of darkness and magic asita m. of a descendant of Kaśyapa (composer of , named also Devala ([]) or Asita Devala ([ asita m. N. of a man (with the patron. Vārṣagaṇa) asita m. of a son of Bharata asita m. of a ṛiṣi asita m. of a mountain asita mf (“ā”; Ved. “asiknī”) n. (“as”) m. a black snake asita m. a Mantra (saving from snakes) asita mf (“ā”; Ved. “asiknī”) n. (“ā”) f. a girl attending in the women’s apartments (whose hair is not whitened by age) asita m. the indigo plant asita m. N. of an Apsaras 12472 asita mf (“ā”; Ved. “asiknī”) n. (“asiknī”) f. “the dark one”, the night asita m. a girl attending in the women’s apartments asita m. N. of a wife of Daksha asita m. N. of the river Akesines (afterwards called Candra-bhāgā) in the Paṇjāb (“asiknī”) x, 75, 5. Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 asita a. (1) Unbound(Ved). (2) [na sitaḥ śubhraḥ] Not white, black, dark-blue, dark-coloured; asitā moharajanī Śānti. 3. 4; Y. 3. 166; -locanā, -nayanā &c. –taḥ (1) The dark or blue colour. (2) The dark fortnight of a lunar month. (3) N. of the planet Saturn. (4) A black snake. (5) N. of the sage devala. (6) N. of a being presiding over darkness and magic. –tā (1) The Indigo plant. (2) A girl attending upon the harem (whose hair is not whitened by age); see asiknī. (3) The river Yamunā. (4) N. of a daughter of Vīraṇa and wife of Daksha. (5) N. of the river A kesines in the Punjab. — Comp. –aṁbujaṁ, –utpalaṁ the blue lotus. –aciṁs m. fire. –aśman, m. –upalaḥ a dark-blue stone; lapis lazuli. –keśā a woman having black hair. –keśāṁta a. having black locks of hair. –giriḥ, –nagaḥ ‘the blue mountain’; N. of a mountain. –grīva a. having a black neck. ( –vaḥ) fire. –ju a. (for -jānu) having black knees. –nayanaṁ a. black-eyed; Me. 112. –pakṣaḥ the dark fortnight; Pt. 1. 173. –phalaṁ the sweet cocoanut. –bhrū a. having black eye-lids. –mṛgaḥ the black antelope. –yavana = kālayavana q. v.; Śi. 15. 56. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch asita (3. a + sita von si) adj. “ungebunden” ŚAT. BR. 14, 6, 9, 28. 11, 6. 7, 2, 27 = BṚH. ĀR. UP. 3, 9, 26. 4, 2, 4. 4, 21. asita 1) adj. f. asitā, ved. asiknī P. 4, 1, 39, Vārtt. 1. 2. dieselbe Form auch klass. KĀŚ. “dunkelfarbig, schwarz” (als m. “Schwärze”) NIR. 9, 26. AK. 1, 1, 4, 23. H. 17. 1397. vasma ṚV. 4, 13, 4. (uṣasaḥ) gūhantīrabhvamasitaṁ ruśadbhiḥ 51, 9. 1, 46, 10. tvacamasiknīm 9, 73, 5. viśa asiknīḥ (“das dunkle Volk” heissen “die Geister des Dunkels”) 7, 5, 3. naktaṁjātāsyoṣadhe rāme kṛṣṇe asikni ca AV. 1, 23, 1. 5, 13, 8. 8, 7, 1. avyāmasiknyām 12, 2, 20. 1, 23, 3. 11, 2, 18. svasitāyatalocanā N. 12, 46. MEGH. 111. asitakeśāntā N. 16, 17. niśāsitā R. 2, 96, 19. ŚĀNTIŚ. 3, 4. anantā raśmayastasya – sitāsitāḥ karbunīlāḥ kapilāḥ pītalohitāḥ YĀJÑ. 3, 166. pakṣa “die dunkle, abnehmende Hälfte des Mondes” H. 147. — 2) m. a) “der Planet Saturn” H. 120. HALĀY. im ŚKDR. HORĀŚ. in Z. f. d. K. d. M. 4, 318. — b) N. pr. eines Herrschers des “Dunkels” und Zauberers: asitasya te brahmaṇā kaśyapasya gayasya ca AV. 1, 14, 4. tāṁ (keśavardhanīṁ) vītahavya ābharadasitasya gṛhebhyaḥ 6, 137, 1. asito dhānvo rājetyāha tasyāsurā viśaḥ ŚĀT. BR. 13, 4, 3, 11. ĀŚV. ŚR. 10, 7. — ein Kāśyapa, nach ṚV. ANUKR. neben Devala Verfasser der Lieder 9, 5– 24 (daher ein Asita Devala MBH. 1, 106. 2048. 2, 441. 1917 (debalaṁ cāsitam). 2038. 3, 510. 8263. 9, 2854. BHAG. 10, 13. HARIV. 951). steht im Geschlechte der Kāśyapa ĀŚV. ŚR. 12, 14. — ein Vārṣagaṇa ŚAT. BR. 14, 9, 4, 33 = BṚH. ĀR. UP. 6, 5, 3. — ein Nachkomme Ikṣvāku’s, ein Sohn Bharata’s R. 1, 70, 27. 2, 110, 15. — Auch die Buddhisten erwähnen einen Ṛṣi Asita LALIT. 103. 110. 246. BURN. Intr. 141. 384. SCHIEFNER, Lebensb. 248 (18). — c) N. pr. eines Berges MBH. 3, 8364. — 3) f. asitā. a) = asiknī “b.” (s. unten) BHARATA zu AK. 2, 6, 1, 18 im ŚKDR. — b) “die Indigo-Pflanze” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) N. pr. einer Apsaras VYĀḌI zu H. 183. MBH. 1, 4819. HARIV. 12472. — 4) f. asiknī. a) “die Dunkle, Nacht” NAIGH. 1, 7. asiknīmeti ruśatīmapājan ṚV. 10, 3, 1. asiknyāṁ yajamāno na hotā 4, 17, 15. — b) “eine weibliche Dienerin von mittleren Jahren (noch schwarz, noch nicht grau) im Harem” AK. 2, 6, 1, 18. H. 521. MED. n. 33. — c) N. pr. eine Tochter Vīraṇa’s und Gemahlin Daksha’s HARIV. 120. fgg. VP. 117. — d) N. pr. eines Flusses im Pendshab, Akesines (später candrabhāgā), MED. n. 33. (bheṣajaṁ) yatsindhau yadasiknyām ṚV. 8, 20, 25. anders betont 10, 75, 5: asiknyā marudvṛdhe vitastayā (śṛṇuhi). VP. 183. Vgl. ROTH, Zur L. u. G. d. W. 138. fg. — Angeblich zusammeng. aus 3. a + sita “weiss”, aber dieses letztere Wort ist für die ältere Zeit nicht zu belegen und verdankt seinen Ursprung wohl dem missverstandenen asita, wie man auch aus asura ein sura gebildet hat. asita m. “eine schwarze Schlange” AV. 3, 27, 1. 5, 13, 5. 6. 6, 56, 2. 72, 1. 7, 56, 1. 10, 4, 5. 13. 12, 3, 55. vielleicht VS. 24, 37. In AV. 6, 137, 2: keśā naḍā iva vardhantāṁ śīrṣṇaste asitāḥ pari könnte eher asitāḥ die richtige Betonung sein. asita TS. 7, 4, 22, 1. asita 1) asitekṣaṇā R. 3, 52, 40. -pakṣe Spr. 1191, v. l. — 2) a) VARĀH. BṚH. S. 17, 25. BṚH. 2, 7. 11, 18. — b) N. pr. eines alten Weisen Verz. d. Oxf. H. 310,a,24. Sohnes des Kaśyapa 56,b,38. PAÑCAV. BR. 14,11,18. KĀṬH. 22,11. — c) KATHĀS. 111, 93. 95. 106. — d) “ein best. zu den Mäusen gerechnetes giftiges Thier” Verz. d. Oxf. H. 309,a,19. asita m. N. pr. eines Schlangendämons MBH. 1, 2188. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 asita 1 I One of the Ṛṭviks of the Sarpasatra of Janamejaya. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 asita [1] a. unbound. asita [2] (f. asitā & asiknī) a. dark-coloured, black. m. N. of a cert. myth. being & of sev. men; f. asiknī or asiknī N. of a river. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 asita 2. as-ita, a. (ā or -iknī) dark-coloured, black; m. N.; -pakṣa, m. dark half of a month; -pītaka, a. (ikā dark yellow; -aś-man, m. sapphire; -īkṣaṇa, a. black-eyed; -utpala, n. blue lotus. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 asita pu° sitaḥ śubhraḥ virodhe na° ta° . 1 śubhravarṇabhinne tadviruddhe kṛṣṇavarṇe . 2 tadvati tri° . 3 kṛṣṇapakṣe pu° . 4 nīloṣadhau antaḥpuracāriṇyāmavṛddhāyāṁ 5 preṣyāyāñca strī ṅīp kṛṣṇavarṇaparatayā knaśca asiknītyeva . asitagirinibhaṁ syāt kajjvalaṁ sindhupātram puṣpadantaḥ tantumavavyayannasi tam ṛ° 4, 13, 4, 5 yamunāyāṁ tasyāḥ kṛṣṇavarṇatvāt tathātvam strī sitāsite yatra saridvare śubhe kāśī° . asyāḥ strītve’pi chandasītyukteḥ na knaḥ tena ṅībapi na . 6 devale ṛṣibhedepu° . asitodevalovyāsaḥ svayañcaiva bravīṣi me gītā . asitamuniśca himavataḥ ekaparṇāṁ nāma sutāmupayeme yathāha hari° 18 a° . tisraḥ kanyāstu menāyāṁ janayāmāsa śailarāṭ . aparṇāmekaparṇāñca tṛtīyāmekapāṭalām . tapaścarantyaḥ sumahadduścaraṁ devadānavaiḥ . lokān santāpayāmāsustāstisraḥ sthāṇujaṅgamān . āhāramekaparṇena ekaparṇā samācarat . pāṭalāpuṣpamekañca ādadhāvekapāṭalā . ekā tatra nirāhārā tāṁ mātā pratyaṣedhayat . umā iti niṣedhantī mātṛsnehena duḥkhitā . sā tathoktā tadāmātrā devī duścaracāriṇī . umetyevābhavat khyātā triṣu lokeṣu sundarī tathaiva nāmnā teneha viśrutā yogadharmiṇī . evaṁ trisraḥkumārīrvarṇayitvā . sarvāśca brahmavādinyaḥ sarvāścaivoddhvairetasaḥ . umā tāsāṁ variṣṭhā ca jyeṣṭhā ca varavarṇinī . mahāyogabalopetā mahādeva mupasthitā . asitasyaikaparṇā tu devalasya mahātmanaḥ . patnī dattā tathā brahman! yogācāryāya dhīmate . jaijīṣavyāya tu tathā viddhi tāmekapāṭalām . ete kanye mahābhāge yogācāryamupasthite . 7 śanoca 8 apsarobhede strī asitā ca subāhuśca suvṛttā mṛdukā tathā . hari° va° . |
आपीत – āpīta | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899āpīta “ā-pīta” mfn. drunk up, exhausted.
āpīta “ā-pīta” mfn. yellowish āpīta “ā-pīta” m. N. of a species of tree āpīta “ā-pīta” n. filament of the lotus āpīta “ā-pīta” n. a pyritic mineral āpīta “ā-pīta” n. (for 1. “ā-pīta” see under “ā-pā”, and for 3. “ā-pīta” under “ā-pyat”). āpīta “ā-pīta” mfn. swollen out, puffed up, distended, full, stout, fat āpīta “ā-pīta” mfn. (for 2. “āpīta” see s.v.) Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 āpīta a. (1) Yellowish. (2) Drunk or sipped a little (as water). –taḥ Yellowish colour. –taṁ A pyritic mineral (mākṣikadhātu). Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch āpīta (2. ā + pīta) 1) adj. “gelblich.” — 2) n. “ein schwefelhaltiges Mineral” (mākṣikadhātu) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 āpīta [1] a. yellowish. āpīta [2] a. turgid, swelled, full. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 āpīta ā-pīta, a. yellowish: -ya, den. P. give a yellowish colouring to. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 āpīta na° īṣat pītam prā° ta° . mākṣike dhātau . 2 īṣatpītavarṇe pu° 3 tadvati tri° . īṣat pānaṁ kṛtaṁ yasya tādṛśe 4 jalādau tri° . |
उकनाह – ukanāha | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899ukanāha m. a horse of a red and yellow or red and black colour, a bay or
chestnut horse Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch ukanāha m. “ein hell”- oder “dunkelbraunes Pferd” H. 1241. — Wohl ein Fremdwort. |
उकानहः – ukānahaḥ | Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890
ukānahaḥ A horse of a red and yellow (or red and black) colour, a bay or chesnut horse. |
ऊर्ध्वपुण्ड्र – ūrdhvapuṇḍra | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899ūrdhvapuṇḍra “ūrdhva-puṇḍra” n. = “-tilaka” above.
Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch ūrdhvapuṇḍra (ū- + pu-) m. “eine auf der Stirn eines Brahmanen mit Sandel u.s.w. senkrecht gezogene Linie” BRAHMĀṆḌA-P. im ĀHNIKAT. ŚKDR. -puṇḍraka dass. DHŪRTAS. 70, 11. ūrdhvapuṇḍra Verz. d. Oxf. H. 13,b,46. 248,a,26. 258,b,9. 267,b,10. 19. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 ūrdhvapuṇḍra A mark worn on the forehead with yellow ochre. This mark should be made by earth or ochre, which should be taken from the top of a mountain peak, banks of rivers, seashore, Śaivite temple serpent-hill or from under a holy basil. The fruits of wearing the mark will vary according to the colour of the ochre. Black ochre will afford peace, red soil will procure docility, yellow soil will get prosperity, and white ochre will give duty or righteousness. As the fruits vary according to the colour, so also it will vary according to the finger used to put the sign. If the mark is made with the thumb the man will become stout. If it is done with the middle finger he will have long life. If it is done with the fourth finger (anāmikā), he will get food and if it is made with the index finger (tarjanī) he will get salvation. The form of the mark also could be changed. The mark may be made in the form of a flame, the leaf of bamboo reed, a lotus-bud, a fish, a turtle or a conch. If the mark is as large as ten fingerbreadths it is superfine. If of nine finger-breadths, it is medium super-fine; and if it is eight and a half fingerbreadths, it is lower superfine. In the same way if the finger-breadth of the mark is seven, six or five they will be super medium, medium medium and lower medium. If it is four, three and two they will be of the low, medium low and lowest. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 ūrdhvapuṇḍra m. the perpendicular line on the forehead of a Brahman. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 ūrdhvapuṇḍra pu° ūrdhva ūrdhvamukhaḥ puṇḍraḥ ikṣuyaṣṭiriva . lalāṭasthe ūrdhvamukhe puṇḍrekṣavat rekhātmake tilakabhede . taddhāraṇe vidhiniṣedhādikaṁ nirūpyate . ūrdhapuṇḍraṁ mṛdā kṛryāt tripuṇḍraṁ bhasmanā sadā . tilakaṁ vai dvijaḥ kuryāccandanena yaddṛcchayā śrā° ta° pu° . ūrdhvapuṇḍraṁ dvijaḥ kuryāt kṣatriyastu tripuṇḍrakam . ardhacandrantu vaiśyaśca vartulaṁ śudrayonijaḥ ā° ta° brahmā° pu° . aśucirvāpya nācāro manasā pāpamācaran . śucireva bhavennityamūrdhapuṇḍrāṅkitonaraḥ ūrdhapuṇḍradharo martyomriyate yatra kutracit . śvapāko’pi vimānastho mama loke mahīyate iti brahmapu° . taddhāraṇe vaidikadvijātiriktasyaivādhikāraḥ yathoktaṁ devībhāgavate śrīnārāyaṇena ūrdhapuṇḍraṁ triśūlañca vartulaṁ caturasrakam . ardhacandrādi vā liṅgaṁ vedaniṣṭho na dhārayet! janmanā labdhajātistu vedapanthānamāśritaḥ . puṇḍrāntaraṁ bhramādvāpi lalāṭe naiva dhārayet . khyātikāntyādisiddhyarthamapi viṣṇvāvagamādiṣu . sthitaṁ puṇḍrāntaraṁ naiva ghārayedvaidikojanaḥ . ni° si° sūtasaṁ° viṣṇvāgamāditantreṣu dīkṣitānāṁ vidhīyate . śaṅkhacakragadāpadmairaṅkanaṁ nānyadehinām . vedamārgaikaniṣṭhastu mohenāpyaṅkitoyadi . patatyeva na sandeha stathā puṇḍrāntarādapi . śaṅkhacakrādyaṅkanaṁ ca gītanṛtyādikaṁ tathā . ekajāterayaṁ gharmo naṁ jātu syāt dvijanmanaḥ . śaṅkhacakramṛdā yastu kuryāt taptāyasena vā . sa śūdravadbahiḥ kāryaḥ sarvasmāddvijacarmaṇaḥ yathā śmaśānajaṁ kāṣṭhamanarhaṁ sarvakarmasu . dvijastu taptaśaṅkhādiliṅgāṅkitatanustathā . saṁbhāṣya kauravaṁ yāti yāvadindrāścaturdaśa vṛhannā° . śivakeśavayoraṅkān śūlacakrādikān dvijaḥ . na dhārayeta matimān vaidike vartmani sthitaḥ tataśca tripuṇḍrādidhāraṇavidhāyakavākyaṁ vaidiketaradvijaviṣayam śūdraviṣayañca . yadapi brāhmaṇasya taddhāraṇavidhānam agnihotraṁ yathā nityaṁ vedasyādhyayanaṁ yathā . brāhmaṇasya tatheveha taptamudrādidhāraṇam padmapu° . brāhmaṇaḥ kṣatriyo vaiśyaḥ śūdro vā yadi vetaraḥ . śaṅkhacakrāṅkitatanustulasīmañjarīdharaḥ . gopīcandanaliptāṅgodṛṣṭaścettadaghaṁ kutaḥ kāśī° . tadapi vaidiketavavipraparam sarvasāmañjasyāt evaṁ śastrārthesthite’pi kulācārāt tasyasarvaiḥ kartavyatā . tathaiva bhārataṭīkāyāṁ nīlakaṇṭhena nirṇītam yathā śroṇāmeka udakaṁ gāmavājati māṁsamekaḥ piṁśati sūnayā bhṛtam ā nimrucaḥ śakṛdeko apābharat kiṁ svit putrebhyaḥ pitarāvupāvatuḥ śrutiḥ . asyārthaḥhe ṛbhavaḥ! bhavatāṁ madhve ekaḥ śroṇāṁ ślakṣṇāṁ gāṁ mṛdaṁ gopīcandranādirūpāṁ tīrtha nikaṭasthāṁ mukhyakarmabhūtāṁ prati udakaṁ jalaṁ gauṇakarma avājati avagamayati antarbhāvitaṇyartho’jatiḥ . śrīṇāṁ gām udakena miśrayatītyarthaḥ śroṇāṁ gāṁ raktacandanādirūpāṁ vā tathā . ekaḥ sūnayā hiṁsayā tatkartrā ābhṛtaṁ āhṛtaṁ māṁsaṁ gorocanākhyaṁ piṁśati pinaṣṭi udakena saha iti śeṣaḥ nimrucaḥ nitarāmastaṁ gacchato dagdhendhanasyāgneḥ sambandhi śakṛt gomayaṁ śuṣkagomayotthaṁ bhasmeti yāvat apābharat apāhṛtavān atrāpyudakena saheti śeṣaḥ vyavahitāścetichandasi vyavahitenāpyupasargeṇa kriyāyāḥ sambandha . hṛgraho rbhaśchandasīti hasyabha . etāni mantrapadāni asaṁpūrṇārthatvāt svārthalābhāya brāhmaṇamapekṣante iṣe tvorje tvetyādimantravat tatra yathā iṣe tveti śākhāṁ chinatti ūrje tvetyanumārṣṭīti brāhmaṇānusārāt he śākhe tvā tvām iṣe annāya chinadmīti ūrje paśubhyaḥ anumājrmīti vyākhyātam evamihāpi vāsudevopaniṣadbrāhmaṇatantrapurāṇopavṛṁhaṇānusārāt ūrdhapuṇḍrārthaṁ ślakṣṇāṁ mṛdaṁ jalena miśrayediti vyākhyeyaṁ tathā kālāgnirudravṛhajjābālādyupaniṣadbrāhmaṇatantrapurāṇopavṛṁhaṇānusā rāt tripuṇḍrakartuḥ nimrucaḥ śakṛdapābharaditi ca vyākhyeyam evamitarasyāpi padasya brāhmaṇamantraliṅgādyupavṛṁhaṇe smṛtibhyaścāṣṭakāprapā vidhivadanumeyaṁ tathāca śroṇāmiti padasya raktāmiti vyākhyāne sauraśāktagāṇeśānāṁ raktameva pārthivaṁ dravya puṇḍrārthe tattattantre vidhīyate vaiṣṇavānāṁ pītaṁ śaivānāṁ bhasmeti anena tattatpuṇḍraviśeṣopalakṣitatattaddevatā bhajanenāpi devatābhāvaṁ prāpnuvantīti vighīyate . kevalavaidikānāṁ tu śroṇāṁ ślakṣṇāmiti vyākhyānena tritayasyāpi samuccayaḥ snātvā puṇḍraṁ mṛdā kuryāt dhutvā caiba tu bhasmanā . devān viprān samabhyarcya candanena samācarediti smṛtibhyaḥ atra gorocanāgrahaṇaṁ candanādyaṣṭagandhopalakṣaṇārtham eteṣāṁ vikalpasamuccayapakṣāṇāṁ pitṛpaitāha paraṁparākrameṇa vyavasthāmāha kiṁ svit putrebhyaḥ pitarā vupāvaturiti putrahitārthe yatkiñcidvrataṁ pitarau mātā pitarau pitṛpitāmahau vā upetya svīkṛtya avatuḥ vrataṁ samyak paripālayāmāsatuḥ tadeva tasya śreyaḥ sādhanati tyarthaḥ evaṁ sati tīrthāni yajñādayastantramārgeṇa sūryādyanyatamopāstiḥ kevalavaidikatā ceti devatābhāvaprāptisādhanāni ityantena . śrāddhakarmaṇi tu tripuṇḍrādau vidhiniṣedhayorvyavasthā ni° si° uktā yathā . jape home tathā dāne svādhyāye pitṛkarmaṇi . tatsarvaṁ naśyati kṣipramūrdhvapuṇḍrabinākṛtamiti hemādrāvukteḥ . yajñodānaṁ japo homaḥ svādhyāyaḥ pitṛkarma ca . vṛthā bhavati viprendrā! ūrdhvapuṇḍravinākṛtamiti vṛhannāradīyāt ūrdhvañca tilakaṁ kuryāddaive pitnye ca karmaṇīti vṛddhaparāśarokteśca ūrdhapuṇḍradhāraṇaṁ paitre vihitam . anye tu ūrdhvapuṇḍrodvijātīnāmagnihotrasamovidhiḥ . śrāddhakāle ca saṁprāpte kartā bhoktā ca varjayediti vāmahaste ca ye darbhā gṛhe raṅgabalintathā . lalāṭe tilakaṁ dṛṣṭvā nirāśāḥ pitaro gatāḥ iti saṁgrahokteḥ ūrdhvapuṇḍraṁ tripuṇḍraṁvā candrākāramathāpi vā . śrāddhakartā na kurvīta yāvat piṇḍānna nirvapet iti viśvaprakāśe vacanācca na dhāryamityāhuḥ . atra kulācārādeva vyavasthā . ata eva vṛhannāradoyeḥ ūrdhvapuṇḍrañca tulasīṁ śrāddhe necchanti kecana ityatrṛkecanetyuktam ūrdhvapuṇḍravidhiḥ śrāddhabhoktṛparaḥ, niṣedhaḥ kartṛparaḥ iti pṛthvīcandraḥ . yattu hemādrau devalaḥ lalāṭe puṇḍrakaṁ vṛṣṭvā skandhe mālyaṁ tathaiva ca . nirāśā pitaro yānti dṛṣṭvā ca vṛṣalīpatimiti . tadgandhatripuṇḍraviṣayam . prākipaṇḍadānāt gandhādyairnālaṅkuryātsvavigraham ityāśvalāyanokteḥ puṇḍraṁ vartulamityaparārke madanaratne ca . pṛthvīcandrastu puṇḍraṁ tripuṇḍram ūrdhvañca tilakaṁ kuryānna kuryādvai tripuṇḍrakam . nirāśāḥ pitaro yānti dṛṣṭvā caiva tripuṇḍrakamiti vṛddhaparāśarokteḥ . bhoktustiryaglapo bhavatyeva . varjayettilakaṁ bhāle śrāddhakāle ca sarvadā . ūrdhvapuṇḍraṁtripuṇḍraṁ vā dhārayettu prayatnataḥ iti vyāsokterityāha . pṛthvīcandrodaye brāhme sahadarbheṇa hastena yaḥ kuryāttilakaṁ budhaḥ . ācamya sa viśudhyeta darbhatyāgena caiva hi . |
एक – eka | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899eka mfn. (“i” , probably fr. a base “e”; cf. Zd. ‘ae-va’; Gk. [greek]; Goth.
‘ai-n-s’; also Lat. ‘aequu-s’; g. “sarvādi” ; see Gr. 200), one (“eko’pi”, or “ekaś-cana”, with “na” preceding or following, no one, nobody; the words “ekayā na” or “ekān na” are used before decade numerals to lessen them by one e.g. “ekān na tṛṁśat”, twenty-nine) &c. eka mfn. (with and without “eva”) alone, solitary, single, happening only once, that one only (frequently ifc.; cf. “dharmaika-rakṣa”, &c.) &c. mfn. the same, one and the same, identical &c. mfn. one of two or many (“eka” – “eka, eka” – “dvitīya”, the one – the other; esp. pl. “eke”, some, “eke” – “apare” some – others, &c.) &c. eka mfn. (“eka” repeated twice, either as a compound [cf. “ekaika”] or uncompounded, may have the sense “one and one”, “one by one” &c.) mfn. single of its kind, unique, singular, chief, pre-eminent, excellent &c. mfn. sincere, truthful mfn. little, small eka mfn. (sometimes used as an indefinite article), a, an &c. (the fem. of “eka” before a Taddhita suffix and as first member of a compound is “eka” not “ekā” eka m. N. of a teacher eka m. of a son of Raya eka n. unity, a unit (ifc.) Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 eka pron. a. [i-kan] (1) One, single, alone, only; Bh. 3. 14. (2) Not accompanied by any one; U. 2. 28. (3) The same, one and the same, identical; ekānvayo mama S. 7; manasyekaṁ vacasyekaṁ karmaṇyekaṁ mahātmanāṁ H. 1. 101. (4) Firm, unchanged; Pt. 1. 260. (5) Single of its kind, unique, singular. (6) Chief, supreme, prominent, sole; -pārthiva, -dhanurdharaḥ, – aiśvarya M. 1. 1 sole sovereignty; eko rāgiṣu rājate Bh. 3. 121. (7) Peerless, matchless. (8) One of two or many; Me. 30, 78. (9) Oft. used like the English indefinite article ‘a’ or ‘an’; jyotirekaṁ S. 5. 30. (10) True. (11) Little. Oft. used in the middle of comp. in the sense of ‘only’, with an adjectival or adverbial force; doṣaikadṛk looking only to faults; tvadekeṣu Ku. 3. 15 your arrow only; so bhogaikabaddhaspṛhaḥ. ekaḥ- anyaḥ, or aparaḥ the one-the other; it is used in the plural in the sense of some, its correlative being anye or apare (others); Śi. 12. 45; see anya, apara also. –kaḥ N. of Viṣṇu, the Supreme being. –kā N. of Durgā. [cf. Persian yak; L. oequus]. — Comp. –aṁśaḥ a separate part, part in general. –akṣa a. 1. having only one axle. –2. having one eye. –3. having an excellent eye. ( –kṣaḥ) 1. a crow. –2. N. of Śiva. –akṣara a. monosyllabic. ( –raṁ) 1. a monosyllable. –2. the sacred syllable om; Ms. 2. 83. – kośaḥ a vocabulary of monosyllabic words by Purushottamadeva. – rabhīvaḥ the production of only one syllable, contraction. –agra a. 1. fixed on one object or point only. –2. closely attentive, concentrated, intent; tadgītaśravaṇaikāgrā R. 15. 66; K. 49; Bg. 18. 72; manumekāgramāsīnaṁ Ms. 1. 1. –3. unperplexed. –4. known, celebrated. –5. single-pointed. ( –graḥ) (in Math.) the whole of the long side of a figure which is subdivided. -citta, –manas a. with a concentrated mind, with undivided attention. -cittaṁ, -cittatā intentness of purpose, concentration of mind. -dṛṣṭi a. fixing one’s eye on one spot. –agrya = -a gra. (–gryaṁ) concentration. –aṁgaḥ 1. a body-guard. –2. the planet Mercury or Mars. –3. N. of Viṣṇu. ( –gaṁ) 1. a single member or part. –2. sandal wood. –3. the head. –aṁgikā preparation made with sandal-wood. –aṁḍaḥ a kind of horse. –adhipatiḥ a sole monarch or sovereign. –anaṁśā the only (day) receiving no part of the moon, an epithet of Kuhū or day of new moon (born together with Kṛṣṇa and worshipped with Kṛṣṇa and Baladeva and identified with Durga). –anudiṣṭa a. 1. left as a funeral feast or one who has recently partaken in it. ( –ṣṭaṁ) a funeral ceremony performed for only one ancestor (recently dead). –aṁta a. 1. solitary, retired. –2. aside, apart. –3. directed towards one point or object only. –4. excessive, great; – śaityātkadalīviśeṣāḥ Ku. 1. 36. –5. worshipping only only. –6. absolute, invariable, perpetual; svāyattamekāṁtaguṇaṁ Bh. 2. 7; kasyaikāṁtaṁ sukhamupagataṁ Me. 109. ( –taḥ) 1. a lonely or retired place, solitude; vyoma- vihāriṇaḥ Pt. 2. 20; H. 1. 52. –2. exclusiveness. –3. an invariable rule or course of conduct or action; Pt. 3. 7. –4. exclusive aim or boundary. ( –taṁ) an exclusive recourse, a settled rule or principle; tejaḥ kṣamā vā naikāṁtaṁ kālajñasya mahīpateḥ Śi. 2. 83. ( –taṁ, –tena, –tataḥ, –te) ind. 1. solely, exclusively, invariably, always, absolutely. –2. exceeding, quite, wholly, very much; vayamapyekāṁtato niḥspṛhāḥ Bh. 3. 24; duḥkhamekāṁtato vā Me. 109; oft. in comp.; -vidhvaṁsin sure or destined to perish; R. 2. 57; -bhīru Mu. 3. 5 always timid; so ekāṁtakaruṇa very weak &c. –3. alone, apart, privately. -bhūta being alone or solitary. -mati a. devoted to one object only. -vihārin a. a solitary wanderer. -suṣamā ‘containing exclusively good years’, a division of time with Jainas. -sthita a. staying or remaining apart. –aṁtara a. next but one, separated by one remove; S. 7. 27; V. 1. ( –raḥ) a kind of fever. –aṁtika a. final, conclusive. –aṁtitvaṁ devotion to one object. –aṁtin a. devoted to one object only. (–m.) a worshipper of Viṣṇu. –annaṁ one and the same food. (–nnaḥ), —ādin a mess-mate. –abdā a heifer one year old. –ayana a. 1. passable for only one (as a foot-path). –2. fixing one’s thoughts on one object, closely attentive, intent; see ekāgra. (– naṁ) 1. a lonely or retired place. –2. a meeting. –place, rendezvous. –3. union of thoughts. –4. monotheism. –5. the sole object; sā snehasya ekāyanībhūtā M. 2. 15; ekāyanībhūya Mv. 4 with one accord, unanimously. -gata = ekāyana q. v. –arṇavaḥ general flood, universal deluge. –artha a. 1. having one and the same meaning, having the same object in view; Śi. 2. 114. ( –rthaḥ) 1. the same thing, object, or intention. –2. the same meaning. –3. N. of a glossary. –avama a. inferior or less by one. –avayava a. made up of the same components. –aśīta or -titama a. eighty-first. –aśītiḥ f. eighty-one. –aṣṭakā 1. the first or chief Aṣṭakā after the full moon. –2. the eighth day of the dark fortnight in the month of Māgha (on which a śrāddha is to be performed). –aṣṭhīla a. having one kernel. ( –laḥ) N. of a plant (vakavṛkṣa). –ahan (haḥ) 1. the period of one day. –2. a sacrifice lasting for one day. -gamaḥ, -adhvā a day’s journey. –ātapatra a. characterized by only one umbrella (showing universal sovereignty); ekātapatraṁ jagataḥ prabhutvaṁ R. 2. 47. -trāṁ bhuvaṁ 18. 4; K. 206; Śi. 12; 33; V. 3. 19. –ātman a. depending solely on one-self, solitary. –ādeśaḥ one substitute for two or more letters (got by either dropping one vowel, or by the blending of both); as the ā in ekāyana. — āyu a. 1. providing the most excellent food. –2. the first living being. –āvaliḥ, –lī f. 1. a single string of pearls, beads &c.; ekāvalī kaṁṭhavibhūṣaṇaṁ vaḥ Vikr. 1. 30; latāviṭape ekāvalī lagnā V. 1. –2. (in Rhetoric) a series of statements in which there is a regular transition from a predicate to a subject, or from a subject to a predicate; sthāpyate’pohyate vāpi yathāpūrvaṁ pararaparaṁ . viśeṣaṇatayā yatra vastu saikāvalī dvidhā .. K. P. 10; cf. Chandr. 5. 103-4; netre karṇātaviśrāṁte karṇau doḥstaṁbhadolitau &c. and Bk. 2. 19. –uktiḥ f. a single expression or word. –uttara a. greater or increasing by one. –udakaḥ (a relative) connected by the offering of funeral libations of water to the same deceased ancestor; Ms. 5. 71. –udaraḥ, –rā uterine, (brother or sister). –udātta a. having one Udātta accent. –uddiṣṭaṁ a Śrāddha or funeral rite performed for one definite individual deceased, not including other ancestors; Ms. 4. 110. –ūna a. less by one, minus one. –ṛc a. consisting of one verse (ṛc). –eka a. one by one, one taken singly, a single one; ekekamapyanarthāya kimu tatra catuṣṭayaṁ H. Pr. 11; R. 17. 43. (–kaṁ) -ekaikaśaḥ, ind. one by one, singly, severally; S. 6. 11; -kaṁ nirdiśan S. 7 pointing to each severally. –oghaḥ a continuous current. –kapāla a. consisting of or contained in one cup. –kara a. (rī f.) 1. doing only one thing. –2. ( –rā) one-handed. –3. one-rayed. –kārya a. 1. acting in concert with, cooperating, having made common cause with; co-worker; asmābhiḥ sahaikakāryāṇāṁ Mu. 2; R. 10. 40. –2. answering the same end. –3. having the same occupation. ( –ryaṁ) sole or same business. –kālaḥ 1. one time. –2. the same time. ( –laṁ, –le) ind. at one time, at one and the same time. -bhojanaṁ eating but one meal in any given time. –kālika, –kālīna a. 1. happening once only. –2. contemporary, coeval. –kuṁḍalaḥ N. of Kubera; of Balabhadra: and Śeṣa. –kuṣṭhaṁ a kind of leprosy; kṛṣṇāruṇaṁ yena bhaveccharīraṁ tadekakuṣṭhaṁ pravadaṁtyasādhyaṁ Suśr. –kṣīraṁ the milk of one (nurse &c.). –gayyaḥ the Supreme spirit. –guru, –guruka a. having the same preceptor. ( –ruḥ, -rukaḥ) a spiritual brother (pupil of the same preceptor). –grāma a. living in the same village. ( –maḥ) the same village. –cakra a. 1. having only one wheel. –2. governed by one king only. ( –kraḥ) the chariot of the sun. -vartin m. sole master of the whole universe, universal monarch. –catvāriṁśat f. forty-one. –cara a. 1. wandering or living alone, alone; Ki. 13. 3; 3. 53. –2. having one attendant. –3. living unassisted. –4. going together or at the same time. –5. gregarious. ( –raḥ) a rhinoceros. –caraṇa a. having only one foot. –cārin a. 1. living alone, solitary. –2. going alone or with one follower only. ( –ṇī) a loyal wife. –citta a. thinking of one thing only, absorbed in one object. ( –ttaṁ) 1. fixedness of thought upon one object. –2. unanimity; ekacittībhūya H. 1 unanimously; -tā fixedness of mind, agreement, unanimity. –ciṁtanaṁ thinking of only one object. –cetas, –manas a. unanimous; see -citta. –codana a. resting upon one rule. ( –naṁ) referring to in the singular number. –ja a. 1. born alone or single. –2. growing alone (a tree). Pt. 3. 54. –3. alone of its kind. –4. uniform, unchanging. –jaḥ, –jā a brother or sister of the same parents. –janman m. 1. a king. –2. a Śūdra; see -jāti below. –jāta a. born of the same parents. –jāti a. 1. once born. –2. belonging to the same family or caste. ( –tiḥ) a Śūdra (opp. dvijanman); brāhmaṇaḥ kṣatriyo caiśyastrayo varṇā dvijātayaḥ . caturtha ekajātistu śūdro nārita tu paṁcamaḥ .. Ms. 10. 4; 8. 270. –jātīya a. of the same kind or family. –jyā the chord of an arc: sine of 30-. –jyotis m. N. of Śiva. –tāna a. concentrated or fixed on one object only, closely attentive; brahmaikatānamanaso hi vasiṣṭhamiśrāḥ Mv. 3. 11. ( –naḥ) 1. attention fixed on one object only. –2. musical harmony, = -tālaḥ. –tālaḥ harmony, accurate adjustment of song, dance, and instrumental music (cf. tauryatrikaṁ). ( –lī) an instrument for beating time, any instrument having but one note. –tīrthin a. 1. bathing in the same holy water. –2. belonging to the same religious order; Y. 2. 137. (–m.) a fellowstudent, spiritual brother. –tejana a. Ved. having only one shaft (an arrow). –triṁśat f. thirty-one; -triṁśa 31st. –trikaḥ a kind of sacrifice performed in or lasting for a day. –daṁṣṭraḥ, daṁtaḥ “one-tusked,” epithets of Gaṇeśa. –daṁḍin m. N. of a class of Sannyāsins or beggars (otherwise called haṁsa). They are divided into four orders: –kuṭīcako bahudako haṁsaścaiva tṛtīyakaḥ . caturthaḥ parahaṁsaśca yo yaḥ paścātsa uttamaḥ .. Harīta. –diś a. living in the same region or quarter. –duḥkhasukha a. sympathising, having the same joys and sorrows. –dṛś, dṛṣṭi a. one-eyed. (–m.) 1. a crow. –2. N. of Śiva. –3. a philosopher. –dṛśya a. the sole object of vision, alone being worthy of being seen. –dṛṣṭiḥ f. fixed or steady look. –devaḥ the Supreme god. –devata, –de(dai) vatya a. devoted, directed, or offered to one deity. –deśa a. occupying the same place. ( –śaḥ) 1. one spot or place. –2. a part or portion (of the whole), one side; -avatīrṇā K. 22; tasyaikadeśaḥ U. 4; Mv. 2; vibhāvitaikadeśena deyaṁ yadabhiyujyate V. 4. 17 ‘what is claimed should be given by one who is proved to have got a part of it’; (this is sometimes called ekadeśavibhāvitanyāya). –deśin a. consisting of parts or portions, divided into parts. –deha, –dehin a. 1. having only one body. –2. elegantly formed. ( –haḥ) the planet Mercury. –dhanaḥ a kind of jug with which water is taken up at certain religious ceremonies. ( –naṁ) 1. an excellent gift. –2. honorific offering. –dhanin a. obtaining an honorific offering. –dharman, –dharmin a. 1. possessing the same properties, of the same kind. –2. professing the same religion. –dhura,–dhurāvaha, –dhurīṇa a. 1. fit for but one kind of labour. –2. fit for but one yoke (as cattle for special burden; P. IV. 4. 79). –dhurā a particular load or conveyance. –nakṣatraṁ a lunar mansion consisting of only one star. –naṭaḥ the principal actor in a drama, the manager (sūtradhāra) who recites the prologue. –navataḥ ninety-first. –navatiḥ f. ninety-one. –nātha a. having one master. ( –thaḥ) sole master or lord. –nāyakaḥ N. of Śiva. –niścaya a. come to the same conclusion or resolution, having the same aim. ( –yaḥ) general agreement or conclusion, unanimity. –niṣṭha a. 1. intently devoted or loyal (to one thing). –2. intently fixed on one object. –netraḥ N. of Śiva; (one-eyed). –pakṣa a. 1. of the same side or party, an associate. –2. partial. ( –kṣaḥ) one side or party; -āśrayaviklavatvāt R. 14. 34; -kṣe in one point of view, in one case. –patika a. having the same husband. –paṁcāśat f. fifty-one. –patnī 1. a faithful wife (perfectly chaste); tāṁ cāvaśyaṁ divasagaṇanātatpara mekapatnīṁ Me. 10. –2. the wife of a man who has no other wives; Ms. 5. 158. –3. the wife of the same man; a co-wife; sarvāsāmekapatnīnāmekā cetputriṇī bhavet Ms, 9. 183. -vrataṁ a vow of perfect chastity; kāmekapatnīvrataduḥkhaśīlāṁ Ku. 3. 7. –patrikā the plant Ocimum Gratissimum (gaṁdhapatrā). –pad, — pād a. 1. one-footed, limping, lame. –2. incomplete. ( –pād) m. N. of Śiva or Viṣṇu. ( –padī) a foot-path (for a single man to walk on). –pada a. 1. one-footed. –2. consisting of or named in one word. ( –daṁ) 1. a single step. –2. single or simple word. –3. the time required to pronounce a single word. (4) present time, same time. (–daḥ) 1. a man having one foot. –2. a kind of coitus (ratibaṁdha). (–de) ind. suddenly, all at once, abruptly; nihaṁtyarīnekapade ya udāttaḥ svarāniva Śi. 2. 95; R. 8. 48; K. 45; V. 4. 3. (–dā) a verse consisting of only one Pāda or quarter stanza. (–dī) 1. a woman having one foot. –2. a Gāyatrī consisting of one Pāda. –para a. Ved. an epithet of the dice in which one is decisive or of preeminent importance. –pari ind. one over or under, (a term at dice; cf. akṣapari). –parṇā 1. N. of a younger sister of Durgā. –2. N. of Durgā. –3. a plant having one leaf only. –palāśaḥ a single Butea Frondosa. –pāṭalā N. of a younger sister of Durgā. –pāṇaḥ a single wager. –pāta a. happening at once, sudden. –pātin a. 1. sudden. –2. standing alone or solitary. (–nī) i. e. ṛk a verse to be taken by itself or independently of the hymn to which it belongs. –pāda a. 1. having only one foot. –2. using only one foot. (– daḥ) 1. one or single foot. –2. one and the same Pāda. –3. N. of Viṣṇu and Śiva. –pādikā a kind of posture of birds. –piṁgaḥ, –piṁgalaḥ N. of Kubera, having a yellow mark in place of one eye; (his eye was so made on account of a curse uttered by Pārvatī when he cast an evil eye at her). –piṁḍa a. united by the offering of the funeral rice-ball; -tā, -tvaṁ consanguinity. –putra a. having only one son. –puruṣaḥ 1. the Supreme being; V. 1. 1. –2. the chief person. –puṣkalaḥ (raḥ) N. of a musical instrument. –prakāra a. of the same kind. –prakhya a. singularly like. — prabhutvaṁ sole sovereignty. –prayatnaḥ one effort (of the voice). — prasthaḥ a measure. –prahārika a. killed by one blow. –prāṇayogaḥ union in one breath. –buddhi a. having only one thought. –bhakta a. 1. serving one master only. –2. worshipping one deity. –3. eating together. (– ktaṁ) N. of a religious ceremony; eating but one meal (a day). -vrataṁ eating but once a day as a religious observance. –bhakti a. 1. believing in one deity. –2. firmly devoted. (–f.) eating but one meal a day. –bhāryā a faithful or chaste wife. (–ryaḥ) one having one wife only. –bhāva a. of the same or one nature. –2. sincerely devoted. –3. honest, sincerely disposed. (–vaḥ) 1. one feeling, the same or unchanged devotion; Pt. 1. 285, 3. 65. –2. oneness, agreement. –bhūta a. 1. being one, undivided. –2. concentrated, closely attentive. –bhūmaḥ a palace having one floor. –bhojana, –bhukta a. 1. eating but one meal. –2. eating in common. — mati a. 1. fixed on one object. –2. unanimous, thinking in the same way. –manas a. 1. thinking with another, of one thought; Mu. 2. 13. –2. fixing the mind upon one object, closely attentive; ekamanāḥ śrotumarhati devaḥ M. 2. –mātra a. of one syllable. –mukha a. 2. having the face directed towards one place or object. –2. having the same aim. –3. having one chief or head. –4. having one door or entrance (as a maṁḍapa). (–khaṁ) 1. gambling. –2. a kind of fruit (rudrākṣaphala). — mūrdhan = -mukha q. v. –mūlā = atasī q. v. –yaṣṭiḥ, yaṣṭikā a single string of pearls. –yoni a. 1. uterine. –2. of the same family or caste; Ms. 9. 148. –rajaḥ the plant bhṛṁgarāja. –rasa a. 1. finding pleasure only in one thing, of one flavour; R. 10. 17. –2. of one feeling or sentiment only; sāhasa- U. 5. 21 influenced only by rashness; vikrama- K. 7; bhāvaikarasaṁ manaḥ Ku. 5. 82; M. 3. 10; Bv. 2. 155; Śi. 6. 26; V. 1. 9. –3. of one tenor, stable, equable; Mal. 4. 7; U. 4, 15. –4. solely or exclusively devoted (to one); abalaikarasāḥ R. 9. 43, 8. 65. (–saḥ) 1. oneness of aim or feeling. –2. the only flavour or pleasure. (–saṁ) a drama of one sentiment. –rāj,–rājaḥ m. an absolute king. –rātraḥ a ceremony lasting one night. (–traṁ) one night. –rātrika a. lasting or sufficient for one night only. –rāśiḥ 1. a heap, crowd. –2. a sign of the zodiac. -bhūta a. collected or heaped together. –rikthin m. a coheir; Ms. 9. 162. –rūpa a. 1. of one form or kind, like, similar; Ki. 8. 2, 9. 55. –2. uniform, one coloured. (–paṁ) one form or kind; -tā uniformity, invariableness. –rūpya a. formed or arising from one. –liṁgaḥ 1. a word having one gender only. –2. N. of Kubera. (–gaṁ) a place in which for five krośas there is but one liṁga (Phallus); paṁcakrośāṁtare yatra na liṁgāṁtaramīkṣyate . tadekaliṁgamākhyātaṁ tatra siddhiranuttamā .. Śabdak. –vacanaṁ the singular number. –varṇa a. 1. of one colour. –2. identical, same. –3. of one tribe or caste. –4. involving the use of one letter (-samīkaraṇa). (–rṇaḥ) 1. one form. –2. a Brāhmaṇa. –3. a word of one syllable. –4. a superior caste. (–rṇī) beating time, the instrument (castanet); -samīkaraṇaṁ an equation involving one unknown quantity. –varṇika a. 1. of one colour. –2. of one caste. –varṣikā a heifer one year old. –vastra, –vasana a. having only one garment, in one dress. (– straṁ) a single garment. –vākyaṁ one or unanimous opinion; ekavākyaṁ vivavruḥ R. 6. 85 raised a unanimous cry; -tā consistency in meaning, unanimity, reconciling different statements. –vādaḥ 1. a kind of drum or tabor. –2. the unitarian doctrine, monotheism. –vāraṁ, –vāre ind. 1. only once. –2. at once, suddenly. –3. at one time. –viṁśa a. twenty-first; consisting of twenty-one. (–śaḥ) the Ekavimśastoma. –viṁśatiḥ f. twenty-one. –vidha a. of one kind; simple. –vilocana a. one-eyed; see ekadṛṣṭi. –viṣayin m. a rival (having a common object or end in view). — vīraḥ a pre-eminent warrior or hero; dharma- Mv. 5. 48. –vṛkṣaḥ 1. one tree. –2. a district in which but one tree is seen for 4 Krośas. –vṛt f. heaven. –vṛṁdaṁ 1. a peculiar disease of the throat. –2. one heap or collection. –vṛṣaḥ Ved. the chief bull. –veṇiḥ, –ṇī f. a single braid of hair (worn by a woman as a mark of her separation from her husband &c.); gaṁḍābhogātkaṭhinaviṣamāmekaveṇīṁ kareṇa Me. 92; -dharā S. 7; dhṛta- S. 7. 21. –veśman n. a solitary house or room. –vyavasāyin a. following the same profession. –śata a. 101st. (–taṁ) 101. –śapha a. whole-hoofed. (–phaḥ) an animal whose hoof is not cloven (as a horse, ass &c.). –śaṁraṇaṁ the sole recourse or refuge (especially applied to a deity). –śarīra a. of one body or blood, consanguineous. -anvayaḥ consanguineous descent. -avayavaḥ a descendant in a right line, blood- kinsman. -āraṁbhaḥ commencement of consanguinity by the union of father and mother. –śākha a. having one branch. (–khaḥ) a Brāhmaṇa of the same branch or school. –śīrṣan = -mukha q. v. –śuṁga a. having one sheath. (–gā) N. of a medicinal plant. –śṛṁga a. having only one horn. (–gaḥ) 1. a unicorn; rhinocerous. –2. N. of Viṣṇu. –3. a class of Pitṛs. –4. a mountain having one top. –śepaḥ a tree having one root. –śeṣaḥ ‘the remainder of one’, a species of Dvandva compound in which one of two or more words only is retained; e. g. pitarau father and mother, parents, (= mātāpitarau); so śvaśurau, bhrātaraḥ &c. –śruta a. once heard. -dhara a. keeping in mind what one has heard once. –śrutiḥ f. 1. monotony. –2. the neutral accentless tone. (–ti) ind. in a monotonous man ner. –śruṣṭi a. Ved. obedient to one command. –ṣaṣṭa a. sixty-first. –ṣaṣṭiḥ f. sixty- one. -tama a. sixtyfirst. –saṁstha a. dwelling in one place; R. 6. 29. — saptata, -titama a. seventyfirst. –saptatiḥ f. seventy-one. –sabhaṁ a common place of meeting. –sarga a. closely attentive. (–rgaḥ) concentration. –sahasraṁ 1001 or one thousand. –sākṣika a. witnessed by one. –sārthaṁ ind. together, in one company. –sūtraṁ N. of a small double drum played by a string and ball attached to the body of it. — stomaḥ N. of a soma ceremony. –stha a. 1. being or centred in one place; Ku. 1. 49; Me. 104 v. l. –2. close-standing, standing side by side; Pt. 3. 53. –3. collected, combined. –sthānaṁ one or the same place; ekasthāne prasūte vāk Pt. 4. 5. –haṁsaḥ the chief or highest Hamsa (an allegorical designation of the soul). –hāyana a. one year old; Mal. 4. 8; U. 3. 28. (–nī) a heifer one year old. (–naṁ) the period of one year. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch eka Uṇ. 3, 43. gaṇa sarvādi zu P. 1, 1, 27. VOP. 3, 9 (Pronominaldeclination). Kann mit seinem nom. compon. werden P. 2, 1, 49. erscheint im comp. und in Ableitungen nie im fem. 6, 3, 62. ekasyā kṣīram = ekakṣīram, ekasyā āgatam = ekarūpyam Sch. Ableitungen von compp. mit eka im ersten Gliede 5, 2, 118. 1) adj. num. f. ā “einer; einzig, alleinig, einmalig; ein und derselbe” AK. 3, 2, 31. 4, 16. 130. H. 872. 873. 1457. an. 2, 2. MED. k. 17. ekaṁ santamakṛṇutā caturvayam ṚV. 1, 110, 3. 161, 2. śatamekaṁ ca meṣān 117, 18. 8, 49, 9. VS. 27, 33. ŚAT. BR. 14, 4, 3, 1. KĀTY. ŚR. 4, 3, 8. 5, 2, 12. M. 2, 43. 3, 29. ekaṁ sadviprā bahudhā vadanti ṚV. 1, 164, 46. veṣīdeko yudhaye bhūyasaścit 5, 30, 4. ya eko vasvo varuṇo na rājati 1, 143, 4. tatsaṁbhūya bhavatyekameva AV. 10, 8, 11. 18, 4, 11. manurevaikaḥ pariśiśiṣe ŚAT. BR. 1, 8, 1, 6. 2, 5, 1, 1. 14, 4, 2, 22. tvameko hyasya sarvasya vidhānasya – kāryatattvārthavit M. 1, 3. 86. 105. 2, 180. 4, 240. P. 1, 1, 21. R. 1, 1, 3. 6. PAÑCAT. I, 2. upavāsena caikena (“einmalig”) YĀJÑ. 3, 319. eka eva R. 3, 28, 15. M. 1, 91. HIT. I, 59. puṇyaikakarman “bei dem die Tugend die einzige That ist, nur Tugend übend” HIT. I, 80. dharmaikarakṣa R. 2, 73, 19. PAÑCAT. 204, 1. ŚĀK. 114. RAGH. 1, 29. KUMĀRAS. 5, 82. KATHĀS. 6, 159. 21, 148. VID. 13. H. 859. auch adv. in comp. mit einem adj. svargaikasaṁmukhī “einzig nur gen Himmel blickend” KATHĀS. 12, 171. madirārasaikasaktā 14, 90. 17, 56. ekānuvākyā bhavatyekā yājyā “eine und dieselbe” ŚAT. BR. 5, 1, 3, 14. ubhayoreka utkaraḥ KĀTY. ŚR. 5, 3, 17. M. 8, 204. P. 1, 2, 64. R. 2, 33, 17. PAÑCAT. IV, 10. RAGH. 1, 36. Manchmal in rednerischer Weise, wo nur ein scheinbarer Gegensatz gegen eine Mehrheit vorhanden ist: viśvānyekaḥ śṛṇavadvacāṁsi me ṚV. 1, 145, 3. ya idaṁ dīrghaṁ prayataṁ sadhasthameko vimame tribhiritpadebhiḥ 154, 3. subst. “Einheit” im comp. nach dem gezählten Gegenstande: karapādaikahīnaka “einer Hand und eines Fusses beraubt” YĀJÑ. 2, 274. Bei Zehnern, von denen Eins abzuziehen ist, tritt eka im instr. oder acc. fem., im instr. oder abl. (P. 6, 3, 76) neutr. mit na “nicht” davor: ekayā na triṁśat ŚAT. BR. 10, 4, 3, 18. 15. ekāṁ na triṁśat 9, 2, 3, 47. 6, 2, 2, 37. ekāṁnaviṁśatidhā 10, 4, 3, 18. ekāṁnapañcāśadrātra KĀTY. ŚR. 24, 2, 38. 3, 36. ekena na viṁśatiḥ, ekānnaviṁśati (compon.) oder ekādbhaviṁśati P. 6, 3, 76, Sch. VOP. 6, 36. In nicht-accentuirtern Texten (z. B. TAIT. UP. 3, 11 ekānnaviṁśatiḥ) muss es dahingestellt bleiben, ob ekānna in ekāṁ na oder in ekāt + na zu zerlegen sei. Ueber eine noch andere Bezeichnungsweise s. u. ūna. — 2) “einzig in seiner Art, vorzüglich” AK. 3, 4, 16. H. an. 2, 2. MED. k. 17. amoghaṁ saṁdadhe cāsmai dhanuṣyekadhanurdharaḥ. brāhmamastram RAGH. 12, 97. MEGH. 31. eko mantrī bhavānyena hantuṁ māṁ na kṛtā matiḥ KATHĀS. 5, 44. adv. in comp. mit einem adj.: ekadṛśya KUMĀRAS. 7, 64. ekaprakhya “vorzüglich –, ganz ähnlich” ad MEGH. 86. — 3) “einer unter zweien oder mehreren” (vgl. ekatara, ekatama); in der Wiederholung (das erste verb. fin. kann im Veda den Ton erhalten nach P. 8, 1, 65) oder wechselnd mit anya, apara, itara, dvitīya “der eine, – der andere, einer – ein anderer”, = anya AK. 3, 2, 32. 4, 16. H. 1468. an. 2, 2. MED. k. 17. sa devatānāmeko bhavati ŚAT. BR. 3, 2, 2, 22. 8, 1, 4, 9. 11, 5, 1, 12. KĀTY. ŚR. 9, 13, 9. 13, 3, 5. 14, 3, 15. 26, 4, 3. CHĀND. UP. 3, 6, 3. tasmāttu mithunādekamāgatyānupalakṣitaḥ. jaghāna R. 1, 2, 13. 18. vasūnāṁ vā bhavāneko rudrāṇāmatha vā bhavān MBH. 3, 17421. dharmārthakāmamokṣāṇāṁ yasyaiko ‘pi na vidyate HIT. Pr. 25. N. 1, 18. 5, 14. tadekamapi (“irgend eines von diesen”) dūṣaṇaṁ tvayi na lakṣyate HIT. 25, 10. trīṇi jānā pari bhūṣantyasya samudra ekaṁ divyekamapsu ṚV. 1, 95, 3. gomāyureko ajamāyurekaḥ pṛśnireko harita eka eṣām 7, 103, 6. 1, 161, 9. AV. 4, 37, 11. 5, 28, 6. calatyekena pādena tiṣṭhatyekena buddhimān HIT. I, 97. eka – anya ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 4, 5. HIT. I, 60. MEGH. 76. SĀṁKHYAK. 66. eka – apara R. 1, 39, 8. AMAR. 16. ŚUKAS. 39, 15. H. 1230. eka – dvitīya RAGH. 12, 6. KĀŚ. beim gaṇa sarvādi zu P. 1, 1, 27. eka – dvitīya – tṛtīya – caturtha R. 2, 61, 24. eka – anya – eka – caturtha M. 4, 9. ekā prasūyate mātā dvitīyā vākprasūyate “als erste – als zweite, zuerst – alsdann, sowohl – als auch” PAÑCAT. IV, 6. eke “einige, manche” (adj. und subst.) ŚAT. BR. 1, 1, 4, 24. 2, 2, 10. 3, 1, 26. BṚH. ĀR. UP. 1, 3, 27. M. 9, 61. 11, 45. H. 619. eke – eke “Einige – Andere” AV. 6, 122, 2. BṚH. ĀR. UP. 5, 12. eke – apare P. 7, 2, 45, Sch. eke – anye – tathānye M. 10, 70. eke – eke — apare 4, 22 – 24. eke – anye – eke – apare – apare 12, 123. Zwei auf einander folgende eka, welche sich auf einen und denselben Begriff beziehen, also nicht in einem Gegensatz zu einander stehen, bedeuten “je einer, einer um den andern”: ekaikā kratuṁ pariyanti sadyaḥ ṚV. 1, 123, 8. ekamekam (ratnam) 20, 7. sapta me sapta śākina ekamekā śatā daduḥ 5, 52, 17. snāpayanti sma – apyekamekaṁ puruṣaṁ pramadāḥ sapta cāṣṭa ca R. 2, 91, 51. BHĀG. P. 5, 22, 9. Vgl. ekaika. — 4) zu einem blossen unbest. Art. sinkt eka erst in später Zeit herab, doch finden sich Spuren davon schon im alten Epos: ekaṁ kālaṁ (“einstmals”) jananyarthe himavantaṁ jagāma saḥ R. 4, 61, 24. strīsaṁsthānaṁ cāpsarastīrthamārādutkṣipyaināṁ jyotirekaṁ jagāma ŚĀK. 126. navoṣasā bhinnamivaikapaṅkajam 175. viśrāntena bhavatā mamāpyekasminkarmaṇi sahāyena bhavitavyam 22, 17. 83, 6, v. l. ekasminpradeśe PAÑCAT. 20, 25. puruṣamekamapaśyat 242, 6. HIT. 10, 8. VET. 36, 4. KATHĀS. 7, 16. VID. 84. 235. ekasmiṁśca dine 221. subst. “Jemand”: tatrādau bāhurekena cchinno me pauṇḍravardhane VID. 270. — 5) über eka = mahant s. VP. 15, N. 22. — 6) N. pr. eines Sohnes von Raja BHĀG. P. 9, 15, 2. — Vielleicht von demselben pronom. Stamme, der in etad enthalten ist. eka 1) paripūrṇānandaikacidātman WEBER, RĀMAT. 344. ekasyai na pañcāśat TS. 7, 4, 3, 3. ekayā na triṁśat PAÑCAV. BR. 23, 25, 3. ekayā na catvā- -riṁśat 24, 9, 2. 3. ekasmānnapañcāśa (Avagraha bei ekasmāt) TS. 7, 4, 3, 3. viṁśatyā caikayā so v. a. ekaviṁśatyā ca WEBER, JYOT. 89. ekānnaviṁśatiḥ 70. ekāṁnatriṁśaduttaraṁ śatamekakam Ind. St. 3, 254. 8, 320. 362. Da die Formen ekānnaviṁśati (d. i. ekāt – na – vi-) u.s.w. durch P. 6, 3, 76 sicher stehen, auch in Betreff der Betonung, so könnte man geneigt sein in ekāṁnatriṁśat u. s. w. nur eine ungenaue Schreibweise anzunehmen. KĀTY. ŚR. 24, 2, 37 (so ist st. 38 zu lesen) hat auch die Ausg. ekānnapañcāśat. Sp. 1070, Z. 2 lies 10, 4, 2, 15 st. 10, 4, 3, 18; Z. 4. fgg. streiche ‘In nicht’ bis ‘zu zerlegen sei’. — 2) -sundarī KATHĀS. 52, 316. -sakhya 74, 75. -caura 88, 24. — 7) f. ā Bein. der Durgā ŚKDR. nach dem DEVĪ-P. eka , seine verschiedenen Bedd. ebend. 5,58,b. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 eka e-ka (e, old loc. sing. of the pronom. base a, cf. idam and etat; ka cf. kim), num., m., f. kā, and n. I. sing. 1. One (cf. enad), Man. 2, 43; ekasmāt, At once, Rājat. 5, 407. 2. Alone, Man. 1, 3; Only, Hit. i. d. 81; puṇyaikakarman, i. e. puṇya- eka-karman, adj. Practising only virtue. 3. Same, Man. 8, 204; Pañc. iv. d. 10. 4. Preeminent, chief, Megh. 31. 5. When immediately repeated, ‘one by one.’ Rām. 2, 91, 51. 6. A, an, Pañc. 242, 6, puruṣam ekam, ‘a man.’ 7. Somebody, Kathās. 18, 330. II. plur. Some, Man. 9, 61. III. Former and latter part of compounds, e. g. eka-chara, adj. living alone, Man. 5, 17. an-, adj. many, Man. 5, 159; several, Yājñ. 2, 120; manifold, Yājñ. 3, 144. karapādaikahīnaka, i. e. kara-pāda-eka-hīna + ka, adj. one who has had a hand and foot cut off, Yājñ. 2, 274. tad-eka, one of these, Hit. 25, 10. — Cf. Lat. aequus. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 eka a. one of (gen, abl., or –°); alone, sole, single, solitary; the same, identical, common (esp. °–); in l. l. a certain or = the indef. article; with na and mostly w. cana or api no one, none; pl. eke some. — eke–eke (apare anye) some — some (others). Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 eka e-ka, num. one; alone, only; single; one and the same, common; one of (g., ab., or -°); unique; excellent; ascertain, some one, (sts. = indefinite article) a, an; with na, none: pl. some, some folks: eka-eka or anya, apara, dvitīya, the one — the other; eke-eke, anye or apare, some — others; m. N. of a teacher; ā, f. ep. of Durgāl; n. unit (-° = one). Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 eka tri° iṇ–kan . 1 ekatvarūpaprathamasaṁkhyānvite, 2 kevale, 3mukhye, 4 anyārthe, 5 satye, 6 advitīye, 7 samāne, 8 alpe ca . prāyaśaḥ saṁkhyāvācakasya saṁkhyāsaṁkhyeyobhayaparatve’pi ekaśabdasya mūriśaḥ ekatvasaṁkhyānvitaparatvam . tena ekoghaṭaityādi na tu ghaṭasyaikaḥ . kvacittu bhāvapradhānanirdeśaparatvena saṁkhyāvācakatvamapi . dvyekayordvivacanaikavacane pā° . iha dvitvam ekatvaṁ ca dvyekaśabdayorarthaḥ . atra dvivacanāntatvameva tathārthatve liṅgam saṁkhyeyaparatvedvyekeṣāmiti syāt dvandvārthānāṁ saṁkhyānvitānāṁ bahutvāt . tena ekadvivacanaśabdo’pi ekatvadvitvārthakaḥ tatrārthe tayoḥparibhāṣitatvāt ataeva supāṁ karmādayo’pyarthāḥ saṁkhyā caiva tathā tiṅām iti supāṁ tiṅāñca saṁkhyāvācakatvamuktam . tathā anekamanyapadārthe pā° sūtre anekapadasya ekavacanāntatayā prayogāt nāsti ekatvaṁ yatra iti vigraheṇa ekatvaśūnyārthakatā . ekasaṁkhyānvitaparatve aneke iti syāt patantyaneke jaladherivormaya ityādau bahuvacanāntatayaivāneka śabdasya prayogāt . svārasikaprayoge tu na lakṣaṇā tena ghaṭasyaika ityādi na prayogaḥ iti draṣṭavyam . itarasaṁkhyāsu ekatvasyānugamāt dvitvādīnāmekatvabuddhyaiva jananācca iṇdhātvarthānugamāt tasya anvarthanāmatā . saṁkhyā ca dravyasamaveto guṇabiśeṣaḥ guṇādau ca saṁkhyānvayaḥ paramparayeti viśeṣaḥ . ekatvāderjātitvanirāsena guṇatvavyavasthāpanaṁ kaṇā° sū° vṛttyoḥkṛtaṁ yathā rūparasagandhasparśavyatirekādarthāntaramekatvam ka° sū° rūparasagandhasparśeti saṁkhyādipañcakabhinnaguṇopalakṣaṇaṁ vyatirekāditi vyabhicārāt . tadayamarthaḥ, ekoghaṭa iti viśiṣṭapratītirviśeṣaṇajñānajanyā, tatra viśeṣaṇaṁ na rūpādi, tadvyatirekeṇa jāyamānatvāt . na ca ghaṭatvādikameva nimittam, paṭe’pi jāyamānatvāt, na caikatvaṁ sattāvat sāmānyam, sattayā sahānyūnānatiriktāvṛttitvāt, na ca dravyamātre sāmānyaṁ tat, dravyatvenānyūnānatiriktadeśatvāt, na cānyūnānatiriktadeśatve’pi pratītibhedādbhedaḥ, pratītibhedasya svarūpakṛtatve sattā’pi bhidyeta, viṣayabhedakṛtatve tu viṣayabhedānupapatteruktatvāt anyathā ghaṭatvakalasatvayorapi bhedāpatteḥ . na ca svarūpābheda ekatvamiti bhūṣaṇoktaṁ yuktam . ghaṭasvarūpabhedaścedekatvaṁ tadā paṭādāvekatvapratyayo na syāt svarūpabhedodvitvādikamityapi bhūṣaṇamatamanupapannaṁ svarūpabhedasya tricaturādisādhāraṇyena vyavahāravaicitryānupapatteriti bhāvaḥ . vaiyā° sū° saṅkhyānirūpaṇapūrvakaṁ tadvivakṣādinirūpaṇaṁ yathā abhedaikatvasaṁkhyāyā vṛttau bhānamiti sthitiḥ . kapiñjalālambhavākye tritvanyāyādyathocyate . uktañca vākyapadīye . yathauṣadhirasāḥ sarve madhunyāhitaśaktayaḥ . avibhāgena vartante saṁkhyāṁ tāṁ tādṛśīṁ viduriti . parityaktaviśeṣaṁ vā saṁkhyāsāmānyaṁ tat . uktañca bhedānāṁ vā parityāgātsaṁkhyātmā sa tathāvidhaḥ . vyāpārājjātibhāgasya bhedāpohena vartate . agṛhītaviśeṣeṇa yathā rūpeṇa rūpavān . prakhyāyate na śuklādi bhedāpohastu gamyate iti . asyāḥ vṛttau samāsādau bhānaṁ nyāyasiddhamiti śeṣaḥ . iti matasthitirvaiyākaraṇānām . ayaṁ bhāvaḥ rājapuruṣa ityādau rājñorājñoḥ rājñāṁ vāyaṁ puruṣa iti jijñāsā jāyate . viśeṣajijñāsāyāṁ sāmānyarūpeṇa tatpratītiḥ śabdādābaśyakī atastasyāṁ śaktiriti . tasyā ekatvena pratītau nyāyamāha kapiñcaleti . bahutvagaṇanāyāṁ tritvasyaiva prathamopasthitatvāt tadrūpeṇaiva bhānavadekatvasya sarvataḥ prathamoprasthitatvamastīti . vastutastu jijñāsaiva nānubhavasiddhā . tathātve vā jñānecchayoḥ samānaprakārakatvena hetuhetumadbhāvāttattadrū peṇaiva vācyatā syāditi dhyeyam . tathā ca utsargāt sarvatra abhedaikatvasaṁkhyaiva vṛttau pratīyate na tu viśeṣeṇa . ata eva saṁkhyā tu vyañjakābhāvādavyaktā prātarādivat . yatra tu vyañjakaṁ kiñcit tatrasaṁkhyā pratīyate iti vākyapadīye uktam tena rājapuruṣa ityādau na viśeṣasaṁkhyāpratītiḥ vyañjakābhāvāt tvatputraḥ asmaddhanam ityādī tu viśeṣeṇa tatpratītiḥ tvādeśatadabhāvayorvyañjakatvāt tvamāvekapacane iti pā° ekavacane tvamādeśasya vidhānāt . tadabhāvādeva dvitvabahutvayorviśeṣeṇa pratītiḥ . evaṁ dravyaikye ekadeśitatpuruṣavidhānāt ardhapippalītyādau ekatvapratītiḥ dvitvādau vivakṣite tu pippalyardhamityādyeva syāditi tatra viśeṣasaṁkhyāpratītiḥ . ekaḥ śabdaḥ suprayuktaḥ samyagjñātaḥ svarge loke kāmadhugbhavati śrutiḥ ekamevādvitīyaṁ brahma śrutiḥ . 9 bhedatrayaśūnye parameśvare pu° . eko’nekaḥ savaḥ kaḥ kim viṣṇusa° . paramārthataḥ sajātīyavijātīyasvagatabhedarāhityāt ekaḥ bhā° . sajātīyabhedaḥ yathā vṛkṣe vṛkṣāntarāt bhedaḥ vijātīyabhedaḥ yathā vṛkṣepaṭādbhedaḥ . svagatabhedaḥ yathā vṛkṣe śākhādibhyobheda ityevaṁbhedatrayarāhityañca sarvasya brahmātmakatvāt kāryakāraṇayorabhedāt tadariktaparamārthavastvantarābhāvācca . tadeva ekamevādvitīyamiti śrutau padatrayeṇoktam iha tu anyapadābhāvāt ekaśabdasyaiva tathā bhedatrayarāhityaparatvamiti bodhyam . sāṁkhyamate tu eko’dvitīya iti vedavacāṁsi puṁsi vaidharmya lakṣaṇabhidāvirahaṁ vadanti ityuktavaidharmyarūpabhedarāhityamekatvamiti bodhyam . nyāyamate tu ekatvamanupaśyataḥ iti śrutyantarāt ekatvena cintyatayā, prādhānyena vā ekatvaṁ samarthanīyam . ekātapatrā pṛthivībhṛtāṅgarṇaḥ māghaḥ . tvamekadṛśyaṁ nayanaiḥ pibantyaḥ mamātra bhāvaikarasaṁ manaḥ sthitam kumā° tvamekohyasya sarvasya vidhānasya svayambhuvaḥ manuḥ . ajāmekāṁ lohitaśuklakṛṣṇāṁ vahvīḥ prajāḥ sṛjamānāṁ sarūpāḥ . ajohyekojuṣamāṇo’nuśete śrutiḥ . ekātapatraṁ jagataḥ prabhutvam tvamekā kalyāṇī giriśaramaṇī kāli! satatam karpū° sta° hetorekāśraye yeṣāṁ svasādhyavyabhicāritā bhāṣā° . viśeṣaṇayorekasya viśeṣyatvavivakṣayā ka° sa° ekaśabda sya pūrvanipātaḥ ekadhanurdhara ityādi amoghaṁ sandadhe śastraṁ dhanuṣyekadhanurdharaḥ raghuḥ . vīraśabdena samāse tu ekavīraḥ vīraika iti rūpadvayaṁ bhavatīti bhedaḥ . vastutastatra vīraikaḥ ityeva ekeṣu mukhyeṣu vīrayate iti vīradhātorūpavīraśabdena saptamītatpuruṣe ekavora iti prauḍhama° . ekaśabdasya saṁkhyāvācakatve’pi saṁkhyāpūrvo dviguḥ pā° na dvigutvamiti . asya sarvanāmakāryam eke ekasmai ekasmāt ekeṣām ekasmin . striyām ekasyai ekasyāḥ ekāsāmekasyāmityādi nañtatpuruṣe tu . aneka ekabhinne dvi° ba° va° . tatra ekatva saṁkhyānvayāsambhavānnaikavacanaprayogaḥ . tatra ca sarvanāmakāryam aneke anekasmai ityādi aneke sevante bhavadadhikagorvāṇanivahān karpū° sta° . ekatvārthakena tena bahuvrīhau ekavacanaprayogo’pi anekamanyapadārthe pā° . ekasya bhāvaḥ tva . ekatva na° tal . ekatā strī, ṣyañ aikya na° ekatvasaṁkhyāyāṁ sāmye śreṣṭhatve abhede ca . tatra komohaḥ kaḥ śoka ekatvamanupaśyataḥ śrutiḥ arthāntaramekatvam kaṇā° sū° . ekatvaṁ sāgatā yasmāt smṛtiḥ . samālokyaikatāmevaṁ śaśino bhāskarasya ca bhā° va° 223 . vrajatorapi praṇayapūrvamekatām māghaḥ daikyaṁ so’nvaye mugdhabo° . dravyaikye si° kau° . ḍatara . ekatara dvayormadhye jātiguṇakriyādibhirnirdhārye ekasmin tri° ekataro brāhmaṇaḥ ekataraḥ kaṭhaḥ ekataronīlaḥ ekataraścala ityādi . astrāṇi vā śarīraṁ vā brahmannekataraṁ vṛṇu bhā° ā° 166 a° . ekatarapakṣapātinī yuktirvinigamanā nyāya° . sa ca śabdaḥ anyatarānyatamavat avyutpannaṁ prātipādikamityanye ataeva adḍḍarādibhyaḥ pā° ekataraśabdānna adḍ . ekataraṁ kulam . tena na sarvanāmakāryam dvayorekatare buddhiḥ kriyatāmityādi, ekaśabdasya bhinnārthakatvona ekataraśabdo’pi bhinnārthe amaraḥ . ḍatama . ekatama bahūnāṁ madhye jātyādibhiḥ niddhārye ekasmin tri° yadi hyekatamohyoṣāṁ strīdhanaṁ bhakṣayedbalāt kātyā° smṛ° . sarvanāmakāryam ekatame ekatamasmādityādi klīve svamoḥ adḍ ekatamat . tasil . ekatas ekasminnityarthe avya° ekatodataḥ manuḥ tāmekatastava bimarti guruvitantro raghuḥ . tral . ekatra ekasminnityarthe avya° ekatra sphaṭikataṭāṁśubhinnanīrāḥ māghaḥ . tathaikatra kare daśa manuḥ antyajairgardabhairuṣṭraiḥ sahaikatrāvatiṣṭhate yā° . dāc . ekadā ekasmin kāle avya° . sa sma bhuṅkte sahasrāṇāṁ bahūnāmannamekadā . ekadā smālpakaṁ bhuṅkte bhā° anu° 159 a° . alpādyarthakāt kārakārthevīpsārthe śas . ekaśas alpamalpamekamekaṁ vetyādyarthe avya° paristīrya taṁ pūrvavat pātrāsādanamekaśaḥ kātyā° 4, 2, 4 . evamekenaikena ekaikasmai ityādyarthe’pi . prakāre dhā . ekadhā ekaprakāre ekadhā bahudhā caiva dṛśyate jalacandravat śrutiḥ . dhyamuñ aikadhyam ekadhetyarthe avya° . |
एकपिङ्ग – ekapiṅga | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899ekapiṅga “eka-piṅga” m. “having a yellow mark (in the place of one
eye)”, N. of Kuvera &c. ekapiṅga “eka-piṅga”. ; “eka–piṅgalācala” m. “Kuvera’s mountain”, N. of the Himavat Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch ekapiṅga (eka + piṅga) adj. als Beiw. von Kuvera R. 4, 44, 4. subst. ein N. Kuvera’s AK. 1, 1, 1, 65. TRIK. 3, 3, 338. H. 189. DAŚAK. 118, 11. Nach WILSON so genannt wegen “eines gelben Flecks” an einem seiner Augen. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 ekapiṅga (EKAPIṄGALA). Another name of Vaiśravaṇa. Once Vaiśravaṇa looked jealously at Pārvatī seated on the left side of Parameśvara and instantly his one eye burst. When Pārvatī regained her peace of mind that one eye of Vaiśravaṇa was changed into piṅgala colour. (See under Kubera). Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 ekapiṅga pu° ekaṁ piṅgaṁ netramasya . kuvere . tasya krūradṛṣṭyā pārvatīdarśane vāmanetrasya sphuṭane śivavākyena prasannāyāstasyā vareṇa piṅgalaṁ vāmanetraṁ jātamiti tasya tathātvam tatkathā kāśī° yathā prasārya nayane pūrbamumāmeva vyalokayat . śambhoḥ samīpe kā yoṣideṣā sarvāṅgasundarī . anayā kiṁ tapastaptaṁ? mamāpi tapaṣo’dhikam . aho rūpamaho prema saubhāgya śrīraho bhṛśam . krūradṛgvīkṣate yāvat punaḥ punaridaṁ vadan . tāvat prasphoṭitaṁ netraṁ vāmaṁ vāmavilokanāt . atha devyabravīddevaṁ kimasau duṣṭatāpasaḥ . asakṛdvīkṣya māṁ vakti nyakkurvanme tapaḥprabhām . asakṛddakṣiṇenākṣṇā punarmāmeṣa paśyati . asūyamāno me rūpaṁ premasaubhāgyasampadaḥ . iti devīgiraṁ śrutvā prahasya prāha tāṁ prabhuḥ . ume! tvadīyaputro’yaṁ na ca krūreṇa cakṣuṣā . saṁpaśyate tapolakṣmyāṁ tava kintvadhivarṇayan . iti devīṁ samābhāṣyatamīśaḥ punarabravīt . varaṁ dadāmi te vatsa! tapasā’nena toṣitaḥ . nidhīnāmadhināthastvaṁ guhyakānāṁ bhaveśvaraḥ . yakṣāṇāṁ kinnarāṇāñca rājā rājñāñca suvrata! . patiḥpuṇyajanānāñca sarveṣāṁ dhanadobhava . mayā sakhyañca te nityaṁ vatsyāmi ca tavāntike . alakāṁ nikaṣā mitra! tava prītiṁ vivardhayan . āgaccha pādayorasyāḥ pata te jananī tviyam . iti dattvā varān devaḥ punarāha śivaḥ śivām . prasādaṁ kuru deveśi! tapasvinyaṅgaje tava . devyuvāca . vatsa! te nirmalā bhaktirbhave bhavatu sarvadā . bhavaikapiṅgonetreṇa vāmena sphuṭitena ca . devadattāstu ye tubhyaṁ varāssantu tathaiva te . kuvero bhava nāmnā tvaṁ mama rūperṣyayā suta! ekapiṅgalo’pyatra . ekapiṅgalavarṇanetrayuktatvāttasya tathātvam . |
कंकुष्ठः – kaṁkuṣṭhaḥ | Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890
kaṁku(gu)ṣṭhaḥ –ṣṭham A kind of medicinal earth (described as of two colours, one of a silvery and one of a gold colour, or one of a light and one of a dark yellow). |
कङ्कुष्ठ – kaṅkuṣṭha | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899kaṅkuṣṭha m. a medicinal earth (described as of two colours, one of
silvery and one of a gold colour, or one of a light and one of a dark yellow) Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch kaṅkuṣṭha m. “eine” (in der Medicin gebrauchte) “best. Erdart” (sowohl von der Farbe des Goldes als auch der des Silbers) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. SUŚR. 1, 103, 16. — Vgl. kālakuṣṭa. kaṅkuṣṭha Z. 3 lies kālakuṣṭha. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 kaṅku(ṅgu)ṣṭha na° kaṅkuḥ tṛṇabhedaḥ tatra tatsamīpe tiṣṭhati sthā–ka ṣatvam . parvatīyamṛttikābhede . himavatpādaśikhare kaṅku (ṅgu)ṣṭhaṁnāma jāyate . tatraikaṁ nalikākhyaṁsyāttadanyadreṇukaṁ smṛtam . pītaprabhaṁ guru snigdhaṁ tatra śreṣṭhaṁ ca reṇukam . kaṅku(ṅgu)ṣṭhaṁ recanaṁ tiktaṁ kaṭūṣṇaṁ varṇakārakam . kṛmiśothodarādhmānagulmānāhakaphāpaham bhāvapra° atrapṛṣo° kasya gaḥ kaṅguṣṭhamapi . |
कर्बूर – karbūra | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899karbūra m. a Rakshas
m. Curcuma Amhaldi or Zerumbet karbūra n. gold karbūra n. a yellow orpiment Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 karbū(rvū)ra a. Variegated. –raḥ (1) A demon. (2) N. of a plant. (3) The variegated colour. –rā A leech. –raṁ (1) Gold. (2) Yellow orpiment. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch karbūra oder karbūra 1) m. a) “ein” Rakshas UṆĀDIK. im ŚKDR. AK. 1, 1, 1, 55, Sch. — b) “Curcuma Amhaldi” oder “Zerumbet Roxb.” AK. 2, 4, 5, 20. ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — 2) f. karbūrā “Blutegel” WILS. Diese Bed. ist wohl aus SUŚR. 1, 40, 12, wo von einem “gesprenkelten” (karburā) Blutegel die Rede ist, oder aus einer ähnlichen Stelle gefolgert worden. — 3) n. a) “Gold” ŚKDR. angeblich nach MED. — b) “Auripigment” TRIK. 2, 9, 35. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 karbū(rvū)ra pu° karva–gatau karba–darpe vā kharjūrā° ūra . 1 rākṣase uṇā° . 2 śaṭhyāṁ ca amaraḥ 3 karcūre (kācā) haridrāyām śabdara° . bhāvapra° karcūra ityeva pāṭhaḥ . 4 svarṇe 5 haritāle na° śabdaci° vaijayantyām karcaramiti pāṭhaḥ karcūraśabde udā° . 6 citravarṇe pu° 7 tadvati tri° amaraṭīkā svārthe kaḥ . karbūrakastatrārtheṣu . |
कषाय – kaṣāya | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899kaṣāya mfn. astringent
mfn. fragrant 31 mfn. red, dull red, yellowish red (as the garment of a Buddhist Bhikshu) kaṣāya mn. (g. “ardharcādi”) an astringent flavour or taste kaṣāya mn. a yellowish red colour on kaṣāya mn. an astringent juice, extract of juice kaṣāya mn. a decoction or infusion (the result of boiling down a mixture consisting of one part of a drug and four or, according to some, eight or sixteen parts of water until only one quarter is left kaṣāya mn. any healing or medicinal potion kaṣāya mn. exudation from a tree, juice, gum, resin kaṣāya mn. ointment, smearing, anointing kaṣāya mn. colouring or perfuming or anointing the person with cosmetics kaṣāya mn. dirt, filth kaṣāya mn. stain or impurity or sin cleaving to the soul kaṣāya mn. dulness, stupidity kaṣāya mn. defect, decay, degeneracy (of which, according to Buddhists, there are five marks, viz. “āyus-k-, dṛṣṭi-k-, kleśa-k-, sattva-k-, kalpa-k-“) kaṣāya mn. attachment to worldly objects kaṣāya m. red, redness kaṣāya m. a kind of snake kaṣāya m. emotion, passion (“rāga”, of which the Jainas reckon four kinds kaṣāya m. the Kali-yuga kaṣāya m. the tree Bignonia Indica kaṣāya m. N. of a teacher (v.l. “kaśāya”) g. “śaunakādi” kaṣāya m. (“as, ā, am”) mf. n. the tree Grislea tomentosa kaṣāya n. a dull or yellowish red garment or robe (cf. “kāṣāya, paṇca- kaṣāya; a-niṣkaṣāya”, full of impure passions Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 kaṣāya a. (1) Astringent; S. 2. (2) Fragrant; sphuṭitakamalāmodamaitrīkaṣāyaḥ Me. 31; U. 2. 21; Mv. 5. 41. (3) Red, dark-red; cūtāṁkurāsvādakaṣāyakaṁṭhaḥ Ku. 3. 32. (4) (Hence) Sweet-sounding; Māl. 7. (5) Brown. (6) Improper, dirty. –yaḥ, –yaṁ (1) Astringent flavour or taste (one of the six rasas): see kaṭu; yo vaktraṁ pariśoṣayati jihvāṁ staṁbhayati kaṁṭhaṁ badhnāti hṛdayaṁ kaṣati pīḍayati ca sa kaṣāyaḥ Suśr. (2) The red colour. (3) A decoction with one part of a drug mixed with four, eight, or sixteen parts of water (the whole being boiled down until one quarter is left); Ms. 11. 154. (4) Plastering, smearing; Ku. 7. 17; anointing. (5) Perfuming the body with unguents; Rs. 1. 4. (6) Gum, resin, extract or exudation from a tree. (7) Dirt, uncleanness. (8) Dulness, stupidity. (9) Attachment to worldly objects. (10) Decay, ruin. –yaḥ (1) Passion, emotion. (2) Kali yuga. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch kaṣāya m. n. gaṇa ardharcādi zu P.2,4,31. SIDDH. K. 249,a, ult. 1) adj. a) “zusammenziehend”, subst. “der zusammenziehende Geschmack” AK. 1, 1, 4, 18. TRIK. 3, 3, 307. H. 1389. HĀR. 206. MBH. 14, 1280. 1411. SUŚR. 1,19, 15. yo vaktraṁ pariśoṣayati jihvāṁ stambhayati kaṇṭhaṁ badhnāti hṛdayaṁ kaṣati pīḍayati ca sa kaṣāyaḥ (rasaḥ) 155, 7. 156, 15. PAÑCAT. 61, 11. 254, 11. BHĀG. P. 3, 26, 42. kaṣāyāṇi tiktāni kaṭukāni ca. bhakṣayan R. 2, 12, 93. — b) “wohlriechend” TRIK. 3, 1, 19. 3, 107. H. an. MED. sphuṭitakamalāmodamaitrīkaṣāyaḥ (vātaḥ) MEGH. 32. — c) “roth, dunkelroth”; subst. “die rothe Farbe” H. an. MED. “gelbroth” SVĀMIN zu AK. ŚKDR. kaṣāyavāsas YĀJÑ. 1, 272. SUŚR. 1, 7, 7. von der Farbe einer Schlange 2, 265, 14. -daśana und -danta von einer Maus 278, 2. 279, 8. kaśāyakaṇṭha (sic) DHŪRTAS. 67, 8. kaṣāyeṇa raktaṁ vastram P. 4, 2, 1, Sch. kaṣāyarakta MBH. 14, 1263. teṣāṁ (tāpasānāṁ) mauṇḍyaṁ kaṣāyaśca vāse rātriśca kāraṇam 13, 6527 (vgl. śukladantāñjitākṣāśca muṇḍāḥ kāṣāyavāsasaḥ. śūdrā dharmaṁ cariṣyanti śākyabuddhopajīvinaḥ.. HARIV. 11142. MBH. 12, 566). kaṣāyavastraracanā MṚCCH. 114, 5. “ein gelbrothes Kleid”: nirvedadhṛtakaṣāyaṁ bhikṣum 113, 3. BURN. Intr. 180, N. 1. Hierher gehört wohlauch: kaṣāyaṁ sulabhaṁ paścānmunīnāṁ śamamicchatām MBH. 2, 675. — 2) subst. m. n. a) “ausgekochter Saft”: parṇakaṣāya ŚAT. BR. 6, 5, 1, 1. KĀTY. ŚR. 16, 3, 16. śuktāni ca kaṣāyāṁśca pītvā medhyānyapi dvijaḥ. tāvadbhavatyaprayato yāvattanna vrajatyadhaḥ.. M. 11, 153. aṅgakaṣāya vom “menschlichen Samen” ŚAT. BR. 14, 9, 4, 8. In der Med. “Decoct; diejenige Form der Medicin, bei deren Bereitung ein Theil des Arzeneistoffes mit vier, nach Andern mit acht oder sechzehn Theilen Wasser gemischt und die Mischung bis auf ein Viertel eingekocht wird”: tatra kecidāhustvakpatramūlādīnāṁ bhāgastaccaturguṇajalamāvāpya caturbhāgāvaśeṣaṁ niḥkvāthyāpaharedityeṣa kaṣāyapākakalpaḥ SUŚR. 2, 175, 9. 21. 1, 15, 3. 16, 6. 18, 5. 38, 5. 159, 8. 14. 15. 17. 160, 11. 2, 48. 16. fgg. 116, 5. kalkāṁścūrṇakaṣāyāṁśca R. 2, 91, 67. Accent eines auf kaṣāya ausgehn. comp. P. 6, 2, 10. umāpuṣpakaṣāyam Sch. kaṣāya = niryāsa “Decoct”, aber auch “jede vegetabilische Ausschwitzung wie Harz u.s.w.” AK. 3, 4, 24, 155. H. an. MED. — b) “Salbe, Schminke”, = samālambhana TRIK. 2, 6, 40. = vilepana und rāgavastu H. an. = vilepana und aṅgarāga MED. ghṛṣṭo vaṭakaṣāyena (sic) anuliptaḥ priyaṅgunā. kṣīreṇa ṣaṣṭikānbhuktvā sarvapāpaiḥ pramucyate.. MBH. 13, 5970. śiroruhaiḥ snānakaṣāyavāsitaiḥ ṚT. 1, 1. — c) (“Bodensatz) Schmutz”; übertragen “Unreinigkeit, Verdummung, Versumpfung, Verfall” (vgl. kalka): karṇakaṣāya BHĀG. P. 2, 6, 45. tasmai mṛditakaṣāyāya (ŚAṁK.: kaṣāyo rāgadveṣādidoṣaḥ) CHĀND. UP. 7, 26, 2. avipakvakaṣāyāṇāṁ durdarśo ‘haṁ kuyoginām BHĀG. P. 1, 6, 22. nirmathitāśeṣakaṣāyadhiṣaṇo ‘rjunaḥ 15, 29. vidhunoti kāmaṁ kaṣāyaṁ malamantarātmanaḥ 4, 22, 20. kaṣāyasya lakṣaṇam (viell. mit Anspielung auf die Kleiderfarbe der buddhistischen Geistlichen) “ein Anzeichen des Verfalls” HARIV. 11182. fgg. kaṣāyopaplave kāle 11184. Die Buddhisten nehmen 5 kaṣāya an: āyuskaṣāya, dṛṣṭi-, kleśa-, sattva-, kalpa- VYUTP. 66. BURN. Lot. de la b. l. 354. kaṣāya = krodhādayaḥ H. an. In der Philos.: layavikṣepaṇābhāve (ŚKDR. – vikṣepābhāve) ‘pi cittavṛtte (ŚKDR. cittasya) rāgādivāsanayā stabdhībhāvādakhaṇḍavastvanavalambanaṁ kaṣāyaḥ VEDĀNTAS. in BENF. Chr. 218, 1. 217, 22. “attachment to wordly objects” WILS. — 3) m. a) “Leidenschaft” (rāga) SVĀMIN zu AK. im ŚKDR. — b) “das” Kalijuga SĀRAS. zu AK. im ŚKDR. Beide Bedeutungen gehen wohl in 2,c auf. — c) Name eines Baumes, “Bignonia indica” (śyonāka), DHAR. im ŚKDR. — d) N. pr. eines Lehrers gaṇa śaunakādi zu P. 4, 3, 106. — 4) m. f. n. Name eines Baumes, “Grislea tomentosa Roxb.” (dhava), RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — 5) f. kaṣāyā Name einer Pflanze (kṣudradurālabhā) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — Vgl. pañcakaṣāya und kāṣāya. kaṣāya 1) c) VARĀH. BṚH. S. 66, 5. 68, 3. -danta “eine Mausart” Verz. d. Oxf. H. 309,a,19. roṣakaṣāyadūṣita “Röthe” mit Anspielung auf 2) c) BHĀG. P. 4, 2, 20. “ein rothes Gewand” Spr. 3615 (ed. Bomb. des MBH. kāṣāya). MBH. 2, 675 hat die ed. Bomb. gleichfalls kā-, was der Schol. durch gairikaraktaṁ vastram erklärt. — 2) a) te pibantaḥ kaṣāyāṁśca sarpīṁṣi vividhāni ca Spr. 4138. — b) vaṭakaṣāyeṇa = vaṭajaṭākaṣāyeṇa Schol. zu MBH. 13, 5970. — c) füge “Leidenschaft” (vgl. 3, “a”) hinzu. kaṣāyavarjitaṁ jñānam MBH. 12, 7873. sa- Ind. St. 3, 148. Z. 9 nach 354 hinzu- zufugen 360. Bei den Jaina vier kaṣāya WILSON, Sel. Works 1, 310. SARVADARŚANAS. 37, 2. 10. 14. 19. 39, 18. mit Anspielung auf 2) a) 36, 20. 22. Etymologie 37, 2. sakaṣāyatva 12. — Vgl. niṣkaṣāya. kaṣāya 2) c) bei den Jaina HEM. YOGAŚ. 4, 6. 77. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 kaṣāya kaṣāya (probably vb. kṛṣ), I. adj., f. yā. 1. Being of an astringent taste, MBh. 14, 1411. 2. Fragrant, Megh. 32. 3. Red, subst. m. and n., red colour, Yājñ. 1, 272; MBh. 14, 1263; of a colour composed of red and yellow, Mṛcch. 113, 3. II. m. and n. 1. An astringent juice, Man. 11, 153. 2. A decoction, Suśr. 2, 175, 9. 3. Ointment, MBh. 13, 5970. 4. Dirt, Bhāg. P. 2, 6, 45; impurity, 4, 22, 20. 5. Stupor, Vedāntas. in Chr. 218, 1. — Comp. a-niṣkaṣāya, i. e. a-nis-, adj. full of impure passions, MBh. 12, 568. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 kaṣāya a. astringent, sharp (of taste), fragrant, red, dark-red. m. red colour, passion, emotion; decoct, extract, ointment (also n.); n. a yellowish-red garment. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 kaṣāya kaṣāya, a. astringent (taste); fragrant; red, yellowish red; m. red colour; passion; m. n. astringent juice; decoction; medicinal potion; ointment; dirt; taint; deterioration, moral decline; n. yellow garment; -ya, den. P. dirty; molest; i-ta, pp. coloured red; dirtied, stained; penetrated w., full of (-°). Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 kaṣāya puṁna° kaṣati kaṇṭham, kaṣa–āya–ardharcādi . (kaṣā) 1 rasabhede 2 tadvati tri° . tasya kāraṇaguṇādi suśrute uktaṁ yathā–tatra śaityaraukṣalāghavavaiśadyavaiṣṭambhyaguṇalakṣaṇovāyustasya samānayoniḥ kaṣāyo rasaḥ so’sya śaityāt śaityaṁ vardhayati, raukṣyāt raukṣyaṁ, lāghavāt lāghavaṁ, vaiśadyāt vaiśadyaṁ, vaiṣṭambhyāt vaiṣṭambhyamiti yovaktraṁ pariśoṣayati jihvāṁ stambhayati kaṇṭhaṁ badhnāti hṛdayaṁ kaṣati pīḍayati ca sa kaṣāyaḥ . kaṣāyaḥ saṁgrāhakoropaṇaḥ stambhanaḥ śodhanālekhanaḥ śoṣaṇaḥ pīḍanaḥ kledīpaśoṣaṇaśceti . sa evaṁguṇo’tyekaevātyarthamupasevyamānaḥ pīḍāsyaśoṣodarādhmānavākyagrahamanyāstambhagātrasphuraṇacumucu māyanākuñcanakṣepaṇaprabhṛtīn janayati iti ca . kaṣāyavargaśca . nyagrodhādirambaṣṭhādiḥ priyaṅgvādīrodhrādistriphalāśallakījambvāmrabakulatindukaphalinīkatakaś ākapāṣāṇabhedakavanaspatiphalāni sālasārādiśca prāyaśaḥ kuravakakovidārakajīvantīcillīpālaṅkyasu niṣaṇṇakaprabhṛtīni nīvārakādayomudgādayaśca samāsena kaṣāyovargaḥ suśru° . asyotpattikāraṇamapi tatroktaṁ yathātasmādāpyorasaḥ parasparasaṁsargāt parasparānugrahāt parasparānupraveśācca sarvesu sarveṣāṁ sānnidhyamastyutkarṣāpakarṣāttu grahaṇam . sa khalvāpyorasaḥ śeṣabhūtasaṁsargādvidagdhāḥ ṣoḍhā vibhajyate ityupakramya . pṛthivyanilaguṇabāhulyāt kaṣāyaḥ iti . tatra tasya ca pittakaphaghnatvamapi tatraivoktam maghurātaktakaṣāyāḥ pittaghnāḥ kaṭutiktakaṣāyāḥ śleṣmaghnāḥ iti . kecidāhuragnīṣomīyatvājjagato rasāḥ dvividhāḥ saumyā āgneyāśca, tatra madhuratiktakaṣāyāḥ saumyāḥ, kaṭvamlalavaṇā āgneyāḥ madhurāmlalavaṇāḥ snigdhāḥ guravaśca kaṭutiktakaṣāyā rūkṣā laghavaśca . saumyāḥ śītā āgneyāścīṣṇāḥ iti suśrute anyamatenoktvā tacca dūṣayitvā pūrvadarśitamatamādṛtam bhāvapra° tadetadvivṛtam yathākaṣāyo ropaṇo grāhī stambhanaḥ śodhanastathā . lekhanaḥ pīḍanaḥ saumyaḥ śoṣaṇo vātakopanaḥ . kaphaśoṇitapittaghno rūkṣaḥ śīto laghurmataḥ . tvakprasādanamālasya stambhano viṣado mataḥ . jihvāyā jāḍyakṛt kaṇṭhasrotasāñca vibandhakṛt . ropaṇaḥ vraṇasya, stambhano gātrāṇāṁ, śodhano vraṇasya, lekhano vraṇādyutsannamāṁsasya, śoṣaṇovraṇamajjādīnām . pīḍano hṛdayasya vātakāritvāt, saumyaḥ somādutpannaḥ . athātiyuktasya kaṣāyasya guṇāstatroktāḥ so’ticayukto gudādhmānahṛtpīḍākṣepaṇādikṛt . abhayāyāmatra viśeṣaḥ . prāyaśaḥ stambhanaṁ proktaṁ kaṣāyamabhayāṁ vinā . 3 rāgadveṣādidoṣe . āhāraśuddhau satvaśuddhiḥ satvaśuddhau dhruvā smṛtiḥ, smṛtilambhe sarvagranthīnāṁ vipramokṣastasmai mṛditakaṣāyāya tamasaḥ pāraṁ darśayati chā° u° . tasmai mṛditakaṣāyāya vārkṣārādiriva kaṣāyo rāgadbeṣādidoṣaḥ, satvasya rañjanarūpatvāt jñānavairāgyābhyāsarūprakṣāreṇa kṣālitomṛdito vināśito yasya nāradasya tasmai bhā° . kaṣāye karmabhiḥ pakve tato jñānaṁ prajāyate vedā° pa° karmaṇāṁ rāgadveṣādidoṣarūpakaṣāyanāśakatvamuktam . layavikṣepābhāve’pi cittavṛtteḥ rāgādivāsanayā stakībhāvāt akhaṇḍavastvanavalambanaṁ kaṣāyaḥ iti vedāntasāroktalakṣaṇe 4 nirvikalpakasamādhivighnabhede sakaṣāyaṁ vijānīyāt śamaprāptaṁ na cālayet . sakaṣāyaṁ kaluṣitaṁ me cittamiti, vijñāya śame’dvitī yātmani niveśayet vidvanma° . 5 rakte anurāgānvite 6 surabhau 7 apaṭau ca keśavaḥ . cūtāṅkurāsvādakaṣāya kaṇṭhaḥ kumā° . kaṣāyaḥ raktaḥ malli° . nidrākaṣāyitavipāṭalalocaneṣu māghaḥ kaṣāyitānyapaṭūkṛtāni malli° . 8 rāge 9 kvāthabhede 10 niryāse ca rāge kvāthe kaṣāyo’strī niryāse saurabhe rase vaija° . kaṣāyaḥ jāto’sya tāra° itac, tatkarotīti ṇickarmaṇi ktavā . kaṣāyita jātakaṣāye kaṣāyīkṛte ca tri° amunaiva kaṣāyitastanī kumā° kaṣāyitaḥ rañjitaḥ malli° . 11 vilepane 13 aṅgarāge ca viśvaḥ . karṇārpitolodhrakaṣāyarūkṣe kumā° kaṣāyeṇa vilepanena malli° . kvaṣāyaśca sarasādikaḥ pañcavidhaḥ bhāvapra° darśito yathā . sarasaśca tathā kalkaḥ kvāthaśca himaphāṇṭakau . jñeyāḥ kaṣāyāḥ pañcaite laghavaḥ syuryathottaram teṣāṁ pañcānāṁ lakṣaṇāni tu tattacchabde dṛśyāni . 13 śyonākavṛkṣe pu° jaṭāgharaḥ . 14 kaliyuge amaraṭīkā rāgadīṣahetutvāttasya tathātvam 15 lohitavarṇayukte tri° medi° 16 raktapītamiśritavarṇe amaraṭīkā . 17 dhavavṛkṣe pu° rājani° 18 kṣudradurālabhāyāṁ strī rājani° . deśe gamye asmāt pānaśabdasya ṇatvam . kaṣāyapāṇodeśabhedaḥ . |
काल – kāla | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (fr. 3. “kal”?), black, of a dark colour, dark-blue &c.
kāla m. a black or dark-blue colour kāla m. the black part of the eye kāla m. the Indian cuckoo kāla m. the poisonous serpent Coluber Nāga (= “kālasarpa”) kāla m. the plant Cassia Sophora kāla m. a red kind of Plumbago kāla m. the resin of the plant Shorea robusta kāla m. the planet Saturn kāla m. N. of śiva kāla m. of Rudra kāla m. of a son of Hrada 189 kāla m. of the prince Kāla-yavana kāla m. of a brother of king Prasena-jit kāla m. of a future Buddha kāla m. of an author of Mantras (= Aśva-ghosha) kāla m. of a Nāga-rāja kāla m. of a Rakshas kāla m. of an enemy of śiva kāla m. of a mountain kāla m. of one of the nine treasures kāla m. a mystical N. of the letter “m” kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ā”) f. N. of several plants (Indigofera tinctoria ; Piper longum ; (perhaps) Ipomoea atropurpurea ; Nigella indica ; Rubia Munjista ; Ruellia longifolia ; Physalis flexuosa ; Bignonia suaveolens kāla m. the fruit of the Kālā g. “harītaky-ādi” kāla m. N. of a “śakti” kāla m. of a daughter of Daksha (the mother of the Kāleyas or Kālakeyas, a family of Asuras) kāla m. N. of Durgā kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. black colour, ink or blacking kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. abuse, censure, defamation kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. a row or succession of black clouds kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. night kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. a worm or animalcule generated in the acetous fermentation of milk (= “kṣīra-kīṭa” or “kṣāra-kīṭa”) kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. the plant Kālāṇjanī kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. Ipomoea Turpethum kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. a kind of clay kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. Bignonia suaveolens kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. one of the seven tongues or flames of fire kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. a form of Durgā kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. one of the Mātṛis or divine mothers kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. N. of a female evil spirit (mother of the Kālakeyas) 11552 kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. one of the sixteen Vidyā-devīs kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. N. of Satyavatī, wife of king śāntanu and mother of Vyāsa or Kṛiṣṇa-dvaipāyana (after her marriage she had a son Vicitra- vīrya, whose widows were married by Kṛiṣṇa-dvaipāyana, and bore to him Dhṛita-rāṣṭra and Pāṇḍu ; according to other legends Kālī is the wife of Bhīmasena and mother of Sarvagata kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. (with or without “gaṅgā”) N. of a river kāla n. a black kind of Agallochum kāla n. a kind of perfume (“kakkolaka”) kāla n. iron kāla m. (3. “kal”, “to calculate or enumerate”), [ifc. f. “ā” , a fixed or right point of time, a space of time, time (in general) &c. m. the proper time or season for (gen. dat. loc., in comp., inf., or Pot. with “yad” e.g. “kālaḥ prasthānasya” or “-nāya” or “-ne”, time for departure; “kriyā-kāla”, time for action ; “nāyaṁ kālo vilambitum”, this is not the time to delay ; “kālo yad bhuṇjīta bhavān”, it is time for you to eat &c. m. occasion, circumstance m. season &c. m. meal-time (twice a day, hence “ubhau kālau”, “in the morning and in the evening” ; “ṣaṣṭhe kāle”, “in the evening of the third day” ; “ṣaṣṭhānna-kāla”, “one who eats only at the sixth meal-time, i.e. who passes five meals without eating and has no meal till the evening of the third day” ; or without “anna” e.g. “caturtha-kālam”, “at the fourth meal- time i.e. at the evening of the second day” m. hour (hence “ṣaṣṭhe kāle ‘hnaḥ”, “at the sixth hour of the day, i.e. at noon” m. a period of time, time of the world (= “yuga”) m. measure of time, prosody m. a section, part m. the end m. death by age m. time (as leading to events, the causes of which are imperceptible to the mind of man), destiny, fate &c. m. time (as destroying all things), death, time of death (often personified and represented with the attributes of Yama, regent of the dead, or even identified with him: hence “kālam-i” or “kālaṁ-kṛ”, “to die” &c.; “kāla” in this sense is frequently connected with “antaka, mṛtyu” e.g. “abhy-adhāvata prajāḥ kāla ivāntakaḥ”, “e attacked the people like Time the destroyer” ; cf. “kālāntaka; kāla” personified is also a Devarshi in Indra’s court, and a son of Dhruva kāla m. (“am”) acc. ind. for a certain time (e.g. “mahāntaṁ kālam”, for a long time kāla m. “nitya-k-“, constantly, always kāla m. “dīrgha-k-“, during a long time kāla m. (“ena”) instr. ind. in the course of time &c. m. with “gacchatā” id. kāla m. “dīrgheṇa kālena”, during a long time m. after a long time kāla m. “kālena mahatā” or “bahunā” id. kāla m. (“āt”) abl. ind. in the course of time kāla m. “kālasya dīrghasya” or “mahataḥ” id. &c. kāla m. “kasya-cit kālasya”, after some time kāla m. (“e”) loc. ind. in time, seasonably (cf. “a-kāle”) kāla m. “kāle gacchati”, in the course of time kāla m. “kāle yāte”, after some time kāla m. “kāle kāle”, always in time kāla m. ([cf. [characters]; Lat. ‘calen-doe’: Hib. ‘ceal’, “death and everything terrible.”]) Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 kāla a. (lī f.) (1) Black, of a dark or dark-blue colour. (2) Injuring, hurting. –laḥ (1) The black or dark-blue colour. (2) Time (in general); vilaṁbitaphalaiḥ kālaṁ nināya sa manorathaiḥ R. 1. 33; tasminkāle at that time; kāvyaśāstravinodena kālo gacchati dhīmatāṁ H. 1. (1) the wise pass their time &c. (3) Fit or opportune time (to do a thing), proper time or occasion; (with gen., loc., dat., or inf.); R. 3. 12, 4. 6, 12. 69; parjanyaḥ kālavarṣī Mk. 10. 60. (4) A period or portion of time (as the hours or watches of a day); ṣaṣṭhe kāle divasasya V. 2. 1; Ms. 5. 153. (5) The weather. (6) Time considered as one of the nine dravyas by the Vaiśeṣikas. (7) The Supreme spirit regarded as the destroyer of the universe, being a personification of the destructive principle; kālaḥ kālyā bhuvanaphalake kraḍiti prāṇiśāraiḥ Bh. 3. 39. (8) (a) Yama, the god of death; kaḥ kālasya na gocarāṁtaragataḥ Pt. 1. 146. (b) Death, time of death. (9) Fate, destiny. (10) The black part of the eye. (11) The (Indian) cuckoo. (12) The planet Saturn. (13) N. of Śiva. (14) A measure of time (in music or prosody). (15) A person who distils and sells spirituous liquor. (16) A section, or part (17) A red kind of plumbago. (18) Resin, pitch (19) N. of an enemy of Śiva. (20) (with the Jainas) One of the nine treasures. (21) A mystical name for the letter m. –lā (1) N. of several plants. (2) N. of a daughter of Daksha. (3) An epithet of Durgā. –lī (1) Blackness. (2) Ink, black ink. (3) An epithet of Pārvatī, Śiva’s wife. (4) A row of black clouds. (5) A woman with a dark complexion. (6) N. of Satyavatī, mother of Vyāsa. (7) Night. (8) Censure, blame. (9) One of the seven tongues of Fire. (10) A form of Durgā; kālītanayaḥ a buffalo. (11) One of the Mātṛs or divine mothers. (12) N. of a wife of Bhīma. (13) A sister of Yama. (14) A kind of learning (mahāviḍyā). (15) A small shrub used as a purgative. –laṁ (1) Iron. (2) A kind of perfume. — Comp. –ayasaṁ iron. –akṣarikaḥ a scholar, one who can read and decipher. –agaru n. a kind of sandal tree, black kind of aloe; Bv. 1. 70, R. 4. 81. (–n.) the wood of that tree; Rs. 4. 5; 5. 5. –agniḥ, –analaḥ 1. the destructive fire at the end of the world. –2. an epithet of Rudra. –3. a kind of bead (rudrākṣa). –aṁga a. having a dark-blue body (as a sword with a dark-blue edge). –ajinaṁ the hide of a black antelope. –aṁjanaṁ a sort of collyrium; Ku. 7. 20, 82. ( –nī) a small shrub used as a purgative. –aṁḍajaḥ the (Indian) cuckoo. –atikramaḥ –maṇaṁ delay, being late; Pt. 1. 154. –atipātaḥ, –atirekaḥ loss of time, delay; Māl 2. –atīta a. elapsed, passed by. –atyayaḥ 1. delay, lapse of time. –2. loss by lapse of time. –adhyakṣaḥ 1. ‘presiding over time’, epithet of the sun. –2. the Supreme soul. –anunādin m. 1. a bee. –2. a sparrow. –3. the Chātaka bird. –anusārakaḥ 1. Tagara tree. –2. yellow sandal. –anusāriḥ, –anusārin, –anusārivā, –anusāryaḥ, –ryakaḥ benzoin. –aṁtakaḥ time, regarded as the god of death, and the destroyer of every thing. –aṁtaraṁ 1. an interval. –2. a period of time. –3. another time or opportunity. -āvṛta a. hidden or concealed in the womb of time. -kṣama a. able to bear delay; akālakṣamā devyāḥ śarīrāvasthā K. 263; S. 4. -prekṣin Pt. 3. 172. -viṣaḥ an animal venomous only when enraged, as a rat. –abhraḥ a dark, watery cloud. –avadhiḥ appointed time. –avabodhaḥ knowledge of time and circumstances; Mal. 3. 11. –aśuddhiḥ f., –aśaucaṁ period of mourning, ceremonial impurity caused by the birth of a child or death of a relation in the family; see aśauca. –ākṛṣṭa a. 1. led to death. –2. produced or brought by time. –ātmaka a. depending on time or destiny. –ātman m. the Supreme spirit. –āyasaṁ iron. –upta a. sown in due season. –kaṁjaṁ a blue lotus. –kaṭaṁkaṭaḥ an epithet of Śiva. –kaṁṭhaḥ 1. a peacock. –2. a sparrow. –3. a wagtail. –4. a gallinule. –5. an epithet of Śiva; U. 6. –kaṁṭhakaḥ –kaṁṭakaḥ a gallinule. –kaṁḍakaḥ a water-snake. –karaṇaṁ appointing or fixing time. –karṇikā, –karṇī misfortune. –karman n. death. –kalāyaḥ dark pulse. –kalpa a. fatal, deadly. –kālaḥ Supreme being. –kīlaḥ noise. –kuṁṭhaḥ Yama. –kuṣṭhaḥ a myrrh. –kūṭaḥ, –ṭaṁ (a) a deadly poison; S. 6. (b) the poison churned out of the ocean and drunk by Śiva; adyāpi nojjhati haraḥ kila kālakūṭaṁ Ch. P. 50. –kṛt m. 1. the sun. –2. a peacock. –3. Supreme spirit. –kṛta 1. produced by time. –2. fixed, appointed. –3. lent or deposited. –4. done for a long time. (–taḥ) the sun. –kramaḥ lapse of time, course of time; kālakrameṇa in course or process of time; Ku. 1. 19. –kriyā 1. fixing a time. –2. death. –kṣepaḥ 1. delay, loss of time; Me. 22; maraṇe kālakṣepaṁ mākuru Pt. 1. –2. passing the time. –khaṁjaṁ, –khaṁjanaṁ, –khaṁḍaṁ the liver. — gaṁgā the river Yamunā. –grāṁthiḥ a year. –ghātin a. killing by degrees or slowly (as a poison) –cakraṁ 1. the wheel of time (time being represented as a wheel always moving). –2. a cycle. –3. (hence fig.) the wheel of fortune, the vicissitudes of life. (–kraḥ) an epithet of the sun. — cihnaṁ a symptom of approaching death. codita a. summoned by the angel of death. –jyeṣṭha a. senior in years, grown up; U. 5. 12. –jña a. knowing the proPer time or occasion (of any action); atyārūḍho hi nārīṇāmakālajño manobhavaḥ R. 12. 33; Śi. 2. 83. (–jñaḥ) 1. an astrologer. –2. a cock. –jñānin m. an epithet of Śiva. –trayaṁ the three times; the past, the present, and the future; -darśī K. 46. –daṁḍaḥ death. –damanī an epithet of Durgā. –dharmaḥ, –dharman m. 1. the line of conduct suitable to any particular time. –2. the law or rule of time. –3. effects proper to the time. –4. fated time, death; na punarjīvitaḥ kaścitkāladharmamupāgataḥ Mb.; parītāḥ kāladharmaṇā &c. –dhāraṇā prolongation of time. –naraḥ (in astrology) the figure of a man’s body. — nāthaḥ, –nidhiḥ Śiva. –niyogaḥ decree of fate or destiny; laṁdhyatena khalu kālaniyogaḥ Ki. 9. 13. –nirūpaṇaṁ determination of time, chronology. –nemiḥ 1. the rim of the wheel of time. –2. N. of a demon, uncle of Rāvaṇa, deputed by him to kill Hanūmat. –3. N. of a demon with 100 hands killed by Viṣṇu. -ariḥ, ripuḥ, haraḥ, han m. epithets of Kṛṣṇa. –pakva a. ripened by time, i. e. spontaneously; Ms. 6. 17, 21; Y. 3. 49. –parivāsaḥ standing for a time so as to become stale. –pāśaḥ the noose of Yama or death. –pāśikaḥ a hangman. –pṛṣṭhaṁ 1. a species of antelope. –2. a heron. (–kaṁ) 1. N. of the bow of Karṇa; Ve. 4. –2. a bow in general. –prabhātaṁ autumn or Śarad; (the two months following the rainy season considered as the best time). –bhakṣaḥ an epithet of Śiva. –bhṛt m. the sun. –bhairavaḥ an epithet of Śiva. –mānaṁ a measure of time. –mukhaḥ a species of ape. –meṣī f. the Mañjiṣṭha plant. –yavanaḥ a king of Yavanas and enemy of Kṛṣṇa and an invincible foe of the Yadavas. Kṛṣṇa, finding it impossible to vanquish him on the field of battle, cunningly decoyed him to the cave where Muchakunda was sleeping who burnt him down. –yāpaḥ, –yāpanaṁ procrastination, delay, putting off. –yogaḥ fate, destiny. -taḥ according to the requirements of the time; Pt. 1. 184. –yogin m. an epithet of Śiva. –rātriḥ, –rātrī f. 1. a dark night. –2. a sister of Yama. –3. the Amāvasyā on which lamps are lighted (in the Divālī holidays). –4. the night of destruction at the end of the world (identified with Durgā). –5. a particular night in the life of man, on the 7th day of the 7th month of the 77th year. –lohaṁ –lauhaṁ steel. –viprakarṣaḥ prolongation of time. –vṛddhiḥ f. periodical interest (payable monthly, quarterly, or at stated times); Ms. 8. 153. –velā the time of Saturn, i. e. a particular time of the day (half a watch every day) at which any religious act is improper. –saṁkarṣā a girl 9 years old personating Durga at a festival. –saṁrodhaḥ 1. keeping back for a long time; Ms. 8. 143. –2. lapse of a long period of time. –sadṛśa a. opportune, timely. –saṁpanna a. dated, bearing a date. –sarpaḥ the black and most poisonous variety of the snake. –sāraḥ the black antelope. (–raṁ) a yellow sort of sandal wood. –sūtraṁ, –sūtrakaṁ 1. thread of time or death. –2. N. of a particular hell; Y. 3. 222; Ms. 4. 88. –skaṁdaḥ the Tamāla tree. –svarūpa a. terrible as death, (deathlike in form). –haraḥ an epithet of Śiva. –haraṇaṁ loss of time, delay; S. 3; U. 5; Mv. 4. 41. –hāniḥ f. delay; R. 13. 16. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch kāla 1) adj. f. ī P. 4, 1, 42. “blauschwarz, schwarz”; als m. “die blauschwarze Farbe, Schwärze” AK. 1, 1, 4, 23. TRIK. 3, 3, 382. H. 1397. an. 2, 478. MED. l. 7. P. 5, 4, 33. (rathe) kālāśvayukte R. 6, 67, 2. kālāḥ kāñcanasaṁnāhāstasmiṁstamasi rākṣasāḥ. samadṛśyanta 19, 5. kālāni bhūtvā māṁsāni śīryante yasya dehinaḥ SUŚR. 1, 299, 19. kālajīmūta R. 3, 55, 13. kālamegha 4, 10, 26. 6, 79, 13. MBH. 1, 7184. VET. 4, 20. kālabāla und kālabāla ŚĀNT. 4, 4. MBH. 1, 1236. tasyāḥ – dīrdhaveṇī – dadṛśe svasitā snigdhā kālī vyālīva mūrdhani 3, 16191. kālī strī pāṇḍurairdantaiḥ 16, 57. timirābhyāhatāṁ kālīmaprakāśāṁ niśāmiva R. 2, 114, 2. pramadā 5, 27, 17. — 2) m. a) “das Schwarze im Auge” SUŚR. 2, 336, 20. Vgl. kālaka. — b) “der indische Kuckuck” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) = kālasarpa VET. 16, 13. — d) “Cassia Sophora Lin.” (s. kāsamarda). — e) “eine Art Plumbago” (raktacitraka). — f) “das Harz der Shorea robusta” (rāla) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — g) “der Planet Saturn” (vgl. nīlavāsas) DĪPIKĀ im ŚKDR. — h) ein Bein. Śiva’s H. an. H. ś. 45. MED.; vgl. kālakaṇṭha, mahākāla und kālī Durgā. = Rudra BHĀG. P. 3, 12, 12. — i) N. pr. eines Sohnes von Hrada HARIV. 189. eines Fürsten (kālayavana) BHĀG. P. 3, 3, 10. eines Bruders des Königs Prasenajit BURN. Intr. 173. eines künftigen Buddha Lot. de la b. l. 126. eines Nāgarāja VYUTP. 85. eines Rakshas R. 6, 69, 12. eines Feindes von Śiva (s. kālāsuhṛd). — k) N. pr. eines Berges R. 4, 44, 21. — l) N. eines der 9 Schätze bei den Jaina H. 193, Sch. — m) myst. Bez. des “Buchstabens m” Ind. St. 2, 316. — 3) f. kālā a) N. verschiedener Pflanzen: “Indigofera tinctoria Lin.” AK. 2, 4, 3, 13. H. an. MED.; “Piper longum Lin.” AK. 2, 4, 3, 15; eine der “Ipomoea Turpethum” nahe verwandte Pflanze, viell. “Ipomoea atropurpurea Chois.” AK. 2, 4, 3, 27. H. an. MED. SUŚR. 1, 131, 19. 2, 106, 19. 528, 16; “Nigella indica Roxb.” AK. 2, 9, 37; “Rubia Munjista” (mañjiṣṭhā, kālameṣikā) “Roxb.” H. an. (lies jiṅgyām). MED.; “Ruellia longifolia” (kulika) RATNAM. im ŚKDR.; “Physalis flexuosa Lin.” (aśvagandhā) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.; “Bignonia suaveolens Roxb.” (pāṭalā) BHĀVAPR. im ŚKDR. Nach dem gaṇa harītakyādi zu P. 4, 3, 167 ist kālā auch “die Frucht der” Kālā. — b) N. pr. einer Tochter des Daksha, der Mutter der Kāleya oder Kālakeya MBH. 1, 2520. 2542. HARIV. 11521. 11552. 12465. PADMA-P. in VP. 122, N. 19. Vgl. kālakā. — c) ein Bein. der Durgā AK. 1, 1, 1, 32, Sch.; vgl. kālī. — 4) f. kālī a) = kālikā “schwarze Farbe, Tinte” H. an. MED. — b) “Anschwärzung, üble Nachrede” H. an. — c) “Nacht” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — d) “eine schwarz aufziehende Wolkenmasse” H. an. HĀR. 71. — e) “ein best. in Milch vorkommendes Thierchen”, = kṣīrakīṭa H. an. = kṣārakīṭa (sic) MED. — f) N. verschiedener Pflanzen: a) = kālāñjanī; b) “Cajanus indicus Spreng.” (tuvarī); g) “Ipomoea Turpethum” (trivṛt) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.; d) “Bignonia suaveolens Roxb.” AK. 2, 4, 2, 35, Sch. — g) N. einer der sieben Zungen Agni’s JAṬĀDH. im ŚKDR. MUṆḌ. UP. 1, 2, 4. GṚHYASAṁGR. 1, 14. — h) eine Form der Durgā AK. 1, 1, 1, 32. H. 203. H. an. MED. MBH. 4, 195. HARIV. 10239. KUMĀRAS. 7, 39. DEV. 9, 27. itthaṁ cemau rajanidivasau dolayandvāvivākṣau kālaḥ kālyā bhuvanaphalake krīḍati prāṇiśāraiḥ BHARTṚ. 3, 43. Hier wie bei kāla als Bein. von Śiva hat man mit dem Begriff “der Schwärze” wohl auch den “der Alles zerstörenden Zeit” vor Augen gehabt. Vgl. Ind. St. 1, 286. 287. mahākālī und bhadrakālī. — i) N. einer der göttlichen Mütter H. an. MED. — k) N. pr. einer Unholdin (vgl. kālakā), der Mutter der Kālakeya, HARIV. 11552. — l) N. einer der 16 Vidyādevī H. 239. — m) Bein. der Satyavatī, der Gemahlin Śāntanu’s und Mutter Kṛṣṇadvaipāyana’s TRIK. 2, 8, 10. LIA. I, 629, N. 1. MBH. 1, 2209. 4244. BENF. Chr. 6, 1. Mutter Vicitravīrya’s, mit dessen Gemahlin Kṛṣṇadvaipāyana die drei Kinder Dhṛtarāṣṭra, Pāṇḍu und Vidura zeugt HARIV. 1825. fg. Gemahlin Bhīmasena’s und Mutter Sarvagata’s BHĀG. P. 9, 22, 30. — n) mit oder ohne Beis. von gaṅgā N. eines Flusses LIA. I, 50. 56. 441. fg. — 4) n. a) “eine dunkle Art Sandelholz” (kālīyaka) ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. — b) “ein best. Parfum” (kakkolaka) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) “Eisen” (vgl. kālāyasa) VĀCASP. bei BHAR. zu AK. ŚKDR. kāla m. 1) “ein bestimmter” oder “richtiger Zeitpunkt; Zeit” überh. AK. 1, 1, 3, 1. 3, 4, 26, 196. TRIK. 1, 1, 103. H. 126. an. 2, 478. MED. l. 7. Im ṚV. nur an einer Stelle: uta prahāmatidīvyā jayāti kṛtaṁ yacchvaghnī vicinoti kāle 10, 42, 9. AV. 19, 53 und 54 sind Lieder, welche von Macht und Wesen der Zeit handeln, deren Begriff an den der “Weltordnung” oder des “Schicksals” streift (vgl. unter 2.). Einigermaassen gebräuchlich wird das Wort (st. des alten ṛtu) erst in den BRĀHMAṆA: sa eṣa sviṣṭakṛtaḥ kālaḥ ŚAT. BR. 1, 7, 3, 3. 3, 8, 3, 36. yadi kāle yadyanākāle ‘thaivāśnanti 2, 4, 2, 4. juhoti kāla eva 4, 5, 1, 16. KĀTY. ŚR. 10, 5, 14. 25, 7, 2. ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 4, 15. M. 2, 80. 3, 105. 7, 164. 204. N. 2, 17. 25, 1. R. 1, 77, 13. 2, 40, 30. 3, 4, 7. SUŚR. 1, 124, 3. PAÑCAT. I, 253. 254. ŚĀK. 151. RAGH. 3, 12. 12, 69. kāle kāle MBH. 1, 1680. RAGH. 4, 6. svakāle M. 4, 93. prāpte kāle 9, 307. kṣetre kālopapādite 36. kāloptāni vījāni 38. kālayuktaṁ vacaḥ R. 5, 46, 2. parjanyaḥ kālavarṣī MṚCCH. 178, 10. PAÑCAT. 149, 14. nainaṁ purā kālātprāṇo jahāti ŚAT. BR. 14, 5, 1, 11 (vgl. AIT. BR. 8, 25, wo āyuṣaḥ st. kālāt). kālameva pratīkṣeta M. 6, 45. kālamanveṣayantau PAÑCAT. 182, 24. kālavid R. 4, 32, 13. kālaṁ gacchati “er gelangt zum Endpunkt” (beim coitus) CHĀND. UP. 2, 13, 1. “die zu Etwas bestimmte –, geeignete Zeit”; die Ergänz. im gen., dat., loc., im comp. vorang., im inf. oder im potent. mit yad (P. 3, 3, 167. 168): saṁpratiṣṭhāmahe kālaḥ prasthānasya R. 2, 56, 2. tasya kālo ‘yamāgataḥ “dazu ist jetzt die Zeit gekommen” VIŚV. 12, 9. eṣa dvaidhībhāvasya kālaḥ PAÑCAT. 155, 9. 143, 12. VID. 241. nāyaṁ vaktavyasya kālaḥ PAÑCAT. 194, 23. na rāma kālaḥ paridevanāya MBH. 3, 10259. na kālo ‘sti vilambane R. 6, 8, 45. dakṣiṇākāla KĀTY. ŚR. 17, 2, 21 (vgl. dakṣiṇānāṁ kāle ŚAT. BR. 7, 2, 2, 21). karmakāla R. 1, 65, 34. kriyākāla SUŚR. 1, 5, 13. paṇakālamamanyata N. 7, 8. VIKR. 32, 15. 64, 18. nāyaṁ kālo vilambitum N. 20, 11. DRAUP. 3, 7. R. 6, 93, 23. kālo yadbhuñjīta bhavān P. 3, 3, 168, Sch. — kālamāsādya “in Berücksichtigung der Zeitumstände”: kālamāsādya kāryaṁ ca daṇḍaṁ rājā prakalpayet M. 8, 324. 9, 293. skandhenāpi vahecchatruṁ kālamāsādya buddhimān PAÑCAT. III, 247. kālamāsādya kaṁcana “nach einer Weile”: yathā kāṣṭhaṁ ca kāṣṭhaṁ ca sameyātāṁ mahārṇave. sametya ca vyapeyātāṁ kālamāsādya kaṁcana.. R. 2, 105, 24. — kālasaṁkhyāṁ na vedmi PAÑCAT. 242, 19. kālaṁ kālavibhaktīśca M. 1, 24. evaṁ sarvaṁ sa sṛṣṭvedaṁ māṁ cācintyaparākramaḥ. ātmanyantardadhe bhūyaḥ kālaṁ kālena pīḍayan 51. kālasyānavasthitatvāt KĀTY. ŚR. 18, 6, 31. kālāvasthā SUŚR. 1, 113, 14. 151, 21. aitasmātkālāt ŚAT. BR. 4, 2, 4, 5. ūrdhvaṁ tu kālādetasmāt M. 9, 90. etasminneva kāle N. 2, 12. anyeṣvapi tu kāleṣu M. 7, 183. sarveṣu kāleṣu R. 1, 46, 11. viṣame kāle 2, 88, 15. kāle śubhe prāpte N. 5, 1. tasminnatisukhe kāle DAŚ. 1, 19. deśakālau “der rechte Ort und die rechte Zeit, Zeit und Ort” M. 3, 126. 7, 10. 16. 64. 8, 126. 156. 157. deśe ca kāle ca 233. HIT. I, 14. deśakālajña N. 8, 12. kālaṁ kar “eine Zeit festsetzen”: kālaśca kriyatāmasya svapne jāgaraṇe tathā R. 6, 38, 29. Eine andere Bed. von kālaṁ kar wird u. 3 besprochen werden. trikālajña R. 1, 1, 8. iṣṭapañcakālajña MBH. 12, 12797. agnau juhvadubhau kālāvubhau kālāvupaspṛśan “bei Sonnenauf – und Niedergang” 1, 4623. ṣaṣṭhe kāle ‘hnaḥ “zur 6ten Stunde am Tage” d. i. “um Mittagszeit” VIKR. 20. ṣaṣṭhānnakāla “der nur die sechste Esszeit hat” d. i. “der 5 Mahlzeiten vorübergehen lässt und erst am Abend des 3ten Tages seine Mahlzeit hält”; davon nom. abstr. ṣaṣṭhānnakālatā M. 11, 200. Gewöhnlich mit Weglassung von anna “Speise”: caturthakālam “zur vierten Esszeit” d. i. “am Abend des zweiten Tages” 109. ṣaṣṭhe kāle “am Abend des dritten Tages” MBH. 13, 5175. 14, 1663. 1665. kadāciddvādaśe kāle kadācidapi ṣoḍaśe. āhāramakarodrājā mūlāni ca phalāni ca.. 1, 8118. Vgl. caturthakālika und aṣṭamakālika adjj. “der erst am Abend des zweiten” und “vierten Tages seine Mahlzeit hält” M. 6, 19. ṛtukāla “die Zeit der monatlichen Reinigung” NIR. 1, 19. ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 3, 13, 47. M. 5, 153. āpatkāle 2, 241. mantrakāle 7, 149. niśā- N. 15, 14. pradoṣa- HIT. 22, 1. śīta-, uṣṇa- I, 186. śiśukāla “die Kinderjahre” PAÑCAT. 192, 3. kiyānkālastavaivaṁ sthitasya saṁjātaḥ “wie viel Zeit ist verflossen, seitdem du stehst?” 242, 14. evaṁ tasya tāṁ nityaṁ sevamānasya kālo yāti 45, 10. kāvyaśāstravinodena kālo gacchati dhīmatām HIT. Pr. 48. athaivaṁ gacchati kāle PAÑCAT. 34, 14. gacchatā kālena “im Verlauf der Zeit, nach einiger Zeit” 47, 6. 76, 10. 224, 7. kāle gacchati dass. VID. 61. evaṁ tena saha sakalāṁ rātriṁ yāvadvigrahaparasya kālo vrajati PAÑCAT. 117, 9. 163, 22. tasya ca kṛṣiṁ kurvatastadaiva niṣphalaḥ kālo ‘tivartate “die Zeit, welche er auf das Bebauen des Ackers verwendet, geht ihm fruchtlos dahin” 174, 9. tasyaivaṁ vartamānasya kālaḥ samabhivartsyati. agniṁ śuśrūṣamāṇasya pitaraṁ ca yaśasvinam.. R. 1, 8, 10. sa ca vakabālakān – sadaiva bhakṣayankālaṁ nayati PAÑCAT. 98, 10. sadaikasthānavihāriṇau kālaṁ nayataḥ 43, 2. bhakṣaṇapānaviharaṇakriyābhiḥ kālo neyaḥ 25, 10. HIT. 37, 20. RAGH. 1, 33. kālaṁ yāpayati PAÑCAT. 183, 24. kva cāyaṁ vihṛtastvayā. kālaḥ MBH. 1, 7. nityakālam “stets” M. 2, 58. 73. dīrghakālam “eine lange Zeit hindurch” 8, 145. SUND. 1, 10. CĀT. 1. mahāntaṁ kālam dass. PAÑCAT. 114, 24. dīrgheṇa kālena dass. SUND. 1, 8. “nach langer Zeit” R. 1, 45, 40. kālena mahatā dass. VIŚV. 10, 10. kālena bahunā ŚṚÑGĀRAT. 8. kenacittvatha kālena “nach einiger Zeit” VIŚV. 5, 13. kālena “im Verlauf der Zeit, mit der Zeit” M. 9, 246. MBH. 3, 8843. BHAG. 4, 38. R. 4, 15, 34. PAÑCAT. 32, 24. KATHĀS. 4, 20. 6, 21. VID. 16. 184. 193. dīrghasya kālasya “nach langer Zeit” N. 18, 1. M. 8, 216. R. 3, 4, 37. 4, 8, 49. kālasya mahataḥ dass. 1, 17, 12. kasyacitkālasya “nach einiger Zeit” ŚĀK. 110, 15. kasyacittvatha kālasya MBH. 1, 5299. HARIV. 6386. R. 1, 26, 25. kālāt “im Verlauf der Zeit, mit der Zeit” M. 8, 251. kālatas dass. KATHĀS. 6, 101. — 2) Ereignisse, deren Ursachen sich dem Verstande entziehen, werden, da sie im Verlauf der “Zeit” geschehen, als unmittelbare Wirkungen “der thätig gedachten Zeit” aufgefasst. Schon oben u. 1. haben wir zweier Lieder des AV. gedacht, in denen der Begriff der “Zeit” an den der “Weltordnung” oder des “Schicksals” streift. na kartā kasyacitkaścinniyoge nāpi ceśvaraḥ. svabhāve vartate kālaḥ kasya kālaḥ parāyaṇaḥ.. R. 4, 24, 5. fgg. SUŚR. 1, 18, 18. BHARTṚ. 3, 43. Verz. d. B. H. No. 948. sarve kālena sṛjyante hriyante ca punaḥ punaḥ MBH. 13, 56. kālasyāhaṁ vaśānugaḥ 51. R. 6, 12, 1. pracodito ‘haṁ kālena pannaga tvāmacūcudam MBH. 13, 50. ayaṁ rāmastvayaṁ rāma iti kālena coditāḥ. anyo ‘nyaṁ samare jaghnuḥ R. 3, 31, 47. kālacodita 1, 1, 50. 3, 8, 8. ARJ. 10, 31. DRAUP. 8, 4. — 3) “die Alles zu Ende führende, vernichtende Zeit; Tod”, sowohl der, welcher nur das einzelne Individuum trifft, als auch der, welcher am Ende der Welt Alles zerstört. Nach SUŚR. 1, 122, 11 “der Tod der durch die Zeit, durch’s Alter kommt”: tatraikaḥ kālasaṁjñastu śeṣāstvāgantavaḥ smṛtāḥ (mṛtyavaḥ). Sehr häufig personificirt mit den Attributen Jama’s und mit diesem bisweilen auch identificirt. AK. 1, 1, 1, 54. 3, 4, 26, 196. TRIK. 3, 3, 382. H. 323. 184. H. an. MED. kālameyivān “er starb” BHĀG. P. 9, 9, 2. kālaṁ kar “sterben” MBH. 14, 1784. R. 2, 64, 52; vgl. kālakarman und kālakriyā. kālasamāyukta “gestorben” 6, 93, 23. kālasya nayane yuktā yamasya puruṣāśca ye MBH. 2, 343. so ‘yaṁ vyaktaṁ bhavatāṁ kālahetuḥ 2096. sa hi meghācalaprakhyaḥ kālaḥ puruṣavigrahaḥ. varāyudhadharaḥ śrīmānutpapāta vihāyasā.. R. 5, 89, 45. kālo hi vyasanaprasāritabhujo gṛhṇāti dūrādapi PAÑCAT. II, 21. upetya muniveṣo ‘tha kālaḥ provāca rāghavam RAGH. 15, 92. pitṝṇāṁ (patiṁ) sarvanidhanaṁ kālaṁ vaiśvānaraṁ prabhum HARIV. 12492. kālāyāḥ kālakalpastu gaṇaḥ paramadāruṇaḥ 12465. prahrādastu – yuyudhe saha kālena raṇe kāla iva sthitaḥ 13191. (nivātakavacāḥ) kālarūpāḥ MBH. 3, 12107. ARJ. 7, 5. svaṁ rūpaṁ kālarūpābhaṁ bheje vaiśravaṇānujaḥ R. 3, 55, 3. kālarūpin 4, 59, 20. kālopamau yuddhe 1, 22, 24. RĀJA-TAR. 1, 289. kālamivolvaṇam 5, 148. nidrayā kālarūpiṇyā HARIV. 3237. śūnyamāsījjagatsarvaṁ kāleneva hataṁ tadā SUND. 2, 18. saṁjihīrṣurdurādharṣaṁ kālo lokakṣaye yathā R. 6, 70, 35. kālasya kālaśca bhavetsa rāmaḥ saṁkṣipya lokāṁśca sṛjedathānyān 3, 43, 42. mṛtyurdaṇḍaṁ sapāśaṁ ca kālaḥ śaktimagṛhṇata HARIV. 12146. khaḍgadaṇḍaṁ dhanuṣpāśaṁ śaraughajaṭharaṁ prabhum. rāmakālamakālena na kālayitumarhasi.. R. 3, 41, 26. kālapāśa 1, 21, 13. 29, 9. 3, 31, 16. 35, 73. 45, 19. 5, 47, 35. VIŚV. 6, 8. 9, 18. MṚCCH. 163, 7. HIT. 21, 11. kāladaṇḍa MBH. 1, 984. R. 3, 35, 43. VIŚV. 6, 2. kālāstra 11. kālamudgara R. 3, 54, 10. kālajihva MBH. 1, 2932. kālaviṣa 3, 10884. kālāgninā yathā pūrvaṁ trailokyaṁ dahyate ‘khilam VIŚV. 15, 16. 6, 19. MBH. 3, 10393. kālāgnisadṛśaḥ krodhe R. 1, 1, 19. kālāgnimiva duḥsaham 74, 17. 4, 33, 32. 50, 9; vgl. kālānala. In Verbindung mit antaka (vgl. kālāntaka) und mṛtyu “Tod”: antakaścābhaddogdhā kālo lokaprakālanaḥ HARIV. 374. abhyadhāvata saṁkruddhaḥ prajāḥ kāla ivāntakaḥ R. 3, 7, 9. mṛtyukālasama 4, 37, 20. kālamṛtyuyugāntābha 31, 17. yathā yamo yathā mṛtyuryathā kālo yathā vidhiḥ hantāsmi rākṣasānadya 3, 69, 20. kāla und mṛtyu in Jama’s sabhā MBH. 2, 340. Kāla (kann hier wie im Folgenden auch als Personif. der “Zeit” oder des “Schicksals” aufgefasst werden) als Devarshi in Indra’s sabhā 295. Kāla ein Sohn Dhruva’s, “des Polarsterns”: dhruvasya putro bhagavānkālo lokaprakālanaḥ (vgl. oben HARIV. 374) 1, 2585. HARIV. 154. VP. 120. kāla = māṭhara im Gefolge des Sonnengottes VYĀḌI zu H. 103. — 4) “Zeitalter, Weltalter” (= yuga): tūrye kāle RĀJA-TAR. 5, 73. — 5) “Zeit” so v. a. “Zeitmaass; Prosodie”: ekādaśidvādaśinorlaghāvaṣṭamamakṣaram (plabate). udaye saṁhitākāle ṚV. PRĀT. 8, 21. hrasvo dīrghaḥ pluta iti kālato niyamā ṛci ŚIKṢĀ 11. AV. PRĀT. 2, 39. P. 1, 1, 70. 2, 27. — 6) “Abtheilung, Abschnitt” VS. PRĀT. 3, 4. 5. — Vgl. akāla, ākāla, ekakālam, yathākālam. kāla 1) KATHĀS. 64, 118. — 2) i) ein Sohn Vasu’s (vgl. kālin) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 80,b,40. Verfasser von Mantra 101,b,16. = aśvaghoṣa WASSILJEW 35. 45. 58. 75. 200. — 4) f) b) nicht “Cajanus indicus”, sondern “eine best. Lehmart.” — h) N. der Dākṣāyaṇī auf dem Berge Kālañjara Verz. d. Oxf. H. 39,b,4. ein Aṁśa der Prakṛti 23,b,1. WILSON, Sel. Works 1,246. kāla 1) yathaiva śṛṅgaṁ goḥ kāle vardhamānasya vardhate “mit der Zeit, allmählich” Spr. 4802. paritoṣakālāḥ “Zeit” so v. a. “Gelegenheit” 3012. brāhmaṇastriṣu kāleṣu śastraṁ gṛhṇanna duṣyati. ātmatrāṇe varṇadoṣe durdamyaniyameṣu ca.. MBH. 12, 2950. — 3) mṛtyukālau R. 7, 22, 22. — 5) ṚV. PRĀT. 6, 9. 11. 11, 1. 16. varṇāpattīnāṁ trayaḥ kālā bhavanti mātrārdhamātrāṇumātropalakṣitāḥ Schol. zu VS. PRĀT. 4, 146. — 7) in den Verbindungen pada-, krama-, saṁhitā- so v. a. pāṭha Schol. zu AV. PRĀT. 4, 123. fg. kāla 1) kālena “von Zeit zu Zeit, dann und wann” (Gegens. pade pade) Spr. (II) 6900. “zu spät” 6007. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 kāla 1 (yama) I (YAMA)>span class=”red”>* The god of Death. When the life span of each living being allotted by Brahmā is at an end Yama sends his agents and takes the soul to Yamapurī (the city of Yama). From there, the holy souls are sent to Vaikuṇṭha (Heaven, the abode of Viṣṇu) and the sinful souls to Hell. kāla 2 II A Maharṣi. Mahābhārata, Sabhā Parva, Chapter 7, Verse 14, refers to this sage as offering worship to Indra, in Indra’s assembly. kāla See under the word Kālamāna. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 kāla 1. kāla, m. 1. Due season, Man. 2, 80; instr. kālena, In due season, Man. 9, 246. 2. Time, Man, 1, 24; 7, 183; instr. kālena, and abl. kālāt, In the long run, Pañc. 32, 24; Man. 8, 251; gen. dīrghasya kālasya, After a long time, Nal. 18, 1; kasya cit kālasya, After some time, Śāk. 110, 15. 3. Mealtime; there are two meal-times a day, therefore, ṣaṣṭha kāla, The sixth meal-time = the evening of the third day, MBh. 13, 5175; Rām. 3, 31, 47. 4. A period, Rājat. 5, 73. 5. Death, Bhāg. P. 9, 9, 2. 6. Time personified, fate, MBh. 13, 56; Rām. 6, 70, 35; endowed with the attributes of Yama, the regent of the dead, Rām. 1, 21, 13; 3, 35, 43, etc. — Comp. a-, m. unseasonableness, Sund. 2, 31; loc. le, unseasonably, Man. 3, 105. ādi-, m. beginning of time, Rām. 3, 20, 6. ṛtu-, m. 1. seasonable time, MBh. 3, 14763. 2. time approved for sexual intercourse, Man. 3, 45. eka-kāla + m, adv. once, Man. 6, 55. kārya-, m. time of action, Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 1809. kṛta-, I. m. appointed time, Yājñ. 2, 184. II. adj. having waited a certain time, MBh. 2, 1875. caturtha-kāla + m, adv. at the fourth meal-time, i. e. on the evening of every second day, Man. 11, 109. tad-kāla + m, adv. instantly, Pañc. 192, 6. tāvatkāla + m, i. e. tāvant-, adv. such a long time, MBh. 3, 16889. tri-, n. 1. past, future, and present time, Bhāg. P. 5, 23, 8. 2. morning, noon, and evening, MBh. 13, 6607. duṣkāla, i. e. dus-, m. the formidable, all-destroying, time, Rām. 2, 33, 21; a name of Śiva, MBh. 12, 10418. nitya-kāla + m, adv. continually, Man. 2, 58. purva(n)-, m. the periodic change of the moon. prāpta-kāla + m (vb. āp with pra), adv. in due season, Pañc. 16, 6. a- prāpta-kāla + m, adv. Out of due season, Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 173. yathā-kāla + m, adv. At the proper time, Man. 2, 39. sa-kāla + m, adv. Betimes, early in the morning. sūrya-, m. day. kāla 2. kāla (cf. kalaṅka), I. adj., f. lī, Dark blue, black, Rām. 6, 67, 2; MBh. 16, 57. II. m. 1. A black and poisonous snake, Coluber naga, Lass. 16, 13. 2. The black in the eye, Suśr. 2, 336, 20. 3. A name of Rudra, Bhāg. P. 3, 12, 12. 4. A proper name, Hariv. 189. 5. The name of a mountain, Rām. 4, 44, 21. III. f. lā. 1. The name of several plants, Suśr. 1, 131, 19, etc. 2. A proper name, MBh. 1, 2520. 3. The name of a female demon, Hariv. 11552. IV. f. lī. 1. A name of Durgā, MBh. 4, 195. 2. A surname of Satyāvatī, Chr. 6, 1. — Comp. bhadra-kālī, f. 1. a name of Durgā. 2. a fragrant grass, Cyperus. mahā-, I. m. a name of Śiva. II. f. lī, Durgā. — Cf. [greek] etc., under kalaṅka. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 kāla f. ī1 dark-blue, black, m. the black part of the eye, E. of Rudra-Śiva; N. of sev. kings etc., also = kālasarpa q.v.; f. ī E. of Durga etc. kāla [2] m. time, esp. the right or proper time (w. gen., dat., loc., inf., or –°); opportunity, case; season, mealtime (twice a day); the half of a day, hour, age, era, measure of time, prosody; time as ruler or destroyer of the world, i.e. destiny, fate; end; death or the god of death. –paraḥ kālaḥ high time (w. inf.). kālaṁ kṛ appoint a time for (loc.). kālena in course of time (also -gacchatā; kālāt or kālatas), at times; kālena dīrgheṇa bahunā, or mahatā (also gen.) after a long time. kasya citkālasya after some time. kāla & kāle in time, at the right or appointed time; (also kāle gacchati) in course of time, little by little. kāle kāle always in time or at the right time. kasmiṁścitkāle one day. — ubhau kālau morning and evening. ṣaṣṭhe kāle on the sixth half-day i.e. after three days; pancaśate kāle after 250 days. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 kāla 1. kāla, a. (ī) dark blue, black; m. the black in the eye; ep. of Śiva. kāla 2. kāla, m. due season, appointed or right time (for d., g., lc., inf., – °); time; opportunity; season; meal-time (of which there are two day); half a day; hour; age, era; measure, prosody; Time, fate; death, god of death; -°, at the right time; in time, gradually; paraḥ kālaḥ, high time (w. inf.); kālaṁ kṛ, fix a time for (lc.); kālam āsādya, according to circumstances; in. kālena, in due season; in course of time: -gacchatā, as time goes on, in course of time; dīrgheṇa-, mahatā -or bahunā-, after a long time; kenacit-, after some time; tena-, at that time; ab. kālāt, in the long run, in course of time; kālatas, id.; with regard to time; g. dīrghasya or mahataḥ kālasya, after a long time; kasya -cit-, after some time; lc. kāle, at the right or appointed time, opportunely; in time = gradually; — prāpte, when the time has come; -gacchati, in course of time; -yāte, after the lapse of some time; -kaśmiṁś cit-, one day; kāle kāle, always at the right time; ṣaṣṭhe –, at the end of the third day: –‘hnaḥ, at the sixth hour of the day, i. e. at noon; pañ- caśate-, = after 250 days; ubhau kālau, morning and evening. Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 kāla t ka kālopadeśe . iti karikalpadrumaḥ . (adantacurāṁ–paraṁ– sakaṁ–seṭ .) yathā acakālat kālamiyattayā gaṇakaḥ . etāvatī veleti kathitavānityarthaḥ . iti durgādāsaḥ .. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 kāla kālopadeśe (iyattayā kālaniścayārthopradeśe) ada° cu° ubha° saka° seṭ . kālayati te avakālat–ta, kalayām–babhūva–āsa–cakāra–cakre . kālayiṣyati–te kāla pu° īṣadalati ala–ac koḥ kā° . 1 kṛṣṇabarṇe tasya varṇeṣu īṣadbhūṣakatvāt tathātvam . astyarthe arśa ādyac . 2 tadvarṇayukte tri° . 3 lauhe na° vācaspatiḥ . dhātuṣu tasya kṛṣṇatvāt tathātvam . 4 kakkole na° rājani° 5 kāloyake gandhadravyabhede na° śabdaca° . tayaurgrandhadravyeṣu kṛṣṇatvāttathātvam . 6 kokile puṁstrī° rājani° tasya pakṣiṣu kṛṣṇatvāttathātvam striyāṁ ṅīṣ . 7 rāle 8 raktacitrake 9 ka samarde (kālaka sendā) vṛkṣe ca pu° rājani° . 10 śanigrahe medi° kṛṣṇatvāttasya tathātvam . kalayatisarvaṁ cu° kala–ac kālasamayavelāsviti pā° nirdeśāt ni° upadhārdardhaḥ . 11 yamarāje 12 mahākāle śive medi° . 13 parameśvare kālo’smi lokakṣayakṛtpravṛddhaḥ kālaḥ kalayatāmaham iti ca gītā ṛtuḥ sudarśanaḥ kālaḥ parameṣṭhī parigrahaḥ viṣṇusa° . trayīmayo’yaṁ bhagavāna kālātmā kālakṛdvibhuḥ sū° si° . svanāmakhyāte paratvāparatvadhīhetau nyāyādimatasiddhe 1 4 dravyabhede . tannirūpaṇaṁ kaṇādasūtre upaskaravṛttau ca yathā aparasminnaparaṁ yugapat ciraṁ kṣipramiti kālaliṅgāni ka° sū° . itiśabdo jñānaprakāraparaḥ pratyekamabhimambadhyate tathācāparamiti pratyayo yugapaditipratyayaḥ ciramitipratyayaḥ kṣipramitipatyayaḥ kālaliṅgānītyarthaḥ aparasminnaparamityanena parasmit paramityapi draṣṭavyaṁ, tenāyamarthaḥ– bahutaratapanaparispandāntaritajanmani sthāpire yuvānamavadhiṁ kṛtvā ‘paratvamutpadyate taccāparatvamasamavāyikāraṇasāpekṣam, na ca rūpādyasamavāyikāraṇaṁ vyabhicārāt trayāṇāṁ gandhādīnāṁ vāyau paratvādyanutpādakatvāt sparśasyāpyuṣṇādibhedena bhinnasya pratyekaṁ vyabhicārāt na cāvacchinnaparimāṇaṁ tathā tasya vijātīyānārambhakatvāt tapanaparispandānāñca vyadhikaraṇatvāt tadaṣacchinnadravyasaṁyoga evāsamavāyikāraṇaṁ pariśiṣyate tacca dravya piṇḍamārtaṇḍobhayasaṁyuktaṁ vibhu syāt ākāśasya tatsvābhāvyakalpane kvacidapi bheryabhidhātāt sarvabherīṣu śabdotpattiprasaṅgaḥ . tathāca kālasyaiva mārtaṇḍasaṁyuktasya piṇḍena saṁyogo’paratvāsamavāyikāraṇaṁ kāla eva mārtaṇḍakriyopanāyakaḥ ātmanaśca dravyāntaradharmeṣu dravyāntarāvacchedāya svapratyāsattyatiriktasannikarṣāpekṣatvāt anyathā vārāṇasīsthena mahārajanāruṇimnā pāṭaliputre’pi sphaṭikamaṇerāruṇyaprasaṅgāt . kālasya tu tatsvabhāvatayaiva kalpanādayamadoṣaḥ . kālenāpi rāgasaṁkramaḥ kathaṁ na iti cet niyatakriyopanāyakatvenaiva tatsiddheḥ evaṁ sthaviramavadhiṁ kṛtvā yūni paratotpattirnirūpaṇīyā . yugapaditi yugapajjāyante yugapattiṣṭhanti yugavat kurvanti ityādi– pratyayānāñca ekasmin kāle ekasyāṁ sūryagatau ekasmin sūryagatvavacchinnakāle ityarthaḥ, na cāprāptā e sūryagatayo viśeṣaṇatāmanubhavanti . na ca svarūpapratyayāsannāeva tāḥ tasmādetāvṛśaviśiṣṭapratyayānyathānupapattyā viśeṣaṇa prāpakaṁ yad dravyaṁ sa kālaḥ upaskaravṛttiḥ . nanu sidhyatu kālaḥ, sa tu nityo dravyaṁ veti na pramāṇamata āha . dravyatvamityatve vāyunā vyākhyāte ka° sū° . yathā vāyuparamāṇorguṇavattvāddravyatvam adravyadravyatvācca nityatvaṁ tathā kālasyāpītyarthaḥ upa° . tathāpi santu bahavaḥ kālā ityata āha . tattvambhāvena ka° sū° . vyākhyātamiti bipariṇatenānvayaḥ . cirādiprayayānāṁ kālaliṅgānāṁ sarvatrāviśeṣādanekatve’pyāratmanāmiva viśeṣaliṅgābhāvāt sattāvadekatvaṁ kālasyetyarthaḥ . nanvevaṁkṣaṇalavamuhūrteyāmadivasāhorātrapakṣamāsartvayanasaṁva tsarādibhedena bhūyāṁsaḥ kālāstat kathamekaḥ iti cenna bhedabhānasya upādhinibandhanatvāt yathā eka eva sphaṭikamaṇirjavātāpiñjādyupādhyaparāgeṇa bhinna iva bhāsate tathaika eva kālaḥ sūryaspandādyavacchedabhedenatattatkāryāvacchedakabhedena ca bhinna iva bhāsat ityayupagamāt tathāca kālopādhyavyāpakaḥ kālopādhiḥ, svādheyakādācitkābhāvapratiyogyanādhāraḥ kālo vā kṣaṇaḥ pratikṣaṇaṁ kasyacidutpatteḥ kasyacidvināśādetadadhyavaseyam . kṣaṇadvayañca lavaṁ ityādyāgamaprasiddham . nanu tathāpyatītānāgatavartamānabhedena kālatrayastu, śradhūyate hi trekālyamupāvartate traikālyāsiddhiḥ ityādīti cenna traikālyavyavahārāt yena hi vastunā yaḥ kālo’vacchidyate sa tasya vartamānaḥ yatprāgabhāvena yaḥ kālo’vacchidyate sa tasya bhaviṣyatkālaḥ yatpradhvaṁ sena yaḥ kālo’vacchidyate sa tasyātītakālaḥ tathācāvacchedakatritvādhīnaḥ kālatritvavyavahāraḥ upaskaravṛttiḥ! idānīṁ sarvotpattimatāṁ kālaḥ kāraṇamityāha . nityaṣvabhāvādanityeṣu bhāvāt kāraṇe kālākhyeti ka° sū° . itiśabdo hetau itihetoḥ kāraṇe–sarvotpattimatkāraṇe kālaḥ ityākhyā . hetumāha nityeṣvabhāvāt anityeṣu bhāvāditi nityeṣu ākāśādiṣu yugapajjātaḥ ciraṁjātaḥ kṣipraṁ jātaḥ idānīṁ jātaḥ divā jātaḥ rātrau jāta ityādipratyayasyābhāvāt anityeṣu ghaṭapaṭādiṣu yaugapadyādipratyayānāṁ bhāvāt anvayavyatirekābhyāṁ kāraṇaṁ kāla ityathaḥ . na kevalaṁ yaugapadyādipratyayabalāt kālasya sarvotpattimannimittakāraṇatvam api tu puṣpaphalādīnāṁ haimantikavāsantikaprāvṛṣeṇyādisajñābalādeva tadadhyavaseyam upa° . bhāṣāmuktāvalyośca saṅkṣepeṇa tannirṇayo yathā janyānāṁ janakaḥ kālojagatāmāśrayomataḥ . parāparatvadhīhetuḥ kṣaṇādiḥ syādupādhitaḥ bhāṣā . kālaṁ nirūpayati janyānāmiti tatra pramāṇaṁ darśayitumāha jagatāmiti tathāhi idānīṁ ghaṭaityādipratītiḥ sūryaparispandādikaṁ yadi viṣayīkaroti tadā sūryaparispandādinā ghaṭādeḥ sambandhovācyaḥ sa ca saṁyogādirna sambhavatīti kālaeva tatsambandhaghaṭakaḥ kalpyate itthañca tasyāśrayatvamapi samyak . pramāṇāntaraṁ darśayati parāparatveti paratvāparatvabuddherasādhāraṇaṁ nimittaṁ ka laeva paratvāparatvayorasamavāyikāraṇasaṁyogāśrayolāghavādatiriktaḥ kalpyataiti bhāvaḥ . nanvekatya kālasya siddhau kṣaṇadinamāsavarṣādisamayabhedona syādataāha kṣaṇādiriti kālastveko’pi upādhibhedāt kṣaṇādivyāhāraviṣayaḥ . upādhistu svajanyavibhāgaprāgabhāvāvacchinnaṁ kamma, pūrbasaṁyogāvacchinnavibhāgovā pūrbasaṁyogāvacchinnauttarasaṁyogaprāgabhāvo vā uttarasaṁyāgāvacchinnaṁ karma vā . nacottarasaṁyogānantaraṁ kṣaṇavyavahārī na syāditi vācyaṁ karmāntarasattvāditi . mahāpralaye kṣaṇādivyavahāroyadyapi, tadā’nāyattyā dhvaṁ senopapādanāyaḥ . dinādivyavahārastu tattatkṣaṇakūṭaireveti muktābalī . tārkikaśiromaṇinā raghunāthaśiromaṇinā ca padārthanirūpaṇaprakaraṇe tatra dikkālau neśvarādatiricyete iti vadatā vibhurūpasyaikasya kālasya khaṇḍanaṁ kṛvam . raghudevarāmabhadrābhyāṁ tadvivṛtaṁ tataḥ saṁkṣipya padārthatattvasāre ca jayanārāyaṇatarkapañcānanena darśitaṁ yathā dikkālau neśvarādatiriktau prācyāṁ ghaṭa idānīṁ ghaṭaḥ ityādivyavahārasya īśvarātmakavibhuviṣayakatvenaivograpatteḥ, naca tayorbhinnaviṣayakatvamanubhavasiddhamiti vācyaṁ tathā sati prācyāṁ ghaṭaḥ pratīcyāṁ ghaṭaḥ idānīṁ ghaṭaḥ tadānīṁ ghaṭa ityāderapi bhinnabhinnaviṣayakatvānubhavāt kāladiśorapi bahutvāṅgokāraprasaṅgāt, tathā ca upādhibhedādekayā diśā ekena kālena ca yathā bhavatāṁ bahūnāṁ vyavahārāṇa apaprattistathā’smākamapi ekeneśvareṇāgamānumānāpyāṁ siddhena sarveṣāmeva tādṛśavyavahāṇāsupadhibhedāduṣapatti sambhavati, suryakriyādau svasaṁyukteśvarasaṁyogitapanāśritatvādisambandhena ghaṭādeḥ sattvasambhavena tatsambandhaghaṭakatayā’pyati raktakālādyasiddheḥ . ayavā kṣaṇā evātiriktāḥ idānāmityādivyavahāraviṣayāḥ, vibhāgaprāgabhāvāvacchinnakarmaṇaḥ kṣaṇatvāsambhavāt bhābikarmāntarajanyavibhāgāntaraprāgabhāvāvacchinnasya karmaṇaḥ kṣaṇacatu yādisthāyitvena tādṛśasyopā dhitvāmambhavāt naca vibhāge svajanyatvaṁ viśeṣaṇīyam, svavānanugamādanangaptāpatteḥ, vibhāgajananādidaśāyāmupādhyantarasya vācyatayā tāvatāpyananugamācca, evañcopādhīnāmatiriktānāṁ kṣaṇikapadārpamvarūpāṇāṁ kṣaṇānāmavaśyābhyupeyatayā tere . tādṛśāḥ sarve vyavahārā upapādanīyāḥ kimatiriktena kāleveti . sāṁkhyamate tasya kāśalarbhāvaḥ na pṛthakatattvāntaratvaṁ tadetatsāṁkhyasūtrabhāṣyayordarśitam khaṇḍadikkālayoḥ sṛṣṭimāha bhā° . dikkālābākāśādibhyaḥ sāṁ° sū° . nityau yau dikkālautāvākāśaprakṛtibhūtau pakṛterguṇaviśeṣaveva . ato dikkālayorvibhatvopapattiḥ . ākāśavat savagataśca nitya itya diśrutyaktaṁ vibhutvaṁ cākāśasyopapannam . yau tu khaṇḍadikkālau tau tu tacadupādhisayogādākāśādatpadyete ityathaḥ ādaśabdenopādhigrahaṇāditi . yadyapi tattadupādhiviśiṣṭākāśameba khaṇḍadikka lau tathāpi ṣiśiṣṭasyātiriktatābhyupagamavādena vaiśeṣikanaye śrotrasya kāryatāvat tatkābhāpamatroktam pra° bhā° . atapadaṁ darśayiṣyamāṇamādhavagranthe ca vācaspatimatena kālakhaṇḍanaṁ tu nityapibhukālakhaṇḍanaparaṁ tathāhi upādhibhidyate na tu tadvāniti sā° sū° upādhibhedeca dharmibhedāsambhavasya vyāsthāpanāt dharmiṇaḥ kālasya ekatvena upādhinā bhedāsambhavāt upādhinā nā’nāgatādi bhedavyavahārasambhavaḥ tathā ca kriyādereva upādhibhūtasyānāgatādivyavahāropapādakatayā tasyaiva kālatvam . ataeva kriyaiva kāla ityabhiyuktoktiḥ . kālamādhavīye ca mādhavena śaṅkāpūrvakaṁ kālaścetthaṁ nyarūpi nanu nāyamudyamaḥ saphalaḥ kālasya gaganakusumāyamānatvāta tadetatparamarahasyamabhijānānaḥ kapilamahāmunistattvāni nirvivektukāmaḥ kālamupekṣyānyānyeva pañcaviṁśatitattvāni viveca mūlaprakṛtiravikṛtirmahadādyāḥ prakṛtivichatayaḥ sapta . ṣāḍaśakastu vikārā na prakṛtina vikṛtiḥ puruṣaḥ iti . na caiteṣveva tattveṣakālamyāntarbhāvo muninā vivajita iti śaṅūnīyam tvadabhimatamya kālamya pañcaviṁśatitattvānāṁ cānyādṛśāni lakṣaṇāni . satvarajastamoguṇānāṁ sāmyāvasthā malaprakṛtirmadahaṅkārapañcataktātrākhyānāṁ svaptānāṁ prakṛtivikṛtīnām madhyetdhyavasāyaheturmattattvava abhimānaheturahaṅkāraḥ . śabdasparśaruparasagandhātmakāni pañcatanyātrāṇi pṛthivyādipañcamahābhūtānāṁmekādaśendiyāṇāñca ṣoḍaśavikārāṇāṁ lakṣaṇāni prasiddhāni . apra kṛtiravikṛtiḥ puruṣaścidātmakaḥ . na hyevaṁlakṣaṇakeṣ tattveṣu kālamyāntarbhāvaḥ sambha vyate nāpi ṣaḍvaṁśaṁ tattvāntaraṁ muniranubhanyate . kathaṁ tarhi munipraṇītāni tattvāni āryābhiḥ saṁgṛhṇāna īśvarakṛṣṇau bahiḥkaraṇāntaḥkarane vicinvan kālaṁ vyājahāra? sāṁpratakālaṁ bāhya trikālamābhyantara karaṇamiti . paraprasiddhyāparo bodhanīya iti nyāyenāyaṁ vyavahāro na tu sasiddhāntābhipāyeṇeti vadāmaḥ . ata evaitadvaco vyācakṣāṇā vācaspatimiśrāstattvakaumuhyāmevamāhuḥ kālastu vaiśeṣikābhibhata eko nānāgatātītādi bhedaṁ pravartayitumarhati . tasmādayaṁ yairupādhibhedairatītānāgatādibhedabhāvaṁ pratipadyate santu taevopādhayo vyavahārahetavaḥ kṛtamantargaḍunā kāleneti sāṁkhyācaryāḥ . tasvānna kālarūpatattvāntarābhyupagama iti . athocyeta–bhūtakālo vartamānakāloṁ bhaviṣyatkāla iti evaṁ triṣvapi bhūtādiṣvanugataḥ kālapratyaya ekamanugataṁ kālatvamantareṇānupapanna iti tanna padārthapratyayavadupapatteḥ yathā bhavanmate dravyapadārtho guṇapadārtha iti ṣaṭsu bhāveṣu caturṣvabhāveṣvanugataḥ padārthapratyaya ekamanugata padārthaśabdavācyaṁ tattvāntaramantareṇāpyupapannaḥ . tathā kālaprayogo’pi kuto nopapadyeta! . tasmānnistattvaṁ kāla nirṇetuṁ mahānayamudyamaḥ prekṣāvacchiromaṇermādhavācāryasya na kathañcidapyapapanna ityevaṁ prāpte brūmaḥ āyuṣmataśce tasyevaṁ nirūḍhakālatattve yaḥ pradvaṣaḥ sa kasya hetoḥ? itivaktavyam . ki kapilamahāmuninā nirākṛtatvāt? 1 kiṁvā sāṁkhyaśāstrapraṇoteṣutattveṣu asaṁgṛhītatvāt? 2 uta lakṣaṇābhāvāt? 3 āhosvitpramāṇā bhāvān? 4 athavā prayojanāmāvāt? 5, athavā tattvagatapañcaviṁśatisaṁ khyābhyāsapāṭavenābhyasitāt śraddhājāḍyāt? 6, na prathamaḥ kālanirākaraṇasūtrasya muninā praṇītasyānupalambhāt . na dvitīyaḥ atiprasaṅgāt ṛgvedaproktānā jyotiṣṭomādīnāmāyurvedadhanurvedagāndharvavedaproktānāsaitradhapas trasvarādīnāṁ māsaṁgṛhītatvena teṣvapi bhāvataḥ pradveṣaḥ phana vāryeta? . aya teṣāṁ viṣaśaṣyā’maṁgrahe’pi sukhaduḥkhamohātmakatvena guṇatrayāntargatatvādastyevārthāt saṁgrahaiyacyate tarhi kālasyāpyasau na daṇḍavārita iti buddhiṁ samādhatasva . kālasya guṇavayapariṇāmatve sāvayavatvama nityatā ca ghaṭāderiva prasajyeteti cet? nityaniraptayava kālatattvābhiniveśavato vaiśeṣikādeḥ patatvayaṁ vajraprahāraḥ śirasi . vedavādināṁ tu na kāpi kṣatiḥ . kālasyotapattisāvayatvayoḥ pratyakṣaśrutāvapalabhyamānatvāta . taittiroyaśa khāyāṁ nārāyaṇīye kālotpattirāmnāyate sarve nimeṣajijñire vidytaḥ puruṣādadhi kalāmuhūrtā kāṣṭhāścāhorātrāśca sarvaśaḥ . ardhasāmā māmā ṛtavaḥ saṁvatsaraśca kalpattāmiti tamyāmeva śāsvayāmāruṇakrtukacayana brāhmaṇe māvayavatvaṁ śrūyate uktoveṣo vāsāṁsi ca ka lābayavānāmitaḥ pratīcyeṣiti . itosmādanuvākātpranocyeṣ adhastaneṣu anuvākeṣa kālāvayavānāmṛtnāṁ dhyātavyo beṣa uktaḥ vastrāṇi coktānītyathaḥ . nityatvaniravayavatvābhidhāyino vaiśeṣikādiśāstrasya amṛtā devatā iti badāpekṣikanityatāyāmantardhānaśaktyupetayakṣarākṣasādivat saṁṛrśayogyāvayavaśvanyatāthā ca tātparye varṇanīyam . atha manyase mahatā tapasā śivamārādhya tatprasāda labbasarvajñatvapadaḥ kaṇādamunirvedavātparyaṁ mamyagvettīti ved syaiva mandamatipratītādarthādarthāntaraṁ netavyasiti . evamapi yasya prasādādayaṁ sarvaṁjñatāmalabhata saeva śivo mukhyaḥ sarvajña iti tanmatānusāreṇa kaṇādamatasyaivātyathānayanamatyantamucitam . śivo hi śaiveṣu āgameṣu ṣaṭatriṁ śattattvāni nirūpayat kālavattvasyotpattimaṅgīncakāra . nikhilaśaivāgamasāramāryābhiḥ saṁgṛhṇāno bhojarājaḥ śuddhāni pañca tattvaḥni śivaśaktisadāśiveśvaravidyākhyāni nirdiśyetarāṇi nirdiśanmāyākāryatvoktipūrvakameva kālaṁ niradikṣat puṁso jagataḥ kṛtaye māyātastattva pañcakaṁ bhavati . kālo niyatiśca tathā kalā ca vidyā ca rāgaśca iti tāni māyāsahitānyekādaśa tattvāni sāṁkhyaprasiddhapañcaviṁśatitattvāni coddiśya vivṛṇvannidamāha nānāvidhaśaktimayī sā janayati kālatattvamevādau . bhāvi bhavadbhūtamayaṁ kalayati jagadeṣa kālo’taḥ iti . taṭṭīkākāra itthaṁ vyācakhyau . nanveṣa kālo naiyāyikādibhinityo’bhyapagataḥ ata āha māvibhavadbhūtamayamiti . bhūtādi rūpeṇa trividhatvāt acetanatvenāsyānityataṁ siddhamiti bhāvaḥ . kena ka ryeṇāsya siddharataāha kalayavi jagadeṣa kālo’taḥ iti . cirakṣiprādipratyayopādhidvāreṇa kalayatyākṣipatatyartha’iti . ittha pratyakṣaśrutisahakṛtaśaitāptamaiḥ kaṇādaśāstrasya bādhe sati uttaramāmāṁsāgataḍitīyādhyāyaprathamādhikaraṇanyāyo’nugṛhyate tasya ca nyāyasya saṁgrāhakau ślokau sāṁkhyasmṛtyaḥsti saṅkoco na vā yedasamanvaye . dharme vedaḥ sāvakāśaḥ saṅkocyo’navakāśayā . pratyakṣaśrutimūlābhirmanvādismṛtibhi smṛtiḥ amūlākāpilo bādhyā na saṅkoca’nayā tataḥ iti . ayamarthaḥ . ṛgvedadi bharagnihotrādidharmo brahmaṇo jagatkartṛtvaṁ ca prati pādyate . sāṁkhyasmṛtyādistu padhānasya jagatkāraṇatva pratipāṭayati tatra tayā smṛtyā vedasya saṅkoco’sti . veti saṁśaye smṛterjagatkāraṇatvamantareṇānavakāśatvāt prābalya vedasya tu dharme’pi caritārthacāddaurbalyam . tataḥ smṛtyanusāreṇa vedaḥ samkucita iti pūrvaḥ pakṣaḥ . pratyakṣaśrutibhirbahva bhiranugṛhītābahvyo manvādimṛtayo brahmakāraṇatāmācakṣate sāṁkhyasmṛtistvekā mūlahīnā ceti durbalatvāt saiva bādhyā ato nāsti vedasya saṅkoca iti siddhānta iti . atha tārkikatvābhimānagrahagṛhītaḥ sana paravaśa evaṁ brūṣe bhūtādonāmaupādhikānāṁ kālaviśeṣāṇāmevotpattirna tu nirupādhikasya mukhyasya kālasyeti tarhi kapardikānveṣaṇāya pravṛttaścintāmaṇimalabhatetyevaṁvāsiṣṭarāmāyaṇa proktasyābhāṇakamya tvameva viṣayo’bhūḥ . yataḥ sādharyavaidharmyajñānāya dravya dīnyanviṣyan parabrahmatattvamavāgamaḥ . vyavahārahetūnāṁ bhūtādikālaviśeṣāṇāmādhāraḥ svayaṁ vyāhārātīto nityo niracayavo mukhyoyaḥ kālaḥ sa paramātmaiva . tathāca śvetāśvatarā āmananti . yaḥ kālakālo guṇī sarvavidya iti . āstāṁ nityatvānityatvasāvayavatvacintā . sarvathāpyasti sāṁkhyatattveṣu ārthikaḥ kālasargrahaḥ sākṣātsaṁgrahābhāvastu jyotiṣṭomādivat prakṛtipuruṣavivekānupayogādityavagantavyam . tṛtīyacaturthapakṣau tu bhavato vaiśeṣikaparicayagandho’pi nāstīti prakaṭayataḥ . vaiśeṣika grantheṣu sarveṣvapi kālaprakaraṇeṣu tallakṣaṇasya tatsādhakānumānasya ca papañcitvāt pramāṇāntarāṇi tu kālasādhakāni śrutyaivopanyastāni tathā ca taittirīyā āruṇaketuke mantramāmananti smṛtiḥ pratyakṣamaitihyam anumānaścatuṣṭayam . etairādityamaṇḍalai sarvaireva vidhāsyate iti . tatra smṛti anumeyaśrutimūlaṁ manvādiśāstraṁ prayakṣaṁ śrotragrāhyo ‘kṛtrimo vedākhyo’kṣararāśiḥ, yogipratyakṣamaupaniṣadābhimataṁ sākṣipratyakṣaṁ vā . aitihyamitihāsapurāṇādike jyotiḥśāstrasyāpyatrāntarbhāvo draṣṭavyaḥ . anumīyate svamūlabhūtaṁ smṛtivākyamanenetyenumānaḥ śiṣṭācārastasya ca smṛtyanumāpakatvaṁ . bhaṭṭācāryarvispaṣṭamabhihitam . ācā rācca smṛtiṁ jñātvā smṛteśca śrutikalpanamiti, tadevaṁ smṛtyādīnāṁ catuṣṭayaṁ saphalam, etaiścaturbhiḥ sarvairapyādityamaṇḍalaṁ pramīyata iti mantrasyārthaḥ . nanu smṛtyādīni maṇḍalasādhakatvenātropanyastāni na tu kālasādhakatveneti cet maivaṁ maṇḍalasya sārvajanīnapratyakṣasiddhatvena tatra smṛtyādyanupayogāt, kālavivakṣayevātra kālanirvāhakamaṇḍale tānyupanyastāni, tathā ca maṇḍaladvārā kālaḥ pramīyate . kālavivakṣā cottaramantreṣvatisphuṭā tatrānantaro mantraevamāmnāyate, sūryo marīcimādatte sarvasmādbhuvanādadhi, tasyāḥ pākaviśeṣeṇa smṛtaṁ kālaviśeṣaṇamiti tasyāyamarthaḥ . bhuvanagataṁ sarvabhūtajātamadhikṛtyarasavīryapākādibhistattadanugrahasamarthaṁ marīciṁ sūryaṁ svīkaroti tatkṛtena bhūtapākabhedena nimeṣādiḥ parārdhaparyantaḥ kālavibhedo’smābhiravagato bhavatīti . kālaprati pādakāni ca smṛtyādītyudāharāmaḥ . tatra manuḥ kālaṁ kālavibhaktiñceti sṛṣṭiprakaraṇe kālaṁ vyavajahāra . yājñavalkyo’pi, śrāddhakālaḥ prakīrtitaḥ iti . evamanyāsvapi smṛtiṣūdāhāryam . śrutiṣvapi kṛtaṁ svapne vicinoti kālaḥ iti bahvṛcāḥ . ahameva kālonāhaṁ kālasyeti taittirīyāḥ . kā ca sandhyā kaśca sandhyāyāḥ kāla iti sāmagāḥ . yogaśāstre’pi saṁyamaviśeṣāddhāraṇādhyānasamādhitrayarūpādyogino’tītādikālaṁ pratyakṣataḥ paśyantīti abhihitam tathā ca pātañjalabhūtram pariṇāmatrayasaṁyamādatītānāgatādijñānamiti . sāṁkṣipratakṣamapi, ahamasminakāle nivasāmi, ityanubhavastāvatsārvajanīnaḥ . na cāsau bāhyendriyakṛtaḥ kālasya rūpādihīnatvāt . nāpi mānasastārkikaistadanaṅgīkārāt . nāpyanumānādijanyaḥ aparokṣapratyayatvāt . ataḥ sāmagryabhāva’pyaparokṣadarśanātsākṣipratyakṣametadityaupaniṣadām anyante . itihāse’pi mahābhārate praharau ghaṭikānyūnau praharau ghaṭikādhikau . sa kālaḥ kutapojñeya pitṝṇāṁ, dattamakṣayamiti . purāṇe’pi anādireṣa bhagavānkālo’santā’jaraḥ paraḥ iti śiṣṭāśca paurṇamāsyākhyakāle svasvakalocitān devaviśeṣebhyaḥ kṣīradadhyādisamarpyaṇādikāndharmaviśeṣānbhānuvārādikālaviśeṣe ca samācaranti . tadevamanekapramāṇapramite kāle pramāṇābhāvarūpaścaturthaḥ pakṣaḥ kathamāśaṅkyeta? . nāpi prayojanābhāvāditi pañcamaḥ pakṣo yujyate . tārkikaistāṣat sarvotpattinimittakāraṇatvamuddhoṣitam . loke kṛṣyādyupayogaḥḥkālaviśeṣya kṛṣīvalādibhirvyavahriyate . gṛhapraveśaprayāṇādyupayogo jyotiḥśāstraprasiddhaḥ . śrautasmārtakarnopayogastu pradarśayiṣyate . tasmāt sāṁkhyaśraddhājāḍyakṛtasrava pradveṣa ityayaṁ ṣaṣṭaḥ pakṣaḥ pariśipyate . tathāca pāpā tmanaḥ svasya budbyaparādhaṁ puṇyātmani mādhavācārye samāro payan kayā vā śikṣayā na daṇḍyo’si . tadevaṁ kālasyapratyā khyātumaśakyatvānnirṇayodyamaḥ saphala iti sthitam . nanu katarakālo’tra nirṇīyate . kiṁ kevalaḥ kālaḥ kiṁ vā kālakālaḥ . nanu kimityaprasiddhabhāṣayā bhīṣayasi, na bhīṣayāmyahaṁ kiñcāstyeva kalayitavyabhedātkāladvaividhyam . yena prāṇidehādayo’tītavartamānādirūpeṇa kalayitavyāḥ sa kevalaḥ kālaḥ . sa ca tattvaprakāśavacanena pūrvam udāhṛtaḥ kalayati jagadeṣa kālo’taḥ iti . tādṛśo’pi kāryotpattisthitivināśakāriṇā yena kalayitavyaḥ sa kālakāla iti . sa ca vāsiṣṭharāmāyaṇedaśitaḥ kāle pi kalyte yeneti śrutiśca bhavati sa viśvakṛdviśvavidātma yonirjñaḥ kālakālo guṇī sarvavidyaḥ pradhānakṣatrajñaḥ iti guṇī sasāramokṣasthitibandhaheturiti ca kūrmapurāṇe’pi anādireṣa bhagavān kālo’nanto’jaraḥ paraḥ . sarvagatvāt svatantratvāt sarvātmatvānmaheśvaraḥ . brahmāṇo bahavo rudrā anye nārāyaṇādayaḥ . ekohi bhagavānīśaḥ kālaḥ kaviriti smṛtaḥ . brahmanārāyaṇeśānāṁ trayāṇāṁ prākṛtolayaḥ . procyate kālayogena punareva ca sambhavaḥ . paraṁ brahma ca bhūtāni vāsudevo’pi śaṅkaraḥ . kālenaiva ca sṛjyante saeva grasate punaḥ . tasmāt kālatmakaṁ viśvaṁ sa eva parameśvaraḥ iti . viṣṇudharmottare’pi . anādinidhanaḥ kālo rudraḥ saṅkarṣaṇaḥ smṛtaṁ . kalanātsarvabhutānāṁ sa kālaḥ parikīrtitaḥ . karṣaṇāt sarvabhūtānāṁ sa tu saṅkaṣaṇaḥ smṛtaḥ . sarvabhūtaśamitvācca sa rudraḥ parikīrtitaḥ anādinidhanatvana sa mahān parameśvara iti jyotiḥśa stre’pi bhūtānāmantakṛtkālaḥ kālo’nyaḥ kalanātmakā iti . tatraivaṁ sati dvayormadhye kālakālotra na nirṇetaka tasya dharmānuṣṭhāneṣvahetutvema heyatvādanupādeyatvācca . yastvitaro māsapakṣatithyādirūpaḥ so’pi jyotiḥśāstre samyaṅnirṇīta iti kṛtamanayā kālanirṇayapravṛttyeti prāpte brūmaḥ umayamapyatra nirṇetavyaṁ kālakālasya jagadīśvarasya sarveṣu karmārambheṣu anusmartavyatvāt ataeva śiṣṭāḥ puṇyāhavācanādāvīśvaramanusmaranti . sarveṣu kāleṣu samasta deśeṣvaśeṣakāryeṣu tayeśvareśvaraḥ . sarvaiḥsvarūpairbhagavānanādimānmamāstu māṅgalyavivṛddhaye hariḥ . yasya smṛtyā ca nāmoktyā tapoyajñakriyādiṣu . nyūnaṁ saṁpūrṇatāṁ yāti sadyovande tamacyutamiti . māsādirūpabhedasya tu svarūpeṇa jyotiṣe nirṇītatve’pi śrautasmārtakarmaviśeṣeṇa saha kālasyāṅgāṅgibhāvī nirṇetavyaḥ . yadyapyasau hemādiprabhṛtiṣu grantheṣu nirṇītastathāpyanekatra viprakīrṇasyaikatra saṁgrahārthamatra yatnaḥ kriyate . tadevaṁ cikīrṣitasya granyasya kālarūpo viṣayaḥ saṁgraharūpaṁ prayojanaṁ cāstīti ayaṁ grantha ārabhyate . nityo janyaśca kālau dvau tayorādyaḥ pareśvaraḥ . so’vāṅamanasagamyo’pi dehī bhaktānukampayā nityakālasya parameśvaratve pramāṇaṁ pūrvamevopanyastam . parameśvarasya cāvāṅmanasagocaratve sarve vedāntāstadanusārismṛtipurāṇāni tattvavidanubhavaśca pramāṇam . bhaktānugrāhimūrtisvīkāraśca ta lavakārākhye sāmavedaśākhāviśeṣe kasyāṁ cidākhyāyikāyāmāmnāyate tasyāṁ hyāstyāyikāyāmevamuktam– agnivāyvi ndrādayo devā īśvarānugṛhītāḥ sarvatra vijayamānāḥ svakīyameva tatsāmarthyamityamimanyante sma . tān bodhāyitumavāṅmanasagamyaṁ parameva brahma pūjyāṁ cakṣurgamyāṁ kāñcinmūrtiṁ dhārayitvā prādurbabhūva . tayā saha vādaṁ kṛtvāpi rājasacittāvagnivāyū tadbrahmatattvaṁ naiva bubudhāte indrastu sātvika cittobubudhe iti . vāsiṣṭharāmāyaṇe’pi śukropākhyāne śukraṁ mṛtamavalokya tatpitā bhṛguḥ kruddho mārayitāraṁ kālaṁ śapnumudyata tadānīṁ kālo’nugrahītumīdṛśena rūpeṇāvirbabhūveti paṭhyate athākalitarūpo’sau kālaḥ kavalitaprajaḥ . ādhibhautikamāsthāya vapurmunimupāyayau . bahupāśadharaḥ śrīmān kuṇḍalī kavacānvitaḥ . ṛtuṣaṭkamayodāravaktraṣaṭkasamanvitaḥ . māsadvādaśakoddāsabhujadvādaśakodbhaṭaḥ . svākārasamayā bahvyā vṛtaḥ kiṅkarasenaya . sa upetya praṇamyādau kupitaṁ taṁ mahāmunim . kalpakṣubdhāvdhigambhīraṁ sāntvapūrvamuvāca h . tvamatyantatapā vipra! vayaṁ niyatiprālakā tena saṁpūjyase pūjya . sādho! netaravīkṣayā . mā tapaḥ kṣapayā’buddha! kalpakālamahānalaiḥ . yo na dagdho’smi me tasya kiṁ tvaṁ śapena dhakṣyasi? . saṁsārāvalayo grastā nigīrṇārudrakoṭayaḥ . bhuktāni viṣṇuvṛndāni kena śaptā vayaṁ mune! . bhoktāro hivayaṁ brahman bhojanaṁ yuṣmadādayaḥ . svayaṁ niyatireṣā hi nāvayoretadokṣitamiti . na ca bhaktānujighṛkṣayā svekṛtā mūrtirīdṛśyeveti kaścinniyamosti sarvātmakasya parameśvarasya bhaktacittapriyāyāḥ sarvasyā api mūrte svakīyatvāt ataeva bhagavadgītāyām yo yo yāṁ yāṁ tanu bhaktaḥ śraddhayārcitumicchati . tasya tasyācalāṁ śraddhāṁ tāmeva vidadhāmyaham . sa tayā śraddhayā yuktastasyā rādhanamīhate . labhate ca tataḥ kāmān mayaiva vihitān hitāniti . viṣṇurudrādivat acetanamūrtayo’pi tattatphalaviśaṣārthibhirośvaratvenopāsyāḥ . tadetadṛgvede samāmnāyate . etaṁ hyeva bahvyaca mahatyukthe mīmāṁsa ntaetamagnāvadhvaryava, etaṁ mahāvratecchandogā, etamasyām (pṛthivyām) etaṁ divyetaṁ vāyāvetamākāśa etamoṣadhīṣvetaṁ vanaspatiṣvetaṁ chandasyetaṁ nakṣatreṣvetaṁ sarveṣu bhūteṣviti vājasaneyino’pi maṇḍalabrāhmaṇe tametamagnimadhvaryava upāsata ityāramya paṭhanti viṣamiti sarpāḥ, sarpa iti sarpavidaḥ, urgiti devaḥ, rayiriti manuṣyāḥ, māyetyamurāḥ, svadheti pitaro, devajana iti devajanavido rūpamiti gandharvā, gandhaityapsarasastaṁ yathāyathopāsate tadeva bhavatīti . taittirīyāśca paṭhanti kṣema iti vāci, yogakṣemam iti prāṇāpānayorityādi . parabrahmaṇyāropitaṁ yadyāvajjagadrūpam asti tena sarveṇaḥpyupāsanayā parameśvaro rūpavānbhavatītihiraṇmayādhikaraṇatejomayādhikaraṇayoḥ prapañcitam . evaṁ ca sati yo yadā yatkarmārabhate sa tadā tatkarmopayuktāṁ kālātmakasyeścarasya mūrtimiṣṭadevaṁtārūpeṇānusmaret . ata eva mantraśāstreṣu nānāvidhāni dhyānānyupadiṣṭāni . loke’pyāvidvadāgopālāṅganaṁ sarvo’pi jana ekaikāṁ devatāṁ svecchayā pūjayati tadetadbhagavānāha yajante sātvikādevān yakṣarakṣāṁsi rājasāḥ pretān bhūtagaṇāṁścānthe yajante tāmasā janāḥ iti tasma dārabhyamāṇakarmaphalapradonijeṣṭadevatārūponityaḥ kālaḥ karmārambheṣu anusmartavya iti siddham . atha janyaṁ kālaṁ nirūpayāmaḥ . nanu kālasya janyatve sati kathaṁ pralaye kālavyavahāraḥ . pralayatvasya janyānadhikaraṇatvarūpatvāt . pralayo’tītaḥ pralayobhāvīti kālanityatvavādinastavāpi samodoṣaḥ . nityasya kālasya tapanaparisyandādyupādhibhiḥ paricchede satyetāvān kāla iti kāleyattā varṇayitavyā . na ca pralaye tadupādhayaḥ santi . atastava kathaṁ pralayakāle iyattānirṇayaḥ . atha satkāryavādābhyupagamenopādhayo’pi vāsanā rūpeṇa santi tarhi kāle’pi tatsamānaṁ, na caitāvatā nityatāprāptiḥ upādhiṣu tadanaṅgīkarāt . atha manyase iyattārahite’pi pralayakāle sṛṣṭikāleyattāvāsanāvaśādiyattā vyavahriyate . tatropādhyāyatvādirdṛṣṭāntaḥ . yathā kaścinmāṇavakaḥ triṁśadvarṣavayaskādadhyetumupakramya saṁvatsaramadhītyāsmadupādhyāya ekatriṁśadvarṣavayaska ityadhyayanarahite’pyatote vayasyvapādhyāyatvaṁ vyavaharati . tadvadiyattāvyavahāraḥ . evaṁ tarhyanena nyāyena kālarahitapralaye kālavyavahāraḥ kiṁ na syāt? . kālarahitaṁ ca pralayādikaṁ vastvastoti māṇḍūkyādiśrutayo’bhyupra gacchanti . tathā ca śrūyate, yaccānyattrikālātītaṁ tadapyoṅkāra eveti . prābhākarāścāpūrvasya kālatrayāsaṁsṛṣṭāṅkāñcidavasthābhāhuḥ . tasmātkālaḥ sukhena janyatāṁ sa ca sāmānyaviśeṣābhyāndvividhaḥ . tasya cobhayavidhasyeśvarākhyānnityātkālādutpattiṁ manurāha kālaṁ kālavibhaktiñca nakṣatrāṇi grahāṁstathā . sṛṣṭiṁ sasarja caivemāṁ sraṣṭumicchannimāḥ prajāḥ iti . tatra yaḥ sāmānyakālaḥ sa viśeṣānugatatvāttadapekṣayā nityograhagatyādibhiranumeyo bhūtotpattinimittakāraṇamiti tārkikajyautiṣikādayaḥ pratipedire . tatra jyautiṣikā evamāhuḥ prabhavaviratibhadhyajñānabandhyā nitāntaṁ viditaparamatattvā yatra te yogino’pi . tamahamiha nimittaṁ viśvajanmātyayānāmanumitamabhivande bhagrahaiḥ kālamīśam . yugavarṣamāsadivasāḥ samaṁ pravṛttāstu caitraśuklādeḥ . kālo’yamanādyanto graharbharanumīyate kṣetra iti kālaviśeṣeṣu ca saṁvatsaraḥ prādhānabhūtaḥ . anye sarve guṇabhūtāḥ . tathācāruṇaketuke samāmnāyate nada va prabhavā kācidakṣayyā syandate yathā . tāṁ nadyobhisamāyanti saha, sā na nivartate . evaṁ nānāsamutthānāḥ kālāḥ saṁvatsaraṁ śritāḥ . aṇuśaśca mahāntaścasarvesamavayanti tam . sa taiḥ sarvaiḥ samāviṣṭa ūhaḥ sanna nivartate iti . ayamarthaḥ . bhāgīrathīgodāvaryādikā nadīva kālaḥ kutaścidutpattisthānādutpadyate . taccotpattisthānaṁ sāṁkhyoktaṁ prakṛtiḥ śivāgamoktamāyā vā śrutismṛtyuditā nityakālātmaka īśvaro vā bhaviṣyati . yathā tāṁ gaṅgādikāṁ mahānadī manyāṁ svalpanadyo’bhitaḥ praviśanti sā ca praviṣṭairnadyantaraiḥ saha vistīrṇā pravahatpravāhā satī na kadācit śuṣyati . evaṁ nānāvidharūpaiḥ samutpannāḥ kālabhedāḥ saṁvatsarākhyaṁ pradhānaṁ kālamāśritāḥ . tatra nimeṣādyā ayanaparyantāḥ kālabhedāḥ saṁsatsarādaṇavo, yugādyāḥ parārdhaparyantāḥ saṁvatsarānmahāntaste sarve taṁ saṁvatsaraṁ samyak praviśanti . aṇū nāmavayavatvena praveśaḥ . mahatāntu saṁvatsarāvṛttiniṣpādyānāmadhyakṣaḥ saṁvatsaraiti tatra praveśo’bhidhīyate . tathāca yedāṅgajyotiṣagranthe paṭhyate pañcasaṁyatsaramayaṁ yugādhyakṣaṁ prajāpatim . dinartvayanamāsāṅga praṇamya śirasā sthita iti . sa ca saṁvatsarasteraṇubhirmahadbhiśca sarvaiḥ samāviṣṭo’tidīrghaḥ sannasmin jagati ta cchidyata iti . nanvaṇutvaṁ nimeṣe paryavasitaṁ mahattvotu parārdhe tathā ca tayoranyatarasya prādhānyamucitam . tatra kathaṁ saṁvatsarasya prādhānyam? iti cet īśvareṇa prathamaṁ sṛṣṭatvāditi brūmaḥ . tathā ca vājasaneyinaḥ samāmananti so’kāmayata dvitīyoma ātmājāyeteti sa manasā vācā mithunaṁ samabhavadyattadreta āsīt sa saṁvatsaro’bhavaditi . tasmātsaṁvatsaraḥ pradhānam, ataeva vayaṁ saṁvatsarabhāramya kālaviśeṣaṁ nirṇayāmaḥ . tatra saṁvatsaro’yanamṛturmāsaḥ pakṣaḥ tithirnakṣatraṁ yoga ityevaṁ vidhāḥ karmakālāḥ . yadyapi purāṇaṣu mṛtyumārkaṇḍeyādīnāṁ yugādikalpādiparimitaṁ tapaḥ smaryate tathāpi śatasaṁvatsarāyuṣo manuṣyānadhikṛtya dharmaśāstrapravṛtteḥ yugādinirṇayonoyayuktaḥ . śāstrāṇāṁ manuṣyādhikāratvaṁ cāsmābhiḥ pārāśarasmṛtivyākhyāne manuṣyāṇāṁ hitaṁ dharmam ityasminvacane prapañcitam . yetu kalau pañca vivarjayet ityādayomanuṣyadharmāsteṣvapi na yugādikaṁ nirṇetavya saṁdehābhāvāt . na ca śatāyuṣāmadhikāre kathaṁ sahasrasaṁvatsarasatraśrutiriti śaṅkanīyam tatra saṁvatsaraśabdodivasapara iti ṣaṣṭhādhyāye sapnamapādenirṇītatvāt . ye’pi caturdaśasavatsarāvṛttisādhyā anantavratādayasteṣvapi na saṁvatsarādhikaḥ kaścitkālo nirṇetavyo’sti . ataḥ saṁvatsaramārabhyāvāṁñca eva nirṇetavyāḥ karmāṅakālāḥ . na ca kālasya karmāṅgatve vivaditavyam sāyaṁ buhoti prātarjahotītiḥ śruteḥ tattatkarmaṇastāvadapūrvaviṣayatvāt (apūrvajanakatvāt, prādhānyamabhyugamya tathā ca kālasya guṇatvenānvayaḥ pariśiṣyate ataeva gargaḥ tithinakṣatravārādi sādhanaṁ puṇyapāpayoḥ . pradhānaguṇabhāvena svātasthyeṇa na te kṣamāḥ iti . tasmādaṅgabhūteṣa nirṇeyeṣa kāleṣvavayavitvena saṁvatsarasyābhyarhitatvādalpavaktavyatayā sūcīkaṭāhanyāyānusāreṇa ca saeva ādau nirṇīyataitisthitam . sū° si° raṅga° kālavibhāgaścetthaṁ pradarśitaḥ lokānāmamakṛtkālaḥ kālo’nyaḥ kalanātmakaḥ . sa dvidhā sthūlasūkṣmatvānmūrtaścāmūrta ucyate sū° si° . kālo dvidhā tatraikaḥ kālo’khaṇḍadaṇḍāyamānaḥ śāstrāntarapramāṇasiddhaḥ . lokānāṁ jīvānāmupalakṣaṇādacetanānāmapi . antakṛdvināśakaḥ . yadyapi kālasteṣāmutpattisthitikārakastathāpi vināśasyānantatvāt kālatvapratipādanāya cāntakṛdityuktam . antakṛdityanenaivotpattisthitikṛdityaktamanyathā nāśakatvāsambhavāt . ataeva kālaḥ sṛjati bhūtāni kālaḥ saṁharati prajāḥ ityādyuktaṁ granthāntare . anyo dvitīyaḥ kālaḥ khaṇḍakālaḥ . kalanātmako jñānaviṣayasvarūpaḥ . jñātuṁśakyaityarthaḥ . sa dvitīyaḥ kalanātmakaḥ kālo’pi dvidhā bhedadvayātmakaḥ . tadāha sthūlasūkṣmatvāditi mahattvāṇutvābhyām . mūrtaḥ–iyattāvacchinnaparimāṇaḥ . amūrtastadbhinnaḥ kālatattva vidbhiḥ kathyate . cakāro hetukrameṇa mūrtāmūrtakramārthakaḥ . tena mahān mūrtakālo’ṇṛramūrtaḥ kāla ityarthaḥ . athoktaṁ bhedadvayaṁ svarūpeṇa pradarśayan prathamabhedaṁ pratipipādayiṣustadavāntarabhedeṣu bhedadvayamāha raṅganāthaḥ . prāṇādiḥ kathito mūrtastruṭyādyo’mūrtasañjñakaḥ . ṣaḍabhiḥ prāṇairvināḍī syāt tatṣaṣṭhyā nāḍikā smṛtā sū° si° . prāṇaḥ svasthasukhāsīnasya śvāsocchāsāntarvartī kālo daśagurvakṣaroccāryamāṇa ādiryasyaitādṛśaḥ prāṇanāntargato mūrtaḥ kāla uktaḥ . truṭirādyā yasyaitādṛśaḥ kāla eva prāṇāntargatastraṭitatparādiko’mūrtasañjñaḥ . athāmūrtasya mūrtādibhūtasya vyadhahārāyogyatvenāpradhānatayānantaroddiṣṭasya bheda pratipādanamupekṣya mūrtakālasya vyavahārayogyatvena pradhānatayā prathamoddiṣṭabhedān vivakṣuḥ prathamaṁ palaghaṭyāvāha . ṣaḍbhiriti . ṣaḍabhiḥprāṇairasubhiḥ pānīyapalaṁ bhavati palānāṁ ṣaṣṭhyā caṭikoktā kālatattvajñaiḥ . atha dinamāsādikamāha raṅga° . nāḍīṣaṣṭyā tu nākṣatramahorātraṁ prakīrtitam . tattriṁśatā bhavenmāsaḥ sāvano’rkodayaignathā . aindavastithibhistadvat saṅkrāntyā saura ucyate . māsairdvādaśabhirvarṣaṁ divyaṁ tadaharucyate . surāsurāṇāmanyo’nyamahorātraṁ viparyavāt . tatṣaṣṭiḥ ṣaḍguṇā 360 divyaṁ varṣamāsurameśa ca . taddvādaśa sahasrāṇi caturyugamudāhṛttam . sūryābdasaṅkhyayā dvitrisāgarairayutāhataiḥ 4320000 . sandhyāsandhyāṁśasahitaṁ vijñeyaṁ taccaturyugam . kṛtādīnāṁ vyavastheyaṁ dharmapādavyavasthāyā . yugasya daśamo bhāgaścatustridvyekasaṅguṇaḥ . kramāt kṛtayugādīnāṁ, ṣaṣṭhāṁśāḥ sandhayaḥ svakāḥ . yugānāṁ saptatiḥ saikā manvantaramihocyate . kṛtābdasaṅkhya 1728000 stasthānte sandhiḥ proktojalaplavaḥ . sasandhayaste manavaḥ kalpe jñenyāścaturdaśa . kṛtapramāṇaḥ kalpādau sandhiḥ pañcadaśaḥ smṛtaḥ . ityaṁ yugasahasreṇa bhūtasahārakārakaḥ . kalpo brāhmamahaḥ proktaṁ śarvarī tasya tāvatī . paramāyuḥ śataṁ tasya tayā’horātnasaṅkhyayā . āyuṣordhamitaṁ tasya śeṣe kalpoyamādimaḥ sū° si° . aharādikālabhedāḥ (ahan) śabde uktāḥ . si° śi° tu nimeṣatatparatruṭirūpāḥ sūkṣmāḥ kālāvayavāḥ darśitāḥ tasya vākyaṁ 1788 pṛ° darśitam . sa ca kālastrividhaḥ vartamānabhūtabhaviṣyadbhedāt tatra bhūtabhaviṣyat kālāvapi pratyekaṁ dvidhā adyatanānadyatanabhedāt tadbhedenaiva lakāraviśeṣaṁ pāṇiniranuśaśāsa . so’yaṁ kālaḥ ṣaḍindriyavedyaḥ iti mīmāṁsakā manyante na so’sti pratyayoloke yatra kālo na bhāsate iti teṣāmukteḥ . vedāntinastu tasya sākṣipratyayabhāsyatvamaṅgīcakruḥ tatra pramāṇaṁ kālamā° anupadameva darśitam . so’yaṁ kālaḥ deśavṛttaravyāpyavṛttitāniyāmakaḥ . tathāhi yaḥ padārthaḥ svādhikaraṇavṛttyabhāvapratiyogī so’vyāpyavṛttiriti bhaṇyate tattānirvāhakaśca kālodeśaśca . kvaciddeśe sthitasya tādṛśapadārthasya kālabhedena tatraivādhikaraṇe’bhāvastiṣṭhati yathā jñānāśraye ātmani suṣuptikāle icchādiviśeṣaguṇāntarakāle ca jñānābhāvaḥ . yathā vā guṇavati janyadravye utpattikāle guṇābhāvaḥ śyāmale apakve ghaṭe raktatvābhāvaḥ raktatvasya pākīttaraṁ jāyamānatvāt . kālasattva ca deśo’pi tathā . yathā ātmani jñānakāle śarārāvacchedena jñānaṁ, ghaṭādyavacchedena tadabhāvaḥ . tathā vṛrkṣa kapisaṁyogakāle’pi mūle tadabhāvaḥ . kālena kṛtasambandhaśca kālikasambandhaḥ tena sambandhena sarveṣu janyabhāveṣu janyabhāvānāṁ vṛttimattā nityeṣu gu kālikasambandhena na kasyāpi sattvam nityānuyogikakālikatambanyānupagamāt iti naiyāyikāḥ . tasya ca pauruṣaṁ daivasampāyā kāle phalati pārthiva! . trayametanmanuvyasya piṇḍitaṁ syāt phalāvaham ityukteḥ kāryamātre nimittakāraṇatā . yadyapi kṛṣervṛṣṭisamāyoge dṛśyante phalasiddhayaḥ . tāstu kāle pradṛśyante naivākāle kathañcaneti śāstrāntareṇa tattatkālānāmeva yattatkāryotpattau hetutā ‘dhigatā tathāpi yadviśeṣayoḥ kāryakāraṇabhāvastatsāmānyayorapīti nyāyāt sāmānyataḥ kāryamātraṁ prati kālasāmānyasya hetutvam . kālaḥ krīḍati gacchatyāyustadapi na muñcatyāśāvāyuḥ mohamu° . kāle bhavaḥ ṭhañ . kālika kālabhave tri° samāsapratyayabidhau pratiṣedho vaktavyaḥ bā° ukteḥ tadantavidhiparibhāṣāyāḥ apravṛtteḥ kālāntaśabdānnāsya pravṛttiḥ tena tadanta śabdāt khaeva sādhuḥ samānakānīnaḥ prākkālīna ityādi bhūriprayogāt . si° kau° samānakālonaprākkālonaśabdayoraprāmāṇikatoktiḥ prauḍhoktireva udāhṛtavārtikasya jāgarūkatvāt iti gauḍāāhuḥ . pratīcyāstu kaumudīkāraśraddhāvaśāt ṭhañvidhāyakasūte kālasāmānyatadviśeṣaparyāyāṇāṁ grahaṇāt samānakālaprākkālayorapi kālaviśeṣatvena tataḥ ṭhañeva pravṛttirna khasyeti bhāṣyādiprayogastu ārṣatvāt samādheyaḥ iti manyante . kālena nirvṛttaḥ ṭhañ kālika kālasādhye tri° striyāṁ ṅīp . kartustātkālikī śuddhiriti smṛtiḥ tatra tatkālaśabdasyaiva ṭhañaḥ prakṛtitvāt tena na pūrvoktavārtikasaṅkocaḥ ataeva tatra tacchabdasyaivādyacovṛddhiḥ tena nivṛttamityadhikārāt prakṛtimātrasyaiva grahaṇāt na kālatvena tatraprakṛtitā . kāle sādhuḥ puṣyan pacyamāno vā aṇ . kāla–kāle sādhau kāle yikaśa māne kāle pacyamāne ca tri° . atra sūtre kālaviśeṣasyaiva grahaṇaṁ na svarūpasya tena na tato’ṇ ityanye . kālaḥ prāpto’sya yat . kālya prāptakāle śītādau tri° kālodevatā’sya kālebhyobhavavat pā° ṭhañ . kālika kāla devatāke havirādau striyāṁ ṅīp . 15 tattatkarmocitakāle varamekāhutiḥ kāle nākāle lakṣakoṭayaḥ tri° ta° . akāle’pyatha vā kāle gaṅgāṁ prāpya saridvarām prā° ta° . kāle kālakṛto naśyet phalabhogyo na naśyati yā° smṛ° . ardhayāmaśabde 376 pṛ° darśite ravyādivāreṣu kālavelākhye 16 divāniśorardhayāmabhede yātrāyāṁ maraṇaṁ kāle vaidhavyaṁ pāṇipīḍane . brate brahmabadhaḥ proktaḥ sarvaṁ karma tatastajet jyo° ta° tasya sarvakarmasu varjyatāmāha 17 sāṁkhyīkte meghāsvye vivekasākṣātakārāntarāye tuṣṭibhede yathā ādhyātmikyaścatasraḥ prakṛtyupādānakālabhāgyākhyāḥ . bāhyāviṣayoparamāt pañca, nava tuṣṭayobhavanti sā° kā0 yā tu pravrajyāpi na sadyonirvāṇadeti saiva kālaparipākamapekṣya siddhinte vidhāsyati alamuttaptatayā tavetyapadeśe yā tuṣṭiḥ sā kālākhyā megha (1) ucyate kau° . vivṛtañjaitadasmābhiḥ . pravrajyāmātrasya vivekakhyātihetutve prabrajyāgrahaṇamātreṇa vivekakhyātyāpattirūpam upadeśe asattavaprayojakaṁ dūṣaṇam sahakāryantarāpekṣākalpanāt pariharannupadeśāntaraṁ darśayati na sadyo nirvāṇadeti . sadyaḥ, grahaṇamātrāt na tu kālarūpasahakāryantarāpekṣaṇāta na nirvāṇadā vivekakhyātijananadvārā na muktidetyarthaḥ . tathā ca kṛṣervṛṣṭisamāyoge vṛśyante phalasiddhayaḥ . tāstu kāle pradṛśyante naivākāle kathañcana iti śāstreṇa kāryamātraṁ prati kālasya sahakāritāyā anvayavyatirekābhyāṁ ca prasiddhatvāt kālasyaiva taddhetutvamastu kṛtaṁ dhyānābhyasādineti samuditārthaḥ . kālasyasādhanatāsādhakaśāstreṇa kṛṣyādeḥ pradhāna phalahetutvaṁ tatra kālasya sahakāritāmātraṁ pratipāditaṁ na tu tanmātrasya hetutvamevañca kālasya sādhāraṇakāraṇatvam asādhāraṇakāraṇatvantu kṛṣyādereva evañca prakṛte’pi vivekakhyātiṁ prati dhyānābhyāsāderevārādpakārakatvāt asādhāraṇahetutvaṁ, kālasya sādhāraṇahetutvamityasyāsadudhadeśatva miti bodhyam iti . varsavācikālaśabdasya striyāṁ janapadā° ni° ṅīṣ . kālī kākālī kāmadhurā kāśītalavāhino gaṅgā . bidagdha mu° samānapraśnottaram . 18 hiṁsake tri° tataḥ striyāṁ na ṅīṣ . kālāt vaṇṇaścet vārtikokteḥ . kālānyā si° kau° . kālasyeyam aṇ ṅīp kālasya patnī ṅīṣ vā . kālī kālaśaktau śivakāntāyāñca strī . adhikaṁ kālīśabde vakṣyate . 19 mṛtyau medi° sarvasyāgrahaṇānāttasya tathātvam . aśumāṁśca tapastepe gaṅgānayanakāmyayā . kālaṁ mahāntaṁ nāśaknīt tataḥ kālena saṁsthitaḥ . dilīpastatsutastadbadaśaktaḥ kālameyikān bhāga° 9 9 2 3 1 kālaṁ mṛtyum śrīdharaḥ . varṇavācakāt tasya bhāva ityarthe imanic kāliman pu° tal kālatā strī, tva kālatva na° . kṛṣṇavarṇe . tatra yame upetya muniveśo’tha kālaḥ provāca rāghavam raghuḥ . yamaparatve 20 dvitvasaṁkhyāyāṁ 21 tatsaṁkhyānvite ca bharaṇyāyamadaivatatvāt tasyāśca aśvinyādinakṣatracakre dvitīyatvāt lakṣitalakṣaṇayā tatparatvam . śivaparatve 22 ṣaṭsaṁkhyāyāṁ 23 tadanvate ca śivadaivatārdrāyā aśvinyādiṣu ṣaṣṭhatvāduktarītyā tathātvam . ṛṇidhanicakraśabde 1428 pṛ° darśitaṁ ṣaṭkālakāletyādi vākyam udā° kālasya velā ravitaḥ śarākṣikālānalāgāmbudhayo gajendū jyo° ta° . candrādigrahāṇāṁ dṛṣṭiyogyatāprāpakakālātmake 24 aṁśabhede ca . sa ca si° śi° darśito yathā dasrendavaḥ 12 śaulabhuvaśca 17 śakrā 14 rudrāḥ 11 khacandrā 10 stithayaḥ 15 krameṇa . candrāditaḥ kālalavā niruktāḥ jñaśukrayorvakragayordvihīnāḥ si° śi° . candrādīnāmene 12 . 17 . 14 . 11 10 . 15 . kālāṁśā jñeyāḥ . budhaśukrayostu vakragatayordvihīnā 12 . 8 dvivarjitā jñeyāḥ . atropapattiḥ . kālāṁśā iti kālātmakā aṁśāḥ ṣaḍbhira śairekā ghaṭikā . ekasyāṁśasya daśa pānīyapalāni . atraitaduktaṁ bhavati . candrasya kila dvādaśa 12 kālāṁśāḥ . arkasyāstamayādudayādvā ghaṭikādvayādhike’ntare candro dṛṣṭiyogyo bhavati . tadūne tatprabhācchāditatvādadṛśyaḥ . atastasya dvādaśa kālāṁśāḥ . evaṁ bhaumasya saptadaśa 17 ṣaḍaṁśonāstisro ghaṭikāḥ 2 . 50 ityarthaḥ . ebamanyeṣāṁ yathāpaṭhitāsteṣāṁ vimbasya sthūlasūkṣmatāvaśāt nyūnādhikatā . ata eva budhaśukrayorvakragatayorvimbasya sthūlatvāddvihīnāḥ . atropalabdhireva vāsanā prami0 yatrodayo vāstamayo’vagamyastaddigbhavo dṛkkhacaro raviśca . astodayāsannadine kadācit sādhyastu paścāt taraṇiḥ saṣaḍbhaḥ si° śi° . iha kendrabhāgairgrahasyodayo’stamayo vā yasmin dina āyātastasyāsanne kasmiṁściddine taṁ grahaṁ raviṁ ca sphuṭaṁ kṛtvā yasyāṁ diśi grahodayo’stamayo vā taddigbhavo dṛggrahaḥ kāryaḥ . yadi prācyāṁ tadaudayikaṁ grahaṁ kṛtvodayalagnaṁ sādhyam . yadi ca pratīcyāṁ tadāstamayikaṁ grahaṁ kṛtvāstalagnaṁ sādhyamityarthaḥ . yadā pratīcyāṁ, tadāraviḥ saṣaḍbhaśca kāryaḥ . idānīmiṣṭakālāṁśānayanamāha prami° . dṛkkhecarārkāntarajātanāḍyo rasāhatāḥ kālalavāḥ syuriṣṭāḥ si° śi° . dṛggrahārkayorantaraghaṭikāḥ sādhyāstā rasa 6 hatā iṣṭāḥ kālāṁśā bhavanti . atha tairudayāstayorgataiṣyāḥ nāḍyaḥ prami° . uktebhya ūnābhyadhikā yadīṣṭāḥ kheṭodayo gamyagatastadā syāt . ato’nyathā vā’stamayo’vagamyaḥ prokteṣṭakālāṁśaviyogaliptāḥ . khābhrāṣṭabhū 1800 ghnādyucarodayāptāḥ kheṭārkabhukyantarabhājitāśca . vakre tu bhuktyaikyahṛtā avāptāstadantarāle divasā gataiṣyāḥ . tātkālikābhyāṁ ravidṛggrahābhyāṁ muhuḥ kṛtāste sphuṭatāṁ prayānti si° śi° . evaṁ ya iṣṭakālāṁśā ānītāste proktebhyo yadi svalpā bhavanti tadā grahasyodayo gamyaḥ . yadyadhikāstadā gata iti veditavyam . ato’nyathāstamaya iti . atha proktāuktebhyoyadīṣṭāḥ svalpāstadā grahasyāstamayogatoyadyadhikastadā gamya iti . atha proktānāmiṣṭakālāṁśānāṁ ca yā antare kalāstā aṣṭādaśaśatai 1800 rguṇyā dṛggrahākrāntasya rāśeḥ svadeśodayāsubhirbhājyāḥ . phalakalānāṁ grahārkabhuktyantareṇa vakrage grahe bhuktiyogena bhāge gṛhīte yallabdhaṁ te gatā eṣyā vādivasā bhavantyudaye vāstamaye vā . tairdivasaistātkālikau dṛggrahārkau kṛtvaivamasakṛtkarmaṇā samyak tatkālajñānaṁ bhavati . atropapattiḥ . iṣṭakālāṁśasādhane lagnavāsanaiva . proktānāṁ kālāṁśānāmanantarvartī graho dṛśyo bhavati . ato yāvadiṣṭā nyūnāstāvadadṛśyaḥ . udaye vilokyamāne udeṣyati . aste bilokyamāne’staṁ gata ityarthājjñāyate . iṣṭā yadyadhikāstadā proktebhyo vilokyamāne’staṁgate bahirbhūtādgraho’dṛśya udaye vilokyamāna uditaḥ astaṁ yāsyatītyarthājjñāyate . atha teṣāṁ prokteṣṭānāṁ kālāṁśānāṁ ca yā antare kalāstāsāṁ kṣetraliptīnāṁ karaṇāyānupātaḥ . yāvatyaḥ kālakalāstāvanta evāsavo bhavanti . atha yadi dṛggrahodayāsubhiraṣṭādaśaśatāni 1800 kṣetraliptā labhyante tadā tadantarakalāsubhiḥ kimiti . phalaṁ kṣaitraliptāḥ . tā grahārkabhuktyantareṇa bhājyāḥ . bhuktyantaraṁ hi kṣetraliptāntarātmakamataḥ sajātīyakaraṇāya kṣetraliptīkaraṇam . bhuktyantareṇaiko divaso labhyata iti yuktamuktam . vakre tu bhuktiyoga eva bhuktyantaram . dūrāntare sthūlakālo bhavatītyasakṛtkarma sūkṣmārtham . atra viśeṣamāha . prami0 prāgdṛggarhaścedadhiko raveḥ syādūno’tha vā paścimadṛggrahaśca . prokteṣṭakālāṁśayuteḥ kalābhiḥ sādhyastadānīṁ divasāgataiṣyāḥ . tathā yadīṣṭakālāṁśāḥ proktebhyo’bhyadhikāstadā . vyatyayaścagataiṣyatve jñeyo’hnāṁ sudhiyā khalu si° śi0 yadi prāgdṛggraho raveradhiko bhavati . atha vā paścimadṛggraho nyūno bhavati tadāye iṣṭakālāṁśā ānītāsteṣāṁ proktānāṁ ca yogakalābhirdivasāḥ sādhyāḥ . nāntarakalābhiḥ tathā prāgdṛggrahe’rkādadhike sati paścāddṛggrahe vā nyūne ya iṣṭakālāṁśā āgatāste ca yadi proktebhyo’dhikāntarāḥ tadā prokteṣṭakālāṁśayuteḥ kalābhirye divasāḥ sādhitāsteṣāṁ divasānāṁ gataiṣyatve viparyayojñeyaḥ . atropapattiḥ . yo grahaḥprācyāmudeti pratitiṣṭhati vā asau raverūnaḥ san praścimāyām adhikaḥ san prācyāṁ diśi proktakālāṁśairūnaḥ san dṛśyatāmeti . tāvadbhireva paścimā yāmadhikaḥsan . ato raveḥ pṛṣṭhataḥ prācyāṁ proktakālāṁśāḥ pratīcyāmagrataḥ . prācyāmūne grahe ya iṣṭakālāṁśāḥ sādhyante te raveḥ pṛṣṭhataḥ . ataḥ pṛṣṭhagataireva proktakālāṁśaisteṣāmantaraṁ kartuṁ yujyate . atha prācyāṁ raveradhike dṛggrahe ya iṣṭakālāṁśāḥ sādhyante te raveragrato bhavanti . ato’gragatānāṁ pṛṣṭhagatānāñca kālāṁśānāṁ yoge kṛtesatyantaraṁ kṛtaṁ bhavati tathā uktebhya ūnābhyadhikā yadīṣṭā iti yadgatagamyalakṣaṇamuktaṁ tat sajātīyānāmeva . yadā punareke pṛṣṭhagatā eke’gragatāstadā tadgatagamyalakṣaṇaṁ vyatyayena bhavati . ata uktaṁ vyatyayaśca gataiṣyatva ityādi . atra sudhiyeti viśeṣaṇādubuddhimataidadanuktamapi jñāyate prami° . vyavahāre vādiprativādinoḥ pratijñātārthasāghanāya rājñādeye 25 avasararūpe samayabhede ca tatkālaviśeṣaḥ smṛtau darśito yathā pratyarthī labhate kālaṁ tryahaṁ saptāhameva ca . arthī tu prārthayan kālaṁ tatkṣaṇādeva hīyate . pratyarthino’pi kvacidviṣayena kālo deyaḥ kvaciccārthipratyarthinoricchayā kālodeyaḥ yathāha yājña° sāhasasteyapāruṣyago’bhiśāpātyaye striyām . vivādayet sadyaeva kālo’nyatrecchayā smṛtaḥ . samayarūpakālasya vaiśeṣikamate saṁyogavibhāgapṛthaktvasaṁkhyāparimāṇarūpā pañca guṇāḥ . bhīmo bhīmasenavat uttarapadalopaḥ . kāladaṇḍarūpe 26 yoge kāladaṇḍaśabde udā° . vāraviśeṣe digbhedena jyotiṣokte yātrādau niṣiddhe 27 yogabhede . sa ca yogaḥ mu° ci° uktaḥ . kauverīto vaiparītyena kālo’rkādye vāre sammukhe tasya pāśaḥ . rātrāvetau vaiparītyena gamyau yātrā yuddhe saṁmukhau varjanīyau . ayamaryaḥ . ravāvuttarasyāṁ kālaḥ, some vāyavyāṁ, bhaume paścimāyām, budhe nairṛtyām, gurau dakṣiṇasyām, śukre āgneyyāṁ, śanau pūrvasyām . ravāvuttarataḥ kālaḥ some vāyavyabhāgake . bhaume tu paścime bhāge budhe nairṛtabhāgake . jīve ca yāmyadigbhāge śukre cāgneyakoṇake . śanau tu pūrvadigbhāge kālacakraṁ prakīrtitam . svarodaye yatrasthastatrakālaḥ syāt pāśastasya tu sammukhaḥ . dakṣiṇasthaḥ śubhaḥ kālaḥ pāśo vāmadigāśrayaḥ . yātrāyāṁ samare śreṣṭhastato’nyatra na śobhavaḥ . rātrau ca vaiparītyena yathā ravau rātrau dakṣiṇasyāṁ kālaḥ uttarasyāṁ pāśa ityādikrameṇetyūhyam . 28 kalāye (maṭara) śimbībhede, vaija° . vikasatkalāyakusumam māghavyā° kālakusumamiti malli° dhruvanāmakavasoḥ 29 putrabhede pu° . dhruvasya putro bhagavān kālo lokaprakālanaḥ harivaṁ° 3 a° . |
गव्य – gavya | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899gavya Nom. P. “-vyati”, to desire cattle or cows ; see “gavyat”.
gavya (or less common “gavya” six times xiii) mfn. ( 5-1, 2 and 39; iv, 3, 160) consisting of cattle or cows, coming from or belonging to a cow (as milk, curds, &c.; cf. “paṇcag-“) &c.; proper or fit for cattle ; sacred to the cow, worshipping the cow 9 ; m. pl. N. of a people (living to the north of Madhya-deśa) ; l. (“ā”) f. a cow-herd ; the measure commonly called Gav-yūti (q.v.) ; see also “gavyā”; fn. a bow-string ; = “gavya- dṛḍha” ; n. cattle, cow-herd (“gavya”); ix, 62, 23; pasture land ; cow- milk gavya &c., Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 gavya a. [gave hitaṁ yat] (1) Consisting of cattle or cows. (2) Coming or got from a cow (as milk, curds &c.). (3) Proper or fit for cattle. (4) Sacred to the cow, worshipping the cow. –vyaṁ (1) Cattle, a herd of cows. (2) Pasture-land. (3) The milk of a cow. (4) A bow-string. (5) Colouring substance, yellow pigment. –vyā (1) A herd of cows. (2) A measure of distance equal to two Krośas. (3) A bow-string. (4) A colouring substance, yellow pigment. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch gavya (von go) 1) adj. “aus Rindern, Kühen bestehend; aus Milch bestehend” P. 5, 1, 2. 39. ūrva ṚV. 1, 72, 8. 3, 32, 16. paśu 5, 61, 5. vraja 1, 131, 3. rādhas 5, 52, 17. 6, 44, 12. maghāni 7, 67, 9. gavyānyaśvyā sahasrā 8, 34, 14. 62, 15. āji 4, 58, 10. vastrāṇi 9, 8, 6. havis MBH. 13, 3321. “von der Kuh (dem Rinde) kommend” P. 4, 3, 160. AK. 2, 9, 50. TRIK. 3, 3, 309. H. 1273. an. 2, 354. MED. j. 16. ghṛta VS. 35, 17. 23, 8. ajina PĀR. GṚHY. 2, 4. kośa MBH. 4, 1337. viṣāṇakoṣa 1, 5370. payas 13, 707. M. 3, 271. SUŚR. 1, 174, 20. dadhi 178, 3. sarpis 180, 15. māṁsa 204, 2. MBH. 8, 2050. 13, 4247. fg. peyūṣa M. 5, 6. pañcagavya n. “die fünf von der Kuh kommenden Dinge; Milch, gekäste Milch, Butter, Urin, Dünger” M. 11, 165. PAÑCAT. III, 119. — “für die Kuh geeignet” TRIK. 3, 3, 309. H. an. MED. “der Kuh geheiligt, die Kuh verehrend” P. 4, 1, 85, Vārtt. 9, Sch. — 2) m. N. pr. eines Volkes im Norden von Madhyadeśa VARĀH. BṚH. S. 14, 28. — 3) n. a) “Rindvieh”: ṣaṣṭiḥ sahasramanu gavyamāgāt ṚV. 1, 126, 3. udīṁ gavyaṁ sṛjate satvabhirdhuniḥ “Kuhheerde” 5, 34, 8. — b) “Weideplatz”: gavyaṁ mīmāṁsamānāḥ pṛcchanti santi tatroṣā3 iti AIT. BR. 4, 28. yatra gavyamabhayaṁ syāt (vgl. urvīṁ gavyūtimabhayaṁ ca naskṛdhi ṚV. öfters) LĀṬY. 10, 17, 4. — c) “Kuhmilch” TRIK. 2, 9, 16. H. ś. 98. KUMĀRAS. 7, 72. — d) “Bogensehne” TRIK. 3, 3, 309. H. an. MED. Nach H. 776 auch gavyā f. — c) “eine Art Färbestoff” (vgl. gavyā unter 2. gavya). H. an. MED. — Vgl. sugavya. gavya (wie eben) 1) adj. “zum Rindergeschlecht gehörig, aus Rindern” oder “Kühen bestehend, vom Rinde” oder “von der Kuh kommend”: caturviṁśatiṁ tvevaitāngavyānālabheta (sc. paśūn) ŚAT. BR. 13, 5, 3, 11. naite sarve paśavo yadajāvayaścāraṇyāścaite vai sarve paśavo yadgavyā iti gavyā (“weibliche Thiere”) uttame ‘hannālabhate 3, 2, 3. ekādaśa prātargavyāḥ paśava ālabhyante TS. 5, 6, 22, 1. vastrā ṚV. 8, 1, 17. rādhāṁsyaśvyā gavyā 5, 79, 7. ete somā abhi gavyā sahasrā (asṛgran) 9, 87, 5. ati śritī tiraścatā gavyā jigātyaṇvyā 14, 6. — 2) f. ā a) “Kuhheerde” P. 4, 2, 50. AK. 2, 9, 60. TRIK. 3, 3, 309. H. 1421. an. 2, 354. MED. j. 16. — b) “ein best. Längenmaass”, = gavyūti oder 2 Krośa H. 888. H. an. — c) “Bogensehne” H. 776. — d) “ein best. Färbestoff” (s. gorocanā) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. gavyadṛḍha dass. VYUTP. 137. — Die erste Bed. vom f. gehört dem Accente nach hierher, ob es auch mit den andern der Fall sei, können wir nicht bestimmen. Da uns der Accent nicht überall leiten konnte, haben wir zur leichteren Uebersicht bei diesem Artikel alle Bedd. des f., bei dem vorhergehenden alle des n. zusammengestellt und diesem auch das m. beigefügt, da gavya nach den Grammatikern einen weitern Umfang hat. Das auf gavy zurückgehende gavyā s. besonders. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 gavya gavya, i. e. go + ya, I. adj., f. yā, 1. Produced by a cow. 2. Consisting of milk. II. n. Milk. — Comp. pañcagavya, i. e. pañcan-, n. the five pure things produced by the cow, Man. 11, 165. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 gavya a. consisting of, belonging to, coming from cows or cattle; f. gavyā desire for cows or milk, ardour of battle; n. gavya cattle, milk, pasture- ground. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 gavya 1. gav-ya, den. desire cattle: only pr. pt. gavyat: desiring cattle; ardently desirous; eager for battle. gavya 2. gav-ya (or -ya), consisting of or relating to cattle; produced by a cow; n. herd of cows; pasture; cow’s milk. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 gavya (ātmano gāmicchati kyac vānto yi pratyaye pā° av) ātmasambandhitvena goricchāyām aka° bhvā° para° seṭ . gavyati agavyīt–agavīt gavyā (vā)m cakāra gaurasi vīra! gavyate ṛ° 6 . 45 . 8 . 26 . gavya tri° gorvikāraḥ gavi bhavaṁ, gorhitaṁ, goridaṁ, vā sarvatra yat yādau av . 1 gosambandhini, gavyasatrake jai° adhikara° bhā° . 2 saratnamarghyaṁ madhumacca gavyam kumā° saṁvatsaraṁ tu gavyena payasā pāyasena vā . śeluṁ gavyañca peyūṣaṁ prayatnena vivarjayet manuḥ . 2 gorhitādau ca . gavi iṣau netre vā sādhu yat . 3 jyāyāṁ 4 rāgadravye ca na° medi° . jyāyāḥ śarakṣepaṇasādhanatvān rāgadravyasya ca netrarāgajanakatvāttathātvam . gervikāre 5 gorocanādravye strī rājani° . tasya gorvikāratvāttathātvam tatra jyāyām śravaṇopāntikanīyamānagavyam māghaḥ . samūhe pāśā° yat . 6 gosamūhe, 7 gavyūtau krośayuge ca strī hemaca° . |
गो – go | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899go “gaus” (acc. “gām” instr. “gavā” dat. “gave”, gen. abl. “gos” loc.
“gavi”; du. “gāvā” [Ved.], “gāvau”; pl. nom. “gāvas” acc. “gās” [rarely “gāvas” ii] instr. “gobhis” dat. abl. “gobhyas”, gen. “gavām” [once at the end of a Pāda at the end of Pādas only cf. “gonām” loc. “goṣu”) m. an ox f. a cow, (pl.) cattle, kine, herd of cattle &c. (in comp. before vowels [cf. “gav, gava”, qq. vv.; cf. also “gavām, gavi, gāṁ” ss.vv.; “gavāṁ vrata” N. of a Sāman; “gavāṁ tīrtha” see “go t-; goṣu-gam”, to set out for a battle [to conquer cows] ; “anything coming from or belonging to an ox or cow”, milk (generally pl.), flesh (only pl. ; “fat” ( x, 27, 22 ; = “go-ṣṭoma” (q.v.) (see also “go-āyus”); (pl.) “the herds of the sky”, the stars ; (m. [also f. rays of light (regarded as the herds of the sky, for which Indra fights with Vṛitra) 2943 &c.; m. the sign Taurus xl f. ; the sun (cf. “-putra”) ; the moon ; a kind of medicinal plant (“ṛṣabha”) ; a singer, praiser (fr. “gai”) ; “a goer”, horse (fr. 1. “gā”) on ; N. of two ṛiṣis of the (with the patr. āṅgirasa [ xvi] and Māyūka); N. of a man (who with Pushkara is said to be the “balādhyakṣa” of the sons and grandsons of Varuṇa) (cf. ; m. or f. (?) the sun’s ray called Suṣumṇa ; water f. pl., xi, 7, 50); an organ of sense ; the eye 70; a billion ; mf. the sky ; the thunderbolt on ; the hairs of the body ; f. an offering in the shape of a cow (= “dhenu” q.v.) ; a region of the sky ; ( i, 1) the earth (as the milk-cow of kings) &c.; (hence) the number “nine” ; = “go-vīthī” on ; a mother (cf. ; ( i, 11) speech, Sarasvatī (goddess of speech) ; voice, note (fr. “gai”) ; N. of Gaurī ; of the wife [or of a daughter-in-law of śuka (a daughter of the manes called Sukālas) 986 ; N. of a daughter of Kakut-stha and wife of Yayāti ; ([cf. [characters]; Lat. ‘bos’; Old Germ. ‘chuo’; Mod. Germ. ‘Kuh’; Eng. ‘cow’; Lett. ‘gohw’; cf. also [characters]; Goth. ‘gavi’ and Mod. Germ. ‘Gau’.]) Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 go m. f. (Nom. gauḥ) [gacchatyanena, gam karaṇe ḍo Tv.] (1) Cattle, kine (pl.). (2) Anything coming from a cow; such as milk, flesh, leather &c. (3) The stars. (4) The sky. (5) The thunder-bolt of Indra. (6) A ray of light. (7) A diamond. (8) Heaven. (9) An arrow. –f. (1) A cow; jugopa gorūpadharāmivorvī R. 2. 3; kṣīriṇyaḥ saṁtu gāvaḥ Mk. 10. 60. (2) The earth; dudoha gāṁ sa yajñāya R. 1. 26; gāmāttasārāṁ raghurapyavekṣya 5. 26, 11. 36; Bg. 15. 13; seko’nugṛhṇātu gāṁ Mu. 3. 2; Me. 30. (3) Speech, words; raghorudārāmapi gāṁ niśamya R. 5. 12, 2. 59; Ki. 4. 20. (4) The goddess of speech, Sarasvatī. (5) A mother. (6) A quarter of the compass. (7) Water (pl.). (8) The eye. (9) A region of the sky. –m. (1) A bull, an ox; asaṁjātakiṇaskaṁdhaḥ sukhaṁ svapiti gaurgaḍiḥ K. P. 10; Ms. 4. 72; cf. jaradgava. (2) The hair of the body. (3) An organ of sense. (4) The sign Taurus of the zodiac. (5) The sun. (6) The number ‘nine’ (in math.). (7) The moon. (8) A singer. (9) A billion. (10) A cowsacrifice. (11) A house. — Comp. –kaṁṭakaḥ, –kaṁ 1. a road or spot trodden down by oxen and thus made impassable. –2. the cow’s hoof. –3. the print of a cow’s hoof. –karṇa a. having cow’s ears. ( –rṇaḥ) 1. a cow’s ear. –2. a mule. –3. a snake. –4. a span (from the tip of the thumb to that of the ring-finger). –5. N. of a place of pilgrimage in the south, sacred to Śiva; śritagokarṇaniketamīśvaraṁ R. 8. 33. –6. a kind of deer. –7. a kind of arrow. –kirāṭā-kirāṭikā the Sārikā bird. –kilaḥ, –kīlaḥ 1. a plough. –2. a pestle. –kulaṁ 1. a herd of kine; vṛṣṭivyākulagokulāvanarasāduddhṛtya govardhanaṁ Gīt. 4; gākulasya tṛṣārtasya Mb. –2. a cow-house. –3. N. of a village (where Kṛṣṇa was brought up). –kulika a. 1. one who does not help a cow in the mud. –2. squint-eyed. –kulodbhavā an epithet of Durgā. –kṛtaṁ cow-dung. –kṣīraṁ cow’s milk. –kṣuraṁ –rakaṁ a cow’s-hoof. –khā a nail. –gṛṣṭiḥ a young cow which has had only one calf. –goyugaṁ a pair of oxen. –goṣṭhaṁ a cow-pen, cattle-shed. –graṁthiḥ 1. dried cowdung. –2. a cow-house. –grahaḥ capture of cattle. –grāsaḥ the ceremony of offering a morsel (of grass) to a cow when performing an expiatory rite. –ghātaḥ, –ghātakaḥ, –ghātin m. a cow-killer. –ghṛtaṁ 1. rain-water. –2. clarified butter coming from a cow. –ghna a. 1. destructive to cows. –2. one who has killed a cow. — 3. one for whom a cow is killed, a guest. –caṁdanaṁ a kind of sandal-wood. –cara a. 1. grazed over by cattle. –2. frequenting, dwelling, resorting to, haunting; pitṛsadmagocaraḥ Ku. 5. 77. –3. within the scope, power, or range of; avāṅmanasagocaraṁ R. 10. 15; so buddhi-, dṛṣṭi-, śravaṇa- &c. –4. moving on earth. –5. accessible to, attainable. –6. circulating, having a particular meaning, prevalent. ( –raḥ) 1. the range of cattle, pasturage; upāratāḥ paścimarātrigocarāt Ki. 4. 10. –2. (a) a district, department, province, sphere. (b) an abode, dwelling-place. –3. range of the organs of sense, an object of sense; śravaṇagocare tiṣṭha be within ear-shot; nayanagocaraṁ yā to become visible. –4. scope, range, in general; harturyāti na gocaraṁ Bh. 2. 16. –5. (fig.) grip, hold, power, influence, control; kaḥ kālasya na gocarāṁtaragataḥ Pt. 1. 146; gocarībhūtamakṣṇoḥ U. 6. 26; Māl. 5. 24; api nāma manāgavatīrṇo’si ratiramaṇabāṇagocaraṁ Māl. 1. –6. horizon. –7. the range of the planets from the Lagna or from each other. (gocarīkṛ to place within the range (of sight), make current.). –carman n. 1. a cow’s hide. –2. a particular measuse of surface thus defined by Vasiṣṭha: –daśahastena vaṁśena daśavaṁśān samaṁtataḥ . paṁca cābhyadhikān dadyādetadgocarma cocyate … -vasanaḥ an epithet of Śiva. –cārakaḥ cowherd. –cāraṇaṁ the tending or feeding of cows. –ja a. born in the earth (rice &c). –jaraḥ an old ox or bull. –jalaṁ the urine of a bull or cow. –jāgarikaṁ auspiciousness, happiness. (–kaḥ) a preparer of food, baker. –jāta a born in the heaven (gods). –tallajaḥ an excellent bull or cow. –tīrthaṁ a cowhouse. –traṁ [gāṁ bhūrmi trāyate trai-ka] 1. a cowpen. –2. a stable in general. –3. a family, race, lineage; gotreṇa māṭharo’smi Sk.; so kauśikagotrāḥ, vasiṣṭhagotrāḥ &c.; Ms. 3. 109, 9. 141. –4. a name, appellation; jagāda gotraskhalite ca kā na taṁ N. 1. 30; S. 6. 4; see -skhalita below; madgotrāṁkaṁ viracitapadaṁ geyamudgātukāmā Me. 86. –5. a multitude. –6. increase. –7. a forest. –8. a field. –9. a road. –10. possessions, wealth. –11. an umbrella, a parasol. –12. knowledge of futurity. –13. a genus, class, species. –14. a caste, tribe, caste according to families. (–traḥ) a mountain. (–trā) 1. a multitude of cows. –2. the earth. -kartṛ, –kārin m. the founder of a family. -kīlā the earth. -ja a. born in the same family, gentile, a relation; Y. 2. 135. -paṭaḥ a genealogical table, pedigree. -pravaraḥ the oldest member or founder of a family. -bhida m. an epithet of Indra; hṛdi kṣato gotrabhidapyamarṣaṇaḥ R. 3. 53, 6. 73; Ku. 2. 52. -skhalanaṁ, -skhalitaṁ blundering or mistaking in calling (one) by his name, calling by a wrong name; smarasi smara mekhalāguṇairuta gātraskhaliteṣu baṁdhanaṁ Ku. 4. 8. –da a. giving cows. (–daḥ) brain. (–dā) N. of the river Godāvarī. — datra a. Ved. giving cows. (–traḥ) an epithet of Indra. (–traṁ) a crown (protecting the head). –daṁta a. armed with a coat of mail. (–taṁ) 1. yellow orpiment. –2. a white fossil substance. –dānaṁ 1. the gift of a cow. –2. the ceremony of tonsure or cutting the hair; athāsya godānavidheranaṁtaraṁ R. 3. 33; (see Mallinātha’s explanation of the word); kṛtagodānamaṁgalāḥ U. 1; (Ram. explains the word differently). –3. the part of the head close to the right ear. –dāya a. intending to give cows. –dāraṇaṁ 1. a plough. –2. a spade, hoe. –dāvarī N. of a river in the south. –duh m., –duhaḥ ‘cow-milker’ a cowherd. –dohaḥ 1. the milking of cows. –2. the milk of cows. –3. the time of milking cows. — dohanaṁ 1. the time of milking cows. –2. the milking of cows. –dohanī a milk-pail. –dravaḥ the urine of a bull or cow. –dhanaṁ 1. a herd or multitude of cows, cattle. –2. possession of cows. (–naḥ) a broadpointed arrow. –dharaḥ a mountain. –dharmaḥ the law of cattle, rules relating to cattle. –dhuptaḥ, –dhūptaḥ 1. wheat. –2. the orange. -cūrṇaṁ wheat- flour; -saṁbhavaṁ a sour paste. –dhūliḥ ‘dust of the cows,’ the time of sunset or evening twilight (so called because cows, which generally return home at about sunset, raise up clouds of dust by their treading on the earth). –dhenuḥ a milch-cow with a calf. –dhraḥ a mountain. — naṁdā an epithet of the wife of Śiva. –naṁdī the female of the Sārasa bird. –nardaḥ 1. the (Indian) crane. –2. an epithet of Śiva (bellowing like a bull). –3. N. of a country. –nardīyaḥ an epithet of Patanjali, author of the Mahābhāṣya. –nasaḥ, –nāsaḥ 1. a kind of snake. –2. a kind of gem. –nasā the mouth of a cow. –nāthaḥ 1. a bull. –2. an owner of land. –3. a herdsman. –4. an owner of kine. –nāyaḥ a cowherd. –nāsā the projecting snout of a cow or ox. –nāsaṁ a kind of gem. –niṣyaṁdaḥ cow’s urine. –paḥ 1. a cowherd (considered as belonging to a mixed tribe); gopaveśasya viṣṇoḥ Me. 15. –2. the chief of a cowpen. –3. the superintendent of a village. –4. a king. –5. a protector, guardian. -anasī the wood of a thatch. -āṭavikā a cowherd. -kanyā 1. the daughter of a cowherd. –2. a nymph of Vṛndāvana. -adhyakṣaḥ, -iṁdraḥ, -īśaḥ the chief of herdsmen, an epithet of Kṛṣṇa. -dalaḥ the betel-nut tree. -bhadraṁ the fibrous root of a water-lily. -rasaḥ gum myrrh -vadhūḥ f. a cowherd’s wife. -vadhūṭī a young cowherdess, a young wife of a cowherd; gopavadhūṭīdukūlacaurāya Bhāṣā P. 1. (–pakaḥ) 1. the superintendent of a district. –2. myrrh. (–pikā) 1. a cowherdess. –2. protectress. (–pī) a cowherd’s wife (especially applied to the cowherdesses of Vṛndāvana, the companions of Kṛṣṇa in his juvenile sports). –2. a milk-maid. –3. a protectress. –4. Nature, elementary nature. –patiḥ 1. an owner of cows. –2. a bull. –3. a leader, chief. –4. the sun. –5. Indra. –6. N. of Kṛṣṇa –7. N. of Śiva. –8. N. of Varuṇa. –9. a king. –paśuḥ a sacrificial cow. –pāḥ m. Ved. 1. a herdsman. –2. protector, or guardian. 1. –pānasī a curved beam which supports a thatch. –pālaḥ 1. a cowherd. –2. a king. –3. an epithet of Śiva. –4. an epithet of Kṛṣṇa. -dhānī a cow-pen, cow-shed, — pālakaḥ 1. a cowherd. –2. a king. –3. an epithet of Śiva; also of Kṛṣṇa. –pāliḥ an epithet of Śiva. –pālikā, –pālī the wife of a cowherd. –pittaṁ bile of cows, ox-bile (from which the yellow pigment gorocanā is prepared; Pt. 1. 94.). –pītaḥ a species of wagtail. –pīthaḥ protec tion. (–thaṁ) a holy place, a place of pilgrimage. –pucchaṁ a cow’s tail. (– cchaḥ) 1. a sort of monkey. –2. a sort of necklace consisting of two or four or thirty-four strings. –puṭikaṁ the head of Śiva’s bull –putraḥ 1. a young bull. –2. an epithet of Karṇa. –puraṁ 1. a town-gate; Māl. 9. 1. — 2. a principal gate; Ki. 5. 5. –3. the ornamental gate-way of a temple. — purīṣaṁ cowdung. –prakāḍaṁ an excellent cow or bull. –pracāraḥ pasture-ground, pasturage for cattle; Y. 2. 166. –prata(tā)raḥ 1. a ford for cattle. –2. a place of pilgrimage on the Sarayū. –praveśaḥ the time when cows return home, sunset or evening-twilight. –phaṇā 1. a bandage hollowed out so as to fit the chin or nose &c. –2. a sling. –bālaḥ the hair of cows. –bhuj m. a king. –bhṛt m. a mountain. –makṣikā a gadfly. –magha a. granting cattle or cows. –maṁḍalaṁ 1. the globe. –2. a multitude of cows. –mataṁ = gavyūti q, v. –matallikā a tractable cow, an excellent cow. –mathaḥ a cowherd. –mahiṣadā N. of one of the Mātṛs attending on kārtikeya. –māṁsaṁ beef. –māyu 1. a kind of frog. –2. a jackal anuhuṁkurute ghanadhvaniṁ na hi gomāyurutāni kesarī Śi. 16. 25. –3. bile of a cow. –4. N. of a Gandharva. –mukhaḥ, –mukhaṁ [gormukhamiva mukhamasya] a kind of musical instrument; Bg. 1. 13. (–khaḥ) 1. a crocodile, shark. –2. a hole of a particular shape in a wall made by thieves. (–khaṁ) 1. a house built unevenly. –2. spreading unguents, smearing. (–khaṁ, –khī) a cloth-bag of the shape of a gnomon containing a rosary, the beads of which are counted by the hand thrust inside. (–khī) the chasm in the Himālaya mountains through which the Ganges flows. –mūḍha a. stupid as a bull. –mūtraṁ cow’s urine. — mūtrikā 1. an artificial verse, the second of which repeats nearly all the syllables of the first (Malli. thus defines it: –vaṁrṇānāmekarūpatvaṁ yadyekāṁtaramardhayoḥ gomūtriketi tatprāhurduṣkaraṁ tadvido viduḥ .. see Śi. 19. 46). –2. a form of calculation. –mṛgaḥ a kind of ox (gavaya). –medaḥ a gem brought from the Himālaya and Indus, described as of four different colours: –white, paleyellow, red, and dark-blue. –medakaḥ 1. see gomeda. –2. a kind of poison (kākola). –3. smearing the body with unguents. –medhaḥ, –yajñaḥ a cowsacrifice. –yānaṁ a carriage drawn by oxen. –yukta a. drawn by oxen. –yutaṁ a cattle-station. –rakṣaḥ 1. a cowherd. –2. keeping or tending cattle. –3. the orange. –4. an epithet of Śiva. -jaṁbū f. wheat. –raṁkuḥ 1. a water-fowl. –2. a prisoner. –3. a naked man, a mendicant wandering about without clothes. –4. a chanter. –ravaṁ saffron. –rasaḥ cow’s milk. –2. curds. –3. buttermilk. –4. the flavour of a sentence, ko raso gorasaṁ vinā Udb. -jaṁ buttermilk. –rājaḥ an excellent bull. –rāṭikā, –rāṭī the Sārikā bird. –rutaṁ a measure of distance equal to two Krośas. –rūpaṁ the form of a cow. (–paḥ) N. of Śiva. –rocaṁ yellow orpiment. –rocanā a bright yellow pigment prepared from the urine or bile of a cow, or found in the head of a cow. –lavaṇaṁ a measure of salt given to a cow. –lāṁgu (gū) laḥ a kind of monkey with a dark body, red cheeks. and a tail like that of a cow; Mal. 9. 30. –lokaḥ a part of heaven, cowworld. –lomī a prostitute. –vatsaḥ a calf. -ādin m. a wolf. –vardhanaḥ a celebrated hill in vṛṁdāvana the country about Mathurā. (This hill was lifted up and supported by Kṛṣṇa upon one finger for seven days to shelter the cowherds from a storm of rain sent by Indra to test Kṛṣṇa’s divinity.’) -dharaḥ, -dhārin m. an epithet of Kṛṣṇa. –vaśā a barren cow. –vāṭaṁ, –vāsaḥ a cow-pen. –vāsana a. covered with an ox-hide. –vikartaḥ, –vikrartṛ m. 1. the killer of a cow. –2. a husbandman. –vitataḥ a horse-sacrifice having many cows. –viṁdaḥ 1. a cowkeeper, a chief herdsman. –2. N. of Kṛṣṇa. –3. Bṛnaspati. -dvādaśī the twelfth day in the light half of the month of phalguna. –viṣ f., –viṣṭhā cowdung. — visargaḥ day-break (when cows are let loose to graze in forests). –vīthiḥ f. N. of that portion of the moon’s path which contains the asterisms bhādrapadā, revatī and aśvinī, or according to some, hasta, citrā and svātī. –vīryaṁ the price received for milk. –vṛṁdaṁ a drove of cattle. — vṛṁdārakaḥ an excellent bull or cow. –vṛṣaḥ, –vṛṣabhaḥ an excellent bull. -dhvajaḥ an epithet of Śiva. –vaidyaḥ a quack doctor. –vrajaḥ 1. a cow- pen. –2. a herd of cows. –3. a place where cattle graze. –vrata, –vratin a. one who imitates a cow in frugality. –śakṛt n. cowdung. –śataṁ a present of a hundred cows to a Brāhmaṇa. –śālaṁ, –lā a cow-stall. — śīrṣaḥ, –rṣaṁ a kind of sandal. –ṣaḍgavaṁ three pairs of kine. –ṣan, –ṣā a. Ved. acquiring or bestowing cows. –ṣā (sā) tiḥ 1. acquiring cattle. –2. giving cattle. –ṣṭomaḥ a kind of sacrificelasting for one day. –saṁkhyaḥ a cowherd. –sadṛkṣaḥ a species of ox (gavaya). –sargaḥ the time at which cows are usually let loose, day-break; see govisarga. –savaḥ a kind of cow-sacrifice (not performed in the Kali age). –sahasraṁ a kind of present (mahādāna). (–srī) N. of two holidays on the fifteenth day of the dark half of kārtika and jyeṣṭha. –sūtrikā a rope fastened at both ends having separate halters for each ox or cow. –stanaḥ 1. the udder of a cow. –2. a cluster of blossoms, nosegay &c. –3. a pearl-necklace of four strings. –stanā, –nī a bunch of grapes. –sthānaṁ, –kaṁ a cow-pen. — svāmin m. 1. an owner of cows. –2. a religious mendicant. –3. an honorary title affixed to proper names; (e. g. vopadevagosvāmin). –hatyā cow-slaughter. –hallaṁ (sometimes written hannaṁ) cowdung. –hita a. cherishing or protecting kine. (–taḥ) N. of Viṣṇu. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch go m. f. SIDDH.K.251,a,5 v. u. gaus, gām, gavā, gave, gos, gavi; gāvau; gāvas, gās und bisweilen auch gāvas (TBR. 3, 1, 2, 12. TAITT. UP. 1, 4, 2. MBH. 4, 1506. R. 2, 32, 38), gobhis, gobhyas, gavām und gonām (dieses nur am Ende eines Pāda im Veda P. 7, 1, 57; gavām am Pāda- Ende ṚV. 4, 1, 19), goṣu P. 6, 1, 93. 7, 1, 90. VOP. 3, 68. 69. Verhalten des o vor Vocalen im comp. P. 6, 1, 122. fgg. VOP. 2, 18. Am Ende eines comp. zu gu (vgl. 1. gu) geschwächt. 1) “Rind, Stier, Kuh”; pl. “Rinder, Kühe, Rinderheerden” (f. P. 1, 2, 73, Sch.) AK. 2, 9, 60. 66. 3, 4, 3, 26. 25, 167. TRIK. 3, 3, 59. H. 1257. 1265. an. 1, 6. MED. g. 1. HĀR. 79. Uṇ. 2, 66, Sch. gavāṁ gotram ṚV. 2, 23, 18. sākaṁ gāvaḥ suvate pacyate yavaḥ 1, 135, 8. yadi no gāṁ haṁsi yadyaśvaṁ yadi pūruṣam AV. 1, 16, 4. sthirau gāvau bhavatām ṚV. 3, 53, 7. 5, 27, 1. aśvāvati prathamo goṣu gacchati 1, 83, 1. 8, 60, 5. puruṣo ‘jo ‘viko gauraśva iti pañca paśavaḥ ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 9, 23, 4. ŚAT. BR. 2, 4, 3, 13. 3, 1, 2, 13. 4, 5, 5, 10. 14, 1, 1, 32. gāva ukṣaṇaḥ ṚV. 1, 168, 2. VS. 21, 20. AV. 3, 11, 8. gāvo dhenavaḥ ṚV. 1, 173, 1. 6, 45, 28. 10, 95, 6. VS. 21, 19. sarve te goṣu jīvinaḥ R. 1, 9, 61. gavāṁ ca yānaṁ pṛṣṭhena M. 4, 72. anargheyā mahārāja dvijā varṇeṣu cottamāḥ. gāvaśca MBH. 13, 2689. fgg. kaliścaiva vṛṣo bhūtvā gavām N. 7, 6. paṅke gauriva sīdati M. 4, 191. 8, 21. HIT. Pr. 23. gaurandhā M. 3, 141. yathā gaurgavi cāphalā 2, 158. gohiraṇya n. sg. “Kühe und Gold” MBH. 2, 1833. gobrāhmaṇa n. sg. “eine Kuh und ein Brahman” 13, 3350. HARIV. 3157. fg. M. 5, 95. 11, 79. hastigo’śvoṣṭradamaka 3, 162. gavāmayaḥ (MBH. 3, 8176. 13, 5177. 7128) und gavāmayanam (MBH. 3, 8080) N. einer Festfeier; s. u. ayana und ZdmG.IX, LXXII. gavāṁ medhaḥ (vgl. gomedha) MBH. 13, 5378. gavāṁ vratam N. eines Sāman Ind. St. 3, 215. gavāṁ tīrtham BHĀG. P. 3, 1, 22; Vgl. gotīrtha. Eine grosse Anzahl von Zusammensetzungen mit go verlieren mit der Zeit ihre ursprüngliche enge, auf das “Rind” oder, die “Kuh” bezügliche Bedeutung und nehmen eine allgemeine an; so z. B. gaviṣ, gaviṣa, gaviṣṭi, gaveṣ, gaveṣaṇa, gavy, gup, gocara, gotra, gopā, gopītha, gopīthya, goyuga, goṣṭha, ṣaṅgava u. s. w. — 2) m. “das Sternbild des Stiers” VARĀH. BṚH. S. 39 (38), 7. 40 (39), 3. BṚH. 11, 4. 17, 2. 18, 1. L. JĀT. 13, 1. — 3) “was vom Rinde” oder “von der Kuh kommt” (s. NIR. 2, 5), namentlich: a) “Milch”, meist pl.: gobhiḥ śrīṇīta matsaram ṚV. 9, 46, 4. 71, 5. gobhiraktam 4, 27, 5. gorna seke 1, 181, 8. 33, 10. 151, 8. 153, 4. 2, 30, 7. — b) “Fleisch”: agnervarma pari gobhirvyayasva ṚV. 10, 16, 7. — c) “Haut, Rindsleder, daraus geschnittene Riemen u.s.w.”: aṁśuṁ duhanto adhyāsate gavi ṚV. 10, 94, 9. gobhiḥ saṁnaddho asi 6, 47, 26. 75, 11. 8, 48, 5. asmadryakśuśucānasya yamyā āśurna raśmiṁ tuvyojasaṁ goḥ 4, 22, 8. tvamāyasaṁ prati vartayo gordivo aśmānam “du schleudertest aus dem Riemen (funda) das eherne Geschoss” 1, 121. 9. — d) “Sehne”: vṛkṣe vṛkṣe niyatā mīmayadgauḥ ṚV. 10, 27, 22. AV. 1, 2, 3. — 4) go, abgekürzt für goṣṭoma (s. d.), heisst ein Opfertag im Abhiplava: jyotirgaurāyuriti trīṇyahāni gaurāyurjyotiri trīṇi AIT. BR. 4, 15. ŚAT. BR. 13, 5, 4, 3. goāyuṣī 12, 1, 2, 2. KĀTY. ŚR. 23, 1, 26. ĀŚV. ŚR. 9, 1. 11, 1. LĀṬY. 4, 7, 1. MAŚ. 2, 9. 3, 1 in Verz. d. B. H. 72. go = gomedhayajña BHĀNUD. bei einem Sch. zu AK. ŚKDR. m. = kratubheda Uṇ., Sch. — 5) pl. “die Heerde am Himmel, die Gestirne”: tā vāṁ vāstūnyuśmasi gamadhyai yatra gāvo bhūriśṛṅgā ayāsaḥ ṚV. 1, 154, 6. vi raśmibhiḥ sasṛje sūryo gāḥ “mit ihren Strahlen hat die Sonne die Gestirne verscheucht” 7, 36, 1. — 6) “Himmel” NAIGH. 1, 4. AK. 3, 4, 3, 26. H. 87. H. an. masc. TRIK. MED. (lies: svarga st. sarga). m. f. Uṇ., Sch. Diese Bed. wurde. wenn sie nur sonst nachzuweisen wäre, recht gut passen zur folgenden Stelle: indraḥ pṛthivyai varṣīyāngostu mātrā na vidyate VS. 23, 48. — 7) “die Sonne” NIR. 2, 6. 14. masc. Uṇ., Sch. BHĀNUD. bei einem Sch. zu AK. ŚKDR. Vgl. goputra. — 8) m. “der Mond” VIŚVA im ŚKDR. — 9) pl. “die Lichtstrahlen (die Rinderheerde des Himmels”, um welche Indra mit Vṛtra kämpft) NAIGH. 1, 5. NIR. 2, 6. 14, 25. AK. 3, 4, 3, 26. H. 99. H. an. masc. TRIK. MED. m. = kiraṇa, m. f. = raśmi Uṇ., Sch. gobhirbhāsayase mahīm MBH. 3, 182. tvamevaikastapase jātavedo nānyastaptā vidyate goṣu deva 1, 8414. gavāṁ sūryo guruḥ smṛtaḥ HARIV. 2943. tejomayairgobhirivodito ‘rkaḥ (dīptimavāpa) R. 1, 7, 18. 4, 40, 64. BHĀG. P. 2, 6, 21. gogaṇaiḥ 4, 16, 14. sg. “der Strahl” Suṣumṇa NIR. 2, 6. — 10) “Donnerkeil” AK. H. an. SĀY. zu ṚV. 5, 30, 7. masc. TRIK. MED. m. f. Uṇ., Sch. — 11) “Weltgegend” AK. H. an. fem. TRIK. MED. Uṇ., Sch. — 12) “die milchende Kuh der Fürsten, die Erde” NAIGH. 1, 1. AK. H. 936. H. an. fem. TRIK. MED. Uṇ., Sch. nādharmaścarito loke sadyaḥ phalati gauriva M. 4, 172. khaṁ saṁniveśayetkheṣu ceṣṭanasparśane ‘nilam. paktidṛṣṭyoḥ paraṁ tejaḥ snehe ‘po gāṁ ca mūrtiṣu.. 12. 120. imāṁ sāgarāpāṅgīṁ gām MBH. 1, 2468. 3, 1281. 15828. taṁ janāḥ kathayantīha yāvadbhavati gauriyam 13, 3168. BHAG. 15, 13. R. 1, 41, 18. 44, 19. MṚCCH. 173, 17. MEGH. 31. (rājā) dudoha gāṁ sa yajñāya śasyāya maghavā divam RAGH. 1, 26; vgl. payodharībhūtacatuḥsamudrāṁ jugopa gorūpadharāmivorvīm 2, 3 und kasmāddadhāra gorūpaṁ dharitrī bahurūpiṇī. yāṁ dudoha pṛthustatra ko vatso dohanaṁ ca kim.. BHĀG. P. 4, 17, 3. – 1, 10, 3. 4, 17, 7. Vgl. auch dhenu. — 13) “Wasser” AK. H. an. m. f. Uṇ., Sch. f. pl. TRIK. MED. m. n. (also gu) BHĀNUD. im ŚKDR. gaviṣṭho gāṁ gatastadā BHĀG. P. 1, 10, 36. — 14) “Pfeil” AK. H. an. fem. TRIK. MED. m. f. Uṇ., Sch. — 15) “Auge” AK. H. an. fem. TRIK. MED. m. f. Uṇ., Sch. — 16) “das Haar auf dem Körper”, m. f. Uṇ., Sch. m. n. (also gu) BHĀNUD. Vgl. 2. godāna. — 17) f. “Mutter” EKĀKṢARAK. im ŚKDR. Vgl. prajāpatirditiścaiva gāvo viśvasya mātaraḥ VARĀH. BṚH. S. 47, 68. — 18) m. “eine best. Arzeneipflanze” (ṛṣabha) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — 19) “Rede, die Göttin der Rede” (Sarasvatī) NAIGH. 1, 11. NIR. 6, 2. AK. H. 241. H. an. fem. TRIK. MED. Uṇ., Sch. janmaprabhṛti matyāṁ te vedmi gāṁ brahmavādinīm MBH. 1, 72. tasyārdhyamāsanaṁ caiva gāṁ cāvedya 3, 16696. yo ‘satsevī vṛthācāro ca śrotā suhṛdāṁ satām. parānvṛṇīte svāndveṣṭi taṁ gaustyajati bhārata.. 5, 4149. tatheti gāmuktavate RAGH. 2, 59. raghorudārāmapi gāṁ niśamya 5, 12. Diese und die folgende Bed. hat man wohl in Folge der Herleitung von gā “singen” angenommen. — 20) “Lobsänger” NAIGH. 3, 16. — 21) “Gänger, Ross” (von gam oder gā “gehen”) SĀY. zu ṚV. 1, 121, 9. 4, 22, 8. — 22) “Billion”: yadā daśabhirakṣitairyajate ‘tha gaurbhavati (akṣita = “100,000 Millionen”) PAÑCAV. BR. 17, 14. — 23) N. pr. a) m. eines Ṛṣi: gorāṅgirasasya sāma LĀṬY. 6, 11, 3. Ind. St. 3, 215. (vāruṇaśca tathā mantrī) putrapautraiḥ parivṛto gonāmnā puṣkareṇa ca MBH. 2, 381. — b) f. der Gemahlin Śuka’s, einer Tochter der Manen Sukāla HARIV. 986. der Schwiegertochter Śuka’s BHĀG. P. 9, 21, 25. einer Tochter Kakutstha’s und Gemahlin Yayāti’s HARIV. 1601. go 4) WEBER, Nax. 2, 282. — 9) RĀJA-TAR. 5, 1. Spr. 2842 (zugleich “Kuh”). BHĀG. P. 11, 7, 50. — 13) f. pl. BHĀG. P. 11, 7, 50. — 15) Spr. 2842. “Sinnesorgan” überh. BHĀG. P. 7, 5, 30. — 19) Spr. 2373 (zugleich “Kuh”). — 23) a) gorāṅgirasasya sāma PAÑCAV. BR. 16, 7, 7. gormāyūkasya Ind. St. 3, 459. Zu MBH. 2, 381 vgl. R. 7, 23, 28; nach dem Comm. sind Go und Pushkara balādhyakṣau der Söhne und Enkel Varuṇa’s. — b) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 39,b,43. — 24) Bez. “der Zahl neun” WEBER, JYOT. 101. Nax. 2, 382. go 24) (Nachträge) SŪRYAS. 1, 42. 2, 36. 3, 44. wegen “der neun Erden.” Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 go (gau) (GAU) A wife of sage Pulastya. Vaiśravaṇa was born of her. The son left his father and went to Brahmā. (Śloka 12, Chapter 274, Vana Parva). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 go go, I. m. 1. A bull; f. A cow, Man. 3, 141; pl. Bulls and cows, cattle, Man. 4, 72. 2. m. pl. Rays of light, Rājat. 5, 1. II. f. The earth, Rām. 1, 41, 18. III. m. and f. Water, Bhāg. P. 1, 10, 36. IV. f. Speech, Ragh. 5, 12. V. The deity of speech, MBh. 5, 4149. VI. m. The name of a Ṛṣi, MBh. 2, 381. VII. f. A proper name, Bhāg. P. 9, 21, 25. — Cf. [greek] Lat. bos, ceva; OHG. ko; AS. cū; probably also [greek] Goth. gavi, gauja. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 go m. bull, ox, ox-hide, leather, sinew; pl. cattle, herds, the stars or rays of light (as the herds of the sky); pieces of flesh, cow-milk (also sgl.). –f. cow, the earth (as the milch cow of kings); speech and Sarasvati, the goddess of speech. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 go go, ox, bull; cow’s milk (gnly. pl.); ox-hide; thong: pl. host of heaven, stars; rays; f. cow; earth; speech. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 go puṁstrī gacchatyanena gama–karaṇe ḍo . 1 svanāmakhyāte paśubhede vṛṣasya yānasādhanatvāt strīgavyāśca dānadvārā svargagatisādhanatvācca tathātvam . gatisādhanatayā tasya tathārthatvayogena yaugikatve’pi yogarūḍhatvam . etena darṣaṇakṛtā vyutpattilabhyasya mukhyārthatve gauḥ śete ityatrāpi lakṣaṇā syāt gamerḍoḥ iti vyutpāditasya gośabdasya śayanakāle’pi prayogāt iti yaduktaṁ tat grāmādikameva gamerḍoḥ ityūṇādipratyayasya kartṛvācakatvāniyamāt tābhyāmanyatroṇādayaḥ pā° sūtre ūṇādīnāṁ apādānasaṁpradānabhinnārthatvaniyamāt atra karaṇārthakaḍopratyayena vyutpāditasya gośabdasya śayanakāle’pi gatisādhanasvarūpayogyavācakatvāt phalopadhāyakatvaniyame yānāsanaśayanādīnāmapi gatiśayanādivigamakāle tacchabdavācyatānupapatteḥ . gamyate jñāyate anena karaṇe, śīghraṁ gacchati kartari vā ḍo . 2 raśmau kiraṇe tasya śīghra gāmitvāt cākṣuṣajñānahetutvācca tathātvam sūryādikiraṇa saṁparkaṁ vinā cākṣuṣajñānāsambhavāt raśmerjñānasādhanatvāt tathātvam . 3 vajre 4 hīrake tasyāpi kaṭhinadravye’pi gatimattvāt tathātvam . karmaṇi ḍo . 5 svarge karmibhi rgamyamānatvāt tasya tathātvam medi° . 6 candre viśvaḥ karmibhistallokagamanāttasya tathātvam 7 sūrye 8 gomedhayajñe bhānudīkṣitaḥ . sūryasya śīghragatikatvāt arcirādiṣvadhiṣṭhātṛtayā ātivāhikatvāt tathātvam . saṁvatsarādādityamādityāccandramasam chā° u° . ātivāhikaśabde 651 pṛ° dṛśyam 9 ṛṣabhanāmauṣadhe rājani° . tasya gonāmakatvāt tathātvam . karaṇe ḍo . 10 betre strī tasya cākṣuṣajñānasādhanatvāt tathātvam . kartari ḍo . 11 vāṇe strī tasya śīghragtikatvāt tathātvam . karmaṇi ḍo . 12 diśi strī diśāṁ palāyanakāle gamyamānatvāttayātvam . 13 vāci strī tasyāḥ jñānahetutvāt tathātvam . ādhāreḍo . 14 bhuvi strī tasyāḥ gamanādhāratvāt tathātvam 15 jale ca strība° va° kecit tasya nimnagatitvāt 16 paśumātre amaraḥ 17 mātari 18 lomani bhānudīkṣitaḥ . 19 vṛṣarāśau 20 navasaṁkhyāyām gorbhūmernavakhaṇḍātmakatvāt ākāśe sadāgatimadgrahāṇāṁ navatvādvā tatsaṁkhyāsāmyāt tathātvam . 21 pulastyabhāryāyāṁ gavijātaśabde 2566 pṛ° dṛśyam . jñānahetutvāt 22 indriye gocaraḥ . padāntasthitasyopasarjanasya samā° hrasvaḥ śītaguḥ sahasraguḥ . asya uttarapadasthatve tatpuruṣe ṣac samā° . puṁsi paramagavaḥ striyāṁ ṣittvāt ṅīṣ dugdhagavī goḥ purīṣaṁ mayaṭ . gomaya (govara) khyāte padārthe na° gaurvidyate’sya mini gomin . matup . gomat goviśiṣṭe gosvāmini ca tri° striyāṁ ṅīp . goḥsthāne goṣṭhac gogoṣṭha gosthāne na° gomāṁsaguṇā bhāvapra° uktā yathā gomāṁsaṁ tu guru snigdhaṁ pittaśleṣmavivardhanam . vṛṁhaṇaṁ vātahṛt balyamapathyaṁ pīnasapraṇut . goridaṁ yat āntoyi pratyaye pā° avādeśaḥ . gavya godugdhādau bhāvapra° tadguṇādyuktaṁ yathā gavyaṁ dugdhaṁ viśeṣeṇa madhuraṁ rasapākayoḥ . śītalaṁ stanyapṛt snigdhaṁ vātapittāsranāśanam . doṣadhātubalasrotaḥkiñcitkledakaraṁ guru . jarāsamastarogāṇāṁ śāntikṛt sevināṁ sadā . kṣīravargaśabde 2377 pṛ° vivṛtiḥ . gavyadadhiguṇāḥ bhāvapra° uktā yathā gavyaṁ davi viśeṣeṇa svādvamlañca rucipradam . pabitraṁ dīpanaṁ hṛdyaṁ puṣṭikṛt pavanāpaham . uktaṁ dadhnāmaśeṣāṇāṁ madhye gavyaṁ guṇādhikam tannavanītaguṇāḥ tatroktā yathā navanītaṁ kṣitaṁ gavyaṁ vṛṣyaṁ varṇabalāgnikṛt . saṁgrāhi vātapittāsṛkkṣayārśo’rditakāsahṛt . taddhitaṁ vālake vṛddhe viśeṣādamṛtaṁ śiśoḥ tadghṛtaguṇāḥ bhāvapra° uktā yathā gavyaṁ ghṛtaṁ viśeṣeṇa cakṣuṣyaṁ vṛṣyamagnikṛt . svādupākakaraṁ śītaṁ vātapittakaphāpaham . medhālāvaṇyakāntyojastejovṛddhikaraṁ param . alakṣmīpāparakṣoghnaṁ vayasaḥ sthāpakaṁ guru . balyaṁ pavitramāyuṣyaṁ sumaṅgalyaṁ rasāyanam . sugandhaṁ rocanaṁ cāru sarvājyeṣu guṇādhikam . tanmūtraguṇā bhāvapra° uktā yathā gomūtraṁ kaṭu tīkṣṇoṣṇaṁ kṣāraṁ tiktaṁ kaṣāyakam . laghvagnidīpanaṁ medhyaṁ pittakṛtkaphavātahṛt . śūlagulmodarānāha kaṇḍvakṣimukharogajit . kilāsagadavātāmavastiruk kuṣṭhanāśanam . kāsaśvāsāpahaṁ śothakāmalāpāṇḍurogahṛt . kaṇḍūkilāsagadaśūlamukhākṣirogān gulmātisāramarudāmayamūtrarodhān . kāsaṁ sakuṣṭhajaṭhara krimipāṇḍurogān gomutramekamapi pītamapākaroti . sarveṣvapi ca mūtreṣu gomūtraṁ guṇato’dhikam . ato’viśeṣāt kathane mūtraṁ gomūtramucyate . plīhodaraśvāsa kāsaśothavarcāgrahāpaham . śūlagulmarujānāhakāmaṁlāpāṇḍurogahṛt . kaṣāyaṁ tiktatīkṣṇañca pūraṇāt karṇaśūlanut . tatra saurabhyām paṅke gauriva sīdati bhā° vi° 191 . yathā gaurgavi cāphalā manuḥ goghnavat vihitaḥ kalpaḥ prā° ta° viśvā° . vāci pannagagavīgumpheṣu cājāgarīt malli° preyodūtapataṅgapuṅgavagabīhaiyaṅgavīnaṁ rasāt naiṣa° netrādiṣu gomadhyamadhye! mṛgagodhare! he sahasragobhūṣaṇakiṅkarāṇām . nādena gobhṛcchikhareṣu mattā nṛtyanti gokarṇaśarīrabhakṣāḥ cauraḥ . gāmāttasārāṁ raghurapyavekṣya raghuḥ kṣiptāvarodhāṅganamutpathena gām māghaḥ . hitādau yat . gavya gauhitaudau bhuvi padānte gośabdasya atipare pararūpaṁ go’graṁ prakṛtivadbhāvaśca go agraṁ acipare vā avaṅa gavāgram . aśvaśabde pare gavāśvādi° dvandva ekavadbhāvaḥ . gavāśvam . |
गौर – gaura | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899gaura mf (“ī”) n. (in comp. or ifc. g. “kaḍārādi”) white, yellowish,
reddish, pale red v &c. mf (“ī”) n. shining, brilliant, clean, beautiful gaura m. white, yellowish (the colour) gaura m. a kind of buffalo (Bos Gaurus, often classed with the Gavaya) &c. gaura m. white mustard (the seed of which is used as a weight, = 3 Rāja-sarshapas) gaura m. Grislea tomentosa (“dhava”) gaura m. a species of rice gaura m. the moon gaura m. the planet Jupiter gaura m. N. of the Nāga śeṣa gaura m. of Caitanya (cf. “-candra”) gaura m. of a Yoga teacher (son of śuka and Pīvarī) 981 gaura pl. N. of a family (cf. “-rātreya”) gaura n. white mustard gaura n. N. of a potherb gaura n. saffron (cf. “kanaka-“) gaura n. the filament of a lotus gaura n. gold gaura n. orpiment gaura mf (“ī”) n. (“ā”) f. = “rī” (cf. “gaulā”) gaura mf (“ī”) n. (“ī”) f. the female of the Bos Gaurus (“Vāc or voice of the middle region of the air”, i, 164, 41 according to gaura n. = “gaurikā” gaura n. the earth gaura n. red chalk gaura n. a yellow pigment or dye (“go-rocanā”, “orpiment” gaura n. turmeric (“rajanī”) gaura n. N. of several other plants (“priyaṁgu, maṇjiṣṭhā, śveta-dūrvā, mallikā, tulasī, suvarṇa-kadalī, ākāśa-māṁsī”) gaura n. N. of several metres (one of 4 x 12 syllables; another of 4 x 13 syllables; another of 4 x 26 long syllables) gaura n. (in music) a kind of measure gaura n. () N. of a Rāgiṇī gaura n. “brilliant Goddess”, śiva’s wife Pārvatī Pariś. gaura n. N. of Varuṇa’s wife gaura n. of a Vidyā-devī, iii, 231, 48 gaura n. of śākya-muni’s mother gaura n. of the wife of Vi-rajas and mother of Su-dhāman gaura n. of several other women gaura n. of several rivers (one originally the wife of Prasena-jit or Yuvanāśva, changed by his curse into the river Bāhu-dā ([cf. Lat. ‘gilvus’?]) Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 gaura a. (rā or rī f.) (1) White; kailāsagauraṁ vṛṣamārurukṣoḥ R. 2. 35; dviradadaśanacchedagaurasya tasya Me. 59, 52; Rs. 1. 6. (2) Yellowish, pale-red; gorocanākṣepanitāṁtagaure Ku. 7. 17; R. 6. 65; gaurāṁgi garvaṁ na kadāpi kuryāḥ R. G. (3) Reddish. (4) Shining, brilliant. (5) Pure, clean, beautiful. –raḥ 1 The white colour. (2) The yellowish colour. (3) The reddish colour. (4) White mustard. (5) The moon. (6) A kind of buffalo. (7) A kind of deer. (8) The planet Jupiter. (9) N. of Chaitanya. –raṁ (1) The filament of a lotus. (2) Saffron. (3) Gold. — Comp. –aṁgaḥ N. of (1) Viṣṇu. (2) Kṛṣṇa. –āsyaḥ a kind of black monkey, with a white face. –kharaḥ a wild monkey. –sarṣapaḥ white mustard (considered as a kind of weight). Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch gaura ved., gaura klass. Uṇ. 2, 29. ŚĀNT. 1, 4. 1) adj. f. ī (auch klass.) P. 4, 1, 41. “weisslich, gelblich, röthlich” (als m. “die weissliche Farbe u.s.w.”) NIR. 11, 39. AK. 1, 1, 4, 22. 24. 3, 4, 25, 191. H. 1393. 1394. an. 2, 413. MED. r. 27. kann im comp. seinem subst. vorgehen oder nachfolgen gaṇa kaḍārādi zu P. 2, 2, 38. gaurasya yaḥ payasaḥ pītimānaśe ṚV. 10, 100, 2. gauralalāma TS. 5, 6, 16, 1. mṛṇāla- VARĀH. BṚH. S. 4, 31. 58, 36. SUŚR. 1, 106, 17. bhūmi 135, 1. sirā 356, 1. (acalam) gauraṁ tuṣāraiḥ MEGH. 53. 60. tuṣāragaura ṚT. l, 6. kailāśagauraṁ vṛṣam RAGH. 2, 35. MBH. 6, 445. -dukūla GĪT. 11, 26. gaurīṁ kanakavarṇābhāmiṣṭāmantaḥpureśvarīm R. 5, 14, 30. jāmbūnadaśuddhagaura DRAUP. 7, 7. MBH. 4, 2301. fg. nārī 8, 2050. – payodhara BHARTṚ. 1, 9. taruṇādityasadṛśaiḥ śaṇagauraiśca vānaraiḥ MBH. 3, 16350. taruṇādityagauraiḥ śaragauraiśca vānaraiḥ R. 4, 39, 14. 11. raśmayo yasya (candrasya) gaurāḥ MṚCCH. 26, 1. rocanā- RAGH. 6, 65. GĪT. 11, 12. CAURAP. 1. “glänzend, rein, schön”, = ujjvala TRIK. 3, 3, 346. = viśuddha H. an. MED. = viśada H. an. -kānti CAURAP. 1 (nach dem Sch.: = manohara). — 2) m. a) “eine Büffelart, Bos Gaurus”, häufig neben dem gavaya genannt. AIT. BR. 3, 34. ŚAT. BR. 1, 2, 3, 9. ṚV. 4, 21, 8. gauro na tṛṣitaḥ piva 1, 16, 5. 4, 58, 2. 5, 78, 2. 7, 69, 6. 98, 1. 8, 4, 3. 45, 24. 76, 1. 10, 51, 6. gauramāraṇyamanu te diśāmi VS. 13, 48. 24, 28. ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 16, 3, 14. BHĀG. P. 3, 10, 21. 8, 2, 20. Vgl. gauramṛga. — b) “weisser Senf” MED. n. nach H. an. m. “das Korn”, als “Gewicht” = 3 rājasarṣapa YĀJÑ. 1, 362. Hier eig. adj. mit Ergänzung von sarṣapa aus dem vorhergehenden rājasarṣaya; vgl. gaurasarṣapa. — c) “Grislea tomentosa Roxb.” (dhava) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — d) “der Mond” H. an. MED.; vgl. Ind. St. 2, 262. 286. — e) “der Planet Jupiter” H. ś. 13; vgl. Ind. St. 2, 287. — f) N. pr. eines Joga- Lehrers, eines Sohnes des Śuka von der Pīvarī, HARIV. 981. — g) Bein. des Heiligen Caitanya ANANTASAṁHITĀ im ŚKDR. — 3) f. gaurā = gaurī f. DVIRŪPAK. im ŚKDR. — 4) f. ī “die Kuh des Bos Gaurus”: somo gaurī adhi śritaḥ (P. 1, 1, 19, Sch.) ṚV. 9, 12, 3. madhvaḥ pibanti gauryaḥ. yā indreṇa sayāvarīrvṛṣṇā madanti 1, 84, 10. yathā ha tyadvasavo gauryaṁ citpadi ṣitāmamuñcata 4, 12, 6. gaurīrmimāya (AV.: gaurinmimāya) salilāni takṣatī 1, 164, 41. Auf der letzten Stelle beruht die Deutung des Wortes als Vāc “des mittleren Gebietes” NAIGH. 1, 11. NIR. 11, 40. — b) “Gelbwurz”, = rajanī H. an. MED. RATNAM. 58. SUŚR. 1, 59, 11. 2, 39, 11. 101, 8. = piṅgā (wofür ŚKDR. dāruharidrā substituirt) MED. Auch N. einer Menge anderer Pflanzen: = priyaṁgu H. an. MED. = mañjiṣṭhā, śvetadūrvā, mallikā. tulasī, suvarṇakadalī, ākāsamāṁsī RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) “ein best. gelbes Pigment” (s. gorocanā) H. an. MED. — d) “ein noch nicht menstruirtes (achtjähriges) Mädchen” AK. 2, 6, 1, 8. TRIK. 3, 3, 346. H. 510. H. an. MED. GṚHYASAṁGR. 2, 28. 29. — e) “die Erde” H. an. MED. — f) N. pr. der Tocher des Himālaya u. Gemahlin Śiva’s AK. 1, 1, 1, 32. TRIK. H. 203. H. an. MED. MEGH. 51. 61. gaurī yatra vitastātvaṁ yātā (vgl. u. “k”) RĀJA-TAR. 1, 29. — g) N. pr. der Gemahlin Varuṇa’s H. an. MED. MBH. 5, 3968. 13, 6751. 7637. — h) N. pr. der Mutter Śākyamuni’s (s. māyā) TRIK. 1, 1, 14. — i) N. pr. einer der 16 Vidyādevī H. 240. — k) N. pr. der Gemahlin Prasenajit’s (oder Yuvanāśva’s), welche durch einen Fluch ihres Gatten in den Fluss Bāhudā (vgl. u. f) verwandelt wurde, HARIV. 710. 1716. VP. 362, N. 18. 448, N. 9. — N. pr. der Gemahlin des Virajas und der Mutter Sudhāman’s 82, N. 2. — l) N. pr. eines Flusses (vgl. u. “f”) und k) H. an. MED. MBH. 6, 333. VP. 183. LIA. I, Anh. XXXVIII. Vgl. gaurīgaṅgā ebend. 55. — m) N. pr. einer Rāgiṇī, der Gemahlin des Rāga Mālava (vgl. gauḍa 2, “a”): ārāmamadhyato kumārikā (zwei Kürzen fehlen) śāradendumukhalakṣmīḥ. rāḍīdāḍimavījaṁ (rāḍī!) dadhatī kīrānane gaurī.. SAṁGĪTADĀM. im ŚKDR. Hierher viell. zu ziehen: gaurī vidyātha gāndhārī keśinī mitrasāhvayā. sāvitryā saha sarvāstāḥ pārvatyā yānti pṛṣṭhataḥ.. MBH. 3, 14562. HARIV. 12036. 12041. Vgl. auch u. gāndhāra. — n) N. verschiedener Metra: a) metrical sequenceCOLEBR. Misc. Ess. II, 160 (VII, 10). — b) metrical sequence ebend. 161 (VIII, 4). — g) 4 Mal 26 Längen ebend. 164 (XXI, 3). — 5) n. a) “weisser Senf” H. an. m. nach MED. — b) “die Staubfäden der Lotusblume” H. an. MED. — c) “Safran” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. Diese Bed. hat nach VIŚVA beim Sch. zu CAURAP. 10 kanakagaura n.: kanakagaurakṛtāṅgarāga KAURAP. 10. — d) “Gold” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. gaura 1) ṚV. PRĀT. 17, 9. Ind. St. 8, 273. ŚIŚ. 11, 14. — 4) Z. 1 füge a) nach ī hinzu. — b) VIŚVA bei UJJVAL. zu UṆĀDIS. 1, 66. “Nacht” AUFRECHT. — d) vgl. Spr. 282. — f) Ind. St.5,194.9,58. 106. 108. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 25,a,34. 58,a,10. 71,b,30. 77,b,37. auch mit der Sarasvatī identificirt WILSON, Sel. Works 2, 190. — k) N. pr. verschiedener Frauen Verz. d. Oxf. H. 141,a,21. 321,b, No. 763. 364,b, No. 68. — n) d) metrical sequenceInd. St. 8, 385. — Vgl. mahāgaurī. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 gaura(m) A mountain in the Kuśa island. (Bhīṣma Parva, Chapter 12, Verse 4). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 gaura gaura, I. adj., f. rī, White, yellow, pale red, Megh. 53; Rām. 5, 14, 30. II. m. 1. A kind of buffalo, Bos gaurus, Bhāg. P. 3, 10. 21. 2. White mustard, as a measure, Yājñ. 1, 362. III. f. rī, 1. Turmeric, Suśr. 1, 59, 11. 2. A young girl prior to menstruation, Pañc. iii. d. 213. 3. The wife of Śiva, Megh. 51. 4. The wife of Varuṇa, MBh. 5, 3968. 5. The name of a river, MBh. 6, 333. IV. n. Saffron, Caur. 10. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 gaura f. ī white, yellowish, reddish; brilliant, beautiful. m. = gauramṛga or = gaurasarṣapa, N. of a teacher; f. ī a female buffalo, a young girl before puberty, E. of the wife of Śiva, N. of sev. women. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 gaura gaura, a. (ī) whitish, yellowish, reddish; m. kind of buffalo; white mustard (a grain of it = a measure); -mukha, m. N.; -mṛga, m. kind of buffalo. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 gaura pu° guṅ–gatau ra ni° vṛddhiḥ gura–ghañ prajñādyaṇ vā . 1 candre 2 śvetasarṣape medi° 3 dhavavṛkṣe rājani° 4 pītavarṇe 5 śvetavarṇe 6 aruṇavarṇe ca pu° 7 tadviśiṣṭe tri° striyāṁ gaurā° ṅīṣ . 8 śrīcaitanyadeve mahāprabhau anantamahitā . 9 padmakeśare na° medi° 10 svarṇe 11 kuṅkume ca na° rājani° . tatra śvetavarṇayukte kailāsagauraṁ vṛṣamārurukṣoḥ raghuḥ pītavarṇādye gorocanopanitānta gaure kumā° aruṇavarṇādye kīrṇaiḥ piṣṭātakoghaiḥ kṛta divasamukhaiḥ kuṅkumakṣodagauraḥ ratnāva° taruṇādityagauraiśca śaragauraiśca vānaraiḥ rāmā° ki° 301 sa° . nitāntagauryo hṛtakuṅkameṣvalam kirā° 12 parimāṇamede yathoktaṁ yājña° jālasūryamarīcisthaṁ trasareṇurajaḥ smṛtam . te ‘ṣṭau likṣā ca tāstisro rājasarṣapa ucyate . gaurastu te trayaḥ ṣaṭ ca yavomadhyastu te trayaḥ iti . 13 mṛgabhede pu° strī gaurajo mahiṣaḥ kṛṣṇaḥ śūkaro gavayo ruruḥ . dviśaphāḥ paśavaśceme aviruṣṭraśca sattama! . kharo’śvo’śvataro gauraḥ śarabhaścamarī tathā . ete caikaśaphāḥ kṣattaḥ! bhāga° 3 . 10 . 22 . a° . mahoragāśca bhayato vidravanti sagaurakṛṣṇāḥ śarabhāścamaryaḥ bhāga° 8 . 2 . 16 a° . 14 viśuddhe tri° medi° . kaḍārā° karmadhāraye’sya vā pūrvanipātaḥ gaurapaṭaḥ paṭagauraḥ . |
चित्र – citra | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899citra mf (“ā”) n. conspicuous, excellent, distinguished
mf (“ā”) n. bright, clear, bright-coloured mf (“ā”) n. clear (a sound) mf (“ā”) n. variegated, spotted, speckled (with instr. or in comp.) mf (“ā”) n. agitated (as the sea, opposed to “sama”) mf (“ā”) n. various, different, manifold &c. citra mf (“ā”) n. (execution) having different varieties (of tortures) mf (“ā”) n. strange, wonderful mf (“ā”) n. containing the word “citra” citra mf (“ā”) n. (“am”) ind. so as to be bright mf (“ā”) n. in different ways citra mf (“ā”) n. (to execute) with different tortures citra mf (“ā”) n. (“as”) m. variety of colour mf (“ā”) n. Plumbago zeylanica mf (“ā”) n. Ricinus communis mf (“ā”) n. Jonesia Aśoka mf (“ā”) n. a form of Yama mf (“ā”) n. N. of a king (“citra”) mf (“ā”) n. of a Jābāla-gṛihapati (with the patr. Gauśrāyaṇi), mf (“ā”) n. of a king (with the patr. Gāṅgyāyani) mf (“ā”) n. of a son of Dhritarāṣṭra mf (“ā”) n. of a Draviḍa king, Padma P.v, 20, 1 (v.l. “-trākṣa”) mf (“ā”) n. of a Gandharva citra f. pl. the asterism Citrā citra mf (“ā”) n. (“am”) n. anything bright or coloured which strikes the eyes citra f. a brilliant ornament, ornament citra f. a bright or extraordinary appearance, wonder, ii &c. citra f. (with “yadi” [ iii, 9/10] or “yad” [ 9062 fut. [ 3-3, 150 f. ]) strange, curious (e.g. “citraṁ badhiro vyākaraṇam adhyeṣyate” “it would be strange if a deaf man should learn grammar” citra f. strange! 15652 citra f. the ether, sky citra f. a spot citra f. a sectarial mark on the forehead citra f. = “kuṣṭha” citra f. a picture, sketch, delineation 4532 (“sa-” mfn. = “-ga”) &c. (ifc. f. “ā” 64) citra f. variety of colour citra f. a forest (“vana” for “dhana”?) of variegated appearance on citra f. various modes of writing or arranging verses in the shape of mathematical or other fanciful figures (syllables which occur repeatedly being left out or words being represented in a shortened form) citra f. punning in the form of question and answer, facetious conversation, riddle, iv, 14/v citra f. cf. a- and, “su-citra, dānu-, vi-” citra f. “caitra”. citra “-traka, -traṭa”, &c. see 4. “cit”. Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 citra a. [citr-bhāve ac; ci-ṣṭran vā Uṇ. 4. 163] (1) Bright, clear. (2) Variegated, spotted, diversified. (3) Amusing, interesting, agreeable; Māl. 1. 4. (4) Various, different, manifold; Pt. 1. 136; Ms. 9. 248; Y. 1. 288. (5) Surprising, wonderful, strange; kimatra citraṁ R. 5. 33; S. 2. 15. (6) Perceptible, visible. (7) Conspicuous, excellent, dstinguished. (8) Rough, agitated (as the sea, opp. sama). (9) Clear, loud, perceptible (as a sound). –traḥ (1) The variegated colour. (2) A form of Yama. (3) The Aśoka tree. (4) = citragupta q. v. below. –traṁ (1) A picture, painting, delineation; citre niveśya parikalpitasattvayogā S. 2. 9; punarapi citrīkṛtā kāṁtā S. 6. 20, 13, 21 &c. (2) A brilliant ornament or ornament. (3) An extraordinary appearance, wonder. (4) A sectarial mark on the forehead. (5) Heaven, sky. (6) A spot. (7) The white or spotted leprosy. (8) (In Rhet.) The last of the three main divisions of Kavya (poetry). (It is of two kinds śabdacitra and artha-vācyacitra, and the poetical charm lies mainly in the use of figures of speech dependent on the sound or sense of words. Mammaṭa thus defines it: –śabdacitraṁ vācyacitramavyaṁgyaṁ tvavaraṁ smṛtaṁ K. P. 1. As an instance of śabdacitra may be cited the following verse from R. G. mitrātriputranetrāya trayīśātravaśatrave . gotrārigotrajaitrāya gotrātre te namo namaḥ … (9) Anything bright which strikes the eye. (10) Playing upon words, punning, using conundrums, riddles &c. –traṁ ind. Oh!, how strange!, what a wonder! citraṁ badhiro nāma vyākaraṇamadhyeṣyate Sk. — Comp. –akṣī, –netrā, –locanā a kind of bird commonly called Sārikā. –aṁga a. striped, having a spotted body. ( –gaḥ) 1. a kind of snake. –2. N. of Arjuna. ( –gaṁ) 1. vermilion. –2. yellow orpiment. –aṁgada a. decked with brilliant bracelets. ( –dā) N. of a wife of Arjuna and mother of Babhruvāhana. –aṁgadasūḥ f. an epithet of Satvavatī, mother of Vyāsa. –annaṁ rice dressed with coloured condiments; Y. 1. 304. –apūpaḥ a kind of cake. –arpita a. committed to a picture, painted. -āraṁbha a. painted; R. 2. 31; Ku. 3. 42. –ākṛtiḥ f. a painted resemblance, portrait. –āyasaṁ steel. –āraṁbhaḥ a painted scene, outline of a picture; V. 1. 4. v. l. –uktiḥ f. 1. agreeable or eloquent discourse; jayaṁti te paṁcamanādamitracitroktisaṁdarbhavibhūṣaṇeṣu Vikr. 1. 10. –2. a voice from heaven. –3. a surprising tale. –odanaḥ boiled rice coloured with turmeric &c. –kaṁṭhaḥ a pigeon. –kathālāpaḥ telling agreeable or charming stories. –kaṁbalaḥ 1. painted cloth used as an elephant’s housing. –2. a variegated carpet. –kara. 1. a painter. –2. an actor. –karman n. 1. an extraordinary act. –2. ornamenting, decorating. –3. a picture; Mu. 2. 4. –4. magic. (–m.). 1. a magician, one who works wonders. –2. a painter. -vid m. 1. a painter. –2. a magician. –kāyaḥ 1. a tiger in general. –2. a leopard or panther. –kāraḥ 1. a painter. –2. N. of a mixed tribe; (sthapaterapi gāṁdhikyāṁ citrakāro vyajāyata Parāśara). –kūṭaḥ N. of a hill and district near Prayāga; R. 12. 15, 13. 47, U. 1. –kṛt a. astonishing, surprising. (–m) a painter. –kolaḥ a kind of lizard. –kriyā painting. –kṣatra a. Ved. having manifold power, or one whose wealth is visible. –ga, –gata a. 1. painted, drawn in a picture. –2. coloured, variegated. –gaṁdhaṁ yellow orpiment. –guptaḥ one of the beings in Yama’s world recording the vices and virtues of mankind; Mu. 1. 20. –gṛhaṁ a painted room. –jalpaḥ a random or incoherent talk, talk on various subjects. –taṁḍuṁla a medicinal plant said to possess anthelmintic virtues. –tvac m. the Bhūrja tree. –daṁḍakaḥ the cotton-plant. –nyasta a. painted, drawn in a picture; Ku. 2. 24. –pakṣaḥ the francoline partridge. –paṭaḥ, –ṭṭaḥ 1. a painting, a picture. –2. a coloured or chequered cloth. –pada a. 1. divided into various parts. –2. full of graceful expressions. –pādā the bird called Sārikā. –picchakaḥ a peacock. –puṁkhaḥ a kind of arrow. –pṛṣṭhaḥ a sparrow. –pratikṛtiḥ f. representation in colours, a painting, picture. –phalakaṁ a tablet for painting, a pictureboard. –barhaḥ a peacock. –bhānu a. of a variegated colour, shining with light. ( –nuḥ) 1. fire. –2. the sun; (citrabhānurvibhātīti dine ravau rātrau vahnau K. P. 2 given as an instance of one of the modes of aṁjana). –3. N. of Bhairava. –4. the Arka plant. –5. Śiva. –6. an epithet of the Aśvins. –7. the first year of the first cycle of Jupiter. –bhūta a. painted. –maṁḍalaḥ a kind of snake. –mṛgaḥ the spotted antelope. –mekhalaḥ a peacock. –yodhin a. fighting in a wonderful manner. (–m.) an epithet of Arjuna. –rathaḥ 1. the sun. –2. N. of a king of the Gandharvas, one of the sixteen sons of Kaśyapa by his wife Muni; atra munestanayaścitrasenādīnāṁ paṁcadaśānāṁ bhrātṝṇāmadhiko guṇaiḥ ṣoḍaśaścitraratho nāma samutpannaḥ K. 136; V. 1. –likhanaṁ painting. –likhita a. 1. painted. –2. dumb, motionless (as in a picture). –lekha a. of beautiful outlines, highly arched; rucistava kalāvatī ruciracitralekhe bhruvau Gīt. 10. ( –khā) 1. a portrait, picture. –2. N. of a friend and companion of Uṣā, daughter of Bāṇa. [When Uṣā related to her her dream, she suggested the idea of taking the portraits of all young princes in the neighbourhood; and on Uṣā’s recognising Aniruddha, Chitralekha, by means of her magical power, conveyed him to her palace]. –lekhakaḥ a painter. –lekhanikā a painter’s brush. –vadālaḥ the sheat-fish. –vanaṁ N. of a forest near the Gaṇḍakī. –vājaḥ a cock. –vicitra a. 1. variously coloured, variegated. –2. multiform. –vidyā the art of painting. –śālā a painter’s studio. –śikhaṁḍin m. an epithet of the seven sages: marīci, aṁgiras, atri, pulastya, pulaha, kratu and vasiṣṭha. -jaḥ an epithet of Bṛhaspati. –śiras m., –śīrṣakaḥ a kind of venomous insect. –śrīḥ great or wonderful beauty. –saṁstha a. painted. –hastaḥ a particular position of the hands in fighting. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch citra (von 4. cit) Uṇ. 4, 165. 1) adj. f. ā a) “augenfällig; sichtbar, ausgezeichnet”: ūti ṚV. 2, 17, 8. 4, 32, 5. 5, 40, 3. abhiṣṭi 1, 119, 8. 8, 3, 2. sa ciketa sahīyasāgniścitreṇa karmaṇā 39, 5. varūtha 56, 3. grābha 70, 1. vakṣatha 10, 115, 1. vasu 9, 19, 1. rādhas 1, 22, 7. 44, 1 u.s.w. draviṇa 2, 23, 15. 10, 36, 13. uṣo vājaṁ hi vaṁsva yaścitro mānuṣe jane 1, 48, 11. 4, 22, 10. 36, 9. sa citra citraṁ citayantamasme citrakṣatra citratamaṁ vayodhām. candraṁ rayiṁ gṛṇate yuvasva 6, 6, 7. citraṁ ketuṁ kṛṇute cekitānā 1, 93, 15. 94, 5. 113, 1. ā citra citriṇīṣvā. citraṁ kṛṇoṣyūtaye 4, 32, 2. — b) “hell, licht; hellfarbig”: uṣasaḥ ṚV. 7, 75, 3. 6, 60, 2. agni 1, 71, 1. 4, 7, 1. jyotis 5, 63, 4. sūro na citraḥ 9, 86, 34. sa citreṇa cikite bhāsā 2, 3, 5. ā yaḥ svārṇa bhānunā citro vibhātyarciṣā 8, 4. raśmi 9, 100, 8. nakṣatra TBR. 3, 1, 2, 1. Indra ṚV. 1, 142, 4. 2, 13, 13 u.s.w. die Marut 1, 165, 13. 8, 7, 7. abhra 5, 63, 3. ratha 3, 2, 15. aśvā 1, 30, 21. 10, 75, 7. vastra 1, 134, 4. rūpa 5, 52, 11. — c) “verschiedenfarbig, bunt, scheckig” AK. 1, 1, 4, 26. TRIK. 3, 3, 347. H. 1398. an. 2, 418. MED. r. 34. srajaḥ N. 4, 8. puṣpavatīṁ citrāṁ vanamālām R. 5, 4, 2. MṚCCH. 92, 7. In Verb. mit einem instr. oder nach einem im instr. zu fassenden Worte im comp.: sauvarṇastvaṁ mṛgo bhūtvā citro rajatavindubhiḥ R. 3, 44, 16. kāñcanacitrakārmuka 8, 25. vaidūryamaṇicitre – aṅgade 6, 112, 88. ratnacitra (ratha) VARĀH. BṚH. S. 42 (43), 6. mukuṭāṅgadacitrāṅgī R. 1, 45, 41. — d) “bewegt” (vom Meere), Gegens. sama R. 3, 39, 12. — e) “hell, vernehmlich” (von Tönen): vācaṁ parjanyaścitrāṁ vadati tviṣīmatīm ṚV. 5, 63, 6. arka 6, 66, 9. 10, 112, 9. pavamāno ajījanaddivaścitraṁ na tanyatum 9, 61, 16. — f) “mannichfaltig, verschieden, allerlei”: vanarājayaḥ R. 6, 15, 6. kathāḥ MBH. 1, 3. R. 1, 3, 10. -bhāṣya MBH. 5, 1240. vadhopāyaiḥ M. 9, 248. YĀJÑ. 1, 287. ARJ. 7, 14. SUŚR. 1, 237, 17. 241, 14. 2, 93, 6. PAÑCAT. I, 196. 429. BHĀG. P. 1, 6, 12. 13. 3, 19, 6. adv.: citraṁ saṁkrīḍamānāstāḥ krīḍanairvividhaiḥ R. 1, 9, 14. vajracitrapariṣkṛte (aṅgade) R. 6, 112, 88. — g) “wunderbar” MED.; vgl. 4,b. — h) “das Wort” citra “enthaltend”: citre gāyati ŚAT. BR. 7, 4, 1, 24. KĀTY. ŚR.17, 4, 4. — 2) m. a) “Buntheit” BHAR. zu AK. ŚKDR. — b) N. verschied. Pflanzen: a) “Plumbago zeylanica Lin.” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. MED. l. 11. — b) “Ricinus communis.” — g) “Jonesia Asoka” (aśoka) “Roxb.” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) “eine Form des” Jama TITHYĀDIT. im ŚKDR. — d) N. pr. eines Königs (parox.) ṚV. 8, 21, 18. eines Gāñgyāyani Ind. St. 1, 395. Gauśrāyaṇi ebend. eines Sohnes des Dhṛtarāṣṭra MBH. 1, 2730. 4543. 7, 5594. eines Königs von Draviḍa PADMA-P. in Verz. d. B. H. No. 457. — 3) f. ā a) “Spica virginis”, in der alten Reihe das 12te, in der neuen das 14te Mondhaus, COLEBR. Misc. Ess. II, 337. 425. 463. 481. Ind. St. 1, 99. TRIK. 3, 3, 347. H. 112. H. an. MED. AV. 19, 7, 3. TS. 2, 4, 6, 1. citrā nakṣatraṁ mitro devatā 4, 4, 10, 2. TBR. 1, 1, 2, 5. ŚAT. BR. 2, 1, 2, 13. 17. KAUŚ. 75. KĀTY. ŚR. 4, 7, 4. MBH. 5, 4842. 6, 79. 13, 3268. 4261. HARIV. 4257. R. 3, 23, 11. 5, 18, 14. RAGH. 1, 46. LALIT. 117. pl. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 11, 58. citrāsvātī gaṇa rājadantādi zu P. 2, 2, 31. — b) “eine Schlangenart” H. an. MED. — c) N. verschied. Pflanzen: a) “Anthericum tuberosum Roxb.” oder “Salvinia cucullata Roxb.” = mūṣikaparṇī AK. 2, 4, 3, 6. = ākhuparṇī H. an. MED. — b) “Cucumis maderaspatanus” AK. 2, 4, 5, 22. H. an. MED. “Koloquinthe” RATNAM. 15. — g) = dantī H. an. MED. RATNAM. 34. — d) “Ricinus communis” RATNAM. 3. — e) “Myrobalanenbaum” (āmalakī) RATNAM. 90. — z) = mṛgervāru. — h) gaṇḍadūrvā. — J) “Rubia Munjista” (mañjiṣṭhā) “Roxb.” RĀJAN. – SUŚR. 1, 144, 14. 2, 21, 15. 23, 2, wahrscheinlich in der Bed. greek — d) N. verschiedener Metra: a) “eine Art” Mātrāsamaka (“4 Mal 16 Moren”) COLEBR. Misc. Ess. II, 155 (2, 4). 86. — b) metrical sequence ebend. 161 (X, 11). — g) metrical sequence ebend. 162 (XI, 3); hier bei COLEBR. citra. — e) “Schein, Täuschung” (māyā) MED. — f) N. pr. = citrāyāṁ jātā P. 4, 3, 34, Vārtt. 1. a) einer Apsaras H. an. — b) einer Schwester Kṛṣṇa’s und Gemahlin Arjuna’s, = subhadrā TRIK. H. an. MED. HARIV. 1952. — g) einer Tochter Gada’s (v. l. Kṛṣṇa’s) HARIV. 9194. — d) eines Flusses MED. — 4) n. SIDDH.K.249,b,2. a) “eine helle, glänzende” oder “farbige Erscheinung; ein in die Augen fallender Gegenstand”, daher auch “funkelndes Geschmeide, Schmuck”: ā revatī rodasī citramasthāt ṚV. 3, 61, 6. kadasya citraṁ cikite 4, 23, 2. sarvāṇi hi citrāṇyagniḥ (hierher oder zu b) ŚAT. BR.6,1,3,20.7,4,1,24. na yāsu citraṁ dadṛśe na yakṣam ṚV. 7, 61, 5. ā vaścitramā vo vratamā vo ‘haṁ samitiṁ dade 10, 166, 4. nakṣatravihitāsau (der Himmel) citravihiteyam (die Erde) TS. 2, 5, 2, 5. citrāṇyaṅgairnakṣatrāṇi rūpeṇa (prīṇāmi) VS. 25, 9. PAÑCAV. BR. 18, 9. dakṣiṇāvatāmidimāni citrā dakṣiṇāvatāṁ divi sūryāsaḥ ṚV. 1, 125, 6. uṣastaccitramā bharāsmabhyam. yena tokaṁ ca tanayaṁ ca dhāmahe “bring uns den Schmuck, dass wir Kind und Enkel besitzen” 92, 13. sā hīyaṁ (rātriḥ) saṁgṛhyeva citrāṇi vasati die “Sterne” als “Edelsteine” gedacht ŚAT. BR. 2, 3, 4, 22. citraṁ paścātsyātprajā vai citraṁ citraṁ hyasya prajā bhavati 13, 8, 1, 13; nach dem Schol. zu KĀTY. ŚR. 21, 3, 23 und ṢAḌV. BR. 2, 10 soll es hier = anekaprakāraṁ vanam “verschiedenfarbiges” oder — “gestaltetes Gehölz” sein. — b) “eine ungewöhnliche Erscheinung, Wunder” AK. 1, 1, 7, 19. 3, 4, 25, 180. H. 303. H. an. MED. citraṁ vā abhūma ya iyataḥ sapatnānabadhiṣma ŚAT. BR. 2, 1, 2, 17. taccitramiva me pratibhāti ŚĀK. 110, 17. BHARTṚ. 3, 39. PAÑCAT. 256, 12. ŚṚÑGĀRAT. 21. BHĀG. P. 5, 1, 36. vākyamapratirūpaṁ hi na citraṁ strīṣu R. 3,51, 32. BHĀG. P. 1, 19, 20. kimatra citraṁ yadi… ŚĀK. 35, 21. naitaccitraṁ yadayam .. 48. KATHĀS. 18, 359. fg. naitaccitraṁ – tvayi – yat HARIV. 9062. citraṁ badhiro nāma vyākaraṇamadhyeṣyate “es wäre ein Wunder, wenn” P. 3, 3, 151, Sch. citraṁ drakṣyati nāmāndhaḥ kṛṣṇaṁ paśyedyadīśvaram VOP. 25, 15; vgl. 14 und P. 3, 3, 150. fg. yādavā iti citraṁ naḥ śaktāḥ sthātuṁ raṇe “es wäre ein Wunder, wenn die J. vermöchten” HARIV. 15652. kṣipto ‘pi nāpataccitram “o Wunder!” KATHĀS. 5, 86. citraṁ kathaṁ tvayā jñātā sā saṁjñā 7, 73. RĀJA-TAR. 1, 85 (mitten in den Satz eingeschoben). 4, 586. — c) “Luftraum, Himmel” H. an. — d) “Fleck”: yathaiva sadṛśo rūpe mātāpitrorhi jāyate. vyāghraścitraiḥ MBH. 13, 2605. — e) “Sectenzeichen auf der Stirn” TRIK. H. 653. H. an. MED. lalitavanitāḥ – sacitrāḥ MEGH. 65. — f) “weisser Aussatz” H. 466, falsche Lesart für śvitra; vgl. übrigens carmacitraka. — g) “Bild, Gemälde; Malerei” AK. 3, 4, 25, 180. H. 922. H. an. MED. paṭe citramivārpitam MBH. 13, 7692. citre ‘pi cālikhatyaśvān SĀV. 2, 13. citre niveśya ŚĀK. 42. 141. 89, 2. citrairivārpitam (vgl. citrārpita) “gemalt” MBH. 13, 2660. citraṁ yathāśrayamṛte SĀṁKHYAK. 41. ye ca citraṁ bhajanti vai “und die sich mit der Malerei abgeben” R. GORR. 2, 90, 23. sacitra “bemalt” HARIV. 4532. — h) “Buntheit” AK. 1, 1, 4, 26. TRIK. H. 1398. H. an. MED. — i) Bez. “verschiedener Arten, künstliche Verse u.s.w. in Form von allerlei Figuren durch Nichtwiederholung wiederkehrender Silben oder Wörter in abgekürzter Weise künstlich für das Auge darzustellen”: padmādyākārahetutve varṇānāṁ citramucyate SĀH. D. 645; vgl. HAEB. Anth. 291. fgg., wo verschiedene solcher Figuren mitgetheilt werden. — k) “ein Wortspiel in Form von Frage und Antwort”: praśnottarāntarābhinnamuttaraṁ citramucyate KUVALAJ. 145, “b”, mit dem Beispiele: ke dārapoṣaṇaratāḥ (dāra = kṣetra, als Antwort gilt kedāra-) ke kheṭāḥ (khe’ṭāḥ) kiṁ calaṁ vayaḥ (“Vögel” und “Alter”). — Vgl. acitra, dānu-, vi-, su-, caitra. citra 1) f) -ratāni Verz. d. Oxf. H. 215,b,29. citrā yogāḥ unter den 64 Kalā 217,a,4. 216,a,11. -vadha “eine qualificirte Todesstrafe” DAŚAK. in BENF. Chr. 193, 4. citramenaṁ ghātayiṣyasi “unter verschiedenen Martern” 198, 3. — g) namo ‘stu citraprabhāvāya dhanāya tasmai Spr. 4777. — 2) d) Gārgyāyaṇi Verz. d. Oxf. H. 276,a,30. — 3) a) TS. 7, 4, 8, 2. PAÑCAV. BR. 5, 9, 1. SŪRYAS. 8, 21. 9, 12. — d) vgl. Ind. St. 8, 315. fg. — f) e) eines Felsens BHĀG. P. 12, 8, 17. — 4) f) vgl. citrakuṣṭha. — g) (tām) citre likhitvā KATHĀS. 51, 126. -rodanāntardhāna Verz. d. Oxf. H. 322,b,4. fg. — i) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 208,a,5 v. u. — k) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 211,b,9. — i) k) “Wort- und Lautspiel”: keciccitrākhyaṁ tṛtīyaṁ kāvyabhedamicchanti tadāhuḥ. śabdacitraṁ vācyacitramavyaṅgyaṁ tvavaraṁ smṛtam SĀH. D. 116, 19. fg. śabdacitra, arthacitra, ubhayacitra PRATĀPAR. 12,b. 13,a. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 citra 1 I A son of Dhṛtarāṣṭra killed in war by Bhīmasona. (M.B. Droṇa Parva, Chapter 136, Verse 20). citra 2 II A gajarāja (king elephant) with whom Subrahmaṇya, as a child, used to play. (M.B. Vana Parva, Chapter 225, Verse 23). citra 3 III A hero who fought on the Kaurava side against the Pāṇḍavas. He was killed by Prativindhya. (M.B. Karṇa Parva, Chapter 14, Verse 32). citra 4 IV A hero from the Cedi Kingdom who fought on the Pāṇḍava side against the Kauravas. Karṇa killed him. (M.B. Karṇa Parva, Chapter 56, Verse 46). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 citra 1. cit + ra, I. adj. 1. Visible (ved.). 2. Clear, shining, Chr. 293, 2 = Rigv. i. 88, 2. 3. Variegated, Chr. 2, 21. 4. Spotted, Rām. 3, 48, 12. 5. Various, Man. 9, 248. 6. Fluctuating, Rām. 3, 52, 15. 7. Wonderful, Rām. 3, 35, 4. 8. Surprised, Rājat. 5, 2. 9. Uncommon, rigorous, Daśak. in Chr. 193, 4; adv. in a rigorous manner, ib. 198, 3. II. f. trā, The name of a lunar mansion, Spica virginis, Rām. 3, 23, 11. III. n. 1. A surprising appearance, Śāk. 110, 17; wonder, Rām. 3, 51, 26. 2. A spot, MBh. 13, 2605. 3. A picture, MBh. 13, 7692. 4. Painting, Rām. 2, 90, 23 Gorr. — Comp. vi-, I. adj. 1. variegated, spotted. 2. painted. 3. handsome. 4. surprising. II. n. 1. variegated (the colour). 2. surprise. 3. speech implying apparently the reverse of the intended object. sa-, adj. 1. painted, Hariv. 4532. 2. containing pictures, Megh. 65. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 citra a. conspicuous, visible, bright, clear, loud, variegated, manifold, various, excellent, extraordinary, strange, wonderful. f. ā N. of a lunar mansion. n. anything bright or shining, esp. jewel, ornament, picture; extraordinary appearance, wonder (often as exclamation). Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 citra cit-ra, a. manifest, visible, distinguished, clear, bright; distinct, audible (sound); variegated, speckled, dappled; various, manifold; qualified with torture (punishment); wonderful; n. bright-coloured object, glittering ornament; jewel; picture; surpring phenomenon, wonder. Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 citra t ka kṣaṇikekṣaṇe . lekhye’dbhute . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (adantacurāṁ-paraṁ-sakaṁ-seṭ .) kṣaṇikekṣaṇaṁ kadāciddarśanam . citrayati citrāpayati rāhuṁ lokaḥ kadācit paśyatītyarthaḥ . citrayati pratimāṁ lokaḥ . iti durgādāsaḥ .. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 citra kṣaṇike–lekhye adbhute ca ada° cu° ubha° saka° seṭ . citrayati te acicitrat ta . citritaḥ citraḥ . citra na° citra–bhāve ac ci–ṣṭran vā . 1 tilake . 2 ālekhye 3 adbhute 4 karvūravarṇe 5 tadyukte tri° medi° . 6 ākāśe 7 kuṣṭhabhede hema° . 8 yamabhede pu° vṛkodarāya citrāya yamatarpaṇamantraḥ . 9 eraṇḍaṁvṛkṣe 10 aśokavṛkṣe 11 citrakavṛkṣe rājani° 12 citragupte citraguptaśabde dṛśyam 13 śabdālaṅkārabhede na° alaṅkāraśabde 390 pṛ° dṛśyam . citrasaṁjñamīritaṁ pramāṇikāpadadvayam vṛ° ra° ukte 15 ṣoḍaśākṣarapādake chandobhede . nisargacitrojjvalasūkṣmapakṣmaṇā citraṁ cakāra padamardhapulāyitena ruciracitratanūruhaśālibhiḥ iti ca māghaḥ . |
चित्राङ्ग – citrāṅga | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899citrāṅga mfn. having a variegated body
citrāṅga m. a kind of snake citrāṅga m. Plumbago rosea citrāṅga m. N. of a son of Dhṛita-rāṣṭra citrāṅga m. of an antelope citrāṅga m. of a dog citrāṅga n. vermilion citrāṅga n. yellow orpiment citrāṅga n. Rubia munjista citrāṅga n. N. of a courtesan cxxii, 68 citrāṅga n. “-sadana” m. “Citrāṅga-killer”, Arjuna Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch citrāṅga (citra + aṅga) 1) adj. “einen bunten, gesprenkelten Körper habend, gesprenkelt” VYUTP. 204. — 2) m. a) “eine Schlangenart.” — b) “Plumbago zeylanica Lin.” — c) N. einer anderen Pflanze (raktacitraka) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — d) N. pr. eines Sohnes des Dhṛtarāṣṭra MBH. 1, 4545. Bein. Arjuna’s H. ś. 137. — e) N. pr. einer Antilope HIT. 18, 1. PAÑCAT. 140, 23. eines Hundes 232, 25. — 3) f. ī a) “Ohrwurm, Julus.” — b) N. einer Pflanze, “Rubia Munjista” (mañjiṣṭhā) “Roxb.”, RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — 4) n. a) “Zinnober.” — b) “Auripigment” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. citrāṅga 2) d) -vadha Verz. d. Oxf. H. 13,b,15. — e) KATHĀS. 61, 122. — 3) c) N. pr. einer Hetäre KATHĀS. 122, 68. citrāṅga 2) d) Bein. Arjuna’s H. ś. 137 zu streichen, da hier citrāṅgasādana zu lesen ist, wie schon das Metrum zeigt. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 citrāṅga 1 I (CITRĀṄGADA, ŚRUTĀNTAKA). One of the hundred sons of Dhṛtarāṣṭra. In the great battle Bhīmasena killed him. (Śloka 11, Chapter 26, Śalya Parva). citrāṅga 2 II A warrior. In the Aśvamedhayajña performed by Śrī Rāma Śatrughna followed the sacrificial horse and Citrāṅga blocked them on their way. Śatrughna killed him. (Chapter 27, Pātāla Kāṇḍa, Padma Purāṇa). Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 citrāṅga m. N. of an antilope (lit. having a spotted body). Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 citrāṅga citra+aṅga, m. Dapple-body, N. of a deer and of a dog; ī, f. N. of a courtesan; -aṅgada, a. adorned with brilliant bracelets; m. N. of a fairy, of a Gandharva, and of a recorder of human actions in Yama’s realm; -anna, n. rice coloured by the addition of ingredients; (a) -magha, a. having splendid gifts; -ārambha, a. painted; -arpita, pp. id.: -ārambha, a. id.. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 citrāṅga pu° 1 dhṛtarāṣṭraputrabhede . ayobāhurmahāvāhuścitrāṅga ścitrakuṇḍalaḥ bhā° 117 a° tatputroktau . 2 citrāṅgayuktamātre tri° . 3 raktacitrake 4 sarpabhede 5 citrake (cite) rājani° . citramaṅgaṁ yasmāt . 6 haritāle 7 mañjiṣṭhāyāṁ 8 hiṅgule ca na° rājani° . |
जरठ – jaraṭha | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899jaraṭha mfn. old (śāntiś. iv, 17)
mfn. bent, drooping mfn. for “jaṭhara”, hard, solid mfn. harsh, cruel mfn. strong, violent xi f. mfn. yellowish (old leaves’ colour) jaraṭha m. old age Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 jaraṭha a. [jṝ bā -aṭha] (1) Hard, solid. (2) Old, aged; ayamatijaraṭhāḥ prakāmagurvīḥ pariṇatadikkarikāstaṭīrbibharti Śi. 4. 29 (where jaraṭha means ‘hard’ also). (3) Decayed, decrepit, infirm. (4) Bent, bowed down, drooping. (5) Pale, yellowish-white. (6) Full-grown, ripe, matured; jaraṭhakamala Śi. 11. 14. (7) Hard-hearted, cruel. –ṭhaḥ (1) N. of Paṇdu, father of the five Pāṇḍavas. (2) Old age. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch jaraṭha (wie eben) Uṇ. 1, 100, Sch. 1) adj. a) “hinfällig, alt, bejahrt” H. an. 3, 175. BHĀG. P. 6, 1, 25. 9, 6, 41. RĀJA-TAR. 2, 170. ati- SĀY. zu ṚV. 1, 125, 1. — b) “hart” H. 1387. H. an. = karkaśa und kaṭhina MED. ṭh. 13. — c) “gelblich” (die Farbe der “alten” Blätter) MED. — 2) m. “Alter” VIŚVA im ŚKDR. — Vgl. jaṭhara. jaraṭha 1) a) Spr. 808. BHĀG. P. 11, 23, 25. — b) fehlerhaft für jaṭhara SĀH. D. 103, 22. Spr. 814, v. l. (Th. 2, S. 330). VIŚVA bei UJJVAL. zu UṆĀDIS. 1, 102. — c) VIŚVA a. a. O. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 jaraṭha jaraṭha (vb. jṛ10), adj. Old, Bhāg. P. 6, 1, 25. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 jaraṭha a. old, aged; hard, solid, strong. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 jaraṭha tri° jṝ–bā° aṭha . 1 karkaśe kaṭhine 2 pāṇḍunṛpe pu° medi° . 3 jīrṇe tri° hema° 4 jarāyāṁ viśvaḥ . nīrandhrāstanumālikhantu jaraṭhacchedānalagranthayaḥ sā° da° . ayamati jaraṭhāḥ prakāmagurvīḥ māghaḥ . 5 pariṇate ca . jaraṭhakamalakandacchedagaurairmayūkhaiḥ māghaḥ . |
तालकम् – tālakam | Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890
tālakam (1) Yellow orpiment. (2) A fragrant earth. (3) A bolt, latch. –kī The vinous exudation of the palm, toddy. — Comp. –ābha a. green. ( –bhaḥ) the green colour. |
पत्रम् – patram | Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890
patram [pat-ṣṭran] (1) A leaf (of a tree); dhatte bharaṁ kusumapatraphalāvalīnāṁ Bv. 1. 94. (2) The leaf of a flower, lotus &c.; nīlotpalapatradhārayā S. 1. 18. (3) A leaf for writing upon, a paper, a leaf written upon; patramāropya dīyatāṁ S. 6 ‘commit to writing;’ V. 2. 14. (4) A letter, document; Pt. 1. 403. (5) Any thin leaf or plate of metal, a gold-leaf. (6) The wing of a bird, a pinion, feather of an arrow; R. 2. 31; Ku. 3. 27. (8) A vehicle in general (car, horse, camel &c.); diśaḥ papāta patreṇa veganiṣkaṁpaketunā R. 15. 84; N. 3. 16. (9) Painting the person (particularly the face) with musk, sandal-juice or other fragrant substances; racaya kucayoḥ patraṁ citraṁ kuruṣva kapolayoḥ Gīt. 12; R. 13. 55. (10) The blade of a sword, knife &c. (11) A knife, dagger. — Comp. –aṁgaṁ 1. the Bhūrja tree. –2. red sanders. –aṁguliḥ drawing lines of painting with the finger on the person (throat, forehead &c.) with coloured sandal, saffron, or any other fragrant substance. –aṁjanaṁ 1. ink. –2. blacking. –āḍhyaṁ the root of long pepper. –āvaliḥ f. 1. red chalk. –2. a row of leaves. –3. the lines of painting drawn on the body with cosmetics as a decoration. –āvalī 1. a row of leaves. –2. = -āvali (3). –3. mixture of young Aśvattha leaves with barley and honey. — āhāraḥ feeding on leaves. –ūrṇaṁ wove-silk, a silk-garment; snānīyavastrakriyayā patrorṇaṁ vopayujyate M. 5. 12. –ullāsaḥ the bud or eye of a plant. –kāhalā the noise or sound made by the flapping of wings or rustling of leaves. –kṛcchraṁ a sort of penance, drinking the infusion of leaves of various plants. –ghanā a plant with full leaves (sātala). –jhaṁkāraḥ the current of a river. –dārakaḥ a saw. –nāḍikā the fibre of a leaf. –paraśuḥ a file. –pālaḥ a long dagger, large knife. (–lī) 1. the feathered part of an arrow. –2. a pair of scissors. –pāśyā an ornament (a gold-leaf) on the forehead. –puṭaṁ a vessel of leaves; R. 2. 65. –puṣpā the holy basil. –baṁdhaḥ adorning with flowers. –bā (vā) laḥ an oar. –bhaṁgaḥ –bhāṁgiḥ –gī f. drawing lines or figures of painting on the face and person with fragrant and coloured substances, such as musk, saffron, sandal-juice, yellow pigment &c., as a mark of decoration; kastūrīvarapatrabhaṁganikaro mṛṣṭo na gaṁḍasthale S. Til. 7 (used frequently in K.). –yauvanaṁ a young leaf or sprout. –raṁjanaṁ embellishing a page. –rathaḥ a bird; vyarthīkṛtaṁ patrarathena tena N. 3. 6. -iṁdraḥ N. of Garuḍa. -iṁdraketuḥ N. of Viṣṇu; R. 18. 13. –latā a long knife or poniard. –re (le) khā, –vallarī, –valliḥ, –vallī f. see patrabhaṁga above; R. 6. 72, 16. 67; Rs. 6. 7; Śi. 8. 56, 59. –vāja a. furnished with feathers (as an arrow). –vāhaḥ 1. a bird; Śi. 18. 73. –2. an arrow. –3. a letter-carrier. –viśeṣakaḥ lines of painting &c.; see patrabhaṁga; Ku. 3. 33; R. 3. 55, 9. 29. –veṣṭaḥ a kind of ear-ring; R. 16. 67. –śākaḥ a vegetable consisting chiefly of leaves. –śirā the vein or fibre of a leaf. — śreṣṭhaḥ the Bilva tree. –sūciḥ f. a thorn. –himaṁ wintry or snowy weather. |
पांडु – pāṁḍu | Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890
pāṁḍu a. Pale-white, whitish, pale, yellowish; vikalakaraṇaḥ pāṁḍucchāyaḥ śucā paridurbalaḥ U. 3. 22. –ḍuḥ (1) The pale-white or yellowish-white colour. (2) Jaundice. (3) A white elephant. (4) N. of the father of the Pāṇḍavas. [He was begotten by Vyāsa on Ambālika, one of the widows of Vichitravīrya. He was called Pāṇḍu, because he was born pale (pāṁḍu) by reason of his mother having become quite pale with fear when in private with the sage Vyāsa; (yasmātpāṁḍutvamāpannā virūpaṁ prekṣya mamiha . tasmādeva sutaste vai pāṁḍureva bhaviṣyati Mb.). He was prevented by a curse from having progeny himself; so he allowed his first wife Kuntī to make use of a charm she had acquired from Durvāsas for the birth of sons. She gave birth to Yudhiṣṭhira, Bhīma and Arjuna; and Mādri, his other wife, by the use of the same charm, gave birth to Nakula and Sahadeva. One day Pandu forgot the curse under which he was labouring, and made bold to embrace Mādri, but he fell immediately dead in her arms.] — Comp. –āmayaḥ jaundice. –kaṁbalaḥ 1. a white blanket. –2. a warm upper garment. –3. the housing of a royal elephant. –kaṁbalin m. 1. a carriage covered with a woollen blanket. –2. the housings of a royal elephant. –putraḥ a son of Pāṇḍu, any one of the five Pāṇḍavas. –pṛṣṭha a. ‘white-backed’, having no auspicious marks on the body, one from whom nothing great is to be expected. –bhūmaḥ a region full of chalky soil. –mṛttikā 1. white or pale soil. –2. the opal. –mṛd f. chalk. –rāgaḥ whiteness, pallor. –rogaḥ jaundice. –lekhaḥ a sketch made with chalk; a rough draft or sketch made on the ground, board &c.: pāṁḍulekhena phalake bhumau vā prathamaṁ likhaṁt . nyūnādhikaṁ tu saṁśodhya paścātpatre niveśayet .. Vyāsa. –śarkarā light-coloured gravel (pramehabheda) –śarmilā an epithet of Draupadī. –sopākaḥ N. of a mixed tribe; cāṁḍālātpāṁḍusopākastvaksāravyavahāravān Ms. 10. 37. |
पांडुकः – pāṁḍukaḥ | Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890
pāṁḍukaḥ (1) The yellowish-white colour. (2) Jaundice. (3) N. of Paṇḍu. |
पाण्डु – pāṇḍu | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pāṇḍu mfn. (“paṇḍ”?) yellowish white, white, pale &c.
mfn. jaundiced pāṇḍu m. jaundice pāṇḍu m. pale or yellowish white colour pāṇḍu m. a white elephant pāṇḍu m. Trichosanthes Dioeca pāṇḍu m. a species of shrub pāṇḍu m. N. of a son of Vyāsa by the wife of Vicitra-vīrya and brother of Dhṛita-rāṣṭra and Vidura (he was father of the five Pāṇḍavas) &c. pāṇḍu m. of a son of Janam-ejaya and brother of Dhṛita-rāṣṭra pāṇḍu m. of a son of Dhātri by āyatī (v.l. “prāṇa”) pāṇḍu m. of an attendant of śiva pāṇḍu m. of a Nāgarāja pāṇḍu pl. of a people in Madhya-deśa (v.l. “pāṇḍya” and “-ḍva”) pāṇḍu f. Glycine Debilis Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch pāṇḍu UJJVAL. zu UṆĀDIS. 1, 38. 1) adj. (f. gleichfalls pāṇḍu P. 4, 1, 44, Vārtt., Sch. VOP. 4, 16) “weisslich gelb, weiss, bleich” AK. 1, 1, 4, 23. 3, 4, 13, 53. TRIK. 3, 3, 113. H. 1393. an. 2, 122. MED. ḍ. 18. HALĀY. 4, 47. yathā pāṇḍvāvikam ŚAT. BR. 14, 5, 3, 10. kṛśā pāṇḍuśca lakṣyase MBH. 4, 519. SUŚR. 1, 61, 10. 85, 20. 121, 11. 12. -vṛkṣapraroha 135, 8. 158, 13. -gātratā 263, 17. pāṇḍvavabhāsa 2, 2, 8. śaśāṅkaḥ kāminīgaṇḍapāṇḍuḥ MṚCCH. 25, 24. kṣaumam – indupāṇḍu ŚĀK. 80. pāṇḍudukūla LALIT. ed. Calc. 332, 13 u.s.w. pattra ŚĀK. 18. 110. -varṇā (damayantī) N. 2, 3. mukhena rodhrapāṇḍunā RAGH. 3, 2. -mukhī KATHĀS. 28, 2. bhasma- 25, 81. jarā- 31, 40. -sikata ŚĀK. 56. MEGH. 18. 24. 30. āpāṇḍupītikā mṛt VARĀH. BṚH. S. 53, 20. āpāṇḍubhasmoṣṭrakharānurūpā (śilā) 111. LAGHUJ. 1, 6. Vgl. pāṇḍara, pāṇḍura. — 2) m. a) “Gelbsucht” ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. Verz. d. B. H. 278; vgl. pāṇḍuroga. — b) N. zweier Pflanzen: “Trichosanthes dioeca Roxb.” (paṭola) und = pāṇḍuraphalī RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) “ein weisser Elephant” ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — d) N. pr. eines Fürsten, eines Sohnes des Vyāsa von der Frau des Vicitravīrya und Bruders des Dhṛtarāṣṭra und des Vidura, TRIK. 2, 8, 13. 3, 3, 113. H. an. MED. AV. PARIŚ. in Verz. d. B. H. 91. MBH. 1, 95. 2213. 2441. 2721. 3808. 4291 (Ursprung des Namens). 15, 851. HARIV. 1932. 3010. 4055. KATHĀS. 21, 20. fgg. VP. 437. 459. BHĀG. P. 9, 22, 24. — e) N. pr. eines Sohnes des Janamejaya und Bruders des Dhṛtarāṣṭra MBH. 1, 3745. LIA. I, Anh. XXIV. — f) N. pr. eines Sohnes des Dhātar von der Āyati VP. 82, N. 1; nach anderen Autoritäten heisst dieser Sohn Prāṇa. — g) N. pr. eines Dieners des Śiva VYĀḌI zu H. 210. — h) N. pr. eines Nāgarāga VYUTP. 85. — i) N. pr. eines Volkes in Madhyadeśa VARĀH. BṚH. S. 14, 3 (v. l. pāṇḍya und pāṇḍva). — 3) f. = māṣaparṇī “Glycine debilis Ait.” ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. — Vgl. pari-. pāṇḍu 2) i) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 338,b,33. 339,b,46. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 pāṇḍu 1 I Father of the Pāṇḍavas. pāṇḍu 2 II The second son of. Janamejaya. (Chapter 94, Ādi Parva). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 pāṇḍu pāṇḍu, I. adj. Pale, white, yellowish white, Śāk. d. 80. II. m. The name of a sovereign, father of Yudhiṣṭhira, and the other four Pāṇḍavas. — Comp. puṣpa-, m. a kind of snake. vi-, adj. pale, Śic. 9, 3. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 pāṇḍu a. whitish yellow, white, pale (abstr. -tā f., -tva n.), N. of an ancient king. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 pāṇḍu pāṇḍ-u, a. (f. id.) yellowish white, whitish, pale; m. N. of a sovereign of ancient Delhi, a son of Vyāsa and brother of Dhṛtarāṣṭra; -cchāya, a. white-coloured; -tā, f. yellowish white colour, paleness; -nanda-na, m. son of Pāṇḍu; -pattra, n. yellow (= withered) leaf; -putra, m. son of Pāṇḍu; -bhūma, m. pale-coloured (chalky) soil. Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 pāṇḍu raḥ puṁ, (pāṇḍurasyāstīti . pāṇḍu + nagapāṁśupāṇḍubhyaśca . 5 . 2 . 107 . ityasya sūtrasya vārtikoktyā raḥ .) śvetapītamiśritavarṇaḥ . tadbati, tri . ityamaraḥ . 1 . 5 . 17 .. (yathā, bhāgavate . 8 . 8 . 3 . tata uccaiḥśravā nāma hayo’bhūccandrapāṇḍuraḥ . tasmin baliḥ spṛhāñcakrenendra īśvaraśikṣayā ..) kāmalārogaḥ . iti śabdaratnāvalī .. śvitraroge, klī . iti halāyudhaḥ .. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 pāṇḍu pu° paḍi–ku ni° dīrghaḥ . sitapītasamāyuktaḥ pāṇḍuvarvaṇaḥ prakīrtitaḥ 1 subhūtyukte pāṇḍustu pītabhāgārdhaḥ ketakīdhūlisannibhaḥ ityukte ca 2 varṇamede 3 tadvati tri° . striyāmudantaguṇavacanatve’pi na ṅīp pāṇḍuśabdaparyudāsāt . 4 sitavarṇe śabdaratnā° 5 tadvati tri° sāntanuputravicitravīryasya kṣetre vyāsenotpādite 6 nṛpabhede 7 nāgabhede 8 śvetagaje 9 rogabhede ca śabdara° . 10 pāṇḍuraphalīkṣupe 11 paṭole ca rājani° . 12 deśabhede pu° pāṇḍunṛpotpattikathā bhā° ā° 106 a° tannāmatākāraṇañca uktaṁ yathā tatastenaiva vidhinā maharṣistāmavindata . ambālikāmathābhyāgādṛṣiṁ dṛṣṭvā ca sāpi tam . vivarṇā pāṇḍusaṅkāśā samapadyata mārata! ityupakrame yasmāt pāṇḍutvamāpannā virūpaṁ prekṣya māmiha . taṇādeṣa sutaste vai pāṇḍureva bhaviṣyati . nāma tasya tadeveha bhaviṣyadi śubhānane . tasya digvijayādikathā taduttarādhyāyeṣu dṛśyā . pāṇḍurogabhede nidānādikaṁ bhāvapra° uktaṁ yathā pāṇḍurogāḥ smṛtāḥ pañca vātapittakaphaistrayaḥ . caturthaḥ sannipātena pañcamo bhakṣaṇānmṛdaḥ pañcamo bhakṣaṇāt mṛda iti nanu mṛttikāpi dūṣitavātādidoṣadvāreṇaiva pāṇḍurogaṁ janayatoti mṛdbhakṣaṇajaḥ pāṇḍurogodoṣajādabhinna eva kathaṁ pañcama iti ucyate aparakāraṇakupitā vātādayo’nyānapi rogān karvanti . mṛttikābhakṣṇāt kupitāstu vātādayo viśeṣataḥ pāṇḍurogameva janayantyeveti viśeṣāt cikitsāviśeṣācca pañcamaḥ carakeṇoktaḥ . taccikitsāparakāraṇakupitadoṣajanitapāṇḍurogacikitsā bhavatīti suśrutena mṛttikājaḥ pṛthak na paṭhitaḥ . atha viprakṛṣṭanidānapūrvikāṁ samprāptimāha vyavāyamamlaṁ lavaṇāni madyaṁ mṛdaṁ divāsvapnamatīva tīkṣṇam . niṣevamāṇasya vidūṣya raktaṁ doṣāstvacaṁ pāṇḍuratāṁ nayanti tīkṣṇaṁ rājikādi . atha pūrvarūpamāha tvaksphoṭaniṣṭhīvanagātrasādamṛdbhakṣaṇaprekṣaṇakūṭaśothāḥ . viṇmūtraṣītatvamathāvipāko bhaviṣyatastasya puraḥsarāṇi prekṣaṇakūṭaśothaḥ iti akṣigolakaśothaḥ . atha vātikasya pāṇḍurogasya lakṣaṇamāha tvaṅmūtranayanādīnāṁ rūkṣakṛṣṇāruṇāmatā . vātapāṇḍvāmaye kampastodāmāhabhramādayaḥ . kṛṣṇāruṇāmatā pāṇḍutvaṁ nātikrāmati . ataeva suśrute sarveṣu caiteṣvapi pāṇḍubhāvo yato’dhiko’taḥ khalu pāṇḍurogaḥ iti . bhramādaya ityādiśabdāt medaśūlādayaḥ . atha ṣaittikasya lakṣaṇamāha pītatvaṅnakhaviṇbhūtradāhatṛṣṇājvarānvitaḥ . bhinnaviṭko’tipītābhaḥ pittapāṇḍvāmaye naraḥ . bhinnaviṭkaḥ sadravamalaḥ . atha ślaiṣmikasya lakṣaṇamāha kaphaprasekaḥ śvayathuḥ tandrālasyātigauravaiḥ . pāṇḍurogī kaphāt śuklaistvaṅmūtranayanānanaiḥ . atropalakṣaṇe tṛtīyā . sānnipātikasya lakṣaṇamāha sarvānnasevinaḥ sarve duṣṭā doṣāstridoṣajam . tridoṣaliṅgaṁ kurvanti pāṇḍurogaṁ suduḥsaham . atha mṛjjasya samprāptimāha mṛttikādanaśīlasya kupyatyanyatamo malaḥ . kamāyā mārutaṁ, pitta mūṣarā, madhurā kapham . kopayenmṛdrasādīṁśca raukṣyādbhuktañca rūkṣayet . pūrayatyavipakvaiśca srotāṁsi niruṇaddhyapi . indriyāṇāṁ balaṁ hatvā tejo vīryaujasī tathā . pāṇḍurogaṁ karotyāśu samavarṇāgnināśanam . srotāṁsi śirāmukhāni . tejo dīptiḥ ojaḥ sarvadhāturasaḥ . atha mṛjjasya lakṣaṇamāha mṛdbhakṣaṇādbhavetpāṇḍu standrālasyanipīḍitaḥ . sakāsaśvāsaśūlārtaḥ sadā’ruci samanvitaḥ . śūnākṣikūṭagaṇḍabhrūḥ śūnapānnābhimehanaḥ . kṛmikoṣṭho’tisāryeta malaṁ sāsṛkkaphānvitam . krimikoṣṭhaḥ udarābhyantarasthakṛmirbhavedityanena sambadhyate atisāryeta malamiti karmakartṛ tatkarmavat mantavyam . tasmin karmaṇyarthe’tra yakpratyayaḥ . athāsādhyasya lakṣaṇamāha jvarārocakahṛllāsaccharditṛṣṇāklamānvitaḥ . pāṇḍurogī tribhirdoṣaistyājyaḥ kṣīṇo hatendriyaḥ . pāṇḍurogaścirotpannaḥ kharībhūto na sidhyati . kālaprakarṣāt śūnāṅgo yo vā pītāni paśyati kharībhūtaḥ atirūkṣitaḥ sarvadhātuḥ baddhālpaviṭ saharitaṁ sakaphaṁ yo’tisāryate . pītasvedātidigdhāṅgaḥ chardimūrchātṛṣānvitaḥ . pāṇḍudantanakho yastu pāṇḍunetraśca yo bhavet . pāṇḍusaṅghātadarśī ca pāṇḍurogī vinaśyati . pāṇḍusaṅghātadarśīṁ pībavarṇasya rāśiṁ paśyati . anteṣu śūnaṁ parihīnamadhyaṁ mlānaṁ tathānteṣu ca madhyaśūnam . gude mukhe śephasi muṣkayośca śūnaṁ pratāmyantamasaṁjñakalpam . urabhre nihate caiva pāṇḍurogaḥ prajāyate śātā° meṣabadhakarmaṇobipāka stadroga uktaḥ . 1 3 māṣaparṇyām (māṣāṇī) strī rājani° . pāṇḍorapatyam orañ pā° añ . pāṇḍava pāṇḍorapatye yudhiṣṭhirādau . pāṇḍoḥ janapadabhedasya rājā pāṇḍorḍyan vārti° ḍyan . pāṇḍudeśanṛpe raghu4 . 9 2 . svārthe ka pāṇḍuka tatrārthe tataḥ astyarthe ini pāṇḍukin tadrogayute tri° . saṁjñāyāṁ kan . pāṇḍuka dhānābhede suśrutaḥ . tatra pṛṣo° dīrghamadhyaḥ pāṇḍūka tatrārthe paṅgukaśabde 2 49 2 pṛ° suśrutavākyaṁ dṛśyam . pāṇḍukasya vṛddhiḥ kṣīrikāvṛddhyā bhavatotyuktaṁ vṛṁ° sa° 29 a° . |
पाण्डुक – pāṇḍuka | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pāṇḍuka mfn. = “pāṇḍu”
pāṇḍuka m. a pale or yellowish-white colour pāṇḍuka m. jaundice pāṇḍuka m. a species of rice (cf. “-ḍūka”) pāṇḍuka m. (with Jainas) N. of one of the 9 treasures pāṇḍuka m. N. of a son of Janam-ejaya and brother of Dhṛita-rāṣṭra pāṇḍuka n. N. of a forest Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch pāṇḍuka (von pāṇḍu) 1) adj. = pāṇḍu HALĀY. 4, 47, v. l. — 2) m. a) “Gelbsucht” ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR.; vgl. pāṇḍukin. — b) “eine best. Reisgattung” SUŚR. 1, 73, 4. 195, 6; vgl. pāṇḍūka. — c) N. pr. = pāṇḍu 2,d. ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — d) N. eines der 9 Schätze bei den Jaina H. 193, Sch. — 3) n. N. pr. eines Waldes ŚATR. 8, 34. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 pāṇḍuka pāṇḍu + ka, m. The jaundice. |
पाण्डुत्व – pāṇḍutva | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pāṇḍutva “pāṇḍu-tva” n. whitish-yellow colour, paleness
Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch pāṇḍutva (von pāṇḍu) n. = pāṇḍutā MBH. 1, 4290. SUŚR. 1, 263, 21. |
पाण्डुर – pāṇḍura | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pāṇḍura mf (“ā”) n. whitish, white, pale, yellow &c.
pāṇḍura m. a form of jaundice pāṇḍura m. Anogeissus Latifolia pāṇḍura m. an Andropogon with white flowers pāṇḍura m. N. of one of the attendants of Skanda pāṇḍura mf (“ā”) n. (“ā”) f. Glycine Debilis pāṇḍura m. of a Buddhist deity (cf. “pāṇḍarā”) pāṇḍura n. the white leprosy, vitiligo Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch pāṇḍura (von pāṇḍu) KĀŚ. und SIDDH. K. zu P. 5, 2, 107. 1) adj. f. ā “weisslich, weiss, bleich” AK. 1, 1, 4, 22. 23. H. 1393. an. 3, 577. MED. r. 183. HALĀY. 4, 47. 52. SUŚR. 1, 286, 9. 2, 168, 17. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 33, 2. 53, 7. -nakha 67, 3. kaca H. 571. HALĀY. 2, 377. candra- BHĀG. P. 8, 8, 3. mukhena śarapāṇḍunā RAGH. 14, 26. kṛśa- KATHĀS. 27, 34. 32, 155. ātapatra, chattra R. 2, 2, 5. 98, 26. gṛha 57, 22. Spr. 91. pāṇḍurāruṇavarṇāni srotāṁsi DAŚ. 1, 18. chavi ŚĀK. 58. ā- VARĀH. BṚH. S. 35, 4. 53, 106. kapota 87, 13. āpāṇḍurībhūtamukhacchavi KUMĀRAS. 3, 33. Vgl. pāṇḍara. — 2) m. a) “eine Form der Gelbsucht” (kāmalāroga) ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — b) “eine best. Pflanze”, = maruvaka H. an. MED. — c) N. pr. eines Wesens im Gefolge des Skanda MBH. 9, 2575. — 3) f. ā = māṣaparṇī “Glycine debilis Ait.” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — 4) n. “der weisse Aussatz” H. 466. HALĀY. 2, 449. pāṇḍura 1) KATHĀS. 71, 2. — 5) f. ā N. pr. einer buddh. Göttin, = tārā WILSON, Sel. Works 2, 36. pāṇḍarā (sic) Gattin Amitābha’s (während Tārā die Gattin Amoghasiddha’s genannt wird) 12. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 pāṇḍura A soldier of Subrahmaṇya. (Śloka 73, Chapter 45, Śalya Parva). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 pāṇḍura pāṇḍu + ra, I. adj., f. rā, Of a yellowish white colour, white, pale, Bhāg. P. 8, 8, 8. II. m. a proper name. — Comp. ā-, adj. a little pale, Amar. 89. vi-, adj. pale. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 pāṇḍura a. whitish, pale. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 pāṇḍura pāṇḍu-ra, a. whitish, white, pale: -tā, f. white colour; -ya, den. P. colour whitish yellow; i-ta, pp. coloured yellowish white; i-man, m. pale colour; ī-kṛ, colour yellowish white. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 pāṇḍura pu° pāṇḍurvarṇo’syāsti ra . 1 śvetapītamiśrite varṇe amaraḥ 2 tadvati tri° . paḍi–ura pṛṣo° vṛddhiḥ . 3 śvetavarṇe 4 tadvati ca halā° . 5 kāmalākhye roge 6 śvitraroge na° śabdaratnā° . 7 māṣaparṇyāṁ strī ṭāp rājani° . |
पिंग – piṁga | Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890
piṁga a. [piṁj-varṇe aṁc nyaṁkva- kutvam] Reddish-brown, tawny, yellow-red. aṁtarniviṣṭāmalapiṁgatāraṁ (vilocanaṁ) Ku. 7. 33. –gaḥ (1) The tawny colour. (2) A buffalo. (2) A rat. –gā (1) Turmeric. (2) Saffron. (3) A kind of yellow pigment. (4) An epithet of Durgā. (5) A bow-string. –gaṁ A young animal. — Comp. –akṣa a. having reddish-brown eyes, redeyed. ( –kṣaḥ) 1. an ape. –2. an epithet of Śiva. –īkṣaṇaḥ an epithet of Śiva. –īśaḥ an epithet of fire. –kapiśā a species of cock-roach. –cakṣus m. a crab. –jaṭaḥ an epithet of Śiva. –sāraḥ yellow orpiment. –sphaṭikaḥ ‘yellow crystal’, a kind of gem (gomeda). |
पिंगल – piṁgala | Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890
piṁgala a. [piṁga-sidhmā- lac, piṁgaṁ lāti, lā-ka vā Tv.] Reddish-brown, yellowish, brown, tawny; R. 12. 71; Ms. 3. 8. –laḥ (1) The tawny colour. (2) Fire. (3) A monkey. (4) An ichneumon. (5) A small owl. (6) A kind of snake. (7) N. of an attendant on the sun. (8) N. of one of Kubera’s treasures. (9) N. of a reputed sage, the father of Sanskrit prosody, his work being known as pigalacchaṁdaḥśāstra; chaṁdojñānānaṁdhiṁ jaghāna makaro velātaṭe piṁgalaṁ Pt. 2. 33. –laṁ (1) Brass. (2) Yellow orpiment. –lā (1) A kind of owl. (2) The Śiśu tree (śiṁśapā). (3) A kind of metal. (4) A particular vessel of the body. (5) The female elephant of the south (6) N. of a courtezan who became remarkable for her piety and virtuous life; (the Bhāgavata mentions how she and Ajamīla were delivered from the trammels of the world). — Comp. –akṣaḥ an epithet of Śiva. –lauhaṁ brass. |
पिंजर – piṁjara | Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890
piṁjara a. [piṁj-arac] Reddishyellow, tawny, gold-coloured; śikhā pradīpasya suvarṇapiṁjarā Mk. 3. 17; R. 18. 40. –raḥ (1) The reddish-yellow or tawny-brown colour. (2) The yellow colour. –raṁ (1) Gold. (2) Yellow orpiment. (3) A skeleton. (4) A cage (for paṁjara). (5) The ribs or the cavity formed by them, the thorax. |
पिंजरित – piṁjarita | Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890
piṁjarita a. Coloured yellow, tinged brown. |
पिङ्ग – piṅga | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899piṅga “piṅgara, piṅgala” see under “piṇj”, col.3.
piṅga mf (“ā”) n. yellow, reddish-brown, tawny &c. (cf. g. “kaḍārādi”) piṅga m. yellow (the colour) piṅga m. a buffalo a mouse piṅga m. N. of one of the sun’s attendants piṅga m. of a man (cf. “paiṅgi, -gin”) piṅga m. (“piṅga”, in one place “pinga”), N. of a kind of divine being (?) piṅga mf (“ā”) n. (“pingā”) f. a bow-string (; cf. “piṅgala-jya”) piṅga m. a kind of yellow pigment (cf. “go-rocanā”) piṅga m. the stalk of Ferula Asa Foetida piṅga m. turmeric, Indian saffron piṅga m. bamboo manna piṅga m. N. of a woman piṅga m. of Durgā piṅga m. a tubular vessel of the human body which according to the Yoga system is the channel of respiration and circulation for one side piṅga mf (“ā”) n. (“ī”) f. Mimosa Suma piṅga n. orpiment piṅga n. a young animal Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch piṅga 1) adj. f. ā; geht im comp. bald voran, bald hinterdrein, gaṇa kaḍārādi zu P. 2, 2, 38. “röthlich braun” AK. 1, 1, 4, 25. H. 1397. an. 2, 36. MED. g. 9. HALĀY. 4, 51. vipra MBH. 1, 8081. nārī 7, 2066. madhu- 3, 17002. anantapiṅgalānpiṅgān R. 4, 43, 23, v. l. atipiṅga (nayana) 3, 74, 16. vilocanam – antarniviṣṭāmalapiṅgatāram KUMĀRAS. 7, 33. kṣitireṇu MĀRK. P. 8, 190. haripiṅgojjvalaśmaśru MBH. 1, 8080. -jaṭājūṭa KATHĀS. 50, 192. 1, 18. suhutahutavahapiṅgaśmaśrukeśaśarīra PAÑCAT. 182, 18. Ind. St. 2, 258. SUŚR. 1, 41, 2. -bhāsa 2, 289, 17. -deha Beiw. Śiva’s ŚIV. — 2) m. a) oxyt. wohl N. “eines Krautes” AV. 8, 6, 6. 18. 19. 21. 24. 25. — b) “Büffel” H. ś. 182. — c) “Maus” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — d) N. pr. eines Mannes ĀŚV. ŚR. 12, 12; vgl. paiṅgi, paiṅgin. — e) N. pr. eines Wesens im Gefolge des Sonnengottes H. 103, Sch. — 3) f. ā a) parox. nach SĀY. “Bogensehne”: ava svarāti gargaro godhā pari saniṣvaṇat. piṅgā pari caniṣkadadindrāya brahmodyatam ṚV. 8, 58, 9; vgl. piṅgalajyena – ājagavena MBH. 7, 6148. — b) “ein best. gelbes Pigment” (s. gorocanā). — c) “der Stengel der Ferula Asa foetida”, = hiṅgunālī, -nālikā H. an. MED. Nach ŚKDR. und WILS. sind zwei Bedeutungen gemeint, wogegen H. an. entschieden spricht. — d) “Bambusmanna” (vaṁśarocanā) RĀJAN.im ŚKDR. — e) “Gelbwurz” ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. — f) ein Bein. der Durgā H. an. MED. Statt piṅgāyāñcāśrame MBH. 13, 1741 ist wohl piṅgāyāścāśrame zu lesen, wobei es aber doch zweifelhaft bleibt, ob Durgā oder eine best. fromme Büsserin gemeint sei; vgl. piṅgatīrtha und piṅgalā als N. pr. einer frommen Buhldirne. — 4) f. ī “eine best. Mimosa” (s. śamī) H. an. MED. — 5) n. = bālaka H. an. MED. “das Junge eines Thiers” WILS. piṅga 1) -jaṭākalāpa VIKR. 157. — 2) a) vielleicht darunter ein göttliches Wesen zu verstehen. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 piṅga piṅga, i. e. piñj + a, adj., f. gā. 1. Of a tawny colour, Pañc. 182, 18. 2. Yellow, Vikr. d. 157. 3. Red, Hiḍ. 2, 2 (cf. piṅgākṣa). — Comp. eka-, m. a name of Kuvera. śveta-, m. a lion. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 piṅga a. reddish brown, tawny; m. a man’s name. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 piṅga piṅg-a, a. [piñj] reddish brown, tawny: -danta, m. N.. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 piṅga pu° piji–varṇe–ac nyaṅkā° kutvam . 1 mūṣike medi° striyāṁ ṅīṣ . 2 dīpaśikhābhe varṇe pu° piṅgo dīpaśikhāmaḥ syāt piṅgalaḥ padmadhūlibat . 3 tadvati tri° amaraḥ gaurā° pāṭhāt striyāṁ ṅīp . kaḍārā° pāṭhāt asya pūrvanipātaḥ . 4 ṛṣibhede pu° tena proktaḥ kalpaḥ ṇini paiṅgin tatprokte kalpe . piṅga + astryardhe sidhmā° vā lac . priṅgala tadvarṇayute tri° pakṣe matup masya vaḥ . piṅgavat tatrārthe tri° striyāṁ ṅīp . |
पिङ्गल – piṅgala | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899piṅgala mf (“ā” and “ī”) n. (cf. g. “gaurādi” and “kaḍārādi”), reddish-
brown, tawny, yellow, gold-coloured &c. &c, piṅgala mf (“ā” and “ī”) n. (in alg. also as N. of the 10th unknown quantity) mf (“ā” and “ī”) n. having reddish-brown eyes piṅgala m. yellow colour piṅgala m. fire. piṅgala m. an ape piṅgala m. an ichneumon piṅgala m. a small kind of owl piṅgala m. a small kind of lizard piṅgala m. a species of snake piṅgala m. a partic. vegetable poison piṅgala m. (with Jainas) N. of a treasure piṅgala m. the 51st (or 25th) year in a 60 years’ cycle of Jupiter piṅgala m. N. of śiva or a kindred being &c. piṅgala m. of an attendant of śiva piṅgala m. of an attendant of the Sun piṅgala m. of a Rudra piṅgala m. of a Yaksha piṅgala m. of a Dānava piṅgala m. of a Nāga or serpent-demon (the supposed author of the Chandas or treatise on metre regarded as one of the Vedāṅgas, identified by some with Pataṇjali, author of the Mahā-bhāṣya) piṅgala m. of sev. ancient sages &c. piṅgala m. pl. N. of a people piṅgala mf (“ā” and “ī”) n. (“ā”) f. a species of bird mf (“ā” and “ī”) n. a kind of owl mf (“ā” and “ī”) n. Dalbergia Sissoo piṅgala mf (“ā” and “ī”) n. = “karṇikā” mf (“ā” and “ī”) n. a kind of brass mf (“ā” and “ī”) n. a partic. vessel of the body (the right of 3 tubular vessels which according to the Yoga philosophy are the chief passages of breath and air; cf. mf (“ā” and “ī”) n. a kind of yellow pigment (= “go-rocanā”) mf (“ā” and “ī”) n. N. of Lakṣmī mf (“ā” and “ī”) n. of a courtezan who became remarkable for her piety mf (“ā” and “ī”) n. of the female elephant of the South quarter mf (“ā” and “ī”) n. of an astrological house or period mf (“ā” and “ī”) n. heart-pea piṅgala n. a partic. metal piṅgala n. yellow orpiment Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch piṅgala (von piṅga) gaṇa sidhmādi zu P. 5, 2, 97. UJJVAL. zu UṆĀDIS. 1, 108. 1) adj. f. ā (ī gaṇa gaurādi zu P. 4, 1, 41); geht im comp. voran oder hinterdrein, gaṇa kaḍārādi zu P. 2, 2, 38. Accent eines auf piṅgala (v. l. pigalī) ausgehenden comp. gaṇa ghoṣādi zu 6, 2, 85. “röthlich braun” AK. 1, 1, 4, 25. 3, 4, 25, 172. H. 1396. an. 3, 667. MED. l. 112. fg. HALĀY. 4, 50. 50. UJJVAL. sa snāto babhruḥ piṅgalaḥ pṛthivyāṁ bahu rocate AV. 11, 5, 26. babhruḥ piṅgalo dakṣiṇā KĀṬH. 15, 1. anaḍvān ĀŚV. GṚHY. 4, 6. rohiṇī piṅgalaikahāyanī TS. 7, 1, 6, 2. NIR. 3, 18. putro me kapilaḥ piṅgalo jāyeta ŚAT. BR. 14, 9, 4, 4. śukla, nīla, piṅgala, harita, lohita “röthlichbraune Flüssigkeit” 7, 1, 20. 2, 12. CHĀND. UP. 8, 6, 1. piṅgala, piṅgalā (= piṅgākṣa, piṅgākṣī Schol.) KĀTY. ŚR. 7, 6, 14. 20, 8, 16. nodvahetkapilāṁ (= kapilakeśāṁ KULL.) kanyām – na piṅgalām (= piṅgalākṣīm KULL.) M. 3, 8. MBH. 13, 5088. MĀRK. P. 34, 76. tapasvin MBH. 3, 1499. jalāyukā SUŚR. 1, 40, 20. 41, 2. 85, 20. vānara RAGH. 12, 71. kukkurī VARĀH. BṚH. S. 61, 2. netre 68, 19. LAGHUJ. 1, 6. 2, 17. piṅgalākṣa (Śiva) ŚIV. -roman (piśāca) HARIV. 14577. vāpīḥ kamalapiṅgalāḥ R. 3, 61, 17. -jya (ājagava) MBH. 7, 6148. vidyutsaṁpāta- 3, 11145. hema- R. 1, 1, 66. 4, 3, 27. madhu- MBH. 3, 11151. 13, 832. R. 5, 74, 10. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 67, 64. BṚH. 2, 8. sindūra- VID. 54. babhru- MBH. 10, 38. kṛṣṇa- R. 2, 69, 14 (71, 14 GORR.). vāto bhasmāṅgārābhipiṅgalaḥ (-rātipi-?) HARIV. 5533. — 2) m. a) “Feuer.” — b) “Affe” TRIK. 3, 3, 400. H. an. MED. — c) “Ichneumon” H. 1302. — d) “eine kleine Eulenart” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — e) “eine Schlangenart” SUŚR. 2, 265, 13; vgl. “n.” — f) “ein best. vegetabilisches Gift” H. 1199. — g) N. eines Schatzes H. an. MED. bei den Jaina H. 193, Sch. — h) N. pr. eines Trabanten des Sonnengottes AK.1,1,2,33. VYĀḌI beim Schol. zu H. 103. H. an. MED. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 70,a, N. 1. Bei WILSON sind daraus zwei Bedeutungen entstanden: die angegebene und “die Sonne.” — i) Bein. des Śiva oder eines verwandten Dämons ŚĀÑKH. GṚHY. 4, 16. N. pr. eines Rudra H. an. MED. MATSYA-P. in VP. 121, N. 17. Bei WILSON Śiva. — k) N. pr. eines Jaksha MBH.3,14565. MATSYA-P. in Verz. d. Oxf. H. 42,a, Kap. 167. — l) N. pr. eines Wesens im Gefolge des Śiva KATHĀS. 45, 352. — m) N. pr. eines Dānava KATHĀS. 47, 12. — n) N. pr. eines Nāga MED. VYUTP. 87. 85 (Nāgarāja). MBH. 1, 1554. angeblicher Verfasser des Chandas COLEBR. Misc. Ess. II,63. fgg. 97. MÜLLER, SL. 147. fgg. 244. Verz. d. B. H. No. 380. fgg. 1353. fg. Verz. d. Oxf. H. No. 457. fgg. S. 113,a. Ind. St.1,17. 59. chandojñānanidhiṁ jaghāna makaro velātaṭe piṅgalam PAÑCAT. II, 34. -vṛtti f. “Commentar” zur Metrik des Piñgala COLEBR. Misc. Ess. II, 65. -prakāśa ebend. und 91. 92. 102. -sāravikāśinī Verz. d. Oxf. H. No. 457. — o) N. pr. verschiedener alter Weisen H. an. MBH. 1, 2046. 2047. R. 2, 32, 28. mit dem Bein. vatsājīva N. eines Bettlers BURN. Intr. 360. — p) pl. N. pr. eines Volkes MĀRK. P. 58, 45. Vgl. anantapiṅgalānpiṅgān R. 4, 43, 23, v. l. und daṇḍapiṅgalaka. — q) Bez. “des 51ten (25ten) Jahres im 60jährigen Jupitercyclus” VARĀH. BṚH. S. 8, 48. Journ. of the Am. Or. S. 6, 180. — 3) f. ā a) “ein best. Vogel” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. “eine Eulenart” VARĀH. BṚH. S. 85, 21. 37. 87, 2. 38. -ruta Verz. d. B. H. No. 897. — b) = karṇikā H. an. — c) “Dalbergia Sissoo Roxb.” (śiṁśapā) RATNAM. im ŚKDR. — d) “ein best. Metall” (rājarīti) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — e) “eine best. Arterie” H. an. Ind. St.2,172. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 104,b,40. No. 167; vgl. CHĀND. UP.8,6,1. — f) N. pr. des Weibchens des Elephanten Vāmana AK. 1, 1, 2, 6. Kumuda H. an. MED. HĀR. 147. — g) N. pr. einer später fromm gewordenen Buhldirne H. an. MED. HĀR. 263. MBH. 12,6513. fgg. 6646. KAP.4,11. SKANDA2-P. in Verz. d. Oxf. H. 74,b, Kap. 22. MADHUS. in Ind. St.1,22. — 4) n. a) “ein best. Metall” (rīti) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — b) “Auripigment” (vgl. piṅgasāra) WILS. nach ders. Aut. — Vgl. kṛṣṇa-, nīla- piṅgala 1) agnyārādhana- KATHĀS. 106, 73; vgl. piṅgalita. — 2) h) R. 7, 23, 2, 9. — n) -cchandogranthaṭīkā Verz. d. Oxf. H. 197,b, No. 461. — q) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 332,a,5. — 3) e) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 236,a,2 v. u.b,4. 337,b,1. — g) KAP. 4, 11. BHĀG. P. 11, 8, 22. fgg. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 piṅgala 1 I A deva who is an attendant of the Sungod. Sūrya (Sun-god) rides in a one-wheeled chariot drawn by seven horses and he bears in his hands two lotuses. On his right side stands the attendant Daṇḍī with an ink-pot and a writing stick and on his left side stands the attendant Piṅgala with a stick. Both these are demi god attendants of Sūrya. (Chapter 51, Agni Purāṇa). piṅgala 2 II A prominent serpent born to the sage Kaśyapa of his wife Kadrū. (Śloka 9, Chapter 35, Ādi Parva). piṅgala 3 III A sage. He was a Yajvā (priest) in the Sarpasatra of Janamejaya. (Śloka 6, Chapter 53, Ādi Parva). piṅgala 4 IV A King of the Yakṣas. He is a friend of Śiva. He acts as body-guard to Śiva who spends his time in cremation grounds. This Yakṣa gives happiness to all in the world. (Śloka 51, Chapter 23, Vana Parva). piṅgala 5 V A lion, who is a character in the book Pañcatantra. (See under Pañcatantra). piṅgala 6 VI A brahmin of very bad manners. This brahmin was killed by his own wife who was a prostitute. In their next birth Piṅgala became a vulture and the prostitute, a parrot. Both had memories of their previous birth and the vulture (Piṅgala) with vengeance killed the parrot. After that Piṅgala was eaten one day by a tiger A brahmin residing on the shores of Gaṅgā read to their souls the fifth chapter of Gītā and they got salvation and entered Pitṛloka (world of the Manes). (Chapter 40, Sṛṣṭi Khaṇḍa, Padma Purāṇa). piṅgala 7 VII A rākṣasa (demon). Once when this demon was going through a forest he met a forester. The latter got afraid and climbed up a Śamī tree. Then a branch broke and it fell on the head of Gaṇeśa sitting beneath that tree. It was an act of worship and because of that both the forester and the demon were elevated. (Gaṇeśa Purāṇa). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 piṅgala piṅga + la, I. adj., f. lā. 1. Of a tawny colour, brown, Ragh. 12, 71; yellowish. 2. Red-eyed, Man. 3, 8 (Kull.). II. m. A proper name. III. f. lā, A proper name. — Comp. kṛṣṇa-, adj., f. lā, of a fuscous colour. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 piṅgala a. = prec. a.; m. a man’s name, esp. N. of an author on Chandas or metrics, E. of sev. gods & demons; f. piṅgalā a. kind of leech, a woman’s name. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 piṅgala piṅga-la, a. tawny-eyed or redyed; m. ep. of Śiva and of a Dānava; N., esp. of a writer on metre: ā, f. kind of leech; a-ka, m. Tawny, N. of a lion; i-kā, f. N.; (a) -gāndhāra, m. N. of a fairy. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 piṅgala pu° piṅga + sidhmā° lac piṅgaṁ lāti–ka vā . 1 nīlapītamiśritavarṇe 3 tadvati tri° amaraḥ . asmin pare ghoṣā° pūrvapūrvapadamādyudāttam . prākṛtabhāṣayācchandogranthakārake 3 nāgabhede 4 rudre 5 sūryapāripārśvikabhede 6 nidhibhede 7 vānare nakule 8 sthāvaraviṣabhede ca hemaca° . 9 kṣudrolūke rājani° deśabhaṅgo’tha durbhikṣaṁ samāsāt kathayāmyaham . piṅgale cārupadmākṣi! durbhikṣaṁ narmadātaṭe iti jyo° ta° ukte prabhavādibarṣamadhye 10 varṣabhede ca . 11 nāgarājabhede bhā° ā° 35 a° . 12 yakṣabhede bhā° va° 230 a° . 13 rītau pittale 14 śiṁśapāyāṁ ca strī rājani° . 15 vāmanadiggajasya striyāṁ kumudasya 16 kariṇyāṁ medi° . 17 karṇikāyāṁ tantrokte 18 nāḍībhede hemaca° . iḍāśabde dṛśyam |
पिङ्गलत्व – piṅgalatva | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899piṅgalatva “piṅgala-tva” n. a tawny or yellow colour
Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch piṅgalatva n. “die rothbraune Farbe” R. 7, 13, 24. |
पिङ्गलिमन् – piṅgaliman | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899piṅgaliman “piṅgaliman” m. tawny or yellow colour
Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch piṅgaliman m. nom. abstr. von piṅgala adj. VĀMANA 5, 2, 20. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 piṅgaliman m. a reddish-brown colour. |
पिङ्गिमन् – piṅgiman | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899piṅgiman m. tawny or yellow colour |
पिण्जर – piṇjara | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899piṇjara mf (“ā”) n. reddish-yellow, yellow or tawny, of a golden colour
&c. piṇjara m. a tawny-brown colour (also “-tā” f. ; “-tva” n. piṇjara m. a horse (prob. bay or chestnut) piṇjara m. N. of a mountain piṇjara n. (only gold piṇjara n. yellow orpiment piṇjara n. the flower of Mesua Roxburghii piṇjara w.r. for “paṇjara” (“skeleton” or “cage”). |
पिण्जरय – piṇjaraya | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899piṇjaraya “piṇjaraya” Nom. P. “-yati”, to dye reddish-yellow, ; “-rita” mfn.
coloured reddish-yellow |
पिण्जरिक – piṇjarika | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899piṇjarika “piṇjarika” n. a kind of musical instrument “-riman” m. a
reddish-yellow colour |
पिञ्जर – piñjara | Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuchpiñjara UJJVAL. zu UṆĀDIS. 3, 131. 1) adj. f. ā “röthlich gelb, goldfarben”
H. 1396. an. 3, 578. MED. r. 186. HALĀY. 4, 52. (keśarī) kiraṇakeśarabhāsurapiñjaraḥ MBH. 7, 8409. śikhā pradīpasya suvarṇapiñjarā MṚCCH. 48, 11. cāmīkara- RAGH. 18, 39. kuṅkumarāga- (payodhara) ṚT. 5, 9. BHĀG. P. 4, 6. 26. BHAṬṬ. 22, 13. kṛṣṇāñjanābhamākāśaṁ tārolkāpātapiñjaram VARĀH. BṚH. S. 45, 94. KATHĀS. 35, 20. Vgl. ā-, pari-. — 2) m. a) “ein goldfarbenes Pferd” H. an. MED. — b) N. pr. eines Berges MĀRK. P. 55, 9. — 3) n. a) “Gold” H. an. MED. — b) “Auripigment” AK. 2, 9, 104. H. 1058. — c) “die Blüthe von Mesua Roxburghii Wight.” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — d) “Käfig.” — e) “Skelet” RĀMĀŚRAYA zu AK. ŚKDR. — In den beiden letzten Bedeutungen fehlerhafte Variante für pañjara; vgl. AK. 3, 6, 3, 31. piñjara 1) KATHĀS. 72, 38. — Fehlerhaft für pañjara Spr. 2782. 3467. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 piñjara piñj + ara, I. adj., f. rā, Yellow or tawny, reddish-yellow, Mṛcch. 48, 11. II. n. Gold. — Comp. ā-, adj., f. rā, reddish, Ragh. 16, 51. pari-, adj. brown-red, Kām. Nītis, 13, 14. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 piñjara a. reddish yellow, gold-coloured, hoary. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 piñjara piñja-ra, a. reddish yellow, tawny; bleached (of hair in old age): – tva, n. golden colour; bleached colour (of hair in old age). Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 piñjara na° piji–arac . 1 haritāle amaraḥ 2 svarṇe medi° 3 nāgakeśare rājani° 4 vihagādibandhanasthāne 5 dehāsthivṛnde ca rāmāśramaḥ . 6 aśvabhede pu° 7 pītaraktavarṇe 8 pītavarṇe ca pu° hemaca° . 9 tadvati tri° 10 sarpabhede pu° bhā° ā° 35 a° . svārthe ka . piñjaraka tatrārthe na° . |
पिञ्जरय् – piñjaray | Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891
piñjaray piñjarayati* v pp. piñjarita to colour reddish yellow. |
पिञ्जरय – piñjaraya | Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893piñjaraya piñjara-ya, den. P. colour reddish yellow (Pr.): pp. ita, coloured
tawny. |
पिशङ्ग – piśaṅga | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899piśaṅga mf (“ī”) n. reddish, reddish-brown or -yellow, tawny &c. &c.
piśaṅga m. a reddish or tawny colour piśaṅga m. N. of a serpent-demon Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch piśaṅga 1) adj. f. piśaṅgī KĀŚ. zu P. 4, 1, 39. Accent eines auf pi- ausgehenden comp. gaṇa ghoṣādi zu P. 6, 2, 85. “röthlich, röthlich braun” AK. 1, 1, 4, 25. H. 1396. HALĀY. 4, 51. te ‘ruṇebhirvaramā piśaṅgaiḥ śubhe kaṁ yānti rathatūrbhiraśvaiḥ ṚV. 1, 88, 2. piśaṅgaṁ drāpiṁ prati muñcate kaviḥ (savitā) 4, 53, 2. 9, 21, 5. rayi (etwa von der Farbe des Goldes zu verstehen) 72, 8. 107, 21. munayo vātaraśanāḥ piśaṅgā vasate malā 10, 136, 2. AV. 3, 9, 3. 14, 2, 48. VS. 24, 11. 29, 59. paṣṭhauhī TS. 1, 8, 19, 1. PAÑCAV. BR. 21, 14, 8. KĀTY. ŚR. 22, 9, 13. ṚV. PRĀT. 17, 8. KAUŚ. 39. turaga MBH. 6, 4530. 7, 983. saṁdhyāpiśaṅgapūrvādriśṛṅga KATHĀS. 1, 18. analajvālāpiśaṅgaiḥ kacaiḥ PRAB. 65, 11. KATHĀS. 23, 4. kadambakiñjalkapiśaṅgavāsas BHĀG. P. 2, 2, 9. 1, 11, 28. 4, 25, 23. 8, 18, 1. VARĀH. LAGHUJ. 1, 6. aruṇapiśaṅgo ‘śvaḥ TBR. 6, 6, 11, 6. — 2) m. N. pr. eines Schlangendämons PAÑCAV. BR. 25, 15, 3. MBH. 1, 2158. — Das Wort ist wohl auf 1. piś zurückzuführen; vgl. russian “Schönheit”, russian “schmücken”, russian “schön”, russ. russian “schön” und “roth.” piśaṅga 1) Ind. St. 8, 273. 275. fg. puṣpareṇu- KATHĀS. 71, 198. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 piśaṅga A serpent born of the family of Dhṛtarāṣṭra. This serpent was burnt to death at the Sarpasatra of JanameJaya. (Śloka 17, Chapter 57, Ādi Parva). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 piśaṅga piśaṅga (vb. piś), adj., f. gī and gā, Of a tawny, or brown, or reddish colour, Kathās. 1, 18. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 piśaṅga f. ī reddish brown. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 piśaṅga piś-aṅ-ga, a. (ī) [moving brilliantly, glittering], reddish, tawny: – jaṭa, m. N. of an ascetic (having a reddish top-knot); -tā, f., -tva, n. reddish or tawny colour: i-ta, pp. orange-coloured; ī-kṛ, colour reddish. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 piśaṅga pu° piśa–aṅgac kicca . padmadhūlitulye 1 piṅgalavarṇe 2 tadvati tri° amaraḥ . |
पीत – pīta | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pīta mfn. (1. “pā”) drunk, sucked, sipped, quaffed, imbibed &c. &c.
pīta ifc. having drunk, soaked, steeped, saturated, filled with (also with instr.) (cf. g. “āhitāgny-ādi”) pīta n. drinking pīta mf (“ā”) n. (possibly fr. 2. “pi” or “pyai”, the colour of butter ind oil being yellowish) yellow (the colour of the Vaiśyas, white being that of the Brāhmans, red that of the Kshatriyas, and black that of the śūdras) &c. pīta m. yellow colour pīta m. a yellow gem, topaz pīta m. a yellow pigment prepared from the urine of kine pīta m. N. of sev. plants (Alangium Hexapetalum, Carthamus Tinctorius, Trophis Aspera) pīta m. of the Vaiśyas in śālmala-dvipa pīta mf (“ā”) n. (“ā”) f. N. of sev. plants (Curcuma Longa and Aromatica, a species of Dalbergia Sissoo, a species of Musa, Aconitum Ferox, Panicuni Italicum = “mahā-jyotihmatī”) pīta m. a kind of yellow pigment (= “go-rocanā”) pīta m. a mystical N. of the letter “ṣ” pīta n. a yellow substance pīta n. gold pīta n. yellow orpiment Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 pīta a. [pā-karmaṇi kta] (1) Drunk, quaffed; vanāya pītapratibaddhavatsāṁ (gāṁ musoca) R. 2. 1. (2) Steeped, soaked in, filled or saturated with (3) Absorbed, drunk up, evaporated; Ku. 4. 44. (4) Watered, sprinkled with water; pātuṁ na prayama vyavasyati jalaṁ yaṣma svapīteṣu yā S. 4 8 (5) Yellow; vidyutprabhāracitapītapaṭottarīyaḥ Mk. 5. 2. –taḥ (1) Yellow colour. (2) Topaz. (3) Safflower. (4) A yellow pigment prepared from cow’s urine. –taṁ (1) Gold. (2) Yellow orpiment. — Comp. –abdhiḥ an epithet of Agastya. –aṁbaraḥ 1. an epithet of Viṣṇu; iti nigaditaḥ prītaḥ pītāṁbaropi tathākarot Gīt. 12. –2. an actor. –3 a religious mendicant wearing yellow garments. –aruṇa a. yellowish-red. ( –ṇaḥ) the middle of day-break. –aśman m. topaz. –kadalī a species of banana (svarṇakadalī). –kaṁdaṁ the carrot. –kāveraṁ 1. saffron. –2. brass. –kāṣṭhaṁ yellow sanders. –gadhaṁ yellow sandal. –caṁdanaṁ 1. a species of sandal-wood. –2. saffron. –3. turmeric. –caṁpakaḥ a lamp. –tuṁḍaḥ a Kāraṇḍava bird. –dāru n. a kind of pine or Sarala tree. –dugdhā 1. a milch cow. –2. a cow whose milk has been pledged. –3. a cow tied up to be milked. –druḥ the Sarala tree. –nīla a. green. ( –laḥ) the green colour. –pādā a kind of bird (Mar. mainā). –puṣpaḥ N. of several plants, caṁpaka, karṇikāra &c. –maṇiḥ a topaz. –mākṣikaṁ a kind of mineral substance –mūlakaṁ the carrot. –yūthī yellow jasmine. –rakta a. yellowish-red, orange-coloured. ( –ktaṁ) a kind of yellow gem, the topaz. –rāgaḥ 1. the yellow colour. –2. wax. –3. the fibres of a lotus. –lohaṁ brass. –vālukā turmeric. –vāsas m. an epithet of Kṛṣṇa. –sāraḥ 1. the topaz. –2. the sandal tree. ( –raṁ) yellow sandal-wood. –sāri n. antimony. –skaṁdhaḥ a hog. –sphaṭikaḥ the topaz. –harita a. yellowishgreen. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch pīta (partic. praet. pass. von 1. pā) “getrunken”: jīvapītasarga adj. “dessen Strahlen (Güsse) von Lebendigen getrunken sind” ṚV. 7, 149, 2. Belege aus der späteren Literatur für diese und andere Bedd. s. u. pā. pīta 1) adj. f. ā “gelb” AK. 1, 1, 4, 24. H. 1394. an. 2, 178. MED. t. 34. HALĀY. 4, 50. BALA beim Schol. zu NAIṢ 8, 98. VYUTP. 48. ĀŚV. GṚHY. 2, 8. CHĀND. UP. 8, 6, 1. SUŚR. 1, 45, 3. 61, 9. pītāvabhāsa 84, 6. 259, 6. 262, 15. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 3, 21. 29, 22. Die Farbe der Vaiśya, wie weiss die der Brahmanen, roth die der Krieger und schwarz die der Śūdra, 3, 19; vgl. MBH. 12, 6934. MUIR, Sanskrit Texts I, 191. – AK. 2, 4, 2, 52. 56. HALĀY. 2, 50. MĀRK. P. 109, 65. -kauṣeya Citat beim Schol. zu ŚĀK. 6, 5. -cchavivarṇa VYUTP. 205. -māñjiṣṭha R. 2, 94, 5. āpītasūryaṁ nabhaḥ MṚCCH. 84, 8. — 2) m. a) “Topas” RATNAM. bei WILS. RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — b) “ein gelbes aus Kuhurin verfertigtes Pigment” RATNAM. bei WILS. — c) N. verschiedener Pflanzen: “Alangium hexapetalum” (aṅkoṭha); “Safflor, Carthamus tinctorius; Trophis aspera” (śākhoṭa) RĀJAN. — 3) f. ā a) N. verschiedener Pflanzen: “Gelbwurz”, = haridrā AK. 2, 9, 41. H. 418. H. an. MED. RATNAM. 58. = dāruharidrā, mahājyotiṣmatī, kapilaśiṁśapā, priyaṅgu RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. = ativiṣā ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. — b) “eine Art gelbes Pigment” (gorocanā) RĀJAN. — c) mystische Bez. “des Buchstabens” ṣa Ind. St. 2, 316. — 4) n. a) “Gold” BALA a. a. O. NAIṢ 8, 98. — b) “Auripigment” RĀJAN. pīta Z. 2 lies 1, 149, 2. pīta s. u. 2. pī. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 pīta pīta, adj., f. tā, Of a yellow colour, Rām. 2, 94, 5. — Comp. ā-, adj. yellowish, Rām. 2, 76, 4. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 pīta [1] -> pā2. pīta [2] a. yellow; abstr. tā f. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 pīta 2. pīta, a. yellow: -tā, f. yellowness; yellow colour. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 pīta tri° pā–karmaṇi kta . 1 pānakarmaṇi bhāve kta . 2 pāne na° pivati varṇāntaraṁ pā–ūṇā° kartari kta . 3 varṇabhede pu° 4 tadvati tri° amaraḥ . 5 haritāle na° medi° . pītaṁ pānamastyasya ac . 6 pānakartari tri° vanāya pīta pratibaddhavatsām raghuḥ . kāvye varṇanīyapītavarṇadravyāṇi kavikalpalatāyāmuktāni yathā pītāni brahma 1 jīve 2 ndra 3 garuḍe 4 śvaradṛ 5 gjaṭāḥ 6 . gaurī 7 dvāpara 8 gomūtra 9 madhu 10 vīrarasā 11 rajaḥ 12 . haridrā 13 rocanā 14 rīti 15 gandhake 16 dīpa 17 campake 18 . kiñjalka 19 valkale 20 śāli 21 haritāla 22 manaḥśilāḥ 23 . karṇikāvaṁ 24 cakravāka 25 vānarau 26 śārikāmukham 27 . keśavāṁśuka 28 maṇḍūka 29 sarāga 30 kanakādayaḥ 31 . |
पीतक – pītaka | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pītaka mf (“ikā”) n. yellow (also applied to the 4th unknown quantity m.
yellow amaranth mf (“ikā”) n. Odina Pennata pītaka mf (“ikā”) n. (“ikā”) f. saffron mf (“ikā”) n. turmeric mf (“ikā”) n. yellow jasmine pītaka n. (only orpiment pītaka n. brass pītaka n. honey pītaka n. saffron pītaka n. yellow sanders pītaka n. aloe wood pītaka n. Curcuma Aromatica pītaka n. Terminalia Tomentosa, a species of śyonāka. Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 pītaka a. Yellow. –kaḥ The Aśoka tree. –kaṁ (1) Yellow orpiment. (2) Brass. (3) Saffron. (4) Honey. (5) Aloe-wood. (6) Sandal-wood (7) Yellow sandal. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch pītaka (von 2. pīta) 1) adj. f. pītikā “gelb” P. 4, 2, 2, Vārtt. 3. 4. gaṇa yāvādi zu P. 5, 4, 29. MBH. 5, 2472. 12, 6934 (die Farbe der Vaiśya). R. 6, 82, 60. SUŚR. 1, 199, 7. 40, 14. 114, 14. 286, 6. AK. 2, 4, 4, 5. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 34, 4. 53, 20. 32. 85, 78. — 2) f. pītikā a) “Saffran” SUŚR. 1, 359, 20. — b) “Gelbwurz” RATNAM. 58 (pītakā unsere Hdschr., pītikā ŚKDR. und WILS. nach ders. Aut.). — c) “gelber Jasmin” (svarṇayūthī) JAṬĀDH. im ŚKDR. — 3) n. a) “Auripigment” AK. 2, 9, 104. — b) “Messing.” — c) “Honig.” — d) “Saffran.” — e) “gelber Sandel” (ŚKDR. u. pītacandana). — f) “Amyris Agallocha u.s.w.” (aguru). — g) = padmakāṣṭha, kiṁkirāta (in dieser Bed. m. WILS.). — h) = haridru. — i) “eine Art” Śyonāka RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — k) = nandīvṛkṣa (in dieser Bed. m. WILS. nach RĀJAN.). — l) = pītaśāla RATNAM. im ŚKDR. — Vgl. taruṇapītikā. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 pītaka pīta + ka, I. adj., f. tikā, Of a yellow colour, Rām. 6, 82, 60. II. f. tikā, Saffron. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 pītaka f. -tikā = prec. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 pītaka tri° pīta + svārthe ka . 1 pītaśabdārthe saṁjñāyāṁ kan . 2 haritāle amaraḥ 3 kusumbheṁ jaṭāgharaḥ . 4 asurabhede 5 padmakāṣṭhe 6 rītau pittale 7 mākṣike 8 pītacandane na° rājani° 9 nandīvṛkṣe 10 pītaśāle ca pu° ratnamālā . 11 śyonākabhede 12 haridruvṛkṣe 13 aśokavṛkṣe ca pu° rājani° . pītena haritālena raktaṁ tena raktaṁ rāgāt sā° ityadhikāre pītāt kan vārti° kan . 14 haritālena rakte tri° . 15 avyaktarāśaiḥ saṁjñābhede vījagaṇitam . avyaktaśabde dṛśyam . |
पीतता – pītatā | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pītatā “pīta-tā” f. yellowness
Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch pītatā (von 2. pīta) f. “das Gelbsein, die gelbe Farbe” MBH. 3, 11251. BHĀṢĀP. 127. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 pītatā pīta + tā, f. Yellowness, yellow (the colour), Bhāṣāp. 127. Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 pītatā strī, (pīta + tal + ṭāp .) haridrābhatā . pītatvam . pītaśabdāt bhāvārthe tapratyayaniṣpannā . iti vyākaraṇam .. (yathā, mahābhārate . 3 . 149 . 26 . dvāpare’pi yuge dharmo dvibhāgo naḥ pravartate . viṣṇu rvai pītatāṁ yāti caturdhā veda eva ca .. |
पीतरक्त – pītarakta | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pītarakta “pīta-rakta” mfn. yellowish-red, orange (“-cchāya” mfn.
orange-coloured) pītarakta “pīta-rakta” m. = next Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch pītarakta (2. pīta + rakta) 1) adj. “gelbroth, orangefarbig” H. 1396. HALĀY. 4, 52. -cchāya H. 1241. — 2) “Topas”, n. ŚKDR. u. WILS. nach RĀJAN., aber unter puṣparāga im ŚKDR. nach derselben Aut. masc. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 pītarakta na° varṇo varṇena pā° karma° . 1 raktayarṇe athaca potavarṇe ca pītena raktaṁ kṛtarāgam . 2 putparāgamaṇau na° rājani° . |
पीतराग – pītarāga | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pītarāga “pīta-rāga” mfn. of a yellow colour
pītarāga “pīta-rāga” m. yellowness pītarāga “pīta-rāga” m. or n. the fibres of the lotus &c. pītarāga “pīta-rāga” n. wax Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch pītarāga (2. pīta + rāga) 1) adj. “von gelber Farbe.” — 2) n. a) “Staubfaden” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.; m. WILS. — b) “Wachs” RĀJAN. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 pītarāga na° pīto rāgo varṇo yasya . 1 kiñjalke 2 sikthe ca karma° . 3 pītavarṇe pu° 4 tadvati tri° . |
पीतल – pītala | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pītala mfn. yellow
pītala m. yellow colour pītala n. brass Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 pītala a. Yellow. –laḥ The yellow colour. –laṁ Brass. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch pītala (von 2. pīta) adj. “gelb” H. 1394. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 pītala pu° pītaṁ varṇāntaraṁ lāti lā–ka . 1 pītavarṇe 2 tadyute tri° . |
पीतवर्ण – pītavarṇa | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pītavarṇa “pīta-varṇa” m. “yellow-coloured”, a species of parrot |
पीतहरितच्छाय – pītaharitacchāya | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pītaharitacchāya “pīta-harita-cchāya” mfn. of a yellow-green colour |
पीतिमन् – pītiman | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pītiman m. a yellow colour
Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch pītiman m. nom. abstr. von pīta “gelb” VĀMANA 5, 2, 20. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 pītiman m. a yellow colour. |
ब्रध्न – bradhna | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899bradhna mfn. (of doubtful origin pale red, ruddy, yellowish, bay (esp. as
the colour of a horse, but also applied to Soma and the Puroḍāśa) mfn. great, mighty bradhna m. the sun (cf. “viṣṭap”) bradhna m. the world of the sun () bradhna m. a horse bradhna m. the point or some other part of an arrow (in “śata-b-” q.v.) bradhna m. a partic. disease (cf. “bradhma” and “budhna-roga”) bradhna m. N. of a son of Manu Bhautya bradhna n. lead (often w.r. for “budhṇa” and “budhnya”). -cakra, n. the zodiac Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch bradhna UṆĀDIS. 3, 5. 1) adj. “röthlichgelb” oder “falb”, als Farbe des Pferdes insbes.; daher NAIGH. 1, 14 unter den Bezz. für dieses. yuñjanti bradhnamaruṣaṁ carantaṁ pari tasthuṣaḥ ṚV. 1, 6, 1. jānanti vṛṣṇo aruṣasya śevamuta bradhnasya śāsane raṇanti 3, 7, 5. bradhnaṁ māṁścatorvaruṇasya babhrum 7, 44, 3. kṛṣṇaḥ śveto ‘ruṣo yārmo asya bradhna ṛjra uta śoṇo yaśasvān 10, 20, 9. des Soma, welcher sonst babhru heisst, SV. I, 5, 2, 3, 2 (= AV. 7, 22, 2). ṚV. 8, 4, 13. 14. 9, 97, 52. des Puroḍāśa TS. 1, 6, 3, 3. TBR. 3, 7, 5, 7. der Sonne, in der Verbindung bradhnasya viṣṭap (s. u. d. W.). Daher m. “Sonne” AK. 1, 1, 2, 30. 3, 4. 1, 5. TRIK. 1, 1, 99. H. 96. HALĀY. 5, 51. UJJVAL. Unsicher ist die Stelle niṣkā ime yajamānasya bradhne TBR. 3, 7, 5, 13 schon darum, weil AV. 7, 99, 1 dafür -sya loke gelesen wird. Nach NAIGH. 3, 3 auch Bez. fur “gross.” — 2) subst. “Spitze” (oder “ein anderer Theil) des Pfeils” in dem comp. śatabradhna (SĀY. śatāgra): śatabradhna iṣustava sahasraparṇa eka it ṚV. 8, 66, 7. — 3) subst. “Blei” BHĀVAPR. in NIGH. PR. Nach ŚKDR. = gomedaṁ patraṁ mit folgendem Citat aus DHANVANTARI’S NIGHAṆṬU in BHĀVAPR.: patraṁ dalāhvayaṁ rāmaṁ gomedaṁ rasanāhvayamiti. — 4) m. “eine best. Krankheit”: atyabhiṣyandigurvāmasevanānnicayaṁ gataḥ. karoti granthivacchothaṁ doṣo vaṅkṣaṇasaṁdhiṣu.. jvaraśūlāṅgasādāḍhyaṁ taṁ bradhnamiti nirdiśet. MĀDHAVAK. im ŚKDR. — 5) m. N. pr. eines Mannes gaṇa kuñjādi zu P. 4, 1, 98. eines Sohnes des Manu Bhautja MĀRK. P. 100, 32; vgl. brādhnāyana. — Bisweilen fehlerhaft für budhna und budhnya; s. u. d. Ww. bradhna 1) “Sonne”: bradhnasya piṣṭapam (vgl. u. viṣṭap) M. 4, 231. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 bradhna bradhna, perhaps vṛdh + na, m. 1. The root of a tree. 2. A son. 3. The body. 4. The sun, Man. 4, 231. 5. Śiva, Brahman. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 bradhna a. reddish-yellow; m. the sun. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 bradhna bradh-na, a. ruddy; m. sun; N.; n. lead: -bimba, n. disc of the sun; -maṇḍala, n. id.; (a) -loka, m. world of the sun (AV.). Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 bradhna pu° bandha–nak bradhādeśaḥ . 1 sūrye 2 arkavṛkṣe amaraḥ . 3 śive hemaca° . 4 dine 5 aśve nighaṇṭuḥ 6 ṛṣibhede tasya gotrāpatyam kuñjā° ckañ . brāndhāyana tadgotrāpatye puṁstrī° . 7 bhautyamanoḥ putrabhede mārkapu° 100 a° . 8 rīgabhede abhyabhiṣyandigurvāmasevanānnicayaṁ gataḥ . karoti granthivacchothaṁ doṣo vaṅkṣaṇasandhiṣu . jvaraśūlāṅgasādādyaṁ taṁ vradhnamiti nirdiśet mādhavani0 |
मण्जरीपिण्जरित – maṇjarīpiṇjarita | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899maṇjarīpiṇjarita “maṇjarī-piṇjarita” mfn. “having pearls and gold” or
“yellowish coloured with clusters of flowers” |
मलीमस – malīmasa | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899malīmasa mf (“ā”) n. dirty, impure, soiled (lit. and fig.)
mf (“ā”) n. of a dark or dirty gray colour &c. malīmasa m. (!) iron malīmasa m. (!) or n. yellowish vitriol of iron Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 malīmasa a. [mala-īmasac] (1) Dirty foul, impure, unclean, stained, soiled; mā te malīmasavikāraghanā matirbhūt Māl. 1. 32; R. 2. 53. (2) Dark, black. of a black colour; paṇitā na janāravairavaidapi kūjaṁtamaliṁ malīmasaṁ N. 2. 92; mahāmanomohamalīmasāṁdhayā K. 5; visāritāmajihata kokilāvalīmalīmasā jaladamadāṁburājayaḥ Śi. 17. 57, 1. 38; Māl. 10. 4. (3) Wicked, sinful, wrong, unrighteous; malīmasāmādadate na paddhatiṁ R. 3. 46. –saḥ (1) Iron. (2) Green vitriol. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch malīmasa P. 5, 2, 114. 1) adj. f. ā “schmutzig, unrein” (eig. und übertr.), “von schmutzig grauer Farbe” AK. 3, 2, 4. H. 1435. an. 4, 330. MED. s. 58. HALĀY. 4, 42. ŚĀK. 61, v. l. citraṁ nṛpadvipāḥ pūtamūrtayaḥ kīrtinirjharaiḥ. bhavanti vyasanāsaktipāṁsusnānamalīmasāḥ.. Spr. 4050. kṣālayituṁ kṣameta kaḥ kṣapātamaskāṇḍamalīmasaṁ nabhaḥ ŚIŚ. 1, 38. prājyacitādhūma- KATHĀS. 25, 180. añjana Spr. 619. dhūmādgāḍhamalīmasāt 4267. ali NAIṢ 2, 92. kiṁ prāṇairupakrośamalīmasaiḥ RAGH. 2, 53. pathaḥ śucerdarśayitāra īśvarā malīmasāmādadate na paddhatim 3, 46. akīrti- KATHĀS. 49, 55. asāre saṁsāre sarvaduḥkhamalīmase Verz. d. Oxf. H. 90,b,22. — 2) m. a) “Eisen.” — b) “schwarzer Eisenvitriol” H. an. MED. — Vgl. mala und masi. malīmasa 1) ghoraniviḍadhvāntavrāta- (śmaśāna) KATHĀS. 75, 42. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 malīmasa malīmasa (cf. mala), adj. 1. Dirty, Hit. ii. d. 148; stained, Ragh. 2, 33. 2. Wicked. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 malīmasa a. = malina a. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 malīmasa mal-ī-mas-a, a. dirty, foul, stained; unclean, impure (also fig.); dirty-coloured, dark grey. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 malīmasa tri° mala–īmasac . 1 maline amaraḥ . 2 lauhe 3 puṣpakāsīse ca medi° . |
मांश्चतु – māṁścatu | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899māṁścatu mfn. (prob.) light yellow, dun-coloured ( and “maṁścatu”)
Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch māṁścatu (maṁścatu Padap. und ṚV. PRĀT. 4, 35) adj. scheint eine Farbe zu sein, etwa “falb”, als Bez. Mitra’s oder der Sonne, sowie des Rosses: bradhnaṁ māṁścatorvaruṇasya babhrum ṚV. 7, 44, 3. pl. f. māṁścatvaḥ NAIGH. 1, 14 unter den Namen des “Pferdes.” |
राज्णी – rājṇī | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899rājṇī f. (see 1. “rājan”) a queen, princess, the wife of a king &c. &c.
f. N. of the western quarter or that which contains the Soul of the Universe f. deep-coloured or yellowish-red brass (consisting of three parts of copper to one of zinc or tin) rājṇī “rājya” &c. see col.1. |
रुचिः – ruciḥ | Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890
ruciḥ(cī) f. [ruc-ki vā ṅīp] (1) Light, lustre, splendour, brightness; rucimiṁdudale karotyajaḥ paripūrṇaṁdurucirmahīpatiḥ Śi. 16. 71; R. 5. 67; Me. 15. (2) A ray of light; as in rucibhartṛ q. v. (3) Appearance, colour, beauty (usually at the end of comp.); paṭalaṁ bahirbahalapaṁkaruci Śi. 9. 19. (4) Taste, relish; as in rucikara. (5) Zest, hunger, appetite. (6) Wish, desire, pleasure; svarucyā ‘at will or pleasure. (7) Liking, taste; vimārgagāyāśca ruciḥ svakāṁte Bv. 1. 125 ‘liking or love’; na sa kṣitīśo rucaye babhūva; bhinnarucirhi lokaḥ R. 6. 30; nāṭyaṁ bhinnarucerjanasya bahudhāpyekaṁ samārādhanaṁ M. 1. 4; oft. in comp. in the sense of ‘indulging in’, ‘devoted or addicted to’; hiṁsāruceḥ Māl. 5. 29. (8) Passion, close application to any object (9) A kind of yellow pigment (gorocanā). — Comp. –kara a. 1. tasteful, savoury, palatable. –2. exciting desire. –3. stomachic, tonic. –dhāman m. the sun. –bhartṛ m. 1. the sun; Śi. 9. 17. –2. a husband. Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 ruciḥ strī, (rucyate iti . ruc + igupadhāt kit . uṇā° 4 . 119 . iti in . saca kit .) abhiṣvaṅgaḥ . anurāgaḥ . āśaktirvā . spṛhā . (yathā, kirāte . 10 . 62 . rucikaramapi nārthavadbabhūva stimitasamādhiśucau pṛthātanūje .. amlo rucikaro hṛdyaḥ prīṇano vahnidīpanaḥ .. iti vaidyakarājavallabhe dravyaguṇavyākhyāyām ..) abhilāṣaḥ . gabhastiḥ . kiraṇaḥ . ityamarabharatau .. śobhā . iti medinī .. (yathā, raghuḥ . 5 . 67 . lakṣmīrvinodayati yena digantalambī so’yi tvadānanaruciṁ vijahāti candraḥ ..) bubhukṣā . iti hemacandraḥ .. gorocanā . iti rājanirghaṇṭaḥ .. āliṅganaviśeṣaḥ . tallakṣaṇaṁ yathā . nāyikāyā nāyakasya saṁmukhe jānvoruparyupaviśya vakṣasi vakṣo dattvā yadavasthānam . iti kāmaśāstram .. ruciḥ puṁ, (rocate śobhate iti . ruc + in . saca kit .) prajāpativiśeṣaḥ . sa ca raucyamanupitā . yathā — mārkaṇḍeya uvāca . ruciḥ prajāpatiḥ pūrvaṁ nirmamo nirahaṅkṛtiḥ . yatrāstamitaśāyī ca cacāra pṛthivīmimām .. anagnimaniketantamekāhāvasathāśrayam . vimuktasaṅgaṁ taṁ dṛṣṭvā procuḥ svapitaro munim .. pitara ūcuḥ . vatsa kasmāt tvayā puṇyo na kṛto dārasaṁgrahaḥ . svargāpavargahetutvādbandhastenāniśaṁ vinā .. gṛhī samastadevānāṁ pitṝṇāñca tathārhaṇām . ṛṣīṇāmatithīnāñca kurban lokānupāśnute .. svāhoccāraṇato devān svadhoccāraṇataḥ pitṝn . vibhajannannadānena bhūtādyānatithīnapi .. sa tvaṁ daivādṛṇādbandhaṁ bandhamasmadṛṇādapi . āvāpnoṣi manuṣyarṣibhūtebhyaśca dine dine .. anutpādya sutān devānasantarpya pitṝṁstathā . bhūtādīṁśca kathaṁ mauḍhyāt sugatiṁ gantumicchasi .. ruciruvāca . parigraho’tiduḥkhāya pāpāyādhogatestathā . bhavatyato mayā pūrbaṁ na kṛto dārasaṁgrahaḥ .. prakṣālyate’nudivasaṁ yadātmā niṣparigrahaiḥ . mamatvapaṅkadigdho’pi cintāmbhobhirvaraṁ hi tat .. ityādi .. pitara ūcuḥ . yuktaṁ prakṣālanaṁ kartumātmano niyatendriyaiḥ . kintu lepāya mārgo’yaṁ yatra tvaṁ puttra vartase .. ityādi .. * .. mārkaṇḍeya uvāca . sa tena pitṛvākyena bhṛśamudbignamānasaḥ . kanyābhilāṣī viprarṣiḥ paribabhrāma medinīm .. kanyāmalabhamāno’sau pitṛvākyāgnidīpitaḥ . cintāmavāpa mahatīmatīvodvignamānasaḥ .. kiṁ karomi kva gacchāmi kathaṁ me dārasaṁgrahaḥ . kṣipraṁ bhavet pitṝṇāṁ yo mamābhyudayakārakaḥ .. iti cintayatastasya matirjātā mahātmanaḥ . tapasārādhayāmyenaṁ brahmāṇaṁ kamalodbhavam .. tato varṣaśataṁ divyaṁ tapastepe sa vaidhasam . didṛkṣuḥ suciraṁ kālaṁ rucirniyamamāsthitaḥ .. tataḥ svandarśayāmāsa brahmā lokapitāmahaḥ . uvāca ca prasanno’smītyucyatāmabhivāñchitam .. tato’sau praṇipatyāha brahmāṇaṁ jagataḥ patim . pitṝṇāṁ vacanāttena yat kartumabhivāñchitam .. brahmā cāha ruciṁ vipraṁ śrutvā tasyābhivāñchitam . prajāpatistvaṁ bhavitā saṣṭavyā bhavatā prajāḥ .. sṛṣṭvā prajāḥ sutān vipra samutpādya kriyāstathā . kṛtvā hṛtādhikārastvaṁ tataḥ siddhimavāpsyasi .. sa tvaṁ yathoktaṁ pitṛbhiḥ kuru dāraparigraham . kāmañcemamabhidhyāya kriyatāṁ pitṛpūjanam .. ta eva tuṣṭāḥ pitaraḥ pradāsyanti tavepsitam . patnīṁ sutāṁśca santuṣṭāḥ kiṁ na dadyuḥ pitāmahāḥ .. mārkaṇḍeya uvāca . ityṛṣirvacanaṁ śrutvā brahmaṇo’vyaktajanmanaḥ . nadyā vivikte puline cakāra pitṛtarpaṇam .. tuṣṭāva ca pitṝn vipraḥ stavairebhirathādṛtaḥ . ekāgraḥ prayato bhūtvā bhaktinamrātmako ruciḥ .. rucikṛtapitṛstotraṁ yathā — ruciruvāca . namasye’haṁ pitṝn bhaktyā ye vasantyadhidevatam . devairapi hi tarpyante ye śrāddheṣu svadhottaraiḥ .. namasye’haṁ pitṝn svarge ye tarpyante maharṣibhiḥ . śrāddhairmanomayairbhaktyā bhuktimuktimabhīpsubhiḥ . namasye’haṁ pitṝn svarge siddhāḥ santarpayanti yān . śrāddheṣu divyaiḥ sakalairupahārairanuttamaiḥ .. namasye’haṁ pitṝn bhaktyā ye’rcyante guhyakairdivi . tanmayatvena vāñchadbhirṛddhimātyantikīṁ parām .. namasye’haṁ pitṝn martyairarcyante bhuvi ye sadā . śrāddheṣu śraddhayābhīṣṭalokapuṣṭipradāyinaḥ .. namasye’haṁ pitṝn viprairarcyante bhuvi ye sadā . vāñchitābhīṣṭalābhāya prājāpatyapradāyinaḥ .. namasye’haṁ pitṝn viprairarcyanta’raṇyavāsibhiḥ . vanyaiḥ śrāddhaiyatāhāraistaponirdhūtakalmaṣaiḥ .. namasye’haṁ pitṝn viprairnaiṣṭhikavratadhāribhiḥ . ye saṁyatātsabhirnityaṁ santarpyante samādhibhiḥ . namasye’haṁ pitṝn śrāddherājanyāstarpayanti yān . kavyairaśeṣairvidhivallokadvayaphalapradān .. namasye’haṁ pitṝn vaiśyairarcyante bhuvi ye sadā . svakarmābhiratairnityaṁ puṣpadhūpānnavāribhiḥ .. namasye’haṁ pitṝn śrāddhe ye śūdrairapi bhaktitaḥ . santarpyante jagatyasmin nāmnā khyātāḥ sukālinaḥ .. namasye’haṁ pitṝn śrāddhe pātāle ye mahāsuraiḥ . santarpyante svadhāhārāstyaktadambhamadaiḥ sadā .. namasye’haṁ pitṝn śrāddhairarcyante ye rasātale . bhogairaśeṣairvivi dhairnāgaiḥ kāmānabhīpsubhiḥ .. namasye’haṁ pitṝn śrāddhe sarpaiḥ santarpitān sadā tatraiva vividhairmantrairbhogasampatsamanvitaiḥ .. pitṝnnamasye nivasanti sākṣād ye devaloke’tha mahītale vā . tathāntarīkṣe ca surādipūjyāste saṁpratīcchantu mayopanītam .. pitṝnnamasye paramāṇubhūtā ye vai vimāne nivasantyamūrtāḥ . yajanti yānastamalā manobhiryogīśvarāḥ kleśavimuktihetūn .. pitṝnnamasye divi ye ca mūrtāḥ svadhāmujaḥ kābhyaphalābhisandhau . pradānaśaktāḥ sakalepsitānāṁ vimuktidā ye’nabhisaṁhiteṣu .. tṛpyantu te’smin pitaraḥ samastā icchāvatāṁ ye pradiśanti kāmān . suratvamindratvamato’dhikaṁ vā vasvātmajān kṣmāmavalāṁ gṛhāṇi .. sūryasya ye raśmiṣu candravimbe śukle vimāne ca sadā vasanti . tṛpyantu te’smin pitaro’nnatoyairgandhādinā puṣṭimato vrajantu .. yeṣāṁ hute’gnau haviṣā ca tṛptirye bhuñjate vipra śarīrasaṁsthāḥ . ye piṇḍadānena mudaṁ prayānti tṛpyantu te’smin pitaro’nnatoyaiḥ .. ye khaḍgamāṁsena surairabhīṣṭaiḥ kṛṣṇaistilairdaityamahoragaiśca . kālena śākeba maharṣivaryaiḥ saṁprīṇitāste mudamatra yāntu .. kavyānyaśeṣāṇi ca yānyabhīṣṭānyatīva yeṣāmamarārcitānām . teṣāntu sānnidhyamihāstu puṣpagandhādibhojyeṣu mayāhṛteṣu .. dine dine ye pratigṛhṇate’rcāṁ māsāntapūjyā bhuvi ye’ṣṭakāsu . ye vatsarānte’bhyudaye ca pūjyāḥ prayāntu te me pitaro’tra tuṣṭim .. pūjyā dbijānāṁ kumudendubhāso ye kṣattriyāṇāñca navārkavarṇāḥ . tathā viśāṁ ye kanakāvadātā nīlīnibhāḥ śūdrajanasya ye ca .. te’smin samastā mama puṣpagandhadhūpānnatoyādinivedanena . tathāgnihomena ca yāntu tṛptiṁ sadā pitṛbhyaḥ praṇato’smi tebhyaḥ .. ye devapūrvāṇyatitṛptihetoraśnanti kavyāni śubhāhṛtāni . tṛptāśca ye bhūtisṛjo bhavanti tṛpyantu te’smin praṇato’smi tebhyaḥ .. rakṣāṁsi bhūtānyasurāṁstathogrān vināśayantastvaśivaṁ prajānām . ādyāḥ surāṇāmamareśapūjyāstṛpyantu te’smin praṇato’smi tebhyaḥ .. agniṣvāttā barhiṣada ājyapāḥ somapāstathā . vrajantu tṛptiṁ śrāddhe’smin pitarastarpitā mayā .. agniṣvāttāḥ pitṛgaṇāḥ prācīṁ rakṣantu me diśam . tathā bahiṣadaḥ pāntu yāmyāṁ ye pitaraḥsthitāḥ .. pratīcīmājyapāstadbadudīcīmapi somapāḥ . ūrdhvatastvaryamā rakṣet kavyavālo’nalo’pyadhaḥ .. rakṣobhūtapiśācebhyastathaivāsuradoṣataḥ . sarvataścādhipasteṣāṁ yamo rakṣāṁ karotu me .. viśvo viśvabhugārādhyo dhanyo dharmaḥ sanātanaḥ . bhūtido bhūtikṛdbhūtiḥ pitṝṇāṁ ye gaṇā nava .. kalyāṇaḥ kalyadaḥ kartā kalyaḥ kalyatarāśrayaḥ . kalyatāheturanaghaḥ ṣaḍityete gaṇāḥ smṛtāḥ .. varo vareṇyo varadastuṣṭidaḥ puṣṭidastathā . viśvapātā tathā dhātā sapta caite gaṇāḥ smṛtāḥ .. mahānmahātmā mahito mahimāvānmahābalaḥ . gaṇāḥ pañca tathaivaite pitṝṇāṁ pāpanāśanāḥ .. sukhado dhanadaścānyo dharmado’nyo vibhūtidaḥ . pitṝṇāṁ kathyate caitattathā gaṇacatuṣṭayam .. ekatriṁśat pitṛgaṇā yairvyāptamakhilaṁ jagat . te me’tra tṛptāstuṣyantu yacchantu ca samīhitam .. iti mārkaṇḍeyapurāṇe raucye manvantare pitṛstavaḥ .. mārkaṇḍeya uvāca . evantu stuvatastasya tejaso rāśirucchikhaḥ . prādurbabhūva sahasā gaganavyāptikārakaḥ .. taddṛṣṭvā sumahattejaḥ samācchādya sthitaṁ jagat . jānubhyāmavaniṁ gatvā ruciḥ stotramidaṁ jagau .. amūrtānāñca mūrtānāṁ pitṝṇāṁ dīptatejasām . namasyāmi sadā teṣāṁ dhyānināṁ divyacakṣuṣām .. indrādīnāñca netāro dakṣamārīcayostathā . saptarṣīṇāntathānyeṣāṁ tān namasyāmi kāmadān .. manvādīnācca netāraḥ sūryācandramasostathā . tānnamasyāmyahaṁ sarvān pitṝnapsvarṇabeṣu ca .. nakṣatrāṇāṁ grahāṇāñca vāyvagninabhasāṁ tathā . dyāvāpṛthivyośca tathā namasyāmi kṛtāñjaliḥ .. prajāpateḥ kaśyapāya somāya varuṇāya ca . yogeśvarebhyaśca tathā namasyāmi kṛtāñjaliḥ .. namo gaṇebhyaḥ saptabhyastathā lokeṣu saptasu . svayambhuve namasyāmi brahmaṇe yogacakṣuṣe .. somādhārāḥ pitṛgaṇā yogamūrtidhārā hi te . namasyāmi tataḥ somaṁ pitaraṁ jagatāmaham .. agnirūpāṁstathaivānyānnamasyāmi pitṝnaham . agnīṣomamayaṁ viśvaṁ yata etadaśeṣataḥ .. ye tu tejasi ye vāyau somasūryāgnimūrtayaḥ . jagatsvarūpiṇaścaiva tathā brahmasvarūpiṇaḥ .. tebhyo’khilebhyo yogibhyaḥ pitṛbhyo yatamānasaḥ . namo namo namaste me prasīdantu svadhābhujaḥ .. śrīmārkaṇḍeya uvāca . evaṁ stutāstatastena tejaso munisattamāḥ . niścakramuste pitaro bhāsayanto diśo daśa .. niveditantu yattena puṣpagandhānulepanam . tadbhūṣitānatha sa tān dadṛśe purataḥ sthitān .. praṇiṣatya rucirbhaktyā punareva kṛtāñjaliḥ . namastubhyaṁ namastubhyamityāha pṛthagādṛtaḥ .. tataḥ prasannāḥ pitarastamūcurmunisattamam . varaṁ vṛṇīṣveti sa tānuvācānatakandharaḥ .. sāmprataṁ sargakartṛtvamādiṣṭaṁ brahmaṇā mama . so’haṁ patnīmabhīpsāmi dhanyāṁ divyāṁ prajāvatīm .. pitara ūcuḥ . adyaiva sadyaḥ patnī te bhaviṣyati manoramā . tasyāñca puttro bhavitā bhavato munisattama ! .. manvantarādhipo dhīmān tvannāmnaivopalakṣitaḥ . ruce raucya iti khyātiṁ prayāsyati jagattraye .. tasyāpi bahavaḥ puttrā mahābalaprarākramāḥ . bhaviṣyanti mahātmānaḥ pṛthivīparipālakāḥ .. tvañca prajāpatirbhūtvā prajāḥ sṛṣṭvā caturvidhāḥ . kṣīṇādhikāro dharmajñastataḥ siddhimavāpsyasi .. stotreṇānena ca naro yo’smāṁstoṣyati bhaktitaḥ . tasya tuṣṭā vayaṁ bhogān dāsyāmo jñānamuttamam .. śarīrārogyamaiśvaryaṁ puttrapauttrādisantatim . pradāsyāmo na sandeho yaccānyadabhivāñchitam .. tasmāt puṇyaphalaṁ loke vāñchadbhiḥ satataṁ naraiḥ . pitṝṇāñcākṣayāṁ tṛptiṁ stavyāḥ stotreṇa mānavaiḥ .. śrāddhe ca ya imaṁ bhaktyā asmatprītikaraṁ stavam . paṭhiṣyanti dbijāgryāṇāṁ bhuñjatāṁ purataḥ sthitāḥ .. stotraśravaṇasaṁprītyā sannidhāne pare kṛte . asmābhirakṣayaṁ śrāddhaṁ tadbhaviṣyatyasaṁśayam .. yadyapyaśrotriyaṁ śrārdhaṁ yadyapyupahataṁ bhavet . anyāyopāttavittena yadi vā kṛtamanyathā .. aśrāddhārhairupahatairupahāraistathā kṛtam . akāle’pyathavā deśe vidhihīnamathāpi vā .. aśraddhayā vā puruṣairdambhamāśritya vā kṛtam . asmākaṁ prītaye śrāddhaṁ tathāpya tadudīraṇāt .. yatraitat paṭhyate śrāddhe stotramasmatsukhāvaham . asmākaṁ jāyate tṛptistatra dvādaśavārṣikī .. hemante dbādaśābdāni tṛptimetat prayacchati . śiśire dbiguṇābdāni tṛptiṁ stītramidaṁ śrutam .. vasante ṣoḍaśasamāstṛptaye śrāddhakarmaṇi . grīṣme ca ṣoḍaśaivaitat paṭhitaṁ tṛptikārakam .. vikāle ca kṛte śrāddhe stotreṇānena sādhite . varṣāsu tṛptirasmākamakṣayā jāyate ruce .. śaratkāle’pi paṭhitaṁ śrāddhakāle prayacchati . asmākametat puruṣaistṛptiṁ pañcadaśābdikīm .. yasmin gṛhe’pi likhitametattiṣṭhati nityadā . sannidhātaṁ kṛte śrāddhe tatrāsmākaṁ bhaviṣyati .. tasmādetattvayā śrāddhe viprāṇāṁ bhuñjatāṁ puraḥ . śrāvaṇīyaṁ mahābhāga asmākaṁ tuṣṭikārakam .. iti mārkaṇḍeyapurāṇe raucye manvantare pitṛstave .. * mārkaṇḍeya uvāca . tatastasmānnadīmadhyāt samuttasthau manoramā . pramlocā nāma tanvaṅgī tatsamīpe varāpsarāḥ .. sā covāca mahātmānaṁ ruciṁ sumadhurākṣaram .. praśrayāvanatā subhrūḥ pramlocā vai varāpsarāḥ .. atīvarūpiṇī kanyā matsutā tapatāṁvara . jātā varuṇaputtreṇa puṣkareṇa mahātmanā .. tāṁ gṛhāṇa mayā dattāṁ bhāryārthe varavarṇinīm . manurmahāmatistasyāṁ samutpasyati te sutaḥ .. mārkaṇḍeya uvāca . tathati tena cāpyuktā tasmāttoyādvapuṣmatīm . ujjahāra tataḥ kabhyāṁ mālinīṁ nāma nāmataḥ .. nadyāśca puline tasmin sa munirmunisattama ! . jagrāha pāṇiṁ vidhivat samānāyya mahāmunīn .. tasyāṁ tasya suto jajñe mahāvīryo mahāmatiḥ . raucyo’bhavat piturnāmnā khyāto’tra vasudhātale .. tasya manvantare devāstathā saptarṣayaśca ye . tanayāśca nṛpāścaiva te samyak kathitāstava .. dharmavṛddhistathārogyaṁ dhanadhānyasutodbhavaḥ . nṛṇāṁ bhavatyasandigdhamasmin manvantare śrute .. pitṛstavaṁ tathā śrutvā pitṝṇāñca tathā gaṇān . sarvān kāmānavāpnoti tatprasādānnaro mune .. iti mārkaṇḍeyapurāṇe raucyemanvantaraṁ samāptam .. gāruḍe 89 . 90 adhyāye’pyevamasti .. |
रोहित – rohita | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899rohita mf (“ā” or “iṇī” q.v.) n. (cf. “lohita”) red, reddish &c. &c.
rohita m. a red or chestnut horse (applied to the Sun pl. N. of these hymns) rohita m. a kind of deer rohita m. a kind of fish, Cyprinus Rohitaka &c. rohita m. a kind of tree, Andersonia Rohitaka rohita m. a sort of ornament made of precious stones rohita m. a partic. form of rainbow (cf. n.) rohita m. N. of a son of Hari-ścandra rohita m. of a Manu rohita m. of a son of Kṛiṣṇa (v.l. “rauhita”) rohita m. of a son of Vapush-mat (king of śālmala) rohita m. of a river rohita m. pl. N. of a class of Gandharvas mf (“ā” or “iṇī” q.v.) n. of a class of gods under the 12th Manu rohita n. a kind of metre rohita n. a kind of rainbow appearing in a straight form, Indra’s bow unbent and invisible to mortals (cf. “rohitendra-dhanus”) rohita n. blood rohita n. saffron rohita n. N. of the Varsha ruled by Rohita (son of Vapush-mat) Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 rohita a. (rohitā or rohiṇī f.) Red, red-coloured. –taḥ (1) Red colour. (2) A fox. (3) A kind of deer. (4) A red horse. (5) N. of Hariśchandra’s son. (6) A kind of fish. –taṁ (1) Blood. (2) Saffron. (3) A straingt rain-bow. — Comp. –aśvaḥ fire. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch rohita UṆĀDIS. 3, 94. 1) adj. f. rohitā (nicht zu belegen) und rohiṇī “roth, röthlich” P. 4, 1, 39. VOP. 4, 27. AK. 1, 1, 4, 24. TRIK. 3, 3, 136. fg. H. 1395. an. 3, 221. fg. MED. ṇ. 74. praṣṭi ṚV. 1, 39, 6. 8, 7, 28. atya 4, 2, 3. go AV. 1, 22, 1. 3. varṇa 2. 5, 23, 4. 6, 83, 2. 12, 1, 11. 18, 4, 24. carman 14, 2, 23. KĀTY. ŚR. 4, 8, 3. VS. 16, 19. 19, 83. 24, 2. 5. rohitarūpaṁ paśavo bhūyiṣṭhāḥ KĀṬH. 24, 2. AIT. BR. 3, 34. pipīlikāḥ KAUŚ. 116. ŚĀÑKH. ŚR.4, 14, 13. CHĀND. UP. 3, 1, 4. 6, 4, 1. CŪLIKOP. in Ind. St. 9, 15. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 48, 44. So wird auch ein Metrum genannt: rohitaṁ vai nāmaitacchando yatpārucchepam AIT. BR. 5, 10. sarva- ŚAT. BR. 3, 5, 4, 23. — 2) m. a) “ein rothes Ross, Fuchs”: Agni’s NAIGH. 1, 15. ŚAT. BR. 6, 6, 3, 4. rohitena tvagnirdevatāṁ gamayatu TS. 1, 6, 4, 3. ṚV. 1, 94, 1, 10. 134, 9. 2, 10, 2. 3, 6, 6. 4, 6, 9. 5, 61, 9. 8, 3, 22. PAÑCAV. BR. 14, 3, 12. Bildlich von “der Sonne” in den Liedern AV. 13, 1, 1. fgg.; vgl. KAUŚ. 24. Daher auch Bez. “dieser Lieder” AV. 19, 23, 23. KAUŚ. 99. — b) “eine best. Hirschart” AK. 2, 5, 10. H. 1294. an. 3, 289. MED. t. 146. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 86, 26. UTTARAR. 91, 1 (117, 4). lebt am Wasser SUŚR. 1, 204, 10. — c) “ein best. Fisch, Cyprinus Rohita Ham.” AK. 1, 2, 3, 19. TRIK. 1, 2, 16. H. 1346. H. an. MED. HĀR. 188. HALĀY. 3, 37. M. 5, 16. YĀJÑ. 1, 177. adadadrohitānmatsyānbrāhmaṇebhyaḥ (NĪLAK.: rohitān lohitabhūpradeśān padmarāgakhanimato vā matsyān deśaviśeṣān) MBH. 7, 2284 = 12, 984. R. 3, 76, 9. SUŚR. 1, 206, 5. 11. VĀGBH. 6, 68. agādhajalasaṁcārī na garvaṁ yāti rohitaḥ Spr. 19. -matsya VARĀH. BṚH. S. 54, 15. — d) “ein best. Baum, Andersonia Rohitaka Roxb.” H. an. MED. SUŚR. 2, 342, 2. -vṛkṣa VARĀH. BṚH. S. 54, 72. — e) “ein bes. Perlenschmuck” (hārabheda) H. an. — f) “eine best. unvollkommene Form eines Regenbogens” VARĀH. BṚH. S. 28, 16. rohitendradhanūṁṣi M. 1, 38. MĀRK. P. 48, 35; vgl. 4) “a).” — g) N. pr. a) eines Sohnes des Hariścandra AIT. BR. 7, 14. ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 15, 18, 8. HARIV. 756. BHĀG. P. 9, 7, 8. fgg. -gaṇāḥ PRAVARĀDHY. in Verz. d. B. H. 61, 3; vgl. rohitāśva. — b) eines Manu HARIV. 469. — g) eines Sohnes des Kṛṣṇa HARIV. 9184. rauhita ed. Calc. — d) eines Sohnes des Vapushmant, Fürsten von Śālmala, MĀRK. P. 53, 27. — e) pl. Bez. einer Klasse von Gandharva R. 4, 41, 60. — z) pl. Bez. einer Klasse von Göttern unter dem 12ten Manu MĀRK. P. 94, 23. — h) eines Flusses SCHIEFNER, Lebensb. 237 (7). — 3) f. rohiṇī a) proparox. “eine röthliche Kuh” (im Veda vielleicht auch “eine röthliche Stute”) ṚV. 8, 82, 13. 90, 13 (wo wir rohiṇyāḥ vermuthen). AV. 13,1,22. fg. ŚAT. BR.2,1,2,6.4,5,8,2. TS.6,1,6,2. KĀTY. ŚR. 13,4,15. MBH.3,13260. 13,3669. 3705. 3716. 3720. 4919.\ “Kuh” überh. AK.2,9,67. TRIK.2,9,16. H. 1265. an.3,221. MED. ṇ. 74. HALĀY.2,113. In der Mythologie eine Tochter der Surabhi und Mutter des “Rindes” MBH. 1, 2631. fg. R. 3, 20, 28. fg. VĀYU-P. in VP. 150, N. 19. Mutter der Kāmadhenu KĀLIKĀ-P. im ŚKDR. — b) proparox. im AV., sonst oxyt. N. eines Nakshatra (und “des damit verbundenen lunaren Tages”); personif. eine Tochter Daksha’s und die bevorzugte Gattin des Mondes, gaṇa gaurādi zu P. 4, 1, 41. TRIK. 3, 3, 136. fg. H. 109. die “Rothe” benannt nach der Farbe des Hauptsternes, des Aldebaran, Journ. of the Am. Or. S. 6, 329. AV. 19, 7, 2. ŚAT. BR. 2, 1, 2, 6. 7. 11, 1, 1, 7. TS. 2, 3, 5, 1. TBR. 1, 1, 2, 2. 10, 6. 2, 7, 9, 4. AIT. BR. 3, 33. ĀŚV. ŚR. 2, 1, 10. GṚHY. 2, 10, 3. WEBER, Nax. passim; MBH. 1, 5767. 2, 2019. 3, 2676. 16171. 4, 258. 9, 2015. fgg. 13, 3257. HARIV. 3284. 7734. 7955. 12454. 12483. R. 1, 1, 27. 2, 114, 3 (125, 3 GORR.). 3, 3, 11. 55, 22. 4, 19, 30. 5, 17, 36. 21, 9. 31, 5. 6, 72, 43. 59. ŚĀK. 181. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 6, 9. 10. 10, 4. 11, 54. 12, 21. 15, 2. 24, 12. 28. 31. 36. 26, 12. 47, 6. 100, 1. 102, 1. 105, 1. MĀRK. P. 33, 9. 58, 10. VET. in LA. (III) 13, 11. WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 225. pl. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 8, 19. 26, 11. 54, 123. 98, 6. In der Figur des Sternbildes sieht der Inder einen “Karren” COLEBR. Misc. Ess. II, 331. rohiṇyāḥ śakaṭam Spr. 2367. SŪRYAS. 8, 13. rohiṇīśakaṭa Spr. 2649. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 24,30. PAÑCAT. 50,20. KUVALAJ. 169,b. einen “Tempel” Journ. of the Am. Or. S. 6, 329. einen “Fisch” (śakula) KĀLIDĀSA im RĀTRILAGNANIRŪPAṆA nach ŚKDR. — c) “Blitz” MED. — d) “ein junges Mädchen, das eben die Regeln bekommen hat”, Spr. 282. GṚHYASAṁGR. 2, 28. “ein neunjähriges Mädchen” 29. — e) “Halsentzündung in verschiedenen Formen” H. 467. H. an. MED. WISE 310. SUŚR. 1, 32, 1. 92, 13. 306, 14. 20. 2, 130, 14. ŚĀRÑG. SAṁH. 1, 7, 79. — f) Bez. verschiedener Pflanzen: “eine best. Gemüsepflanze” SUŚR. 1, 74, 8. 141, 14. 157, 16. 2, 11, 21. = kaṭurohiṇī H. an. = kaṭuṁbharā (?) MED. vulgo kāṇṭāśirīṣa RATNAM. 162. = somavalka H. an. MED. = kāśmarī, harītakī und mañjiṣṭhā RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. = kapilavarṇā vartulākārā virecane praśastā harītakī RĀJAV. ebend. rohiṇītaru KATHĀS. 59, 37. Könnte in dieser Bed. auch als f. von rohin gefasst werden; vgl. aśoka-, kaṭu-, kaṭuka-, kanda-, pīta-, bhadra-, māṁsa-. — g) N. pr. a) einer Gattin Vasudeva’s und Mütter Balarāma’s MBH. 1, 7308. HARIV. 1947. 1952. 3165. 3305. fgg. 3371. fgg. VP. 498. BHĀG. P. 9, 24, 44. fg. WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 281. 283. fgg. 289. fgg. — b) einer Gattin Kṛṣṇa’s HARIV. 6701. VP. 578. — g) der Gattin Mahādeva’s VP. 59. MĀRK. P. 52, 10. — d) einer Tochter Hiraṇyakaśipu’s MBH. 3, 14194. — e) einer der 16 Vidyādevī H. 239. — h) adj. oxyt. “unter dem” Nakshatra Rohiṇī “geboren” P. 4, 3, 34, Vārtt. 1. — 4) n. a) “eine best. unvollkommene Form eines Regenbogens” AK. 1, 1, 2, 12. H. 179. an. 3, 289. MED. t. 146. HALĀY. 1, 57. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 47, 20; vgl. (2) “f)” — b) “Blut.” — c) “Saffran” MED. — Vgl. karkandhu-, dhūmra-, lohita, rudhira und rauhita. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 rohita (ROHITĀŚVA). The son of Hariścandra. This son, who was born by the blessing of Varuṇa, was wanted to be sacrificed by Varuṇa himself. In connection with this Hariścandra had to bear much sorrow and misery. (For details see under Hariścandra). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 rohita rohita, akin to rudhira, h for dh, I. adj., f. tā and iṇī. 1. Red. 2. Coloured, Man. 1, 38. II. m. 1. Red, the colour. 2. A (kind of) deer, Utt. Rāmac. 117, 4. 3. A fish, Cyprinas rohita, Man. 5, 16. III. f. iṇī, also rohiṇi rohiṇi. 1. The fourth lunar asterism, Vikr. 38, 12 (ṇī). 2. The mother of bala-rāma. IV. f. iṇī. 1. Lightning. 2. A girl at the commencement of the menstruation, Pañc. iii. d. 213. 3. A woman stained with red pigments. 4. Inflammatory affection of the throat. 5. A cow. 6. Yellow myrobalan. 7. Bengal madder. V. n. 1. Blood. 2. Safflower. 3. The rainbow appearing in a straight form. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 rohita f. rohiṇī red, reddish. — m. a red horse, a kind of deer or fish, a cert. form of rainbow, a man’s name. f. rohiṇī a red cow or mare; (also rohiṇī) a cert. lunar mansion (personif. as a daughter of Dakṣa and the favourite wife of the Moon), N. of sev. myth. women. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 rohita 1. roh-ita, pp. of cs. of 2. ruh. rohita 2. roh-ita, pp. [1. ruh = rudh] red, reddish; m. red or chestnut horse (V.); kind of deer; kind of fish; kind of imperfect rainbow; N. of a son of Hariscandra; n. a metre; kind of imperfect rainbow: -aśva, m. N. of a son of Hariscandra. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 rohita pu° ruha–iti . 1 sūrye medi° 2 varṇabhede ca 3 matsya bhede pu° ujjvala° . 4 latābhede 5 mṛgyāñca strī ṅīp medi° . rohita na° ruha itac . 1 rudhire 2 kuṅkume 3 ṛjau indracāpe medi° . 4 rohitakavṛkṣe pu° svanāmakhyāte 5 matsyabhede puṁstrī° striyāṁ ṅīṣ medi° . raktodaro raktamukho raktākṣo raktapakṣatiḥ . kṛśapakṣo jhasaśreṣṭho rohitaḥ kathito budhaiḥ . rohitaḥ sarvamatsyānāṁ varo vṛṣyo’rditārtijit . kaṣāyānurasaḥ svādurvātaghno nātipitta° kṛt . ūrdhvajatrugatān rogān hanyādrohitamuṇḍakam bhāvapra° . 6 raktavarṇe pu° 7 tadvati tri° amaraḥ . striyāṁ ṅīṣ tasya natve ṇatvam . 8 agnivāhane mṛgabhede nidhaṇṭuḥ . svārthe ka . rohitaka uktārthe 9 vṛkṣabhede amaraḥ . |
रौचनिक – raucanika | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899raucanika mf (“ī”) n. (fr. “rocanā”) coloured with or like (the pigment)
Rocanā, yellowish raucanika n. the tartar of the teeth Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 raucanika a. (kī f.) Yellowish. –kaṁ The tartar of the teeth. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch raucanika adj. (f. ī) “mit” Rocanā “gefärbt, die Farbe der” R. “habend” P.4, 2, 2. ruc KIR. 5, 45. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 raucanika raucanika, i. e. rocanā + ika, adj., f. kī, Yellowish, Kir. 5, 45 (cf. also Pāṇ. 4, 2, 2 Sch.). Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 raucanika raucan-ika, a. (ī) having the colour of rocanā, yellowish. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 raucanika tri° rocanayā raktaḥ aṇa . rocanayā rakte . |
वर्णः – varṇaḥ | Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890
varṇaḥ [varṇ-ac] (1) A colour, hue; aṁtaḥśuddhastvamapi bhavitā varṇamātreṇa kṛṣṇaḥ Me. 49. (2) A paint, dye, paintcolour; see varṇ (1). (3) Colour, complexion, beauty; tvayyādātuṁ jalamavanate śārṅgiṇo varṇacaure Me. 46; R. 8. 42. (5) A class of men, tribe, caste (especially applied to the four principal castes, brāhmaṇa, kṣatriya, vaiśya, and śūdra); varṇānāmānupūrvyeṇa Vārt; na kaścidvarṇānāmapathamapakṛṣṭo’pi bhajate S. 5. 10; R. 5. 19. (6) A class, race, tribe, kind, species; as in savarṇaṁ akṣaraṁ. (7) (a) A letter, character, sound; na me varṇavicārakṣamā dṛṣṭiḥ V. 5. (b) A word, syllable; S. D. 9. (8) Fame, glory, celebrity, renown; rājā prajāraṁjanalabdhavarṇaḥ R. 6. 21. (9) A good quality, merit, virtue. (10) Praise. (11) Dress, decoration. (12) Outward appearance. form, figure. (13) A cloak, mantle. (14) A covering, lid. (15) The order or arrangement of a subject in a song (gītakrama); upāttavarṇe carite pinākinaḥ Ku. 5. 56 ‘celebrated in song, made the subject of a song.’ (16) The housings of an elephant. (17) A quality, property. (18) A religious observance. (19) An unknown quantity. (20) The number ‘one.’ (21) Application of perfumed unguents to the body. (22) Gold. (23) A musical mode. –rṇaṁ (1) Saffron. (2) A coloured unguent or perfume. — Comp. –aṁkā a pen. –adhipaḥ a planet presiding over a caste or class. –apasadaḥ an outcast. –apeta a. devoid of any caste, outcast, degraded. –arhaḥ a kind of bean. –āgamaḥ the addition of a letter; bhavedvarṇāgamāddhaṁsaḥ Sk. –ātman m. a word. –āśramāḥ the (four) castes and stages of life; R. 5. 19. –udakaṁ coloured water; R. 16. 70. –kūpikā an ink-stand. –kramaḥ 1. the order of castes or colours. –2. alphabetical order or arrangement. –gata a. 1. coloured. –2. algebraical. –cārakaḥ a painter. –jyeṣṭhaḥ a Brāhmaṇa. –tūliḥ, –tūlikā, –tūlī f. a pencil, paint-brush. –da a. colouring. ( –daṁ) a kind of fragrant yellow wood. –dātrī turmeric. –dūtaḥ a letter. –dūṣaka a. violating the distinctions of castes. –dharmaḥ the peculiar duties of a caste. –pātaḥ the omission of a letter. –pātraṁ a paint-box. –puṣpaṁ the flower of the globe-amaranth. –puṣpakaḥ the globe-amaranth. –prakarṣaḥ excellence of colour. –prasādanaṁ aloe-wood. –mātṛ f. a pen, pencil. –mātṛkā N. of Sarasvatī. –mālā, –rāśiḥ the alphabet. –re (le) khā chalk. –vartiḥ, –vartikā f. a paint-brush, pencil. –vādin m. a panegyrist. –viparyayaḥ the substitution or change of letters; (bhavet) siṁho varṇaviparyayāt Sk. –vilāsinī turmeric. –viloḍakaḥ 1. a house-breaker. –2 a plagiarist (lit. word-stealer). –vṛttaṁ a metre regulated by the number of syllables it contains (opp. mātrāvṛtta). –vyavasthitiḥ f. the institution of caste. –śikṣā instruction in letters. –śreṣṭhaḥ a Brāhmaṇa. –saṁyogaḥ marriage between persons of the same caste. –saṁsargaḥ confusion of castes. –saṁkaraḥ 1. confusion of castes through intermarriage. –2. mixture or blending of colours; citreṣu varṇasaṁkaraḥ K. (where both senses are intended); Śi. 14. 37. –saṁghātaḥ, –samāmnāyaḥ the alphabet. –sthānaṁ an organ of utterance. –hīna a. outcast. Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 varṇaḥ puṁ, (vriyate iti . vṛ + kṝvṛjṝṣidrugupanyanisvapibhyo nit . uṇā° 3 . 10 . iti naḥ . sa ca nit .) jātiḥ . sā ca brāhmaṇaḥ kṣattriyo vaiśyaḥ śūdraśca . eṣāmutpattyādiryathā . yadā bhagavān puruṣarūpeṇa sṛṣṭiṁ kṛtavān tadāsya śarīrāt catvāro varṇā utpannāḥ . mukhato brāhmaṇāḥ bāhutaḥ kṣattriyāḥ ūruto vaiśyāḥ pādataḥ śūdrā jātāḥ . eteṣāṁ varṇānāṁ dharmāḥ śāstreṣu nirūpitāḥ santi . tatra brāhmaṇadharmā ucyante . adhyayanaṁ yajanaṁ dānañceti . jīvikāstrayaḥ adhyāpanaṁ yājanaṁ pratigrahaśceti . 1 . kṣattriyasya trayo dharmāḥ . adhyayanaṁ yajanaṁ dānañca . prajānāṁ rakṣaṇaṁ jīvikā . 2 . vaiśyasya trayo dharmāḥ . adhyayanaṁ yajanaṁ dānañca . catasro jīvikāḥ . kṛṣiḥ gorakṣaṇaṁ bāṇijyaṁ kuśīdañceti . 3 . śūdrasya tu brahmakṣattraviśāṁ śuśrūṣā dharmo jīvikā ca . 4 . brāhmaṇā āśramacatuṣṭayavanto bhavanti . brahmacārī gṛhasthaḥ vānaprasthaḥ sannyāsī ca . tatra upanayanānantaraṁ niyamaṁ kṛtvā yo guroḥ sannidhau sthitvā sāṅgavedādhyayanaṁ karoti sa brahmacārītyucyate . 1 . sāṅgavedādhyayanaṁ samāpya yo dāraparigrahaṁ kṛtvā svadharmācaraṇaṁ karoti sa gṛhastha ucyate . 2 . puttramutpādya yo vanavāsaṁ kṛtvā akṛṣṭapacyaphalādi bhakṣayitvā īśvarārādhanaṁ karoti sa vānaprastha ucyate . 3 . yaḥ sarvaṁ gṛhādikaṁ tyaktvā muṇḍitamuṇḍo gairikakaupīnācchādanaṁ daṇḍaṁ kamaṇḍaluñca vibhrat bhikṣāvṛttirnirjane tīrthe vā sthitvā kevalamīśvarārādhanaṁ karoti sa sannyāsītyucyate .. 4 .. kṣattriyavaiśyayostu prathamāśramatrayaṁ vihitam . śūdrasyaika eva gṛhāśramaḥ . īśvarārādhanantu sarveṣāṁ varṇānāmāśramāṇāñca sādhāraṇo dharmaḥ . tanmadhye yastu viṣṇūpāsakaḥ sa vaiṣṇava ucyate . śivopāsakaḥ śaivaḥ . durgādiśaktyupāsakaḥ śāktaḥ . sūryopāsakaḥ sauraḥ . gaṇeśopāsako gāṇapatya ucyate . iti purāṇārthaprakāśaḥ .. * .. api ca . brahmovāca . sargādikṛddhariścaiva pūjyaḥ svāyambhuvādibhiḥ . viprādyaiḥ svena dharmeṇa taddharmaṁ vyāsa vai śṛṇu .. yajanaṁ yājanaṁ dānaṁ brāhmaṇasya pratigrahaḥ . adhyāpanaṁ cādhyayanaṁ ṣaṭ karmāṇi dvijottame .. dānamadhyayanaṁ yajño dharmaḥ kṣattriyavaiśyayoḥ . daṇḍastathā kṣattriyasya kṛṣirvaiśyasya śasyate .. śuśrūṣaiva dvijātīnāṁ śūdrāṇāṁ dharmasādhanam . kārukarmastathājīvaḥ pākayajño’pi dharmataḥ .. bhikṣācaryātha śuśrūṣā guroḥ svādhyāya eva ca . sandhyākarmāgnikāryañca dharmo’yaṁ brahmacāriṇaḥ .. sarveṣāmāśramāṇāntu dbaividhyantu caturvidham . brahmacāryupakurvāṇo naiṣṭiko brahmatatparaḥ .. yo’dhītya vidhivadvedān gṛhasthāśramamāvrajet . upakurvāṇako jñeyo naiṣṭiko maraṇāntikaḥ .. agnayo’tithiśuśrūṣā yajño dānaṁ surārcanam . gṛhasthasya samāsena dharmo’yaṁ dbijasattamāḥ .. udāsīnaḥ sādhakaśca gṛhastho dvividho bhavet . kuṭumbabharaṇe yuktaḥ sādhako’sau gṛhī bhavet .. ṛṇāni trīṇyupākṛtya tyaktvā bhāryādhanādikam . ekākī yastu vicaret udāsīnaḥ sa maukṣikaḥ .. bhūmau mūlaphalāśitvaṁ svādhyāyastapa eva ca . saṁvibhāgo yathānyāyaṁ dharmo’yaṁ vanavāsinaḥ .. tapastapyati yo’raṇye yajeddevān juhoti ca . svādhyāye caiva nirato vanasthastāpaso mataḥ .. tapasākarṣito’tyarthaṁ yastu dhyānaparo bhavet . sannyāsīha sa vijñeyo vānaprasthāśrame sthitaḥ .. yogābhyāsarato nityamārurukṣurjitendriyaḥ . jñānāya vartate bhikṣuḥ procyate pārameṣṭhikaḥ .. yastvātmaratireva syānnityatṛpto mahāmuniḥ . samyak ca damasampannaḥ sa yogī bhikṣurucyate .. bhaikṣaṁ śrutañca maunitvaṁ tapodhyāne viśeṣataḥ . samyak ca jñānaṣairāgyaṁ dharmo’yaṁ bhikṣuke mataḥ .. jñānasannyāsinaḥ kecit vedasannyāsino’pare . dharmasannyāsinaḥ kecittrividhaḥ pārameṣṭhikaḥ .. yogī ca trividhye jñeyo bhautiko mokṣa eva ca . tṛtīyo’ntyāśramī prokto yogamūrtisamāśritaḥ .. prayamā bhāvanā pūrbe mokṣe tvakṣarabhāvanā . tṛtīye cāntimā proktā bhāvanā pārameśvarī .. dharmāt saṁjāyate mokṣaḥ arthāt kāmo’bhijāyate . pravṛttañca nivṛttañca dvividhaṁ karma vaidikam .. jñānapūrbaṁ nivṛttaṁ syāt pravṛttañcāgnidevakṛt . kṣamā damo dayā dānamalobho’bhyāsa eva ca .. ārjavañcānasūyā ca tīrthānusaraṇaṁ tathā . satyaṁ santoṣa āstikyaṁ tathā cendriyanigrahaḥ .. devatābhyarcanaṁ pūjā brāhmaṇānāṁ viśeṣataḥ . ahiṁsā priyavāditvamapaiśunyamarūkṣatā .. eta āśramikā dharmāścāturvarṇyaṁ bravīmyataḥ . prājāpatyaṁ brāhmaṇānāṁ smṛtaṁ sthānaṁ kriyāvatām .. sthānamaindraṁ kṣattriyāṇāṁ saṁgrāmeṣvapalāyinām . vaiśyānāṁ mārutaṁ sthānaṁ svadharmamanuvartatām . gāndharva śūdrajātīnāṁ paricāre ca vartatām .. iti gāruḍe 49 adhyāyaḥ .. * .. anyacca . brāhmaṇasya tu vakṣyāmi śṛṇu karma vasundhare ! . yāni karmāṇi kurvīta mama bhaktiparāyaṇaḥ .. ṣaṭkarmanirato bhūtvā ahaṅkāravivarjitaḥ . lābhālābhaṁ parityajya bhikṣāhāro jitendriyaḥ .. mama karmasamāyuktaḥ paiśunyena vivajjitaḥ . śāstrānusārī madhyamtho na vṛddhaḥ śiśucetanaḥ .. etadavai brāhmaṇaḥ karma ekacitto jitendriyaḥ . iṣṭāpūrtañca kurute sa māmeti vasundhare ! .. kṣattriyāṇāṁ pravakṣyāmi mama karmasu niṣṭhatām . yāni karmāṇi kurvanti kṣattriyā madhyasaṁsthitāḥ .. dānaśūraśca karmajño yajñeṣu kuśalaḥ śuciḥ . mama karmasu medhāvī ahaṅkāravivarjitaḥ .. alpabhāṣī guṇajñaśca nityaṁ bhāgavatapriyaḥ . guruvidyānasūyātmā guhyakarmeṣvatandritaḥ .. abhyutthānādikuśalaḥ paiśunyena vivarjitaḥ . etairguṇaiḥ samāyukto yo māṁ vrajati kṣattriyaḥ .. bhajate mama yo nityaṁ mama lokāya gacchati . vaiśyānāntu pravakṣyāmi mama karmasu niṣṭhatām .. yāni karmāṇi kurute mama bhaktipathe sthitaḥ . etairguṇaiḥ svadharmeṇa lābhālābhavivarjitaḥ .. ṛtukālābhigāmī ca śāntātmā mohavarjitaḥ . śucirdakṣo nirāhāro mama karmarataḥ sadā .. gurusaṁpūjako nityaṁ yukto bhaktyānuvatsalaḥ . vaiśyastvevantu saṁyukto yo nu karmāṇi kārayet . tasyāhaṁ na praṇaśyāmi sa ca me na praṇaśyati .. atha śūdrasya vakṣyāmi karmāṇi śṛṇu mādhavi ! . yāni karmāṇi kṛtvā tu śūdro mahyaṁ vyavasthitaḥ .. dampatī mama bhaktau yau mama karmaparāyaṇau . ubhau bhāgavatau bhaktau matparau karmaniṣṭhitau .. deśakālau ca jānāti rajasā tamasojjhitaḥ nirahaṅkārayuktātmā ātitheyo vinītavān .. śraddadhāno’tipūtātmā lobhamohavivarjitaḥ . namaskārapriyo nityaṁ mama cintāvyavasthitaḥ .. śūdrakarmāṇi me devi ! ya evaṁ sa samācaret . tyaktvā ṛṣisahasrāṇi śūdrameva bhajāmyaham .. iti vārāhe vidhikarmotpattināmādhyāyaḥ .. aparañca . sukeśiruvāca . viprāṇāṁ cāturāśramyaṁ vistarānme tapodhanāḥ ācakṣadhvaṁ na se tṛptiḥ śṛṇvataḥ pratividyate .. ṛṣaya ūcuḥ . kṛtopanayanaḥ samyak brahmacārī gurau vasan . tatra dharmo’sya yastañca kathyamānaṁ niśāmaya .. svādhyāyo’rtho’gniśuśrūṣā snānaṁ bhikṣāṭanantathā . gurau nivedya taccādyamanujñātena nityaśaḥ .. dharmārthakāmamokṣāṇāṁ samyak pratyupapādanam . tenāhūtaḥ paṭheccaiva tatparībhūya nityaśaḥ .. avāpya sakalān vedān śāstraṁ prāpya gurormukhāt . tato varānmudā dadyādgurave dakṣiṇāntataḥ .. gārhasthāśramakāmastu gārhasthyāśramamāśrayet . vānaprasthāśramañcāpi caturthaṁ svecchayā vaset .. tathaiva ca gurorgehe dvijo niṣṭhāmavāpnuyāt . gurorabhāve tatputtraṁ tadbadeva niṣevayet .. evaṁ jayati mṛtyuṁ sa dvijaḥ śālaṅkaṭaṅkaṭa ! . upāvṛtastatastasmāt gṛhasthāśramakāmyayā . asamānakulāṁ kanyāmudvaheta niśācara ! .. svakarmaṇā dhanaṁ labdhvā pitṛdevātithīnapi . samyak saṁprīṇayedbhaktyā sadācārarato dvijaḥ .. gārhasthyaṁ brahmacaryañca vānaprasthaṁ trayāśramāḥ . kṣattriyasyāpi gaditā ya ācārā dbijasya hi .. vaikhānasatvaṁ gārhasthyamāśramadbitayaṁ viśaḥ . gārhasthyamuttamaṁ tvekaṁ śūdrasya kṣaṇadācara ! .. svāni varṇāśramoktāni karmāṇīha na hāpayet yo hāpayati tasyāsau parikupyati bhāskariḥ .. iti vāmanapurāṇe 14 adhyāyaḥ .. * .. punaśca . śrīurva uvāca . brāhmaṇakṣattriyaviśāṁ śūdrāṇāñca yathākramam . tvamekāgramanā bhūtvā śṛṇu dharmān mayoditān .. dānaṁ dadyādyajeddevān yajñaiḥ svādhyāyatatparaḥ . nityodakī bhavedvipraḥ kuryāccāgniparigraham .. vṛttyarthaṁ yājayeccānyānanyānadhyāpayettathā . kuryāt pratigrahādānaṁ śuktārthānnyāyato dbijaḥ .. śuklārthāt śuklaḥ śuddho nyāyopārjito’rtho yasya tasmāt . iti taṭṭīkā . sarvalokahitaṁ kuryānnāhitaṁ kasyaciddvijaḥ . maitrī samastasattveṣu brāhmaṇasyottamaṁ dhanam .. grāvṇi ratne ca pārakye samabuddhirbhavet dbijaḥ . ṛtāvabhigamaḥ patnyāṁ śasyate cāsya pārthiva ! .. 1 dānāni dadyādicchāto dvijebhyaḥ kṣattriyo’pi hi . yajecca vividhairyajñairadhīyīta ca pārthiva .. śastrājīvo mahīrakṣāpravarā tasya jīvikā . tasyāpi prathame kalpe pṛthivīparipālanam .. dharitrīpālanenaiva kṛtakṛtyo narādhipaḥ . bhavanti nṛpateraṁśā yato yajñādikarmaṇām .. duṣṭānāṁ śāsabādrājā śiṣṭānāṁ paripālanāt . prāpnotyabhimatāllokān varṇasaṁskārako nṛpaḥ .. 2 .. pāśupālyaṁ bāṇijyañca kṛṣiñca manujeśvara . vaiśyāya jīvikāṁ brahmā dadau lokapitāmahaḥ .. tasyāpyadhyayanaṁ yajño dānadharmaśca śasyate . nityanaimittikādīnāmanuṣṭhānañca karmaṇām .. 3 .. dbijātisaṁśrayaṁ karma tādarthyaṁ tena poṣaṇam . krayavikrayajairvāpi dhanaiḥ kārūdbhavena vā .. dānañca dadyāt śūdro’pi pākayajñairyajedapi . pitrādikañca sarvaṁ vai śūdraḥ kurvīta tena ca .. 4 .. bhṛtyādibharaṇārthāya sarveṣāñca parigrahaḥ . ṛtukālābhigamanaṁ svadāreṣu mahīpate .. dayā samastabhūteṣu titikṣā nābhimānitā . satyaṁ śaucamanāyāso maṅgalaṁ priyavāditā .. maitryaspṛhā tathā tadvadakārpaṇyaṁ nareśvara . anasūyā ca sāmānyā varṇānāṁ kathitā guṇāḥ .. āśramāṇāñca sarveṣāmete sāmānyalakṣaṇāḥ . guṇāstathāpaddharmāṁśca viprādīnāmimān śṛṇu .. kṣāttraṁ karma dvijasyoktaṁ vai śyakarma tathāpadi . rājanyasya ca vaiśyoktaṁ śaudraṁ karma na caitayoḥ .. sāmarthye sati tattyājyamubhābhyāmapi pārthiva . tadevāpadi kartavyaṁ na kuryāt karma saṅkaram .. ityete kathitā rājan varṇadharmā mayā tava . dharmamāśramiṇāṁ samyagbruvato me niśāmaya .. * .. śrīurva uvāca . bālaḥ kṛtopanayano vedāharaṇatatparaḥ . gurugehe vasedbhūpa brahmacārī samāhitaḥ .. śaucācāravatā tatra kāryaṁ śuśrūṣaṇaṁ guroḥ . vratāni caratā grāhyā vedāśca kṛtabuddhinā .. ubhe sandhye raviṁ bhūpa tathaivāgniṁ samāhitaḥ . upatiṣṭhettathā kuryādgurorapyabhivādanam .. sthite tiṣṭhedvrajedyāti nīcairāsīta cāsati . śiṣyo gurau nṛpaśreṣṭha pratikūlaṁ na saṁbhajet .. tenaivoktaḥ paṭhedbedaṁ nānyacittaḥ purasthitaḥ . anujñātaśca bhikṣānnamaśnīyādguruṇā tataḥ .. avagāhedapaḥ pūrbamācāryeṇāvagāhitāḥ . samijjalādikaṁ cāsya kalyaṁ kalyamupānayet .. gṛhītagrāhyavedaśca tato’nujñāmavāpya vai . gārhasthyamāvaset prājño niṣpannaguruniṣkṛtiḥ .. 1 .. vidhinā cāptadārastu dhanaṁ prāpya svakarmaṇā . gṛhasthakāryamakhilaṁ kuryādbhūpāla ! śaktitaḥ .. nirvāpeṇa pitṝnarcedyajñairdevāṁstathātithīn . annairmunīṁśca svādhyāyairapatyena prajāpatim .. balikarmaṇā ca bhūtāni vātsalyenākhilaṁ jagat . prāpnoti lokān puruṣo nijakarmasamarjitān .. bhikṣābhujaśca ye kecit parivrāṭ brahmacāriṇaḥ . te’pyatraiva pratiṣṭhante gārhasthyaṁ tena vai param .. vedāharaṇakāryeṇa tīrthasnānāya ca prabho ! . aṭanti vasudhāṁ viprāḥ pṛthivīdarśanāya ca .. aniketā hyanāhārā yatra sāyaṁ gṛhāstu ye . teṣāṁ gṛhasthaḥ sarveṣāṁ pratiṣṭhā yonireva ca .. teṣāṁ svāgatadānādi vaktavyaṁ madhuraṁ vacaḥ . gṛhāgatānāṁ dadyācca śayanāsanabhojanam .. atithiryasya bhagnāśo gṛhātpratinivartate . sa dattvā duṣkṛtaṁ tasmai puṇyamādāya gacchati .. avajñānamahaṅkāro dambhaścaiva gṛhe sataḥ . paritāpopaghātau ca pāruṣyañca na śasyate .. yastu samyak karotyevaṁ gṛhasthaḥ paramaṁ vidhim . sarvabandhavinirmukto lokānāpnotyanuttamān .. vayaḥpariṇatau rājan kṛtakṛtyo gṛhāśramī . puttreṣa bhāryāṁ nikṣipya vanaṁ gacchet sahaiva vā .. 2 .. parṇamūlaphalāhāraḥ keśaśmaśrujaṭādharaḥ . bhūmīśāyī mavettatra muniḥ sarvātithirnṛpa .. carmakāśakuśaiḥ kuryāt paridhānottarīyake . tadvattriṣavaṇaṁ snānaṁ śastamasya nareśvara .. devatābhyarcanaṁ homaḥ sarvābhyāgatapūjanam . bhikṣā balipradānañca śastamasya nareśvara .. vanyasnehena gātrāṇāmabhyaṅgaścāsya śasyate . tapasyataśca rājendra śītoṣṇādisahiṣṇutā .. yastvetāṁ niyataścaryāṁ vānaprasthaścarenmuniḥ . sa dahatyagnivaddoṣān jayellokāṁśca śāśvatān .. 3 .. caturthaścāśramo bhikṣoḥ procyate yo manīṣibhiḥ . tasya svarūpaṁ gadato mama śrotuṁ nṛpārhasi .. puttradravyakalatreṣu tyaktasneho narādhipa . caturthamāśramasthānaṁ gacchennirdhūtamatsaraḥ . traivarṇikāṁstyajet sarvānārambhānavanīpate . mitrādiṣu samo maitraḥ samasteṣveva jantuṣu .. jarāyujāṇḍajādīnāṁ vāṅmanaḥkarmabhiḥ kvacit . yuktaḥ kurvīta na drohaṁ sarvasaṅgāṁśca varjayet .. ekarātrasthitirgrāme pañcarātrasthitiḥ pure . tathā tiṣṭhedyathā prītirdbeṣo vā nāsya jāyate .. prāṇayātrānimittañca vyaṅgāre bhuktavajjane . kāle praśastavarṇānāṁ bhikṣārthe paryaṭedgṛhān .. kāmaḥ krodhastathā darpamohalobhādayaśca ye . tāṁstu doṣān parityajya parivrāṭ nirmamo bhavet .. abhayaṁ sarvasattvebhyo dattvā yaścarate muniḥ . na tasya sarvabhūtebhyo bhayamutpadyate kvacit .. kṛtvāgnihotraṁ svaśarīrasaṁsthaṁ śārīramagniñca mukhe juhoti . viprastu bhekṣopagaterhavirbhiścitāgnināṁ sa vrajatisma lokān .. citāgnīnāṁ agnicitāmityarthaḥ . citāgninā iti vā pāṭhaḥ . iti taṭṭīkā .. mokṣāśramaṁ yaścarate yathoktaṁ śuciḥ susaṅkalpitabuddhiyuktaḥ . anindhanaṁ jyotiriva praśāntaṁ sa brahmalokaṁ śrayati dvijātiḥ .. 4 .. iti viṣṇupurāṇe 3 aṁśe 8 . 9 adhyāyau .. * .. prakārāntareṇa teṣāmādisṛṣṭiryathā — tatastejomayaṁ divyaṁ padmaṁ sṛṣṭaṁ svayambhuvā . tasmāt padmāt samabhavadbrahmā vedamayo vidhiḥ .. prajāvisargaṁ vividhaṁ mānaso manasāsṛjat . asṛjadbrāhmaṇāneva pūrbaṁ brahmā prajāpatiḥ .. ātmatejobhinirvṛttān bhāskarāgnisamaprabhān . tataḥ satyañca dharmañca tapo brahma ca śāśvatam .. ācā ñcaiva śaucañca svargāya vidadhe vibhuḥ . devadānavagandharvā daityāsuramahoragāḥ .. yakṣarākṣasanāgāśca piśācā manujāstathā . brāhmaṇāḥ kṣattriyā vaiśyāḥ śūdrāśca nṛpasattama ! .. ye cānyabhūtasaṁghānāṁ varṇāstāṁśca vinirmame . brāhmaṇānāṁ sito varṇaḥ kṣattriyāṇāñca lohitaḥ .. vaiśyasya pītako varṇaḥ śūdrāṇāmasitastathā .. māndhātovāca . cāturvarṇasya varṇena yadi varṇo vibhajyate . sarveṣāṁ khalu varṇānāṁ dṛśyate varṇasaṅkaraḥ .. kāmaḥ krodho bhayaṁ lobhaḥ śokaścintā kṣudhā śramaḥ . sarveṣāṁ na prabhavati kasmādvarṇo vibhajyate .. svedamūtrapurīṣāṇi śleṣmāpittaṁ saśoṇitam . tanuḥ kṣarati sarveṣāṁ kasmāvarṇo vibhajyate .. jaṅgamānāmasaṁ khyeyāḥ sthāvarāṇāñca jātayaḥ . teṣāṁ vividhavarṇānāṁ kuto varṇaviniścayaḥ .. nārada uvāca . na viśeṣo’sti varṇānāṁ sarvaṁ brahmamayaṁ jagat . brahmaṇā pūrbasṛṣṭaṁ hṛi karmabhirvarṇatāṁ gatam .. kāmabhogapriyāstīkṣṇāḥ krodhanāḥ priyasāhasāḥ . tyaktasvadharmā raktāṅgāste dvijāḥ kṣattratāṁ gatāḥ .. gobhyo vṛttiṁ samāsthāya pītāḥ kṛṣyanujīvinaḥ . svadharmānnānutiṣṭhanti te dbijā vaiśyatāṁ gatāḥ .. hiṁsānṛtapriyā lubdhāḥ sarvakarmopajīvinaḥ . kṛṣṇāḥ śaucaparibhraṣṭāste dbijāḥ śūdratāṁ gatāḥ .. ityetaiḥ karmabhirvyastā dbijā varṇāntaraṁ gatāḥ . ityete caturo varṇā yeṣāṁ brāhmī sarasvatī .. vihitā brahmaṇā pūrbaṁ lobhādajñānatāṁ gatāḥ . brāhmaṇā dharmatantrasthāstatasteṣāṁ na naśyati .. brahma dhārayatāṁ nityaṁ vratāni niyamāṁstathā . brahma caiva paraṁ sṛṣṭaṁ yena jānanti tadvidaḥ .. ṛṣibhiḥ svena tapasā sṛjyante cāpare paraiḥ . ādidevasamudbhū tā brahmamūlākṣatāvyayāḥ . sā sṛṣṭirmānasī nāma dharmatantraparāyaṇāḥ .. māndhātovāca . brāhmaṇaḥ kena bhavati kṣattriyo vā dvijottama ! . vaiśyaḥ śūdraśca devarṣe tadbrūhi vadatāṁvara .. nārada uvāca . jātakarmādibhiryastu taṁskāraiḥ saṁskṛtaḥ śuciḥ . vedādhyayanasampannaḥ ṣaṭsu karmasvavasthitaḥ .. śaucācāraparo nityaṁ vighasāśī gurupriyaḥ . nityavratī satyarataḥ sa vai brāhmaṇa ucyate .. satyaṁ dānamatho’droha ānṛśaṁsyaṁ kṛpā ghṛṇā . tapaśca dṛśyate yatra sa brāhmaṇa iti smṛtaḥ .. kṣattrajaṁ sevate karma vedādhyayanasaṁyutaḥ . dānādānavahiryastu sa vai kṣattriya ucyate .. viśatyāśu paśubhyaśca kṛṣyādānaruciḥ śuciḥ . vedādhyayanasampannaḥ sa vaiśya iti saṁjñitaḥ .. sarvabhakṣmaratirnityaṁ sarvakarmakaro’śuciḥ . tyaktavedastvanācāraḥ sa vai śūdra iti smṛtaḥ .. śūdre caiva bhavellakṣaṁ dvije caiva na vidyate . na vai śūdro bhavecchūdro brāhmaṇo na ca brāhmaṇaḥ māndhātovāca . ke dharmāḥ sarvavarṇānāṁ cāturvarṇasya ke pṛthak . cāturvarṇyāśramāṇāñca rājadharmāśca ke matāḥ .. nārada uvāca . akrodhaḥ satyavacanaṁ saṁvibhāgaḥ kṣamā tathā . prajanaḥ sveṣu dāreṣu śaucamadroha eva ca .. ārjavaṁ bhṛtyabharaṇaṁ na vai te sārvavarṇikāḥ . brāhmaṇasya tu yo dharmastaṁ te vakṣyāmi kevalam .. damameva mahārāja dharmamāhuḥ purātanam . svādhyāyābhyasanañcaiva tatra karma samāpyate .. taṁ cedvittamupāgacchedvattamānaṁ svakarmaṇi . akurvāṇaṁ vikarmāṇi śrāntaṁ prajñānatarpitam .. kurvītopetya santānamatha dadyādyajeta ca . saṁvibhajyāpi bhoktavyaṁ dhanaṁ sadbhiritīṣyate .. pariniṣṭhitakāryastu svādhyāyenaiva brāhmaṇaḥ . kuryādanyanna vā kuryānmaitro brāhmaṇa ucyate .. * .. kṣattriyasyāpi yo dharmastaṁ te vakṣyāmi pārthiva . dadyādrājā na yāceta yajeta na ca yājayet .. nādhyāpayedadhīyīta prajāśca paripālayet . nityodyukto dasyuvadhe raṇe kuryāt parākramam .. ye tu kratubhirījānāḥ śrutavantaśca pārthivāḥ . ye tu yuddhe vijetāraste tu lokajito nṛpāḥ .. avikṣataśarīro hi saṁgarādyo nivartate . kṣattriyasya tu tat karma nobhayatra yaśaḥpradam .. kṣattriyāṇāmayaṁ dharmo nirṇīto munibhiḥ paraḥ . nāsya kṛtyatamaṁ kiñcidrājño dasyuvinigrahāt .. dānamadhyayanaṁ yajño rājñāṁ kṣemo’bhidhīyate . tasmādrājñā mahārāja yoddhavyaṁ dharmaśīlinā .. prajāḥ sveṣu ca dharmeṣu sthāpayeta mahīpatiḥ . dharmyāṇyeva hi karmāṇi kārayet satataṁ prajāḥ .. paramāṁ siddhimāpnoti nṛpatiḥ paripālanāt . kuryādanyanna vā kuryānmaitro rājanya ucyate .. * .. vaiśyasya ca pravakṣyāmi yo dharmo vedasammataḥ .. dānamadhyayanaṁ śaucaṁ yajñaśca dhanasañcayaḥ . pālayecca paśūn vaiśyaḥ pitṛvaddharmamarjayan .. vikarma tadbhavedanyat karma yat sa samācaret . rakṣayā sa hi teṣāṁ vai mahat sukhamavāpnuyāt .. prajāpatirhi vaiśyāya sṛṣṭvā paridade prajāḥ . brāhmaṇebhyaśca rājñe ca sarvāḥ paridade prajāḥ .. tasya vṛttiṁ pravakṣyāmi yacca tasyopajīvanam . ṣaṇṇāmekāṁ pibeddhenuṁ śatācca mithuna bhavet .. labdhācca saptamaṁ bhāgaṁ tathā śṛṅgaikalakṣure . śasyānāṁ sarvabījāni eṣā sāṁvatsarī bhṛtiḥ .. na ca vaiśyasya kāmaḥ syānna rakṣeyaṁ paśūniti . vaiśye rakṣati nānyena rakṣitavyāḥ kathañcana .. * .. śūdrasyāpi hi yo dharmastaṁ te vakṣyāmi bhūpate . prajāpatirhi varṇānāṁ dāsaṁ śūdramakalpayat .. tasmācchūdrasya varṇānāṁ paricaryā vidhīyate . taṣāṁ śuśrūṣaṇañcaiva mahat sukhamavāpnuyāt .. śūdra etān paricaret trīn varṇānanupūrvaśaḥ . mañcayāṁśca na kurvīta yātu śūdraḥ kathañcana .. pāpīyān hi dhanaṁ labdhvā vaśe kuryādgarīyasaḥ . gājñā vā mamanujñātaḥ kāmaṁ kurvīta dhārmikaḥ .. tasya vattiṁ pravakṣyāmi yacca tasyopajīvanam . avaśyaṁ bharaṇīyo hi varṇānāṁ śūdra ucyate .. chattraṁ veṣṭanamauśīramupānadvyajanāni ca . yātayāmāni deyāni śūdrāya paricāriṇe .. adhāryāṇi viśīrṇāni vasanāni dvijātibhiḥ . śūdrāyaiva pradeyāni tasya dharmadhanaṁ hi tat .. yaśca kaściddvijātīnāṁ śūdraḥ śuśrūṣurāvrajet . kalpante’sya tu tenāhurvṛttiṁ dharmavido janāḥ .. deyaḥ piṇḍo’napatyāya bhartavyo vṛddhadurbalau . śūdreṇa ca na hātavyo bhartā kasyāñcidāpadi .. atirekena bhartavyo bhartā dravyaparikṣaye . na hi svamasti śūdrasya bhartṛhāryadhano hi saḥ .. uktastrayāṇāṁ varṇānāṁ yajñastasya ca pārthiva . svāhākāravaṣaṭkārau mantraḥ śūdre na vidyate .. tasmācchūdraḥ pākayajñairyājayeta naca svayam . pūrṇapātramayīmāhuḥ pākayajñasya dakṣiṇām .. * .. śrīnārada uvāca . idānīmāśramāṇāñca dharmaṁ vakṣyāmi bhūmipa . brahmacaryāśramaṁ tāvat śṛṇu sarvādhivāsana .. gatvā gurugṛhaṁ śiṣyo namaskṛtya guruṁ śuciḥ . brūyādadhyetumāyātaḥ śiṣyo’haṁ tava māriṣa . tatastasyājñayā nityamadhyetavyaṁ narādhipa .. sadā vicāraḥ śāstrasya gurupādābhivādanam . tadājñāpālanañcāpi dhyānaṁ daivatabhāvanā .. lābhena yena kenāpi tuṣṭiḥ sadbhiḥ samāgamaḥ . samāptavidyo gurave dakṣiṇāṁ pratipādya ca .. * .. gṛhāśramaṁ tato gacchedgurorājñāmadhivrajan . udbahet kulajāṁ kanyāṁ suśīlāṁ gharmacāriṇīm .. anahaṁvādinīṁ saumyāṁ sucaritrāṁ priyaṁvadām . gṛhiṇāṁ prathamo dharmo’tithipūjaiva pārthiva .. aprāpya pūjāmatithiryasya gehānnivartate . sa yāti narakaṁ ghoraṁ puṇyaṁ tasmai pradāya ca .. prathamaṁ svāgataṁ pṛcchedāsanañcāpi saṁdiśet . pādyañca madhuparkañca dadyāt praṇatipūrvakam .. saṁvādañca priyālāpaṁ kuryāttena sahāntataḥ . bhojanañca yathāśakti kārayedatithiṁ nṛpa .. devāśca pitaraścāpi prīyante’tithipūjane . ātithyasadṛśaṁ karma gṛhasthānāṁ na vidyate .. yasya nityaṁ sthitirnāsti so’tithiḥparikīrtitaḥ . sarvāśramāṇāmadhiko gṛhāśrama udāhṛtaḥ .. yasmāttasmin samāyānti bhikṣārthamāśramāstrayaḥ . pitṛdevārcanaṁ kāryaṁ gṛhiṇā sukhamicchatā .. * .. vānaprasthāśramaṁ vakṣye tṛtīyaṁ jagatīpate . vānaprasthāśramaṁ gacchet kṛtakṛtyo gṛhāśramāt .. tadāraṇyakaśāstrāṇi yamadhītya sa dharmavit . ūrdhvaretāḥ pravrajitvā gacchatyakṣarasātsatām .. sute bhāryāṁ parinyasya vanaṁ gacchet sahaiva vā . śāntaḥ śuddhāntarātmā ca sarvabhūtahite rataḥ .. caritabrahmacaryasya brāhmaṇasya viśāmpate . kartavyāṇīha rājendra kathyante munipuṅgavaiḥ .. bhaikṣyacaryāsvadhīkāraḥ praśasta iha mokṣiṇaḥ . yatrāstamitaśāyī syānniragniraniketanaḥ .. yathopalabdhajīvī syānmunirdānto jitendriyaḥ . nirāśīḥ syāt nnarvasamo niryogo nirvikāravān .. vivekī dhanapūttrādau vitṛṣṇaḥ karuṇaḥ sadā . saṁsāraṁ svapnavadbīkṣya kṣāntaḥ santuṣṭamānasaḥ .. patramūlaphalāhārī jalāśī vāyubhojanaḥ . nirāhāro’thavā śuddho’harniśaṁ tapa ācaret . evaṁ kurvan mahābhāga brāhmaṇaḥ siddhimāpnuyāt .. caturthamāśramaṁ vakṣye muktisopānameva hi . guroḥ purodhamāsāsya bhikṣuḥ sannyāsadharmavit .. vicaret sakalāṁ pṛthvīṁ labdhāśī śānta utsukaḥ . yogābhyāsarato nityaṁ dharmasañcayatatparaḥ . dharmādharmavihīno vā bhikṣukaḥ siddhimāpnuyāt .. iti pādme svargakhaṇḍe 25 . 26 . 27 adhyāyāḥ .. * .. anyat nārasiṁhapurāṇe 59 adhyāye mārkaṇḍeyapurāṇe madālasopākhyāne kūrmapūrāṇe 2 . 3 adhyāye ca draṣṭavyam .. * .. * .. gajacitrakambalaḥ . hātīra jhul iti bhāṣā . tatparyāyaḥ . praveṇī 2 āstaraṇam 3 paristomaḥ 4 kuthaḥ 5 kuthā 6 . ityamaraḥ .. praveṇiḥ 7 pariṣṭomaḥ 8 kutham 9 . iti bharataḥ .. śuklādiḥ . raṅ iti khyātaḥ . sa ca bahuvidho yathā . śvetaḥ 1 pāṇḍuḥ 2 dhūsaraḥ 3 kṛṣṇaḥ 4 pītaḥ 5 haritaḥ 6 raktaḥ 7 śoṇaḥ 8 aruṇaḥ 9 pāṭalaḥ 10 śyāvaḥ 11 dhūmraḥ 12 piṅgalaḥ 13 karvuraḥ 14 . iti cāmaraḥ .. garbhasthabālakasya ṣaṣṭhe māsi varṇo bhavati . iti sukhabodhaḥ .. yaśaḥ . guṇaḥ . stutiḥ . iti medinī . ṇe, 26 .. svarṇam . vratam . rūpam . akṣaram . bhedaḥ . gītakramaḥ . citram . tālaviśeṣaḥ . aṅgarāgaḥ . iti hemacandraḥ .. varṇaḥ puṁ, klī, (varṇyate bhidyate iti . varṇa + ghañ .) bhedaḥ . (varṇyate dīpyate’neneti .) varṇa + ghañ .) rūpam . (varṇayati . varṇa + ac .) akṣaram . (varṇyate rajyate iti . varṇa + ghañ .) vilepanam . iti medinī . ṇe, 26 .. * .. varṇaśca dvividhaḥ . dhvanyātmakaḥ akṣarātmakaśca . asyotpattiprakāro yathā — avnaiṣadyānmukhaśrotramārgasyāviṣadākṣaram . apyavyaktaṁ pralapati yadā sā kuṇḍalī tadā . mūlādhāre viṣvaṇati suṣumnāṁ veṣṭate muhuḥ .. iti prapañcasāraḥ .. asyārthaḥ . mukhaśrotramārgasyāvaiṣadyāt anairmalyāddhetoryadā sā kuṇḍalī aviṣadākṣaraṁ aviṣpaṣṭamakṣaraṁ yatrāvyakte dhvanau taṁ pralapati arthāt kalabhāṣaṇādikaṁ karoti tadā mūlādhāre viṣvaṇati śabdāyate suṣumnāñca muhurveṣṭate . iti taṭṭīkā .. * .. asya kuṇḍalīsvarūpatvaṁ yathā — kuṇḍalībhūtasarpāṇāmaṅgaśriyamupeyuṣī . tridhāmajananī devī śabdabrahmasvarūpiṇī .. dvicatvāriṁśadvarṇātmā pañcāśadvarṇarūpiṇī . guṇitā sarvagātreṇa kuṇḍalī paradevatā .. viśvātmanāpabuddhā sā sūte mantramayaṁ jagat . ekadhā guṇitā śaktiḥ sarvaviśvapravartinī .. tripuṣkaraṁ svarān devī brahmādīnāṁ trayaṁ trayam .. iti sāradātilakaḥ .. asyārthaḥ . tridhāmeti candrasūryāgnirūpā . dbicatvāriṁśaditi bhūtalipimantramayī . pañcāśaditi mātṛkāmayītyarthaḥ . sarvagātreṇa sarvavarṇena guṇitā parasparamilitā satī mantramayaṁ jagat sūte prakāśayati ityarthaḥ . mūlādhāre sarpavat kuṇḍalībhūtā nāḍī vartate tanmadhyasthāyitvādiyaṁ kuṇḍalī . sarvaviśvetyubhayopādānāt śabdārtharūpobhayapratipādiketi sūcitam . tripuṣkaramiti jyeṣṭhamadhyamakaniṣṭhatvena tīrthatrayam . svarāniti udāttānudāttasamāhārān . iti taṭṭīkā .. * .. api ca . dbicatvāriṁśatā mūle guṇitā viśvanāyikā . sā prasūte kuṇḍalinī śabdabrahmamayī tibhuḥ .. śaktiṁ tato dhvanistasmānnādastasmānnivodhikā . tato’rdhendustato vindustasmādāsīt parā tataḥ .. iti sāradāyāmācāryāḥ .. mūle mūlādhāre dvicatvāriṁśatā guṇitā viśvanāyikā kuṇḍalinī anena krameṇa akārādisakārāntāṁ dvicatvāriṁśadātmikāṁ bhūtalipimantrātmikāṁ varṇamālikāṁ sūte ityanvayaḥ . kramamāha śaktimiti sā kuṇḍalinī śaktiṁ sūte tataḥ śakterdhvanirāsīditi yojanā . tato dhvanerityādi jñeyam . ayañca kramaḥ sarvākṣarotpattau jñeyaḥ . tatra sattvapraviṣṭā cicchaktiśabdavācyā . punarākāśasthā saiva sattvapraviṣṭā rajo’nuviddhā satī dhvaniśabdavācyā . akṣarāvasthā saiva tamo’nuviddhā nādaśabdavācyā . avyaktāvasthā saiva tamaḥprācuryānnibodhikāśabdavācyā . saiva tadubhayaprācuryādardhenduśabdavācyā . uktañca padārthādarśe . icchāśaktibalodghuṣṭo jñānaśaktipradīpakaḥ . puṁrūpiṇī ca sā śaktiḥ kriyākhyā sṛjati prabhuḥ .. asāveva binduḥ sthānāntaragataḥ parādyākhyo bhavati . paśyantī madhyamā vācī vaikharī śabdajanmabhūḥ . tatra parā mūle paśyantī svādhiṣṭhāne madhyamā hṛdaye vaikharī mukhe . taduktaṁ padārthādarśe . sūkṣmā kuṇḍalinī madhye jyotirmātrāsvarūpiṇī . aśrotraviṣayā tasmādudgacchatyūrdhagāminī .. svayaṁ prakāśā paśyantī suṣumnāmāśritā bhavet . saiva hṛtpaṅkajaṁ prāpya madhyamā nādrarūpiṇī .. tataḥ saṁjalpamātrā syādavibhaktordhagāminī . saivoraḥkaṇṭhatālusthā śiroghrāṇaradrasthitā .. jihvāmūlauṣṭhanirdhū tasarvavarṇaparigrahā . śabdaprapañcajananī śrotragrāhyā tu vaikharī .. icchājñānakriyātsāsau tejorūpā guṇātmikā . krameṇānena sṛjati kuṇḍalī varṇamālikām .. akārādisakārāntāṁ dbicatvāriṁśadātmikām . pañcāśadbāraguṇitā pañcāśadbarṇamālikām .. sūte tadvarṇato bhinnāḥ kalā rudrādikān kramāt .. iti taṭṭīkā .. aṣṭau sthānāni varṇānāmuraḥ kaṇṭhaḥ śirastathā . jihvāmūlañca dantāśca nāsikoṣṭhau ca tālukā .. iti śikṣāsūtram .. * .. kiñca . yathā bhavanti dehāntaramī pañcāśadakṣarāḥ . bhedā yena prakāreṇa tathā vakṣyāmi tattvataḥ .. samīritāḥ samīreṇa suṣumnārandhranirgatāḥ . vyaktiṁ prayānti vadane kaṇṭhādisthānaghaṭṭitaḥ .. uccairunmārgaṇo vāyurudāttaṁ kurute svaram . nīcairgato’nudāttañca svaritaṁ tiryagāgataḥ .. ardhaikadvitrisaṁkhyābhirmātrābhirlipayaḥ kramāt . savyañjanahrasvadīrghaplutasaṁjñā bhavanti tāḥ .. akārekārayoryogādekāro varṇa iṣyate . tasyaivaikārayogena syādaikārākṣaraṁ tathā .. ukārayogāttasyaiva syādokārāhvayaḥ svaraḥ . tasyaivaikārayogena syādaukārāhvayaḥ svaraḥ .. sandhyakṣarāḥ syuścatvāro mantrāḥ sarvārthasādhakāḥ . ḷvarṇarvarṇayorvyaktirna vai samvak pradarśyate .. bindusargātmanorvyaktimanasorajapā vadet . kaṇṭhāttu niḥsaran sargaḥ prāyo’cātmakataḥparaḥ .. naśvaraḥ sarga eva syāt socchvāsaḥ prāṇakastu haḥ . sa sargaḥ śleṣitaḥ kaṇṭe vāyunā kādimīrayet .. vargasparśanamātreṇa kaṁ svarasparśanāttu kham . stokagambhīrasaṁ sparśāt gaghau ṅañca vahirgatam .. visargastālugaḥ soṣmā śaṁ cavargañca yaṁ tathā . ṛṭurephasakārañca mūrdhago dantagastathā .. ḷtavargalasānoṣṭhyānupūpadhmānasaṁjñakān . dantauṣṭhābhyāṁ vañca tattatsthānago’rṇān samīrayet .. iti prapañcasāre 3 paṭalaḥ .. sargo visarga eva naśvaro vikṛtaḥ socchvāsaḥ sakārarūpaḥ ucchvāso’ntaḥpraveśaśālī vāyuḥ syādityanvayaḥ . evaṁ prāṇako vahirnirgamanaśālī vāyurhaḥ syāt sa eva ucchvāsaḥ socchvāsaḥ . prāṇaścāsau ko vāyuśceti prāṇakaḥ . iti taṭṭīkā .. * .. avarṇakavargahavisarjanīyāḥ kaṇṭhyāḥ . 1 . ivarṇacavargayaśāstālavyāḥ . 2 . ṛvarṇaṭavargaraṣā mūrdhanyāḥ . 3 . ḷvarṇatavargalasā dantyāḥ . 4 . uvarṇapavargopadhmānīyā oṣṭhyāḥ . 5 . vo dantyauṣṭhyaḥ . 6 . e ai kaṇṭhyatālavyau . 7 . o au kaṇṭhyauṣṭhyau . 8 . iti śikṣāsūtram .. * .. api ca . yadguhyaṁ sarvatantreṣu varṇoccāravidhiṁ śive ! . tava snehānmaheśāni ! tadadya kathayāmi te .. pañcāśanmātṛkāvarṇoccāraṇaṁ guruto’bhyaset . a ku cu ṭu tu pu yu śu aṣṭau vargāḥ prakīrtitāḥ .. a ku hāḥ kaṇṭhato jñeyā 1 stālutaścuyaśāḥ smṛtāḥ . 2 . ṛ ṭu raṣāstu mūddhanyāḥ 3 dantyā ḷ tu la sā matāḥ .. 4 .. upavaścoṣṭhasaṁbhūtāḥ 5 sthānāni kathitāni te . viśeṣaṁ kathayāmyadya proccāryaḥ kaṇṭhataḥ svarāḥ .. ṛdbayaṁ jihvayā mūrdhnā ḷdvayaṁ jihvadantajam . mukhasthānāddhalo vācyāḥ kṣakāraḥ kaṇṭaghātajaḥ .. vyañjanadvayasaṁyoge bhavet pūrbasvaro guruḥ . padāntādimavarṇasya saṁyogeṣu śrutirdvayoḥ .. apadāntādisaṁyoge yvoranyatra tatheṣyate . yvoḥ śrutistu tirobhūya svaravat śrutitāṁ vrajet .. śriyā bīje śakārasya chaśrutiḥ parameśvari ! . chaśrutiśca rādibhṛgau tathādisthe tu caśrutiḥ .. sahasra ityādau namastasyai āsthā ityādau ca . rephādike tadante vā hakāre samavācyatā .. varhaḥ hrada ityādau . kintu vaijātyamāśritya sphuṭaṁ nātrāsya vācyatā .. cu tūryadhvanimāpnoti yādisthe parameśvari ! . vāhya ityādau . pu caturthavvaniṁ yāti vādisthe tu viśeṣataḥ .. āhvānamityādau . lādisthe’pyatha nādisthe vaijātyaṁ svalpavācyatā . prahlāda ahrāya ityādau . mādisthe bhe ca masyāpi nāsikāmūlavācyatā .. u ṅa ṇa na mā bindurnāsikāmūlajāḥ smṛtāḥ . yakāraścu tṛtīyatvaṁ padādau sarvadā vrajet .. keyūrādāvapi tathā anyatra kaṇṭhamātragaḥ . nādisthaśasayośchatvaṁ svarayogāntavargake .. praśnaḥ snāna ityādau . varṇottareṣu ḍaḍhayorvakrajihvādivācyatā . vaijātyamapi tatrāsti guroreva samabhyaset . ādirephastu saṁprokto dṛśeranyo vrajedṛtām . evaṁ jñātvā maheśāni ! paṭhet stotraṁ japenmanum .. kavacañca maheśāni nānyathā phalamāpnuyāt .. iti prapañcasāre 3 paṭalaḥ .. * .. api ca . hrasvaḥ svareṣu pūrboktaḥ paro dīrghaḥ kramādime . śivaśaktimayāste syurbindusargāvasānakāḥ .. binduḥ pumān raviḥ proktaḥ sargaḥ śaktirniśākaraḥ . svarāṇāṁ madhyagaṁ yattu taccatuṣkaṁ napuṁsakam .. vinā svaraistu nānyeṣāṁ jāyate vyaktirañjasā . śivaśaktimayān prāhustasmādvarṇān manīṣiṇaḥ .. kāraṇāt pañcabhūtānāmudbhūtā mātṛkā yataḥ . tato bhūtātmakā varṇāḥ pañca pañca vibhāgataḥ .. vāyvagnibhūjalākāśāḥ pañcāśallipayaḥ kramāt . pañca hrasvāḥ pañca dīrghāḥ vindvantāḥ sandhisambhavāḥ . pañcaśaḥ kādayaḥ ṣa kṣa la sa hāntāḥ samīritāḥ .. iti sāradā .. * .. akṣarasṛṣṭikāraṇaṁ yathā — sāṇmāsike’pi samaye bhrāntiḥ saṁjāyate yatā . dhātrākṣarāṇi sṛṣṭāni patrārūḍhānyataḥ purā .. iti jyotistattve bṛhaspatiḥ .. varṇalekhanaprakārastu tattadvarṇe draṣṭavyaḥ .. * .. varṇanāmāni yathā — tantrasaṅketabodhārthamāhṛtya tantraśāstrataḥ . varṇanāmāni katicit vakṣyāmi viduṣāṁ mude .. oṁkāro vartulastāro vāmaśca haṁsakāraṇam . mantrādyaḥ praṇavaḥ satyaṁ binduśaktistridaivatam .. sarvajīvotpādakaśca pañcadevo dhruvastrikaḥ . sāvitrī triśikho brahma triguṇo guṇajīvakaḥ .. ādibījaṁ vedasāro vedabījamataḥ param . pañcarasmistrikūṭe ca tribhave bhavanāśanaḥ .. gāyattrībījapañcāṁśau mantravidyāprasūḥ prabhuḥ . akṣaraṁ mātṛkāsūścānādiradbaitamokṣadau .. oṁ .. aḥ śrīkaṇṭhaḥ sureśaśca lalāṭañcaikamātrikaḥ . pūrṇodarī sṛṣṭimedhau sārasvataḥ priyaṁvadaḥ .. mahābrāhmī vāsudevo dhaneśaḥ keśavo’mṛtam . kīrtirnivṛttirvāgīśo narakārirharo marut .. brahmā vāmādyajo hrasvaḥ karasūḥ praṇavādyakaḥ . brahmāṇī kāmarūpaśca kāmeśī vāśinī viyat .. viśveśaḥ śrīviṣṇukaṇṭhau pratipattithiraṁśinī . arkamaṇḍalavarṇādyau brāhmaṇaḥ kāmakarṣiṇī .. aḥ .. ākāro vijayānanto dīrghacchāyo vināyakaḥ . kṣīrodadhiḥ payodaśca pāśo dīrghāsyavṛttakau .. pracaṇḍa ekajo rudro nārāyaṇa ibheśvaraḥ . pratiṣṭhā mānadā kānto viśvāntakagajāntakaḥ .. pitāmaho dviṭhānto’bhūḥ kriyā kāntiśca sambhavaḥ . dvitīyā mānadā kāśīvighnarājaḥ kujo viyat . svarāntakaśca hṛdayamaṅguṣṭho bhagamālinī .. āḥ .. iḥ sūkṣmā śālmalī vidyā candraḥ pūṣā suguhyakaḥ . sumitraṁ sundaro vīraḥ koṭaraḥ kāṭaraḥ payaḥ .. bhrūmadhyo mādhavastuṣṭirdakṣanetrañca nāsikā . śāntaḥ kāntaḥ kāminī ca kāmo vighnavināyakaḥ . nepālo bharaṇī rudro nityā klinnā ca pāvakaḥ .. .. iḥ .. īstribhūrtirmahāmāyā lolākṣī vāmalocanam . govindaḥ śekharaḥ puṣṭiḥ subhadrā ratnasaṁjñakaḥ .. viṣṇurlakṣmīḥ prahāsaśva vāgviśuddhaḥ parāparaḥ . kalottarīyo bheruṇḍā ratiśca pauṇḍravardhanaḥ .. śivottamaḥ śivā tuṣṭiścaturthī bindumālinī . vaiṣṇavī vaindavī jihvā kāmakalā sanādakā .. pāvakaḥ koṭaraḥ kīrtirmohinī kālakārikā . kucadvandvaṁ tarjanī va śāntistripurasundarī .. īḥ .. uḥ śaṅkaro vartulākṣī bhūtaḥkalyāṇavācakaḥ . amareśo dakṣakarṇaḥ ṣaḍvaktro mohanaḥ śivaḥ .. ugraḥ pramurdhṛtirviṣṇurviśvakarmā maheśvaraḥ . śatrughnaśceṭikā puṣṭiḥ pañcamī vahrivāsinī .. ceṭikāsyāne cekṣikā iti vā pāṭhaḥ . kāmaghnaḥ kāmanā ceśo mohinī vighnahṛnmahī . ḍaṭasūḥ kuṭilā śrotraṁ pāradbīpo vṛṣo haraḥ .. ḍaṭhasū iti kutracit pāṭhaḥ . uḥ .. ūḥ kaṇṭako ratiḥ śāntiḥ krodhano madhusūdanaḥ . kāmarājaḥ kujeśaśca maheśo vāmakarṇakaḥ .. kaṇṭhakasthāne kaṇṭaka iti vā pāṭhaḥ . arghīśo bhairavaḥ sūkṣmo dīrghaghoṇā sarasvatī . vilāsinī vighnakartā lakṣmaṇo rūpakarṣiṇī . mahāvidyeśvarī ṣaṣṭhā ṣaṇḍo bhūḥ kānyakubjakaḥ .. .. ūḥ .. ṛḥ pūrdīrghamukhī rudro devamātā trivikramaḥ . bhāvabhūtiḥ kriyā krūrā recikā nāsikā dhṛtaḥ .. ekapādaśiro mālā maṇḍalā śāntinī jalam . karṇaḥ kamalabhā medho nivṛttirgaṇanāyakaḥ . rohiṇī śivadūtī ca pūrṇagiriśca saptamī .. medhaḥ sthāne meṣa iti ca pāṭhaḥ .. ṛḥ .. ṝḥ krodho’tithiśo vāṇī vāmano’go’tha śrīrdhṛtiḥ . ūrdhamukhī niśānāthaḥ padmamālā vinaṣṭadhīḥ .. śaśinī mocikā śreṣṭhā daityamātā pratiṣṭhitā . ekadantāhvayo mātā haritā mithunodayā .. mātā sthāne māyā iti vā pāṭhaḥ . komalaḥ śyāmalā medhī pratiṣṭhā patiraṣṭamī . brahmaṇyamiva kīlāle pāvako gandhakarṣiṇī .. mivasthāne maveti vā pāṭhaḥ . ṛḥ .. ḷḥ sthāṇuḥ śrīdharaḥ śuddho medhā dhūmro vako viyat . devayonirdakṣagaṇḍo vaheśaḥ kauntarudrakau . vaheśasthāne vāhaga iti vā pāṭhaḥ . viśveśvaro dīrghajihvā mahendro lāṅgaliḥ parā . candrikā pārthivo dhūmrā dvidantaḥ kāmavardhanaḥ .. śucismitā ca navamī kāntirāṣātakeśvaraḥ . cittākarṣiṇī kāśaśca tṛtīyakulasundarī .. cittākarṣiṇīsthāne cintākarṣiṇī iti vā pāṭhaḥ . ḷḥ .. ḹkāraḥ kamalā harṣā hṛṣīkeśo madhuvrataḥ . sūkṣmā kāntirvāmagaṇḍo rudraḥ kāmodarī surā .. śāntikṛt svastikā śakro māyāvī lolupo viyat . kuśamī susthiro mātā nīlapīto gajānanaḥ .. kāminī viśvaṣā kālo nityā śuddhaḥ śuciḥ kṛtī .. viśvaṣāsthāne vismayā iti vā pāṭhaḥ . sūryo dhairyākarṣaṇī ca ekākī danujaprasūḥ .. ḹḥ .. ekāro vāstavaḥ śaktirjhiṇṭīśoṣṭhau bhagaṁ marut . sūkṣmā bhūto’rdhakeśī ca jyotsnā śraddhā pramardanaḥ .. bhūtasthāne śṛta iti vā pāṭhaḥ . bhayaṁ jñānaṁ kṛṣā dhīrā jaṅghā sarvamamudbhavaḥ . vahniviṣṇurbhagavatī kuṇḍalī mohinī vasaḥ .. yoṣidādhāraśaktiśca trikoṇā īśasaṁ jñakaḥ . sandhirekādaśī bhadrā padmanābhaḥ kulācalaḥ .. eḥ .. airlajjā bhautikaḥ kāntā vāyavī mohinī vibhuḥ . dakṣā dāmodaraḥ prajño’dharo vikṛtamukhyapi .. kṣamātmako jagadyoniḥ paraḥ paranibodhakṛt . jñānāmṛtā kapardī śrīḥ pīṭheśāgniḥ samātṛkaḥ .. tripurā lohitā rājñī vāgbhavo bhautikāsanaḥ . maheśvaro dvādaśī ca vimalaśca sarasvatī . kāmakoṭo vāmajānuraṁśumān vijayā jaṭā .. .. aiḥ .. okāraḥ satyapīyūṣau paścimāsyaḥ śrutiḥsthirā . sadyojāto vāsudevo gāyattrī dīrghajaṅghakaḥ .. āpyāyanī cordhvadanto lakṣmīrvāṇī mukhī dbijaḥ . uddeśyadarśakastīvraḥ kailāso vasudhākṣaraḥ .. praṇavāṁśo brahmasūtramajeśaḥ sarvamaṅgalā . trayodaśī dīrghanāsā ratinātho digambarā .. trailokyavijayā prakṣā prītirbījādikarṣiṇī .. .. oḥ .. aukāraḥ śaktiko nāśastejaso vāmajaṅghakaḥ . manubaddhagraheśaśca śaṅkukarṇaḥ sadāśivaḥ .. adhodantaśca kaṇṭhoṣṭhau saṅkarṣaṇaḥ sarasvatī . ājñā cordhvamukhī śānto vyāpinī prakṛtaḥ payaḥ .. anantā jvālinī vyomā caturdaśī ratipriyaḥ . netramātmākarṣiṇī ca jvālāmālinikā bhṛguḥ .. vyomāsthāne romā iti vā pāṭhaḥ . auḥ .. aṅkāraścakṣuṣo danto vaṭikā samaguhyakaḥ . pradyumnaḥ śrīmukhī prītirbījayonirvṛṣadhvajaḥ .. dantasthāne dambha iti vā pāṭhaḥ . paraṁ śaśī pramāṇīśaḥ somabinduḥ kalānidhiḥ . akrūraścetanā nāgapūrṇā duḥkhaharaḥ śivaḥ .. śiraḥ śambhurnareśaśca sukhaduḥkhapravartakaḥ . pūrṇimā revatī śuddhaḥ kanyā caraviyadraviḥ .. amṛtākarṣiṇī śūnyaṁ vicitrā vyomarūpiṇī . kedāro rātrināśaśca kubjikā caiva budvudaḥ .. .. aṁ .. aḥ kaṇṭhako mahāsenaḥ kalā pūrṇāmṛtā hariḥ icchā bhadrā gaṇeśaśca ratirvidyāmukhī sukham dbibindurasanā somo’niruddho duḥkhasūcakaḥ . dbijihvaḥ kuṇḍalaṁ vaktraḥ sargaḥ śaktirniśākaraḥ .. sundarī suyaśānantā gaṇanātho maheśvaraḥ .. aḥ .. kaḥ krodhīśo mahākālī kāmadevaḥ prakāśakaḥ . kapālī tejasaḥ śāntirvāsudevo jayānalaḥ .. cakrī prajāpatiḥ sṛṣṭirdakṣaskandho viśāmpatiḥ . anantaḥ pārthivo bindustāpinī paramātmakaḥ .. dakṣaskandhasthāne dakṣakakṣau iti vā pāṭhaḥ . vargādyaśca mukhī brahmā sakhādyo’mbhaḥ śivo jalam . māheśvarī tulā puṣpā maṅgalaścaraṇaṁ karaḥ .. nityā kāmeśvarī mukhyaḥ kāmarūpo gajendrakaḥ . śrīpuraṁ ramaṇo raṅgaḥ kusumā paramātmakaḥ .. kaḥ .. khaḥ pracaṇḍaḥ kāmarūpī ṛddhirvahriḥ sarasvarta ākāśamindriyaṁ durgā caṇḍīśastāpinī guruḥ .. śikhaṇḍī dantajātīśaḥ kaphoṇirgaruto yadi . śūnyaṁ kapālī kalyāṇī sūrpakarṇo’jarāmaraḥ .. śubhrāgneryā caṇḍaliṅgo janāvyāṅgārakhaḍgakau .. .. khaḥ .. go gaurī gauravo gaṅgā gaṇeśo gokuleśvaraḥ . śārṅgī pañcāntako gāthā gandharvaḥ sarvagaḥ smṛtiḥ .. sarvasiddhiḥ prabhā dhūmrā dvijākhyaḥ śivadarśanaḥ . viśvātmā gauḥ pṛthagrūpā bālabaddhastrilocanaḥ .. gītaṁ sarasvatī vidyā bhoginī nandano dharā . bhogavatī ca hṛdayaṁ jñānaṁ jālandharo lavaḥ .. lavasthāne nara iti vā pāṭhaḥ . gaḥ .. ghaḥ khaḍgī ghurghuro ghaṇṭī ghaṇṭīśastripurāntakaḥ . vāyuḥ śivottamaḥ satyā kiṅkiṇī ghoranāyakaḥ .. marīcirvaruṇo medhā kālarūpī ca dāmbhikaḥ . lambodarā jvālamūlaṁ nandeśo hananaṁ dhvaniḥ . trailokyavidyā saṁhartā kāmākhyamanaghāmayaḥ .. dhaḥ .. ṅaḥ śaṅkhī bhairavaścaṇḍo vindūttaṁsaḥ śiśupriyaḥ . ekarudro dakṣanakhaḥ kharparo viṣayaspṛhā .. kāntiḥ śvetāhvayo dhīro dbijātmā jbālinī viyat . mantraśaktiśca madano vighneśī cātmanāyakaḥ .. ekanetro mahānando durdharaścandramā yatiḥ . śivayoṣā nīlakaṇṭhaḥ kāmeśī ca mayāṁśukau .. .. ṅaḥ .. caḥ puṣkaro halī vāṇī cātmaśaktiḥ sudarśanaḥ . carmamuṇḍadharo bhūtvā mahiṣācārasambinī .. bhūtvāsthāne bhauma iti ca pāṭhaḥ . ekarūpo ruciḥ kūrmaścāmuṇḍā dīrghavālukaḥ . vāmabāhurmalamāyā caturmūrtisvarūpiṇī .. dayitaśca dvinetraśca lakṣmīstritayalocanaḥ . candanaṁ candramā davaśce tano vṛściko budhaḥ .. devī keṭamukhecchātmā kaumārapūrvaphalgunī . anaṅgamekhalā vāyurmedinī ca mūlāvatī .. caḥ .. chaśchandanaṁ suṣumnā ca pa puḥ paśupatirmṛtiḥ . nirmalaṁ taralaṁ vahnirbhūtamātrā vilāsinī .. ekanetraśca vṛṣalī dbiśirā vāmakurparaḥ . gokarṇā lāṅgalī vāmakāmamattā sadāśivaḥ .. mātā niśācaraḥ pāyurvikṣataḥ sthitiśabdakaḥ .. .. chaḥ .. jaḥ śavo vānaraḥ śūlī bhogadā vijayā sthirā . laladevo jayo jetā dhātakī sumukhī vibhuḥ .. lambodarī smṛtiḥ śākhā suprabhā kartṛkā dharā . dīrghabāhū rucirhaṁso nandī tejāḥ surādhipaḥ .. javano vegito vāmo mānavākṣaḥ sadātmakaḥ . hṛnmāruteśvaro vegī cāmodā madavihvalaḥ .. jaḥ .. jho jhaṅkārī guho jhaṣjhāvāyuḥ satyaḥ ṣaḍunnataḥ . ajeśo drāviṇī nādaḥ pāśī jihvā jalaṁ sthitiḥ .. virājendro dhanurhastaḥ karkaśo nādajaḥ kujaḥ . dīrghabāhubalo rūpamākanditaḥ sucañcalaḥ .. durmukho naṣṭa ātmā vān vikaṭā kucamaṇḍalaḥ . kalahaṁsapriyā vāmā aṅgulīmadhyaparvakaḥ . dakṣahāsāṭṭahāsaśca pāthātmā vyañjanaḥ svaraḥ .. .. jhaḥ .. ñakāro vodhanī viśvā kaṇḍalī makhado viyat . kaumārī nāgavijñānī savyāṅgulanakharo vakaḥ .. kaṇḍalīsthāne kuṇḍalī makhadasthāne sukhada iti vā pāṭhaḥ . sarveśacūrṇitā buddhiḥ svargātmā ghargharadhvaniḥ . dharmaikapādau sumukhau virajā candaneśvarī .. buddhisthāne siddhiḥ svargasthāne sarga iti vā pāṭhaḥ . gāyanaḥ puṣpadhanvā ca rāgātmā ca varākṣiṇī .. ñaḥ .. ṭaṣṭaṅkāraḥ kapālī ca somavāḥ khecarī dhvaniḥ . mukundo vinadā pṛthvī vaiṣṇavī vāruṇī navaḥ .. somavā sthāne someśa iti kvacit pāṭhaḥ . dakṣāṅgakārdhacandraśca jarā bhūtiḥ punarbhavaḥ . bṛhaspatirdhanuścitrā pramodā vimalā kaṭiḥ . rājā girirmahādhanurghnānātmā sumukho marut .. ṭaḥ .. ṭhaḥ śūnyo mañjarī bījaḥ pāṇinī lāṅgalī kṣayā . vanajo nandano jihvā sunañjaghūrṇakaḥ sudhā .. vartulaḥ kuṇḍalo vahriramṛtaṁ candramaṇḍalaḥ . dakṣajānūrubhāvaśca devabhakṣyo bṛhaddhaniḥ .. ekapādo vibhūtiśca lalāṭaṁ sarvamitrakaḥ . vṛṣaghno nalinī viṣṇurmaheśo grāmaṇīḥ śaśī .. ṭhaḥ .. ḍaḥ smṛtirdāruko nandirūpiṇī yoginī priyaḥ . kāmārī śaṅkarastrāśastrivakro nadako dhvaniḥ .. durūho jaṭilī bhīmā dvijihvaḥ pṛthivī satī . koragiriḥ kṣamā kāntirnābhiḥ svātī ca locanam .. jaṭilīsthāne jaṭila iti kāntisthāne śāntiriti vā pāṭhaḥ .. ḍaḥ .. ḍho ḍhakkā nirṇayaḥ pūrvo yajñeśādanadeśvaraḥ . ardhanārīśvarastoyamīśvarī triśikhī navaḥ .. yajñeśādanadeśvara ityatra yajñeśo dhanadeśvara ityapi pāṭhaḥ . dakṣapādāṅgulermūlaṁ siddhidaṇḍo vināyakaḥ . prahāsā triverā ṛddhinirguṇo nidhano dhvaniḥ .. prahāsā sthāne prahāsa iti vā pāṭhaḥ . vighneśaḥ pālinī tvakkadhāriṇī kroḍapucchakaḥ . elāpuraṁ tvagātmā ca viśākhā śrīrmano ratiḥ .. takkasthāne tvakca iti vā pāṭhaḥ .. ḍhaḥ .. ṇo nirguṇaṁ ratirjñānaṁ jambhanaḥ pakṣivāhanaḥ . jayā śambho narakajit niṣkalā yoginīpriyaḥ .. dvimukhaṁ koṭavī śrotraṁ samṛddhirbodhano matā . trinetro mānuṣī vyomadakṣapādāṅgulermukham .. mādhavaḥ śaṅkhinī vīro nārāyaṇaśca nirṇayaḥ .. mukhasthāne nakhaṁ iti vā pāṭhaḥ .. ṇaḥ .. taḥ pūtanā hariḥ śuddhiḥ śaktī śaktirjaṭī dhvajā . vāmasphikvāmakaṭyau ca kāminī madhyakarṇakaḥ .. haristhāne haviḥ iti vā pāṭhaḥ . āṣāḍhī taṇḍatusnaśca kāmikā pṛṣṭhapucchakaḥ . ratnakaśca śyāmamukhī vārāhī makaro’ruṇā .. āṣāḍhītaṇḍatusnaścasthāne āṣāntaḍhāntakṣudraśca iti ratnakaścasthāne ratnakaṇṭha iti vā pāṭhaḥ . sugato’rdhamukhā buddhajānuśca kroḍapucchakaḥ . gandho viśvāmarucchatraścānurādhā ca saurakaḥ .. buddhasthāne vṛddha iti saurakasthāne saivika iti vā pāṭhaḥ . jayanti pulako bhrāntiranaṅgamadanāturā .. taḥ .. thaḥ sthirāmī mahāgranthirgranthigrāho bhayānakaḥ . śilī śirasijo daṇḍī bhadrakālī śiloccayaḥ .. kṛṣṇo buddhirvikarmā ca dakṣanāśādhipo’maraḥ . varadā bhogadā keśo vāmajānū raso’nalaḥ .. kṛṣṇo buddhirvikarmā sthāne kṛpto vahrirvikarṇā iti vā pāṭhaḥ . lolaujajjayinī guhyaḥ śaraccandro vidārakaḥ .. lolau ityādisthāne lolojjayinīpūrguhyaśaraccandradivākarau iti vā pāṭhaḥ . thaḥ .. do’drīśo dhātakirdhātā dātā dalaṁ kalatrakam . dīnaṁ jñānañca dānañca bhaktirāhavanī dharā .. dātā dalaṁ sthāne dānādanu iti vā pāṭhaḥ . suṣumnā yoginī sadyaḥ kuṇḍalo vāmagulphakaḥ . kātyāyanī śivā durgā laṅghanā nātri kaṇḍakī .. laṅghanāsthāne saṅghanā kaṇḍakīsthāne kaṇṭakī iti vā pāṭhaḥ . svastikaḥ kuṭilā rūpaḥ kṛṣṇaścomājitendriyaḥ . dharmahṛdvāmadevaśca bhramā bahusucañcalā .. dharmahṛtsthāne gharmakṛt bahusthāne vaha iti vā pāṭhaḥ . haridrā puramatrau ca dakṣapāṇistrirekhakaḥ .. daḥ .. dho dhanārtho ruciḥ sthāṇuḥ śāśvato yoginīpriyaḥ . mīneśaḥ śaṅkhinī toyaṁ nāgeśo viśvapāvanī .. dhanārthasthāne dhanākhya iti vā pāṭhaḥ . dhiṣaṇā dharaṇā cintā netrayugmaṁ priyo matiḥ . pītavāsā trivarṇā ca dhātā dharmaplavaṅgamaḥ .. dharaṇācintāsthāne dharaṇī citrā iti vā pāṭhaḥ . sandarśo mohano lajjā vajratuṇḍā dharaṁ dharā . vāmapādāṅgulermūlaṁ jyeṣṭhā surapuraṁ bhavaḥ . sparśātmā dīrghajaṅghā ca dhaneśo dhanasañcayaḥ .. dhaḥ .. no garjinī kṣamā saurirvāruṇī viśvapāvanī . meṣaśca savitā netraṁ danturo nārado’ñjanaḥ .. vāruṇīsthāne varuṇā iti vā pāṭhaḥ . ūrdhvacāmī dviraṇḍaśca vāmapādāṅgulermukham . vainateyastutirvartma taraṇirbālirāgamaḥ .. vāmano jvālinī dīrgho nirīhaḥ sugatirviyat . śabdātmā dīrghaghoṇā ca hastināpuramecakau . girināyakanīlau ca śivo nādirmahāmatiḥ .. naḥ .. paḥ pūrapriyatā tīkṣṇā lohitaḥ pañcamo ramā . guhyakartā nidhiḥ śeṣaḥ kālarātriḥ suvāhitā .. tapanaḥ pālanaḥ pātā padmareṇurnirañjanaḥ .. sāvitrī pātinī pānaṁ vīratattvo dhanurdharaḥ .. pālanasthāne pāvana iti tattvasthāne tantra iti vā pāṭhaḥ . dakṣapārśvaśca senānī marīciḥ pavanaḥ śaniḥ . uḍḍīśaṁ jayanī kumbho’lasaṁ rekhā ca mohakaḥ .. kumbhasyāne kāntā iti rekhāsthāne reṣā iti vā pāṭhaḥ . mūlā dbitīyamindrāṇī lokākṣī mana ātmanaḥ .. ātmanaḥ sthāne ātmaka iti vā pāṭhaḥ . paḥ .. phaḥ sakhī durgiṇī dhūmrā vāmapārśvo janārdanaḥ . jayā pādaḥ śikhā raudrī phetkāraḥ śākhinī priyaḥ .. umā vihaṅgamaḥ kālakubjinīpriyapāvakau . pralayāgnirnīlapādo’kṣaraḥ paśupatiḥ śaśī .. phutkāro yāminī vyaktā pāvano mohavardhanaḥ . niṣphalavāgahaṅkāraḥ prayāgo grāmaṇīḥ phalam .. vyaktāsthāte jhañjhā iti prayāgasthāne prayāṇa iti vā pāṭhaḥ . phaḥ .. bo vanī bhūdharo mārgo ghargharī locanapriyaḥ . pracetāḥ kalasaḥ pakṣī sthalagaṇḍaḥ kapardinī .. pṛṣṭhavaṁśo bhayā mātuḥ śikhivāho yugandharaḥ . sukhabindurbalī ghaṇṭā yoddhā trilocanapriyaḥ .. sukhabindusthāne mukhabinduriti vā pāṭhaḥ . kledinī tāpitā bhūmiḥ supanindravalipriyaḥ . surabhirmukhaviṣṇuśca saṁhāro vasudhādhipaḥ .. supanindrasthāne sugandhiśceti vā pāṭhaḥ . ṣaṣṭhī purañca peṭā ca modako gaganaṁ prati . pūrbāṣāḍhāmadhyaliṅgau śaniḥ kumbhatṛtīyakau .. baḥ .. bhaḥ klinnā bhramaro bhīmo viśvamūrtirniśātavam . dviraṇḍo bhūṣaṇo mūlaṁ yajñasūtrasya vācakaḥ .. niśātavasthāne niśābhayaṁ iti vā pāṭhaḥ . nakṣatraṁ bhramaṇā dīptirvayo bhūmiḥ payo nabhaḥ . nābhibhadraṁ bhahābāhurviśvamūrtirvitāṇḍakaḥ .. vayaḥsthāne bhaya iti vitāṇḍakasthāne vimūrtaka iti vā pāṭhaḥ . prāṇātmā tāpinī vajrā viśvarūpī ca candrikā . bhīmasenaḥ sudhāmenaḥ sukho māyāpuraṁ haraḥ .. vajrasthāne rudrā iti sukhasthāne mukha iti vā pāṭhaḥ . bhaḥ .. maḥ kālī kleśitaḥ kālo mahākālo mahāntakaḥ . vaikuṇṭho vasudhā candrī raviḥ puruṣarājakaḥ .. vasudhāsyāne vastudā iti vā pāṭhaḥ . kālabhadro jayā medhā viśvadā dīptasaṁjñakaḥ . jaṭharañca bhramānānaṁ lakṣmīmātograbandhanau .. dīptasthāne dīpra iti vā pāṭhaḥ . viṣiṁ śivo mahāvīraḥ śaśiprabhāṁ janeśvaraḥ . pramattaḥ priyasū rudraḥ sarvāṅgo vahnimaṇḍalam .. bhātaṅgamālino binduḥ śravaṇābharatho viyat .. rathasthāne makha iti vā pāṭhaḥ . maḥ .. yo vāṇī vasudhā vāyurvikṛtiḥ puruṣottamaḥ . yugāntaḥ śvasanaḥ śīghro dhūmārciḥ prāṇisevakaḥ .. yugāntasthāne yugābha iti vā pāṭhaḥ . śaṅkhā bhramo jaṭī lolā vāyuvegī yaśaskarī . saṅkarṣaṇaḥ kṣapā vālo hṛdayaṁ kapilā prabhā .. āgneyo vyāpakāstyāgo homo yānaṁ pramā sukham . caṇḍaḥ sarveśvarī ghūmaścāmuṇḍā sumukheśvarī .. pramāsthāne prabhā iti vā pāṭhaḥ . tvagātmā malayo mātā haṁsinī bhṛṅgināyakaḥ . tenamaḥ śoṣako mīno dhaniṣṭhānaṅgavedinī .. tvagātmāsthāne vigātmā iti tenamasthāne yemana iti vā pāṭhaḥ . meṣṭhaḥ somaḥ paktināmā pāpahā prāṇasaṁjñakaḥ .. meṣṭhasthāne seṣṭa iti vā pāṭhaḥ . yaḥ . ro raktaḥ krodhinī rephaḥ pāvakastvojaso mataḥ . prakāśā darśeno dīpo ratakṛṣṇā paraṁ balī .. stvojasasthāne ntejana iti ratakṛṣṇāsthāne raktakṛṣṇa iti vā pāṭhaḥ . bhujaṅgeśo matiḥ sūryo dhātū raktaḥ prakāśakaḥ . vyāpako revatī dāsaṁ kukṣyaṁśo vahnimaṇḍalam .. dāsasthāne dānamiti kukṣyaṁśasthāne dakṣāṁśa iti vā pāṭhaḥ . ugrarekhā sthūladaṇḍo vedakaṇṭhapalā purā . prakṛtiḥ sugalo brahmaśandaśca gāyako dhanam .. vedakaṇṭhapalāsthāne vedakaścapalā iti vā pāṭhaḥ . śrīkaṇṭha uṣmā hṛdayaṁ muṇḍī tripurasundarī . savinduryonijo jvālā śrīśailo viśvatomukhī .. śrīśailasthāne śrīśoṇa iti vā pāṭhaḥ . raḥ . laścandraḥ pūtanā pṛthvī mādhavaḥ śakravācakaḥ . valānujaḥ piṇākīśo vyāpako māṁsasaṁjñakaḥ .. mādhavasthāne mādhavī iti vā pāṭhaḥ . khaḍgī nādomṛtaṁ devī lavaṇaṁ vāruṇī patiḥ . śikhā vāṇī kriyā mātā bhāminī kāminī priyā .. mṛtasthāne mṛḍamiti lavaṇasthāne maraṇamiti vā pāṭhaḥ . jvālinī veginī nādaḥ pradyumnaḥ śoṣaṇo hariḥ . viśmātmamantrau balī ceto merurgiriḥ kalā rasaḥ .. mantrasthāne mandra iti kalāsthāne kaṇā iti vā pāṭhaḥ . laḥ . vo vālo vāruṇī sūkṣmā varuṇo medasaṁjñakaḥ . khaḍgīśo jvālinī vaṅkaḥ kalasadhvanivācakaḥ .. vaṅkasthāne raṅka iti kalasadhvanisthāne kalasaṁravi iti vā pāṭhaḥ . utkārīśastu nā vīto vajrā sphik sāgaraḥ śuciḥ . tridhātuḥ śaṅkaraḥ śreṣṭho viśeṣo yamasādanam .. vaḥ .. śaḥ savyaśca kāmarūpī kāmarūpo mahāmatiḥ . saukhyanāmā kumāro’sthi śrīkaṇṭho vṛṣaketanaḥ .. vṛṣaghnaḥ śayanaṁ śāntā subhagā visphuliṅginī . mṛtyurdevo mahālakṣmīrmahendraḥ kulakaulinī .. bāhurhaṁso viyadbaktraṁ hṛdanaṅgāṅkuśaḥ khalaḥ . vāmoruḥ puṇḍarīkātmā kāntiḥ kalyāṇavācakaḥ . haṁsaścāne hiṁsā iti vā pāṭhaḥ . śaḥ .. ṣaḥ śveto vāsudevaśca pītā prajñā vināyakaḥ . parameṣṭhī vāmabāhuḥ śreṣṭho garbhavimocanaḥ .. pītāsthāne prītā iti prajñāsthāne śraddhā iti vā pāṭhaḥ . lambodaro yamaujeśaḥ kāmadhuk kāmadhūmakaḥ . suśrīruṣmā vṛṣo lajjā marudbhakṣyaḥ priyaḥ śivaḥ . kāmadhūmakasthāne kāladhūmaka iti vā pāṭhaḥ . sūryātmā jaṭharaḥ koṣo mattā vakṣovidāriṇī . kalakaṇṭho madhyabhinnā buddhātmā malapūḥ śivaḥ .. ṣaḥ .. so haṁsaḥ suyaśā viṣṇurbhṛgvīśaścandrasaṁjñakaḥ . jagadvījaṁ śaktināmā mohaṁ veśavatī bhṛguḥ .. suyaśāsthāne sujana iti mohasthāne so’haṁ iti vā pāṭhaḥ . prakṛtirīśvaraḥ śuddho prabhā śvetā kulojjvalaḥ . dakṣapādo mṛtaṁ brāhmī paramātmā paro’kṣaraḥ .. surūpā ca guṇeśo gauḥ kalakaṇṭho vṛkodarī . prāṇādyāśca purādevī lakṣmīḥ somo hiraṇyapuḥ .. durgottāriṇī sanmohājjīvo mūrtirmanoharaḥ .. durgottāriṇisthāne durgottāriṇī iti sanmohātsthāne sanmohā iti manoharakhyāne manoyava iti vā pāṭhaḥ . saḥ . haḥ śivo gaganaṁ haṁso nāgaloko’mbikāpatiḥ . nakulīśo jagatprāṇaḥ prāṇeśaḥ kapilā malaḥ .. malasthāne mata iti vā pāṭhaḥ . paramātmātmajo jīvo yavākaḥ śāntido’ṅganaḥ . mṛgo bhayo ruṇāsthāṇuḥ kruṭakūpavirāvaṇaḥ .. yavākasthāne varāka iti aṅganasthāne aṅgula iti kruṭakūpavirāvaṇasthāne kūṭakoparivāraṇa iti vā pāṭhaḥ . lakṣmīrmaviharaḥ śambhuḥ prāṇaśaṅkirlalāṭajaḥ . svakopavāraṇaḥ śūlī caitanyaṁ pādapūraṇaḥ .. maviharasthāne harihara iti svakopasthāne sakopa iti vā pāṭhaḥ . mahālakṣmīḥ paraṁ nādo meghanādo harirmataḥ . vindurdurgā priyā devī meghaśyāmeśvaraḥ pumān .. dakṣapādaḥ sadāśambhuḥ śākhoṭaḥ somamaṇḍalam .. haḥ Laḥ pṛthvī vimalā mogho’nanto havyavahā sitā . vyāpinī śivadā ketujagatsārataraṁ haṭhaḥ .. glaurmṛḍānī ca vedārthaḥ sāro nārāyaṇaḥ svayam . jaṭharo nakuliḥ pītā śiveśo’naṅgamālinī .. Laḥ .. kṣaḥ kopastumbukaḥ kālo rūkṣaḥ saṁvartakaḥ paraḥ . nṛsiṁho vidyutā māyā mahātejā yugāntakaḥ .. stumbukasthāne stughuka iti rūkṣasthāne vyakṣyamiti parasthāne paya iti vā pāṭhaḥ . parātmā krodhasaṁ hārau valānto meruvācakaḥ . sarvāṅgaḥ sāgaraḥ kāmaḥ saṁyogāntyastripūrakaḥ .. valāntasthāne nalānta iti sarvāṅgasthāne sarvāga iti vā pāṭhaḥ . kṣetrapālo mahākṣobho mātṛkāntānalakṣayaḥ . mukhaṁ kavyavahānantā kālajihvā gaṇeśvaraḥ . chāyāputtraśca saṁghāto malayaḥ śrīrlalāṭakaḥ .. kṣaḥ .. iti nandanabhaṭṭācāryaviracitaṁ varṇābhidhānaṁ samāptam .. |
वर्णद – varṇada | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899varṇada “varṇa-da” mfn. giving colour, colouring, dyeing
mfn. giving tribe &c. varṇada “varṇa-da” n. a kind of fragrant yellow wood Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch varṇada 1) adj. “Farbe gebend.” — 2) n. “ein best. wohlriechendes gelbes Holz” (kālīyaka) JAṬĀDH. im ŚKDR. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 varṇada na° varṇaṁ dadāti dā–ka . 1 kālīyake gandhadravye . jaṭā° . 2 varṇaprade tri0 |
वर्णिन् – varṇin | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899varṇin mf (“iṇī”) n. having a partic. colour, coloured
varṇin mf (“iṇī”) n. (ifc.) having the colour or appearance of. mf (“iṇī”) n. belonging to the caste or tribe of (see “jyeṣṭha-v-“) varṇin m. a painter varṇin m. a writer, scribe varṇin m. a person belonging to one of the four castes varṇin m. a religious student or Brahnia-cārin (q.v.) (cf. varṇin m. a partic. plant (?) varṇin m. pl. N. of a partic. sect varṇin mf (“iṇī”) n. (“iṇī”) f. a woman belonging to one of the higher castes mf (“iṇī”) n. any woman or wife mf (“iṇī”) n. turmeric Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 varṇin a. [varṇo’styasya ini] (At the end of comp.) 1 Having the colour or appearance of. (2) Belonging to the caste of. –m. (1) A painter. (2) A scribe, writer. (3) A religious student, a Brahmachārin q. v.; athāha varṇī Ku. 5. 65, 52; varṇāśramāṇāṁ gurave sa varṇī vicakṣaṇaḥ prastutamācacakṣe R. 5. 19. (4) A person of any one of the four principal castes. — Comp. –liṁgin a. disguised as, or wearing the marks of, a religious student; sa varṇiliṁgī viditaḥ samāyayau yudhiṣṭhiraṁ dvaitavane vanecaraḥ Ki. 1. 1. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch varṇin (von varṇa) 1) adj. am Ende eines comp. P. 5, 2, 132. a) “das Aussehen von – habend”: kumārau devavarṇinau R. 2, 92, 28. — b) “zu der Kaste der – gehörig”: brāhmaṇa- P. 5, 2, 132, Sch. jyeṣṭha- “ein Brahmane” KĀM. NĪTIS. 2, 19. — 2) m. a) “eine zu einer der vier Kasten gehörige Person” YĀJÑ. 2, 83. Spr. 303. KĀM. NĪTIS. 2, 33. — b) “ein Brahmane im ersten Lebensstadium, ein” Brahmacārin P. 5, 2, 134. AK. 2, 7, 42. H. 808. an. 2, 284. MED. n. 125. HALĀY. 2, 239. RAGH. 5, 19. KUMĀRAS. 5, 52. 65. KATHĀS. 24, 91. ŚAṁK. zu BṚH. ĀR. UP. S. 257. — c) pl. Bez. einer best. Secte Hall in der Einl. zu VĀSAVAD. S. 53. — d) “Maler” H. an. MED. e) “Schreiber” diess. — f) vielleicht “eine best. Pflanze”: palāśaśaravarṇinām (= lekhakānām NĪLAK.) MBH. 12, 2652. in der Verbindung sarva- adj. (yūpa) 14, 2630 erklärt NĪLAK. varṇin durch palāśakāṣṭhamaya. — 3) f. “Weib” H. 504. HALĀY. 2, 326. “eine Frau aus hoher Kaste” VĀGBH. 7, 70. — Vgl. varavarṇin, varavarṇinī. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 varṇin varṇin, I. adj., i. e. varṇa + in, f. nī, Belonging to a caste or tribe. II. m. 1. A painter. 2. A scribe. 3. A religious student, Ragh. 5, 19. 4. A man of either of the four castes. III. f. nī. 1. A woman. 2. Turmeric. — Comp. vara-varṇinī, f. 1. an excellent woman, Rām. 3, 53, 30. 2. a virtuous woman, Chr. 47, 39. 3. Gaurī. 4. Lakṣmī. 5. Sarasvatī. 6. turmeric. 7. lac. 8. a yellow pigment = rocanā. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 varṇin a. having a cert. colour, coloured, having the appearance or belonging to the caste of (–°); m. a person belonging to one of the four castes, esp. a religious student. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 varṇin varṇ-in, a. coloured; -°, having the appearance; of; belonging to the (Brāhman etc.) caste; m. man belonging to one of the four castes; Brāhman in the first stage, religious student, Brahmacārin: pl. a certain monastic order; -ī, f. woman; woman of high caste. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 varṇin pu° varṇo’styasya ini . 1 citrakare 2 lekhake 3 brahmacāriṇi medi° . athāha varṇī vidito maheśvaraḥ kumāraḥ . 4 viprādijātau ca varṇināṁ hi badho yatra smṛtiḥ . |
विपाण्डु – vipāṇḍu | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899vipāṇḍu “vi-pāṇḍu” mfn. pale, pallid (“-tā” f.)
mfn. painted with different yellow colours vipāṇḍu “vi-pāṇḍu” mfn. “-ḍura” mf (“ā”) n. pale, pallid Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch vipāṇḍu (2. vi + pā-) adj. “weisslich, bleich” SUŚR. 1, 95, 13. ŚIŚ. 9, 3. KIR. 5, 6. KATHĀS. 87, 31. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 vipāṇḍu a. whitish, pale, abstr. -tā f. |
विशद – viśada | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899viśada “vi-śada” mf (“ā”) n. (prob. fr. 1. “śad”) “conspicuous”, bright,
brilliant, shining, splendid, beautiful, white, spotless, pure (lit. and fig.; “am” ind.) &c. mf (“ā”) n. calm, easy, cheerful (as the mind, the eye, a smile) mf (“ā”) n. clear, evident, manifest, intelligible (compar. “-tara”) mf (“ā”) n. tender, soft (to the touch; as food, wind, odour) viśada “vi-śada” mf (“ā”) n. (ifc.) skilled or dexterous in, fit for mf (“ā”) n. endowed with viśada “vi-śada” m. white (the colour) viśada “vi-śada” m. N. of a king (the son of Jayad-ratha) viśada “vi-śada” n. yellowish sulphurate of iron viśada “vi-śada” n. “-tā” f. clearness, distinctness (v.l.) viśada “vi-śada” n. “-nara-karankāya” (ā. “-yate”), to resemble a white human skull viśada “vi-śada” n. “-prajṇa” mfn. of clear understanding, keen-witted, sagacious viśada “vi-śada” n. “-prabha” mfn. of pure effulgence, shedding pure light viśada “vi-śada” n. “-dātman” mfn. pure-hearted viśada “vi-śada” n. “-dānana” mfn. (ifc.) one whose face is radiant with Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 viśada a. (1) Clear, pure, pellucid, clean, spotless; yogatidrātaviśadaiḥ pāvanairavalokanaiḥ R. 10. 14, 19. 39; 8. 3 praṇayaviśadā dṛṣṭiṁ vaktre dadāti na śaṁki tā Ratn. 3. 9. Ki. 5. 12. (2) White, of a pure, white colour; nirdhautahāragulikāviśadaṁ himāṁbhaḥ R. 5. 70; Ku. 1. 44. 6. 25, Śi. 9. 26, Ki. 4. 23. (3) Bright, shining, beautiful; Ku. 3. 33; Śi. 8. 70. (4) Clear, evident, manifest. (5) Calm, free from anxiety, at ease: jāto mamāyaṁ viśadaḥ prakamaṁ (aṁtarātmā) S. 4. 21, V. 3. –daḥ The white colour. (viśadīkṛ) 8. U. ‘to explain make clear, illustrate’). Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch viśada 1) adj. (f. ā) a) “klar, hell, blank, heiter, rein”; = śukla, pāṇḍura, śuci u.s.w. AK. 1, 1, 4, 22. TRIK. 3, 3, 211. H. 1392. 1436. an. 3, 339. MED. d. 39. HALĀY. 1, 132. acchasphaṭika- (ambhas) MEGH. 52. nirdhautahāraguṭikā- (himāmbhas) RAGH. 5, 70. śīdhu Spr. 3322. madya SUŚR. 2, 477, 3. Oel 1, 182, 3. Urin 2, 82, 15. vīrya 1, 148, 9. vyoman RĀJA-TAR. 3, 375. prabhā ŚIŚ. 9, 26. RAGH. 4, 18. 9, 38. candrapādāḥ MEGH. 71. candrikā RAGH. 19, 39. daśanāṁśavaḥ KUMĀRAS. 6, 25. – hāramayūkha BHĀG. P. 3, 28, 25. himācala KIR. 5, 12. śṛṅgocchrāyaiḥ kumudaviśadaiḥ MEGH. 59. sphaṭika- (nagendra) 63. vapus GĪT. 1, 12. kadamba 2, 8. kaca AK. 2, 6, 2, 49. H. 570. śastra BHĀG. P. 8, 10, 14. Auge SUŚR. 2, 141, 17. kumudaviśadāni prekṣitāni MEGH. 41. prītiviśadairnetraiḥ RAGH. 17, 35. viśvāsaviśadāṁ dṛśam RĀJA-TAR. 8, 1279. Mund SUŚR. 2, 235, 6. prasādaviśadānana RĀJA-TAR. 3, 25. adhara KUMĀRAS. 3, 33. oṣṭhastāmbūladyutiviśadaḥ ŚIŚ. 8, 70. smita KUMĀRAS. 1, 45. BHĀG. P. 4, 16, 9. dantāvabhāsaviśadasmitavaktrakānti ṚT. 3, 18. svarūpaṁ brahmacaryaṁ ca MBH. 4, 186. antarātman ŚĀK. 97. āśaya BHĀG. P. 3, 5, 45. 4, 20, 10. hṛtpadma KAIVALJOP. bei MUIR, ST. 4, 304. hṛdaya Spr. 4568. cetas 2071. viśadātman 2680. 4232. yaśas KATHĀS. 22, 36. BHĀG. P. 1, 18, 11. kīrti 8, 21, 4. RĀJA-TAR. 8, 1152. anuvṛtti BHĀG. P. 3, 4, 12. nṛpaśrī RĀJA-TAR. 4, 373. -prajña 5, 79. vijñāna SARVADARŚANAS. 29, 18. svarūpāvabhāsa 47, 18. phalapaṅkti MĀRK. P. 43, 39. nijadīrghavaṁśaviśadapreṅkhatpatākākṛti Inschr. in Journ. of the Am. Or. S. 6, 506, Śl. 22. “rein, lauter”, von einem Menschen KĀM. NĪTIS. 12, 34. — b) “klar, deutlich, verständlich”; = vyakta TRIK. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 4, 67. viśadapaṭuravaiḥ PAÑCAR. 3, 9, 14. ucchūsita RAGH. 8, 3. niḥśvāsa (suviśada) MṚCCH. 48, 22. śāstra HARIV. 15701 (viṣada die ältere, viśada die neuere Ausg.). vivekaviśadā kathā RĀJA- TAR. 2, 113. bhāratavyākhyā Verz. d. Oxf. H.2,a, No. 14. fg. 161,b,35 (su-). 257,b,31 (-tara). — c) “weich anzufühlen” MBH. 12, 6856. 14, 1416. von Speisen im Gegens. zu khara PAT. zu P. 7, 3, 69. Schol. zu P. 2, 1, 35. 4, 2, 16. H. 921, Schol. SUŚR. 1, 246, 21. der Südwind 76, 14. von einem Geruch MBH. 12, 6848. 14, 1409. — d) “geschickt zu Etwas (geschmeidig)”: nṛtyaprayogaviśadau caraṇau MṚCCH. 9, 19. — e) am Ende eines comp. “behaftet mit”: kāsaśvāsādiduḥkha- SARVADARŚANAS. 101, 1. — 2) m. N. pr. eines Fürsten, eines Sohnes des Jayadratha, BHĀG. P. 9, 21, 23. — Vgl. vaiśadya. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 viśada A King who was the son of Jayadratha and father of King Senajit. (Bhāgavata, Skandha 9). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 viśada viśada, I. adj. 1. Of a white colour, Megh. 41; Śiś. 9, 26; Kir. 5, 12. 2. Clear, Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 3322. 3. Pure, Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 2680; spotless, Śāk. d. 97. 4. Evident. 5. Beautiful. II. m. White, the colour. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 viśada a. clear, pure, distinct, intelligible; tender, soft; dexterous, fit for (–°). Abstr. -tā f. |
शवल – śavala | Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890
śavala See śabara, śabala. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch śavala s. śabala. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 śavala śavala, I. adj. 1. Variegated, of a variegated colour, Mālat. 145, 12; grown or yellow, Vikr. d. 109 (cf. Wilson, Spec. of the Theatre of the Hind. 2. ed. i. 250, n.). 2. Imitative. 3. Articulated, Rājat. 5, 68 (divided, viz. by rivers). II. f. lī. 1. A brindled cow. 2. The cow of plenty, Vaśiṣṭha’s cow, Rām. 1, 52, 21. III. n. Water. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 śavala pu° śava–kalan . 1 karvūravarṇe 2 tadvati tri° amaraḥ . 3 tadvarṇavatyāṁ dhenau strī amaraḥ . |
शार – śāra | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śāra mf (“ā”) n. (in most meanings also written “sāra”; of doubtful
derivation) variegated in colour, of different colours (as dark hair mixed with grey), motley, spotted, speckled 2 mf (“ā”) n. yellow śāra m. variegating or a variegated colour, (esp.) a mixture of blue and yellow, green śāra m. (also “śāraka”) a kind of die or a piece used at chess or at backgammon śāra m. air, wind śāra m. hurting, injuring (fr. “śṝ”) śāra mf (“ā”) n. (“ī”) f. a chessman &c. (see m.) śāra m. a kind of bird (= “śāri”) śāra m. Kuśa grass śāra n. a variegated colour śāra Vṛiddhi form of “śara”, in comp. Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 śāra a. [śār-ac śṝ-ghañ vā] (1) Variegated, speckled, mottled, spotted. (2) Yellow. –raḥ (1) A variegated colour. (2) Green colour. (3) Air, wind. (4) A piece used at chess, a chessman; kālaḥ kālyā bhuvanaphalake trīḍati praṇiśāraiḥ Bh. 3. 39. (5) Injuring, hurting Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch śāra P. 3, 3, 21, Vārtt. 2 (vgl. P. 6, 1, 159). m. f. (ī) TRIK. 3, 5, 19. 1) adj. “bunt, scheckig” P. 3, 3, 21. Vārtt. 2. AK. 3, 4, 25, 168. H. an. 2, 461. MED. r. 90. HALĀY. 4, 56. palita- DAŚAK. 60, 5. Vgl. kṛṣṇa- und sāra. — 2) m. a) “ein beim Würfelspiel gebrauchter Stein, – Figur” H. 487.H. an. MED. kālaḥ kālyā bhuvanaphalake krīḍati prāṇiśāraiḥ Spr. 2294. pramādadatta- DAŚAK. 70, 4. — b) “Wind” P. 3, 3, 21, Vārtt. 2. AK. H. an. MED. — c) nom. act. von śar, = hiṁsana ŚABDĀRTHAK. bei WILSON. — 3) f. ī a) = 2) a) ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. (sārī). — b) Kuśa-“Gras” ŚABDĀRTHAK. bei WILSON. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 śāra śāra, I. adj. 1. Variegated (in colour), Daśak. in Chr. 180, 1 (of hair, mixed with greyand white). 2. Yellow. II. m. 1. Hurting (vb. śṛ10). 2. A mixture of blue and yellow, a green. 3. Variegating. 4. Air, wind (cf. sāra). 5. A piece or man at chess, backgammon, Daśak. in Chr. 185, 24 (cf. sāra). III. f. rī. 1. An arrow (vb. śṛ10, cf. śara), Chr. 297, 16 = Rigv. i. 112, 16. 2. Kuśa grass. — Comp. kṛṣṇa-, adj. blue-black, Megh. 48, read -śāra (Sch.). Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 śāra f. ā mottled, spotted; m. a stone or piece used at sev. games (also f. ī). Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 śāra śāra, a. variegated, speckled, spotted; m. piece or figure used on a draught-board: ī, f. id.; a bird. Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 śāra t ka daurbalye . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ . (adanta curā°-para°-aka°-seṭ .) aśaśārat . iti durgādāsaḥ .. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 śāra daurvalye ada° cu° uma° saka° seṭ . śārayati–te aśaśārat ta . śāra na° śāra–ac, śṛ–ghañ vā . 1 karvūravarṇe 2 tadvati tri° amaraḥ 3 vāyau pu° amaraḥ 4 akṣopakaraṇe medi° . |
शारत्व – śāratva | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śāratva “śāra-tva” n. variety of colour, yellowness |
शाव – śāva | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śāva m. (prob. fr. 1. “śū” for “śvi”; cf. “śiśu”) the young of any animal
(cf. “mṛga-śāva”) śāva mfn. (fr. “śava”) cadaverous, relating to a dead body, produced by or belonging to a corpse &c. mfn. dead mfn. of a cadaverous or dark yellowish colour, tawny śāva n. defilement caused by contact with a corpse or the death of a relation śāva w.r. for “śyāva”. Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 śāva a. (vī f.) [śava-aṇ] (1) Relating to a dead body; caused by the death (of a relative); daśāhaṁ śāvamāśaucaṁ sapiṁḍeṣu vidhīyate Ms. 5. 59, 61. (2) Tawny, dark-yellowish. –vaḥ (1) The young of any animal, a fawn, cub; kva vayaṁ kva parokṣamanmatho mṛgaśāvaiḥ samamedhito janaḥ S. 2. 18; mṛgarājaśāvaḥ R. 6. 3, 18. 37. (2) A dark-yellowish colour. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch śāva (vgl. śiśu) m. “das Junge eines Thieres” H. 338. HALĀY. 2, 347. mṛgāḥ sārdhaṁ śāvaiḥ HARIV. 15439. siṁha- 9105. KĀM. NĪTIS. 7, 4. RAGH. 6, 3. 18, 36. ŚĀK. 105, 14. Spr. 3254. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 104, 28. UTTARAR. 94, 6 (122, 12). MĀRK. P. 43, 54. RĀJA-TAR. 3, 112. SARVADARŚANAS. 119, 21. Vgl. mṛga- (auch MBH. 3, 16164. R. 3, 24, 18. ŚĀK. 51. BHĀG. P. 4, 2, 12). śāva (von śava) adj. “einem Leichnam angehörig, von einer Leiche herrührend”: karau BHĀG. P. 2, 3, 21. kapāla HARIV. 384. kalevara SĀV. 5, 61 (śyāva MBH. 3, 16809. śāva ed. Bomb., welches NĪLAK. ohne alle Noth durch śyāma erklärt). svatanūdbhava so v. a. “entseelt” HARIV. 1142 (śocya die neuere Ausg.). āśauca PĀR. GṚHY. 3, 10. M. 5, 59. 61. fg. 74. YĀJÑ. 3, 18. n. so v. a. śāvamāśaucam MĀRK. P. 32, 23. śāvaśeṣāsthinicaya R. 2, 77, 22 fehlerhaft für sāvaśeṣa-, wie die ed. Bomb. liest. śāva adj. fehlerhaft für śyāva H. 1396, v. l. und sonst. śāva 1 śāba in den südindischen Hdschrr. nach PISCHEL. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 śāva śāva, I. i. e. śava + a, adj. 1. Relating to, or produced by, a dead body, Man. 5, 59. 2. Dead, Sāv. 5, 61. II. (akin to śvi, cf. śiśu), m. The young of any animal, Utt. Rāmac. 122, 12 (siṁha-, A lion’s cub). Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 śāva [1] m. the young of an animal. śāva [2] a. relating to a dead body, cadaverous, dead. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 śāva 1. śāv-a, m. [growing: 2. śū] young of an animal; 2. a. belonging to a corpse (śava), caused by a death (imparity); n. impurity produced by a corpse: -ka, m. young of an animal or bird. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 śāva pu° śava–ghañ . 1 śiśau śabdara° . svārthe ka . tatraiva śavasyedam aṇ . 2 śavasambaddhe tri° trirātraṁ śāvamāśaucam iti smṛtiḥ . |
शिलाधातु – śilādhātu | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śilādhātu “śilā-dhātu” m. “rock-mineral”, chalk
m. yellow ochre m. red chalk m. a white fossil substance m. an aluminous earth of a white or yellowish colour Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch śilādhātu m. “weisse Kreide” TRIK. 2, 3, 6. “eine best. gelbe mineralische Substanz” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. – R. 2, 96, 2 (105, 2 GORR.). 5, 32, 37. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 śilādhātu pu° śilāyā dhātuścaramadhāturiva śubhratvāt . 1 śvetopale (khaḍī) trikā° . 2 pītavarṇe gairikabhede ca rājani° . |
शोण – śoṇa | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śoṇa mf (“ā” or “ī”) n. red, crimson, purple &c. &c.
śoṇa m. redness śoṇa m. fire śoṇa m. Bignonia Indica or a variety of it śoṇa m. red sugar cane śoṇa m. a chestnut or bay horse śoṇa m. the river śona or Sone (also “ā”, f.; it rises in Gondwana in the district of Nagpore, on the table-land of Amara-kaṇṭaka, four or five miles east of the source of the Narmadā [Nerbudda], and running first northerly and then easterly for 500 miles falls into the Ganges above Pāṭali-putra or Patnā) &c. śoṇa m. N. of a partic. ocean śoṇa m. of a man g. “naḍādi” śoṇa m. of a prince of the Paṇcālas śoṇa mf (“ā” or “ī”) n. (“ā”) f. see above śoṇa n. blood śoṇa n. red-lead Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 śoṇa a. (ṇā or ṇī f.) [śoṇ-ac] (1) Red, crimson, tinged red; styānāvanaddhaghataśoṇitaśoṇapāṇiruttaṁsayiṣyati kacāṁstava devi bhīmaḥ Ve 1. 21; āsvāditadvi daśoṇi taśoṇaśobhāṁ Mu. 1. 8; Ku. 1. 7. (2) Bay, reddish-brown. (3) Yellow. –ṇaḥ (1) Crimson, the red colour. (2) Fire (3) A kind of red sugar-cane. (4) A bay horse. (5) N. of a male river, rising in Gondavana and falling into the Ganges near Pātaliputra q. v.; pratyagrahītpārthivavāhinīṁ tāṁ bhāgīrathīṁ śoṇa ivottaraṁgaḥ R. 7. 36. (6) The planet Mars; cf. lohita. –ṇaṁ (1) Blood. (2) Red lead. — Comp. –aṁbuḥ N. of a cloud which is said to rise at the destruction of the world. –aśman m., –upalaḥ 1. a red stone. –2. a ruby. –padmaṁ a red lotus. –puṣpakaḥ the Kovidāra tree. –ratnaṁ a ruby. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch śoṇa 1) adj. (f. ā und ī P. 4, 1, 43. VOP. 4, 17) “roth, hochroth” AK. 1, 1, 4, 24. TRIK. 3, 3, 140. H. 1395. an. 2, 156. MED. ṇ. 31. fg. HALĀY. 4, 48. ROSS H. 1242. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 2, 282. ṚV. 1, 6, 2. 126, 4. 3, 35, 3. 5, 33, 9. 10, 20, 9. MBH. 3, 15597. 4, 1677. 1826. 6, 751. R. 5, 12, 35. KATHĀS. 37, 162. 167. śoṇo dhāvati VEDĀNTAS. (Allah.) No. 105. vṛṣan ṚV. 9, 97, 13. yadidaṁ ghṛte hute śoṇamivārcirujjvalati KĀṬH. 8, 9. TS. 7, 3, 18, 1. KUMĀRAS. 1, 7. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 30, 22. -rāga KATHĀS. 23, 78. 109, 120. -śiras adj. (Vogel) HARIV. 1121. tālu 1145. mukha SĀH. D. 34, 4. oṣṭha KATHĀS. 35, 11. kara 105, 2. roṣasuśoṇadṛṣṭi BHĀG. P. 2, 7, 24. maṇimālā CHANDOM. 53. śoṇita- Spr. (II) 1073. KĀVYAPR. (1866) 70, 13. SĀH. D. 146, 5. sindūra- KATHĀS. 19, 68. kuṅkuma- BHĀG. P. 10, 60, 8. amlāna AK. 2, 4, 2, 54. -padma GĪT. 3, 5. -padmaka RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. -saroja Verz. d. Oxf. H. 141,b, No. 289, Z. 5. aśoṇa AV. 19, 60, 1 wohl fehlerhaft für aśīrṇa. — 2) m. a) “Röthe” AK. 1, 1, 4, 24. H. 1395. BHĀG. P. 1, 11, 2. — b) “Feuer” H. an. MED. — c) Bez. verschiedener Pflanzen: = śyonāka diess. = śyonākaprabheda und raktekṣu RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — d) N. pr. eines in Amarakaṇṭaka entspringenden und bei Pāṭaliputra in die Gañgā sich ergiessenden Flusses AK. 1, 2, 3, 33. TRIK. H. 1090. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 3, 52. LIA. 1, 82. MBH. 2, 373. 796. 3, 8150. 12910. 14233. HARIV. 9512. 12827. R. 1, 33, 20 (34, 18 GORR.). R. GORR. 1, 37, 4. 4, 40, 20. RAGH. 7, 33. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 5, 65. 16, 1. 9. PRĀYAŚCITTEND. 11, “b”, 8. MĀRK. P. 57, 21. BHĀG. P. 5, 19, 18. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 255, “a”, 15. 339, “a”, 30. fg. 40. -saṁgama 39,b,25. gaṅgāśoṇam P. 2, 4, 7, Schol. śoṇā f. MBH. 6, 337 (śoṇa VP. 183). — e) N. pr. eines Meeres DHAR. im ŚKDR. — f) N. pr. eines Mannes gaṇa naḍādi zu P. 4, 1, 99. ŚAT. BR. 13, 5, 4, 16. — 3) f. ā s. u. 2) d) am Ende. — 4) n. a) “Blut.” — b) “Mennig” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — Vgl. dadhi- und śauṇāyana. śoṇa 2) d) am Ende, śoṇā f. auch R. ed. Bomb. 1, 31, 20. 35, 1. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 śoṇa śoṇa, i. e. probably (although already in the Vedas). sa-varṇa, I. adj. 1. Crimson, of a crimson colour, of chesnut colour, Vedāntas. in Chr. 214, 11. 2. Red in the face, from passion, etc. II. m. 1. Crimson, the colour of the red lotus. 2. A horse of a reddish or bright chesnut colour, Vedāntas. in Chr. 214, 10. 3. Fire. 4. A red sort of sugar-cane. 5. The name of a river. 6. A flower, Bignonia indica. III. n. 1. Blood. 2. Red lead. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 śoṇa a. red, deep-red; m. redness, N. of a river. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 śoṇa śoṇa, a. red, crimson; m. redness (C., rare); N. of a river, the Sone or Red River which flows into the Ganges at Pāṭaliputra (C.): -tā, f. redness; -aśva, a. having red horses, ep. of Droṇa. Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 śoṇa ṛ gatau . varṇe . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (bhvā°-para°-saka°-varṇe aka°-seṭ .) varṇaśceha raktībhāvaḥ . śoṇati sūryaḥ sandhyāyām . iti durgādāsaḥ .. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 śoṇa gato saka° varṇe aka° bhvā° para° seṭ . śoṇati aśīṇīt ṛdit caṅi na hrasvaḥ . śoṇa na° śoṇa–ac . 1 sindūre 2 rudhire ca rājani° . 3 raktekṣau 4 śoṇākabhede rājani° . 5 maṅgale grahe 6 agnau 7 citrake 8 nadabhede sa ca amarakaṇṭakadeśagataḥ pāṭaliputrasannikṛṣṭe gaṅkāyāṁ militaḥ . 9 raktavarṇe pu° 10 tadvati tri° medi° . 11 samudrabhede dharaṇiḥ . |
शोभा – śobhā | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śobhā f. (ifc. f. “ā”) splendour, brilliance, lustre, beauty, grace, loveliness
(“kā śobhā” with loc., “what beauty is there [in that]” i.e. “it has no beauty”; “śobhāṁ na-kṛ”, “to look bad or ugly”; ifc. often = “splendid”, “excellent” e.g. “śaurya-śobhā”, “splendid heroism”; “karma-śobhā”, “a masterpiece”) &c. &c. f. distinguished merit f. colour, hue f. wish, desire f. a kind of metre f. turmeric f. the yellow pigment Go-rocanā Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 śobhā [śubh-a] (1) Light, lustre, brilliance, radiance. (2) (a) Splendour, beauty, elegance, grace, loveliness; vapurabhinavamasyāḥ puṣyati svāṁ na śobhāṁ S. 1. 19; Me. 52, 59. (b) Natural beauty, grandeur (as of a mountain); adriśobhā R. 2. 27. (3) An ornament, graceful expression; śobhaiva maṁdarakṣu bdhakṣubhitāṁbhodhivarṇanā Śi. 2. 107. (4) Turmeric. (5) A kind of pigment (= gorocanā q. v.) — Comp. –aṁjanaḥ N. of a very useful tree. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 śobhā śobh-ā, f. splendour, beauty, grace, loveliness (-° sts. = splendid, extraordinary); colour (rare): kā śobhā, what good is there in (lc.) = is a bad thing: -bat-ī, f. N. of a town; -vākya, n. handsome speech. Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 śobhā strī, śobhante’nayā . (śubha + karaṇe ghañ . ṭāp .) dīptiḥ . tatparyāyaḥ . kāntiḥ 2 dyutiḥ 3 chaviḥ 4 . ityamaraḥ .. dyutī 5 chavī 6 iti taṭṭīkā .. abhikhyā 7 . iti jaṭādharaḥ .. śubhā 8 bhāḥ 9 śrīḥ 10 bhāsā 11 bhā 12 iti śabdaratnāvalau .. suṣamā 13 chāyā 14 vibhā 15 dṛkpriyā 16 bhānam 17 bhātiḥ 18 kamā 19 ramā 20 . iti rājanirghaṇṭaḥ .. tasyā lakṣaṇam . sā śobhā rūpabhogādyairyat syādaṅgavibhūṣaṇam . śobhaivakāntirākhyātā manmathāpyāyanojjvalā .. ityujjvalanīlamaṇiḥ .. * .. gopīviśeṣaḥ . yathā — dṛṣṭastvaṁ śobhayā gopyā yuktaścandanakānane . sadyo macchabdamātreṇa tirodhānaṁ kṛtaṁ tvayā .. śobhā dehaṁ parityajya jagāma candramaṇḍalam . tatastasyāḥ śarīrañca snigdhaṁ tejo babhūva ha .. saṁvibhajya tvayā dattaṁ hṛdayena vidūyatā . ratnāya kiñcit svarṇāyakiñcinmaṇivarāya ca .. kiñcit strīṇāṁ mukhābjebhyaḥ kiñcidabjāya kiñcana . kiñcit kiśalayebhyaśca puṣpebhyaścāpi kiñcana .. kiñciccandanapaṅke bhyastoyebhyaścāpi kiñcana . kiñcit phalebhyaḥ śasyebhyaḥ supakke bhyaśca kiñcana . kiñcinnūtanavastrebhyo dugdhe bhyaścāpi kiñcana .. iti brahmavaivarte prakṛtikhaṇḍe 9 adhyāyaḥ .. * .. haridrā . gorocanā . iti rājanirghaṇṭaḥ .. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 śobhā strī śubha–a . 1 dīptau sā śobhā rūpabhogādyairyat syādaṅgavimūṣaṇam . śobhaiva sāntirākhyātā manmathāpyāyanojjvalā ujjvalamaṇyuktārthe ca 3 gopībhede brahmavai° pra° 9 a° . 4 haridrāyāṁ 5 gorocanāyāṁ rājani° . |
सितरण्जन – sitaraṇjana | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899sitaraṇjana “sita-raṇjana” mfn. yellow
sitaraṇjana “sita-raṇjana” m. yellow (the colour) |
सु – su | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899su cl.1.P. ā. “savati, -te”, to go, move ( “sru”).
su (= 1. “sū”) cl.1.2. P. ( xxii, 43 and xxiv, 32; “savati, sauti”, only in 3. sg. pr. “sauti” and 2. sg. Impv. “suhi”) to urge, impel, incite ; to possess supremacy su cl.5.P. ā. ( xxvii, 1) “sunoti, sunute” (in 3. pl. “sunvanti, sunvire” [with pass. sense] and “suṣvati”; p. “sunvat” or “sunvāna” [the latter with act. and pass. sense] ; pf. “suṣāva, suṣuma” &c. ; p. in Veda “suṣuvas” and “suṣvāṇa” [the later generally with pass. sense; accord. to on “suṣuvāṇa” with act. sense]; aor. accord. to Gr. “asāvīt” or “asauṣīt, asoṣṭa” or “asaviṣṭa”; in also Impv. “sotu, sutam”, and p. [mostly pass.] “suvāna” [but the spoken form is “svāna” and so written in , “suv-” in ; and 3. pl. “asuṣavuḥ” ; fut. “sotā” ; “soṣyati” ; “saviṣyati” ; inf. “sotave, sotos” ; “sotum” Gr.; ind. p. “-sutya” ; “-sūya” , to press out, extract (esp. the juice from the Soma plant for libations) ; to distil, prepare (wine, spirits &c.) on Pass. “sūyate” (in also ā. 3. sg. “sunve” and 3. pl. “sunvire” with pass. sense; aor. “asāvi” Caus. “-sāvayati” or “-ṣāvayati” (see “abhi-ṣu” and “pra-su”; aor. “asūṣavat” accord. to some “asīṣavat”) Gr.: Desid. of Caus. “suṣāvayiṣati” Desid. “susūṣati, -te” Iutens. “soṣūyate, soṣavīti, soṣoti” su (= 2. “sū”), (only in 3. sg. “sauti” see “pra-sū”) to beget, bring forth. su ind. (opp. to “dus” and corresponding in sense to Gk. [greek]; perhaps connected with 1. “vasu”, and, accord. to some, with pron. base “sa”, as “ku” with “ka”; in Veda also “sū” and liable to become “ṣu” or “ṣū” and to lengthen a preceding vowel, while a following “na” may become “ṇa”; it may be used as an adj. or adv.), good, excellent, right, virtuous, beautiful, easy, well, rightly, much, greatly, very, any, easily, willingly, quickly (in older language often with other particles; esp. with “u”, = “forthwith, immediately”; with “mo” i.e. “mā u”, = “never, by no means”; “su kam” often emphatically with an Impv. e.g. “tiṣṭhā su kam maghavan mā parā gāḥ”, “do tarry O Maghavan, go not past” ; “su” always qualifies the meaning of a verb and is never used independently at the beginning of a verse; in later language it is rarely a separate word, but is mostly prefixed to substantives, adjectives, adverbs and participles, exceptionally also to an ind. p. e.g. “su-baddhvā”, “having well bound” ; or even to a finite verb e.g. “su-nirvavau” su (to be similarly prefixed to the following): su (to be similarly prefixed to the following). su (to be similarly prefixed to the following): su (to be similarly prefixed to the following): su (to be similarly prefixed to the following) su (to be similarly prefixed to the following): su (to be similarly prefixed to the following): su (to be similarly prefixed to the following): su (to be similarly prefixed to the following, in which the initial “ṣ” stands for an orig. “s”): su (to be similarly prefixed to the following): su (to be similarly prefixed to the following) Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 su I. 1 U. (suvati-te) To go, move. –II. 1. 2. P. (savati, sauti) To possess power or supremacy. –III. 5. U. (sunoti, sunute, suta; the s of su is changed to ṣ after any preposition ending in i or u) (1) To press out or extract juice. (2) To distil. (3) To pour out, sprinkle, make a libation. (4) To perform a sacrifice, especially the Soma sacrifice. (5) To bathe. (6) To churn. –Desid. (suṣūsati-te) –WITH ud to excite, agitate. –pra to produce, beget. su ind. A particle often used with nouns to form Karmadhāraya and Bahuvrīhi compounds, and with adjectives and adverbs. It has the following senses: (1) Well, good, excellent; as in suṁgadhi. (2) Beautiful, handsome; as in sumadhyamā, sukeśī &c. (3) Well, perfectly, thoroughly, properly; sujīrṇamannaṁ suvicakṣaṇaḥ sutaḥ suśāsitā strī nṛpatiḥ susevitaḥ &c … sudīrghakāle’pi na yāti vikriyāṁ H. 1. 22. (4) Easily, readily, as in sukara or sulabha q. v. (5) Much, very much, exceedingly; sudāruṇa, sudīrgha &c. (6) Worthy of respect or reverence. (7) It is also said to have the senses of assent, prosperity, and distress. — Comp. –akṣa a. 1. having good eyes. –2. having keen organs, acute. –aṁga a. well-shaped, handsome, lovely. –accha a. see s. v. –aṁta a. having a happy end, ending well. –alpa, -alpaka a. see s. v. –asti, –astika see s. v. –ākāra, –ākṛti a. well-formed, handsome, beautiful. –āgata see s. v. –ādānaṁ taking justly or properly; Ms. 8. 172. –ābhāsa a. very splendid or illustrious; Ki. 15. 22. –iṣṭa a. properly sacrificed. -kṛt m. a form of fire. –ukta a. well-spoken, well-said; athavā sūktaṁ khalu kenāpi Ve. 3. ( –ktā) a kind of bird (sārikā. (–ktaṁ) 1. a good or wise saying; netuṁ vāṁchati yaḥ khalān pathi satāṁ sūktaiḥ sudhāsyaṁdibhiḥ Bh. 2. 6, R. 15. 97. –2. a Vedic hymn, as in puruṣasūkta &c. -darśin m. a hymnseer, Vedic sage. -vāc f. 1. a hymn. –2. praise, a word of praise. –uktiḥ f. 1. a good or friendly speech. –2. a good or clever saying. –3. a correct sentence. –uttara a. 1. very superior. –2. well towards the north. –utthāna a. making good efforts, vigorous, active. ( –naṁ) vigorous effort or exertion. –unmada, –unmāda a. quite mad or frantic. –upasadana a. easy to be approached. –upaskara a. furnished with good instruments. –kaṁṭakā the aloe plant. –kaṁḍuḥ itch. –kaṁdaḥ 1. an onion. –2. a yam. –3. a sort of grass. –kaṁdakaḥ onion. –kara a. (rā or rī f.) 1. easy to be done, practicable, feasible; vaktuṁ sukaraṁ kartuṁ (adhyavasātuṁ) duṣkaraṁ Ve. 3 ‘sooner said than done.’ –2 easy to be managed. ( –rā) a tractable cow. ( –raṁ) charity, benevolence. –karman a. 1. one whose deeds are righteous, virtuous, good. –2. active, diligent. (–m.) N. of Viśvakarman. –kala a. one who has acquired a great reputation for liberality in giving and using (money &c.). –kāṁḍaḥ the Kāravella plant. –kāṁḍikā the Kāṇḍīra creeper. –kāṁḍin a. 1. having beautiful stems. –2. beautifully joined. (–m.) a bee. –kāṣṭhaṁ firewood. –kuṁdakaḥ an onion. –kumāra a. 1. very delicate or soft, smooth. –2. beautifully young or youthful. ( –raḥ) 1. a beautiful youth. –2. a kind of sugar-cane. –3. a kind of grain (śyāmāka). –4 a kind of mustard. –5. the wild Champaka. ( –rā) 1. the double jasmine. –2. the plantain. –3. the great- flowered jasmine. –kumārakaḥ 1. a beautiful youth. –2. rice (śāli). (–kaṁ) the Tamālapatra. –kumārī the Navamallikā jasmine. –kṛt a. 1. doing good, benevolent. –2. pious, virtuous, righteous. –3. wise, learned. –4. fortunate, lucky. –5. making good sacrifices or offerings (–m.) 1. a skilful worker. –2. N. of Tvaṣṭṛ. –kṛta a. 1. done well or properly. –2. thoroughly done. –3. well- made or constructed. –4. treated with kindness, assisted, befriended. — 5. virtuous, righteous, pious. –6. lucky, fortunate. ( –taṁ) 1. any good or virtuous act, kindness, favour, service; nādatte kasyacitpāpaṁ kasyacitsukṛtaṁ vibhuḥ Bg. 5. 15, Me. 17. –2. virtue, moral or religious merit; svargābhisaṁdhisukṛtaṁ vaṁcanāmiva menire Ku. 6. 47; tacciṁtyamānaṁ sukṛtaṁ taveti R. 14. 16. –3. fortune, auspiciousness. –4. recompense, reward. –kṛtiḥ f. 1. well-doing, a good act. –2. kindness, virtue. –3. practice of penance. –4. auspiciousness. –kṛtin a. 1. acting well or kindly. –2. virtuous, pious, good, righteous; saṁtaḥ saṁtu nirāpadaḥ sukṛtināṁ kīrtiściraṁ vardhatāṁ H. 4. 132; Bg. 7. 16. –3. wise, learned. –4. benevolent. –5. fortunate, lucky. –kṛtyaṁ a good action; Pt. 2. 41. –keśa(sa)raḥ the citron tree. –kratuḥ 1. N. of Agni. –2. of Śiva. –3. of Indra. –4. of Mitra and Varuṇa. –5. of the sun. –6. of Soma. –gaṁ a. 1. going gracefully or well. –2. graceful, elegant. –3. easy of access; Pt. 2. 144. –4. intelligible, easy to be understood (opp. durga). ( –gaṁ) 1. ordure, feces. –2. happiness. –gata a. 1. well-gone or passed. –2 well-bestowed. ( –taḥ) an epithet of Buddha. –gaṁdhaḥ 1. fragrance, odour, perfume. –2. sulphur. –3. a trader. ( –dhaṁ) 1. sandal. –2. small cumin seed. –3. a blue lotus. –4. a kind of fragrant grass. ( –dhā) sacred basil. –gaṁdhakaḥ 1. sulphur. –2. the red Tulasī1. –3. the orange. –4. a kind of gourd. –gaṁdhāraḥ an epithet of Śiva. –gaṁdhi a. 1. sweet-smelling, fragrant, redolent with perfumes. –2. virtuous, pious. ( –dhiḥ) 1. perfume, fragrance. –2. the Supreme Being. –3. a kind of sweet-smelling mango. ( –dhi n.) 1. the root of long pepper. –2. a kind of fragrant grass. — 3. coriander seed. -triphalā 1. nutmeg. –2. areca nut. –3. cloves. -mūlaṁ the root Uśīra. -mūṣikā the musk-rat. –gaṁdhikaḥ 1. incense. –2. sulphur. –3. a kind of rice. ( –kaṁ) the white lotus. –gama a. 1. easy of access, accessible. –2. easy. –3. plain, intelligible. –gahanā an enclosure round a place of sacrifice to exclude profane access. -vṛttiḥ f. the same as above. –gṛha a. (hī f.) having a beautiful house or abode, welllodged; sugṛhī nirgṛṁhīkṛtā Pt. 1. 390. –gṛhīta a. 1. held well or firmly, grasped. –2. used or applied properly or auspiciously. -nāman a. 1. one whose name is auspiciously invoked, one whose name it is auspicious to utter (as Bali, Yudhiṣṭhira), a term used as a respectful mode of speaking; sugṛhītanāmnaḥ bhaṭṭagopālasya pautraḥ Māl. 1. –grāsaḥ a dainty morsel. –grīva a. having a beautiful neck. ( –vaḥ) 1. a hero. –2. a swan. –3. a kind of weapon. –4. N. of one of the four horses of Kṛṣṇa. –5. of Śiva. –6. of Indra. –7. N. of a monkeychief and brother of Vāli. [By the advice of Kabandha Rāma went to Sugrīva who told him how his brother had treated him and besought his assistance in recovering his wife, promising at the same time that he would assist Rāma in recovering his wife Sīta. Rāma, therefere, killed Vāli, and installed Sugrīva on the throne. He then assisted Rāma with his hosts of monkeys in conquering Rāvaṇa, and recovering Sīta.]. -īśaḥ N. of Rāma. –gla a. very weary or fatigued. –cakṣus a. having good eyes, seeing well. (–m.) 1. a discerning or wise man, learned man. –2. the glomerous fig-tree. –carita, caritra a. well-conducted, well-behaved. ( –taṁ, -traṁ) 1. good conduct, virtuous deeds. –2. merit; tava sucaritamaṁgulīya nūnaṁ pratanu S. 6. 10. ( –tā, –trā) a well-conducted, devoted, and virtuous wife. –carman m. the Bhūrja tree. –citrakaḥ 1. a king-fisher. –2. a kind of speckled snake. –citrā a kind of gourd. –ciṁtā, –ciṁtanaṁ deep thought, deep reflection or consideration. –ciram ind. for a very long time, very long. –cirāyus m. a god, deity. –cūṭī a pair of nippers or tongs. –celakaḥ a fine cloth. –chatraḥ N. of Śiva. ( –trā) the river Sutlej. –jana a. 1. good, virtuous, respectable. –2. kind, benevolent. ( –naḥ) 1. a good or virtuous man, benevolent man. –2. a gentleman. –3. N. of Indra’s charioteer. –janatā 1. goodness, kindness, benevolence, virtue; aiśvaryasya vibhūṣaṇaṁ sujanatā Bh. 2. 82. –2. a number of good men. –3. bravery, –janman a. 1. of noble or respectable birth; yā kaumudī nayanayorbhavataḥ sujanmā Māl. 1. 34. –2. legitimate, lawfully born. –jalaṁ a lotus. –jalpaḥ 1. a good speech. –2. a kind of speech thus described by Ujjvalamaṇi; yatrārjavāt sagāṁbhīryaṁ sadainyaṁ sahacāpalam . sotkaṁṭhaṁ ca hariḥ spṛṣṭaḥ sa sujalpo nigadyate … –jāta a. 1. wellgrown, tall. –2. well made or produced. –3. of high birth. –4. beautiful, lovely; Māl. 1. 16, R. 3. 8. –tanu a. 1. having a beautiful body. –2. extremely delicate or slender, very thin. –3. emaciated. ( –nuḥ, –nūḥ f.) a lovely lady; etāḥ sutanu mukha te sakhyaḥ paśyaṁti hemakūṭagatāḥ V. 1. 10. –taṁtrī a. 1. well-stringed. –2. (hence) melodious. –tapas a. 1. one who practises austere penance. –2. having great heat. (–m.) 1. an ascetic, a devotee, hermit, an anchorite. –2. the sun. (–n.) an austere penance. –tamāṁ ind. most excellently, best. –tarāṁ ind. 1. better, more excellently. –2. exceedingly, very, very much, excessively; tayā duhitrā sutarāṁ savitrī sphuratprabhāmaṁḍalayā cakāśe Ku. 1. 24; sutarāṁ dayāluḥ R. 2. 53, 7. 21, 14. 9, 18. 24. –3. more so, much more so; mayyapyāsthā na te cettvayi mama sutarāmeṣa rājan gatosmi Bh. 3. 30. –4. consequently. –tardanaḥ the (Indian) cuckoo. –talaṁ 1. ‘immense depth’, N. of one of the seven regions below the earth; see pātāla. –2. the foundation of a large building. –tiktakaḥ the coral tree. –tīkṣṇa a. 1. very sharp. –2. very pungent. –3. acutely painful. ( –kṣṇaḥ) 1. the Śigru tree. –2. N. of a sage; nāmnā sutīkṣṇaścaritena dāṁtaḥ R. 13. 41. -daśanaḥ an epithet of Śiva. –tīrthaḥ 1. a good preceptor. –2. N. of Śiva. –tuṁga a. very lofty or tall. ( –gaḥ) the cocoa-nut tree. –tejas a. 1. very sharp. –2. very bright, or splendid. –3. very mighty. (–m.) a worshipper of the sun. –dakṣiṇa a. 1. very sincere or upright. –2. liberal or rich in sacrificial gifts; Pt. 1. 310. ( –ṇā) N. of the wife of Dilīpa; tasya dākṣiṇyarūḍhena nāmnā magadhavaṁśajā . patnī sudakṣiṇetyāsīt R. 1. 31, 3. 1 –daṁḍaḥ a cane, ratan. –dat a. (tī f.) having handsome teeth. –daṁtaḥ 1. a good tooth. –2. an actor, a dancer. ( –tī) the female elephant of the north-west quarter. –darśana a. (nā or nī f.) 1. good-looking, beautiful, handsome. –2. easily seen. ( –naḥ) the discus of Viṣṇu; as in kṛṣṇopyasudarśanaḥ K. –2. N. of Śiva. –3. of mount Meru. –4. a vulture. ( –nī –naṁ) N. of Amarāvatī, Indra’s capital. ( –naṁ) N. of Jambudvīpa. –darśanā 1. a handsome woman. –2. a woman. –3. an order, a command. –4. a kind of drug. –dā a. very bountiful. –dāṁtaḥ a Buddhist. –dāman a. one who gives liberally. (–m.) 1. a cloud. –2. a mountain. –3. the sea. –4. N. of Indra’s elephant. –5. N. of a very poor Brāhmaṇa who came to Dvāraka with only a small quantity of parched rice as a present to his friend Kṛṣṇa, and was raised by him to wealth and glory. –dāyaḥ 1. a good or auspicious gift. –2. a special gift given on particular solemn occasions. –3. one who offers such a gift. –dinaṁ 1. a happy or auspicious day. –2. a fine day or weather (opp. durdina); so sudināhaṁ in the same sense. –dīrgha a. very long or extended. ( –rghā) a kind of cucumber. –durlabha a. very scarce or rare. –dvara a. very distant or remote. (sudūraṁ means 1. to a great distance. –2. to a very high degree, very much. sudūrāt ‘from afar, from a distance’). –ṭṭaḍha a. very firm or hard, compact. –dṛś a. having beautiful eyes. (–f.) a pretty woman. –dhanvan a. having an excellent bow. (–m.) 1. a good archer or bowman. –2. Ananta, the great serpent. –3. N. of Viśvakarman. –dharman a. attentive to duties. (–f.) the council or assembly of gods. (–m.) 1. the hall or palace of Indra. –2. one diligent in properly maintaining his family. –dharmā –rmī the council or assembly of gods (devasabhā); yayāvudīritālokaḥ sudharmānavamāṁ sabhāṁ R. 17. 27. –dhita a. Ved. 1. perfect, secure. –2. kind, good. –3. happy, prosperous. –4. well-aimed or directed (as a weapon). –dhī a. having a good understanding, wise, clever, intelligent. ( –dhīḥ) a wise or intelligent man, learned man or pandit. (–f.) a good understanding, good sense, intelligence. -upāsyaḥ 1. a particular kind of royal palace. –2. N. of an attendant on Kṛṣṇa. ( –syaṁ) the club of Balarama. -upāsyā 1. a woman. –2. N. of Umā, or of one of her female companions. –3. a sort of pigment. –dhūmravarṇā one of the seven tongues of fire. –naṁdā N. of a woman. –nayaḥ 1. good conduct. –2. good policy. –nayana a. having beautiful eyes. ( –naḥ) a deer. ( –nā) 1. a woman having beautiful eyes. –2. a woman in general. –nābha a. 1. having a beautiful navel. –2. having a good nave or centre. ( –bhaḥ) 1. a mountain. –2. the Maināka mountain q. v. –nibhṛta a. very lonely or private. ( –taṁ) ind. very secretly or closely, very narrowly, privately. –niścalaḥ an epithet of Śiva. –nīta 1. well-conducted, well-behaved. –2. polite, civil. ( –taṁ) 1. good conduct or behaviour. –2. good policy or prudence. –nītiḥ f. 1. good conduct, good manners, propriety. –2. good policy. –3. N. of the mother of Dhruva, q. v. –nītha a. well-disposed, well-conducted, righteous, virtuous, good. ( –thaḥ) 1. a Brāhmaṇa. –2. N. of Śiśupāla q. v. –3. Ved. a good leader. –nīla a. very black or blue. ( –laḥ) the pomegranate tree. ( –lā) common flax. (–laṁ), –nīlakaḥ a blue gem. –netra a. having good or beautiful eyes. –nau n. water (?). –pakva a. 1. well-cooked. –2. thoroughly matured or ripe. ( –kvaḥ) a sort of fragrant mango. –patnī a woman having a good husband. –pathaḥ 1. a good road. –2. a good course. –3. good conduct. –pathin m. (nom. sing. supaṁthāḥ) a good road. –padmā orris root. –parṇa a. (rṇā or rṇī f.) 1. wellwinged. –2. having good or beautiful leaves. ( –rṇaḥ) 1. a ray of the sun. –2. a class of bird-like beings of a semi-divine character. –3. any supernatural bird. –4. an epithet of Garuḍa. –5. a cock. -ketuḥ N. of Viṣṇu. –parṇakaḥ = suparṇa. –parṇā, –parṇī f. 1. a number of lotuses. –2. a pool abounding with lotuses. –3. N. of the mother of Garuḍa. –paryāpta a. 1. very spacious. –2. well-fitted. –parvan a. well-jointed, having many joints or knots. (–m.) 1. a bamboo. –2. an arrow. –3. a god, deity. –4. a special lunar day (as the day of full or new moon, and the 8th and 14th day of each fortnight). –5. smoke. (–f.) white Dūrvā grass. –palāyita a. 1. completely fled or run away. –2. skilfully retreated. –pātraṁ 1. a good or suitable vessel, worthy receptacle. –2. a fit or competent person, any one well-fitted for an office, an able person. –pād (pād or padī f.) having good or handsome feet. –pārśvaḥ 1. the wavedleaf fig-tree (plakṣa). –2. N. of the son of Sampāti, elder brother of Jaṭāyu. –pītaṁ a carrot. ( –taḥ) the fifth Muhūrta. –puṁsī a woman having a good husband. –puṣpa a. (ṣpā or ṣpī f.) having beautiful flowers. ( –ṣpaḥ) 1. the coral tree. –2. the Śirīṣa tree. ( –ṣpī) the plantain tree. ( –ṣpaṁ) 1. cloves. –2. the menstrual excretion. –puṣpita a. 1. well blossomed, being in full flower. –2. having the hair thrilling or bristling. –pūra a. 1. easy to be filled; Pt. 1. 25. –2. well-filling. ( –raḥ) a kind of citron (bījapūra). –pūrakaḥ the Baka-pushpa tree. –prakāśa a. 1. manifest, apparent. –2. public, notorious. –pratarkaḥ a sound judgment –pratibhā spirituous liquor. –pratiṣṭha a. 1. standing well. –2. very celebrated, renowned, glorious, famous. ( –ṣṭhā) 1. good position. –2. good re putation, fame, celebrity. –3. establishment, erection. –4. installation, consecration. –pratiṣṭhita a. 1. well-established. –2. consecrated –3. celebrated. ( –taḥ) the Udumbara tree. –pratiṣṇāta a. 1. thoroughly purified. –2. well-versed in. –3. well- investigated, clearly ascertained or determined. –pratīka a. 1. having a beautiful shape, lovely, handsome. –2. having a beautiful trunk. ( –kaḥ) 1. an epithet of Kāmadeva. –2. of Śiva. –3. of the elephant of the north-east quarter. –prapāṇaṁ a good tank. –prabha a. very brilliant, glorious. ( –bhā) one of the seven tongues of fire. –prabhātaṁ 1. an auspicious dawn or day-break; diṣṭyā suprabhātamadya yadayaṁ devo ṭṭaṣṭaḥ U. 6 –2. the earliest dawn. –prayuktaśaraḥ a skilful archer. –prayogaḥ 1. good management or application. –2. close contact. –3. dexterity. –prasannaḥ N. of Kubera. –prasāda a. very gracious or propitious. ( –daḥ) N. of Śiva. –priya a. very much liked, agreeable. ( –yaḥ) (in prosody) a foot of two short syllables. ( –yā) 1. a charming woman. –2. a beloved mistress. –phala a. 1. very fruitful, very productive. –2. very fertile. ( –laḥ) 1. the pomegranate tree. –2. the jujube. –3. the Karṇikara tree. –4. a kind of bean. ( –lā) 1. a pumpkin, gourd. –2. the plantain tree. –3. a variety of brown grape. –4. colocynth. –phenaḥ a cuttlefish bone. –baṁdhaḥ sesamum. –bala a. very powerful. ( –laḥ) 1. N. of Śiva. –2. N. of the father of Śakuni. –bāṁdhavaḥ N. of Śiva. –bāhu a. 1. handsome-armed. –2. strong-armed. ( –huḥ) N. of a demon, brother of Mārīcha, who had become a demon by the curse of Agastya. He with Mārīcha began to disturb the sacrifice of Viśvāmitra, but was defeated by Rāma and Lakṣmaṇa; see R. 11. 29. –bodha a. 1. easily apprehended or understood. ( –dhaḥ) good information or advice. –brahmaṇyaḥ 1. an epithet of Kārtikeya. –2. N. of one of the sixteen priests employed at a sacrifice. –bhaga a. 1. very fortunate or prosperous, happy, blessed. highly favoured. –2. lovely, charming, beautiful, pretty; na tu grīṣmasyaivaṁ subhagamaparāddhaṁ yuvatiṣu S. 3. 9; Ku. 4. 34, R. 11. 80; Māl. 9. –3. pleasant, grateful, agreeable, sweet; śravaṇasubhaga M. 3. 4, S. 1. 3. –4. beloved, liked, amiable, dear; sumukhi subhagaḥ paśyan sa tvāmupaitu kṛtārthatāṁ Gīt. 5. 5. illustrious. ( –gaḥ) 1. borax. –2. the Aśoka tree. –3. the Champaka tree. –4. red amaranth. ( –gaṁ) good fortune. -mānin, subhagaṁmanya a. –1. considering oneself fortunate, amiable, pleasing; vācālaṁ māṁ na khalu subhagaṁmanyabhāvaḥ karoti Me. 94. –2. vain, flattering oneself. –bhagā a woman beloved by her husband, a favourite wife. –2. an honoured mother –3. a kind of wild jasmine. –4 turmeric. –5. the Priyangu creeper. –6 the holy basil. -sutaḥ the son of a favourite wife. –bhaṁgā the cocoa-nut tree. –bhadra a. very happy or fortunate. ( –draḥ) N. of Viṣṇu. ( –drā) N. of the sister of Balarāma and Kṛṣṇa, married to Arjuna q. v. She bore to him a son named Abhimanyu. –bhadrakaḥ 1. a car for carrying the image of a god. –2. the Bilva tree. –bhāṣita a. 1. spoken well or eloquent. ( –taṁ) 1. fine speech, eloquence, learning; jīrṇamaṁge subhāṣitaṁ Bh. 3. 2. –2. a witty saying, an apophthegm, an apposite saying; subhāṣitena gītena yuvatīnāṁ ca līlayā . mano na bhidyate yasya sa vai mukto’thavā paśuḥ Subbish. –3. a good remark; bālādapi subhāṣitaṁ (grāhyaṁ). –bhikṣaṁ 1. good alms, successful begging. –2. abundance of food, an abundant supply of provisions, plenty of corn &c. –bhīrakaḥ the Palāśa tree. –bhūtikaḥ the Bilva tree. –bhrū a. having beautiful eyebrows. ( –bhrūḥ f.) a lovely woman. (N. B. The vocative singular of this word is strictly subhrūḥ; but subhru is used by writers like Bhaṭṭi, Kālidāsa, and Bha vabhūti; hā pitaḥ kvāsi he subhru Bk. 6. 17; so V. 3. 22; Ku. 5. 43; Māl. 3. 8. –maṁgala a. 1. very auspicious. –2. abounding in sacrifices. –mati a. very wise. ( –tiḥ f.) 1. a good mind or disposition, kindness, benevolence, friendship. –2. a favour of the gods. –3. a gift, blessing. –4. a prayer, hymn. –5. a wish or desire. –6. N. of the wife of Sagara and mother of 60,000 sons. –madanaḥ the mango tree. –madhuraṁ a very sweet or gentle speech, agreeable words. –madhya, -madhyama a. slender-waisted. –madhyā, -madhyamā a graceful woman. –mana a. very charming, lovely, beautiful. ( –naḥ) 1. wheat. –2. the thorn-apple. ( –nā) the great-flowered jasmine. –manas a. 1. good-minded, of a good disposition, benevolent. –2. well-pleased, satisfied. (–m.) 1. a god, divinity. –2. a learned man. –3. a student of the Vedas. –4. wheat. –5. the Nimba tree. (–f., n.; said to be pl. only by some) a flower; ramaṇīya eṣa vaḥ sumanasāṁ saṁniveśaḥ Māl. 1 (where the adjectival sense in 1 is also intended); kiṁ sevyate sumanasāṁ manasāpi gaṁdhaḥ kastūrikājananaśaktibhṛtā mṛgeṇa R. G.; Śi. 6. 66. (–f.) 1. the great-flowered jasmine. –2 the Mālatī creeper. – phalaḥ the wood-apple. -phalaṁ nutmeg. –maṁtu a. 1. advising well. –2. very faulty or blameable. (–m.) a good adviser. –maṁtraḥ N. of the charioteer of Daśaratha. –mitrā 1. N. of one of the wives of Daśaratha and mother of Lakṣmaṇa and Śatrughna –mukha a. (khā or khī f.) 1. having a beautiful face, lovely. –2. pleasing. –3. disposed to, eager for; Ki. 6. 42. ( –khaḥ) 1. a learned man. –2. an epithet of Garuḍa. –3. of Gaṇeśa. –4. of Śiva. ( –khaṁ) the scratch of a finger-nail. ( –khā, –khī) 1. a handsome woman. –2. a mirror. –mūlakaṁ a carrot. –mekhalaḥ the Munja grass. –medhas a. having a good understanding, wise, intelligent. (–m.) a wise man. (–f.) heart-pea. –meruḥ 1. the sacred mountain Meru, q. v. –2. N. of Śiva. –yavasaṁ beautiful grass, good pasturage. –yāmunaḥ N. of Viṣṇu. –yuktaḥ N. of Śiva. –yodhanaḥ an epithet of Duryodhana q. v. –raktakaḥ 1. a kind of red chalk. –2 a kind of mango tree. –raṁgaḥ 1. good colour. –2. the orange. –3. a hole cut in a house (suraṁgā also in this sense). ( –gaṁ) 1. red sanders. –2. vermilion. -dhātuḥ red chalk. -yuj m. a house-breaker. –raṁgikā the Mūrvā plant. –rajaḥphalaḥ the jackfruit tree. –raṁjanaḥ the betel-nuttree. –rata a. 1. much sported. –2. playful. –2. much enjoyed. –4. compassionate, tender. ( –taṁ) 1. great delight or enjoyment. –2. copulation, sexual union or intercourse, coition; suratamṛditā bālavanitā Bh. 2. 44. -tālī 1. a female-messenger, a go-between. –2. a chaplet, garland for the head. – prasaṁgaḥ addiction to amorous pleasures; Ku. 1. 19. –ratiḥ f. great enjoyment or satisfaction. –rasa a. 1. well-flavoured, juicy, savoury. –2. sweet. –3. elegant (as a composition). ( –saḥ, –sā) the plant siṁdhuvāra. (–sā) N. of Durgā. ( –sā, -saṁ) the sacred basil. ( –saṁ) 1. gummyrrh. –2. fragrant grass. –rājan a. governed by a good king; surājñi deśe rājanvān Ak. (– m.) 1. a good king. –2. a divinity. –rāṣṭraṁ N. of a country on the western side of India (Surat). – jaṁ a kind of poison. -brahmaḥ a Brāhmaṇa of Surāṣṭra. –rūpa a. 1. well-formed, handsome, lovely; surūpā kanyā. –2. wise, learned. ( –paḥ) an epithet of Śiva. –rebha a. finevoiced; Ki. 15. 16. ( –bhaṁ) tin. –lakṣaṇa a. 1. having auspicious or beautiful marks. –2. fortunate. ( –ṇaṁ) 1. observing, examining carefully, determining, ascertaining. –2. a good or auspicious mark. –labha a. 1. easy to be obtained, easy of attainment, attainable, feasible; na sulabhā sakaleṁdumukhī ca sā V. 2. 9; idamasulabhavastuprārthanādurnivāraṁ 2. 6. –2. ready for, adapted to, fit, suitable; niṣṭhyūtaścaraṇopabhogasulabho lākṣārasaḥ kenacit S. 4. 4. –3. natural to, proper for; mānuṣatāsulabho laghimā K. -kopa a. easily provoked, irascible. –locana a. fineeyed. ( –naḥ) a deer. ( –nā) 1. a beautiful woman. –2. N. of the wife of Indrajit. –lohakaṁ brass. –lohita a. very red. ( –tā) one of the seven tongues of fire. –vaktraṁ 1. a good face or mouth. –2 correct utterance. ( –ktraḥ) N. of Śiva. –vacanaṁ, –vacas n. eloquence. –varcakaḥ, –varcikaḥ –kā, –varcin m. natron, alkali. –varcalaṁ linseed. –varcasaḥ N. of Śiva. –varṇa see s. v. –vasaṁtaḥ 1. an agreeable vernal season. –2. the day of full moon in the month of Chaitra, or a festival celebrated in honour of Kāmadeva in that month (also suvasaṁtakaḥ in this sense). –vaha a. 1. bearing well. patient. –2. patient, enduring. –3. easy to be borne. ( –hā) a lute. –vāsaḥ 1. N. of Śiva. –2. a pleasant dwelling. –3. an agreeable perfume or odour. –vāsinī 1. a woman married or single who resides in her father’s house. –2. a married woman whose husband is alive. –vikrāṁta a. very valiant or bold, chivalrous. ( –taḥ) a hero. ( –taṁ) heroism. –vid m. a learned man, shrewd person. (–f.) a shrewd or clever woman. –vidaḥ 1. an attendant on the women’s apartments. –2. a king. –vidat m. a king. –viditraṁ 1. a household, family –2. wealth. –vidallaḥ an attendant on the women’s apartments (wrongly for sauvidalla q. v). ( –llaṁ) the women’s apartments, harem. –vidallā a married woman. –vidha a. of a good kind. –vidham ind. easily. –vinīta a. well-trained, modest. ( –tā) a tractable cow. –vihita a. 1. well-placed, well-deposited. –2. well-furnished, wellsupplied, well-provided, well-arranged; suvihitaprayogatayā āryasya na kimapi parihāsyate S. 1; kalahaṁsamakaraṁdapraveśāvasare tatsuvihitaṁ Māl. 1. –3. well done or performed. –vī (bī) ja a. having good seed. ( –jaḥ) 1. N. of Śiva. –2. the poppy. ( –jaṁ) good seed. –vīrāmlaṁ sour rice-gruel. –vīrya a. 1. having great vigour. –2. of heroic strength, heroic, chivalrous. ( –ryaṁ) 1. great heroism. –2. abundance of heroes. –3. the fruit of the jujube. ( –ryā) wild cotton. –bṛkti f. 1. a pure offering. –2. a hymn of praise. –vṛtta a. 1. well-behaved, virtuous, good; mayi tasya suvṛtta vartate laghusaṁdeśapadā sarasvatī R. 8. 77. –2. well-rounded, beautifully globular or round; mṛdunātisuvṛttena sumṛṣṭenātihāriṇā . modakenāpi kiṁ tena niṣpattiryasya sevayā; or sumukho’pi suvṛttopi sanmārgapatito’pi ca . mahatāṁ pādalagno’pi vyathayatyeva kaṁṭakaḥ (where all the adjectives are used in a double sense). ( –ttaṁ) a good or virtuous conduct; Pt. 1. 69. –vela a. 1. tranquil, still. –2. humble, quiet. ( –laḥ) N. of the Trikūṭa mountain. –vrata a. strict in the observance of religious vows, strictly religious or virtuous. ( –taḥ) a religious student. ( –tā) 1. a virtuous wife. –2. a tractable cow, one easily milked. –śaṁsa a. wellspoken of, famous, glorious, commendable. –śaka a. capable of being easily done. –śalyaḥ the Khadira tree. –śākaṁ undried ginger. –śāradaḥ N. of Śiva. –śāsita a. kept under control, well-controlled. –śikṣita a. well-taught trained, well-disciplined. –śikhaḥ fire. ( –khā) 1. a peacock’s crest. –2. a cock’s comb. –śītaṁ yellow sandal-wood. –śīma a. cold, frigid. ( –maḥ) coldness. –śīla a. good-tempered, amiable. ( –lā) 1. N. of the wife of Yama. –2. N. of one of the eight favourite wives of Kṛṣṇa. –śrīkā the gum olibanum tree. –śruta a. 1. well heard. –2. versed in the Vedaś. ( –taḥ) N. of the author of a system of medicine, whose work, together with that of Charaka, is regarded as the olddest medical authority, and held in great esteem in India even to this day. –śliṣṭa 1. well-arranged or united. –2. well-fitted; Māl. 1. –śleṣaḥ close union or embrace. –satyā N. of the wife of Janaka. –saṭṭaś agreeable to look at. –sannata a. welldirected (as an arrow). –saraṇa. N. of Śiva. –saha a. 1. easy to be borne. –2. bearing or enduring well. ( –haḥ) an epithet of Śiva. –sāra a. having good sap or essence. ( –raḥ) 1. good sap, essence, or substance. –2. competence. –3. the red-flowering Khadira tree. –sāravat n. crystal. –sikatā 1. good sand. –2. gravel. –3. sugar. –stha a. 1. well-suited, being in a good sense. –2. in health, healthy, faring well. –3. in good or or prosperous circumstances, prosperous. –4. happy, fortunate. ( –sthaṁ) a happy state, well-being; susthe ko vā na paḍitaḥ H. 3. 121. (susthita in the same sense). –sthatā –sthitiḥ f. 1. good condition, wellbeing, welfare, happiness. –2. health, convalescence. –smita a. pleasantly smiling. ( –tā) a woman with a pleased or smiling countenance. –svapanaḥ an epithet of Śiva. –svara a. 1. melodious, harmonious. –2. loud. –hita a. 1. very fit or suitable, appropriate. –2. beneficial, salutary. –3. friendly, affectionate. –4. satisfied. ( –tā) one of the seven tongues of fire. –hṛda a. having a kind heart, cordial, friendly, loving, affectionate. (–m.) 1. a friend; suhṛdaḥ paśya vasaṁta kiṁ sthitaṁ Ku. 4. 27; maṁdāyaṁte na khalu suhṛdāmabhyupetārthakṛtyāḥ Me. 38. –2. an ally. -bhedaḥ the separation of friends. -vākyaṁ the counsel of a friend. –hṛdaḥ a friend. –hṛdaya a. 1. good-hearted. –2. dear, affectionate, loving. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch su 1 sunoti DHĀTUP. 27, 1 (abhiṣave, saṁdhākledapīḍāmanthe VOP.). sunota ṚV. 7, 32, 8. sunotana 5, 34, 1. sunuta 10, 14, 13. sunavat und sunvat 27, 22. sunvant partic.; med. sunve 3. sg. 7, 29, 1. 9, 88, 1. sunvire, sunudhvam, sunavai 8, 80, 1. suvāna partic.; suṣāva, suṣuma, suṣuviva (VOP. 12, Anf.), suṣuvaṁs, suṣuvuṣas 10, 94, 14. suṣvāṇa med. 4, 29, 2. 10, 148, 1. passivisch 9, 6, 8. sota, sotana, suṣvati 3. pl. (wohl praes.) 2, 16, 5. asāvīt, asoṣṭa und asāvīt P. 7, 2, 72. VOP. 11, 1. 12, Anf. soṣyati und saviṣyati 8, 46. 12, Anf. soṣyant KĀTY. ŚR. 16, 6, 10. (abhi) saviṣyant ŚAT. BR. 9, 5, 1, 66. infin. sotave (s. auch sotu) ṚV. 1, 28, 1. pass. sūyate, asāvi; partic. suta. “auspressen, keltern” (den Soma): sunu somam ṚV. 1, 28, 6. 101. 9. 137, 1. yaṁ te suṣāva (adriḥ) 7, 22, 1. andhaḥ 4, 16, 1. 5, 30, 6. 7, 21, 1. athā sunudhvaṁ savanaṁ madāya 4, 35, 4. havaṁ yajamānasya sunvataḥ 6, 60, 15. AV. 6, 6, 1. 54, 3. sotā hi somamadribhiḥ 8, 1, 17. asāvyaṁśuḥ 9, 62, 4. soma u ṣuvāṇaḥ sotṛbhiḥ 107, 8. grāvabhiḥ ŚAT. BR. 12, 8, 2, 14. payasā 15. KĀTY. ŚR. 9, 6, 23. soṣyatyasoṣṭa (zugleich zu 4. su) CHĀND. UP. 3, 17, 5. śaśvatsūyamānātsūryaḥ MAITRJUP. 6, 7. suṣāva ca vahūnsomānsomasaṁsthāstatāna ca MBH. 1, 4695. sarve sunvantaḥ P. 3, 2, 132, Schol. surāṁ sunoti so v. a. “braut” ebend. — asunvan AIT. BR. 4, 17 fehlerhaft für asanvan: s. u. 1. san. – suta partic.: suto aśnaiḥ ṚV. 8, 2. 2. 2, 11, 11. 4, 18, 3. aṁśu 25, 3. soma 41, 3. 6, 40, 1. sutāsa indavaḥ 8, 6, 21. sute adhvare 10, 94, 14. ŚAT. BR. 12, 8, 1, 5. pibasva somaṁ sutamadya taṁ mayā MBH. 14, 277. sute somasahasre 1, 8042. sutam Spr. (II) 2694 wohl fehlerhaft für hutam. masc. sg. und pl. “der Saft” d. h. Soma NAIGH. 2, 7. suṣvāṇaḥ pavate sutaḥ ṚV. 9, 6, 8. parīto ṣiñcatā sutam 107, 1. 2. 1, 135, 1. 2, 15, 1. 4, 32, 11. prātaḥ sutamapibaḥ 35, 7. madhumantaḥ 7, 90, 1. 10, 27, 2. TS. 7, 3, 11, 3. ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 7, 10, 13. AV. 4, 29, 2. ŚAT. BR. 14, 5, 1, 3. -tejas 10, 6, 1, 8. = somayāga BHĀG. P. 7, 15, 48. neutr. CHĀND. UP. 5, 12, 1. — Vgl. 1. sava, 1. savana, asuta, adriṣuta, jambhasuta, suṣuta. adhi dass.: adhi suvāno nahuṣyebhirinduḥ ṚV. 9, 91, 2. — Vgl. adhiṣavaṇa. abhi, -suṇoti, abhyaṣuṇot P. 8, 3, 63. 65. -soṣyati, abhyasoṣyat 117. 1) “kelternd verarbeiten, pressen, mit Steinen ausschlagen u.s.w.” ŚAT. BR. 1, 1, 4, 7. 2, 2, 2, 1. 4, 4, 15. 3, 3, 2, 6. 4, 5, 10, 2. abhiṣuṇvanta āsate AIT. BR. 4, 14. 3, 15. 7, 17. plākṣāṇi 30. rājānam 32. ṛjīṣam TS. 6, 1, 6, 4. 3, 2, 2, 1. havirdhāne carmannadhi grāvabhirabhiṣutya 6, 2, 11, 4. ghnanti vā etatsomaṁ yadabhiṣuṇvanti 4, 4, 4. 5, 1. sa yadyabhiṣūyamāṇaḥ kiṁcidāpadyate ŚAT. BR. 12, 6, 1, 21. KĀTY. ŚR. 9, 5, 1. 10, 3, 12. abhiṣutya R. 1, 13, 5, v. l. abhiṣūya (so ed. Bomb.) somam MBH. 14, 2624. some vṛthābhiṣūyamāṇe 13, 372. “mit Flüssigkeit ansetzen und ausdrücken”: yāni caivābhiṣūyante puṣpamūlaphalaiḥ śubhaiḥ M. 5, 10. kṣīreṇābhiṣutya (v. l. abhiplutya) SUŚR. 1, 317, 12. kiṇvapiṣṭam 2, 73, 17. partic. abhiṣuta ŚAT. BR. 2, 4, 4, 16. 4, 1, 1, 15. 6, 1, 9. 14, 3, 2, 30. KĀTY. ŚR. 9, 1, 9. LĀṬY. 1, 9, 20. — 2) “bespritzen”: abhisoṣyantaṁ raktai rakṣāṁsi BHAṬṬ. 9, 90. — caus. -ṣāvayati P. 8, 3, 65, Vārtt. 3, Schol. — Vgl. abhiṣava fg., -ṣuta, -ṣotar, -susūs. ā “keltern” u. s. w.: ā sotā pari ṣiñcata ṚV. 9, 108, 7. yo asmai tīvrānsomāṁ āsunoti 10, 42, 5. ŚAT. BR. 12, 7, 3, 6. 12. tasmāttava sutaṁ prasutamāsutaṁ kule dṛśyate CHĀND. UP. 5, 12, 1. — Vgl. 2. āsava, āsāva. āsāvya (BHAṬṬ. 6, 64). 2. āsuti. ud “aufregen”: utsunoṣīkṣamāṇānāṁ kandukakrīḍayā manaḥ BHĀG. P. 3, 20, 35. Der Bedeutung nach eher zu 2. su (wie auch utsava). ni desid. vgl. nisusūs. nis, niḥṣuṇoti P. 8, 3, 65, Vārtt. 1, Schol. pari, -ṣuṇoti, paryaṣuṇot, -soṣyati, paryasoṣyat Schol. zu P. 8, 3, 63. 65. 117. in Stellen wie ṚV. 9, 10, 4. 87, 7 ist die Präposition zum Verbum finitum zu ziehen. pra “fortkeltern”; partic. “fortgesetzt gepresst, der” Soma “einer nicht bloss einmaligen, sondern andauernden Kelterung”: pūrṇamāse vai devānāṁ sutasteṣāmetamardhamāsaṁ prasutaḥ TS. 2, 5, 5, 4. aharahaḥ sutaḥ prasuto bhavati ŚAT. BR. 14, 5, 1, 3. 4, 1, 2, 6. saṁvatsaram PAÑCAV. BR. 25, 5, 1. 2. 18, 5. KĀTY.ŚR. 6, 6, 27. 8, 10. 7, 1, 26. LĀṬY. 3, 3, 29. 7, 8. tasmāttava sutaṁ prasutamāsutaṁ kule dṛśyate CHĀND. UP. 5, 12, 1. medial: dvādaśāhaṁ prasuto bhūtvā AIT. BR. 4, 24. — Vgl. 1. prasava, prasut. — caus. “fortgesetzt keltern lassen”: prasāvayet NIDĀNAS. 5, 11, 3 bei WEBER, Nax. 2, 284. vi, vyaṣāvīt; visoṣyati und visaviṣyati VOP. 8, 45. 12, Anf. “zerkeltern”: suṣvāṇāso vyadribhiḥ ṚV. 9, 101, 11. sam “gleichzeitig” (Soma) “keltern”: yau dvau saṁsunutaḥ TBR. 1, 4, 6, 1. saṁsuta TS. 7, 5, 5, 1. KĀṬH. 34, 4. PAÑCAV. BR. 9, 4, 1. — Vgl. saṁsava, saṁsutasoma. abhisam “gleichzeitig keltern für” (acc.): ekaṁ vā etāvindramabhi saṁsunutaḥ TBR. 1, 4, 6, 1. su (sū), savati (prasavaiśvaryayoḥ) DHĀTUP. 22, 43. suvati 28, 115 (preraṇe, VOP. kṣepe). suvatāt; med. (in den BRĀHMAṆA): suvate 3. pl. ŚAT. BR. 5, 3, 3, 13. suvāntai 14. suvante TS. 5, 6, 3, 1. suvai, suvāvahai P. 7, 3, 88, Schol.; später (auch ŚAT. BR.; s. u. pra) sauti DHĀTUP. 24, 32 (prasavaiśvaryayoḥ). sāviṣat (ved. P. 3, 1, 34, Vārtt., Schol.), asāvīt P. 7, 3, 96, Schol. VOP. 13, 1. sāvīs; suṣuve AV. pass.: sūyate, sūyai; partic. suta ŚAT. BR. 9, 3, 4, 5. 4, 3, 14. sūta (= īrita, prerita H. an. 2, 208. MED. t. 72. fg.) in nṛṣūta; s. auch unter pari und pra. (“in Bewegung setzen), veranlassen, zum Vorschein bringen; bescheeren, schicken” (von Savitar’s Wirkung); “aufstellen, bestimmen, weihen für Etwas; Ermächtigung geben zu Etwas”; med. “sich weihen” u. s. w. “lassen”: savitā suvāti ṚV. 7, 40, 1. śreṣṭhaṁ savaṁ savitā sāviṣannaḥ 1, 164, 26. AV. 6, 1, 3. devebhyo hi prathamamamṛtatvaṁ suvasi bhāgam ṚV. 4, 54, 2. fgg. 5, 42, 3. 82, 4. vāmamasmabhyaṁ sāvīḥ 6, 71, 6. yadadya sūra udite suvati savitā bhagaḥ 7, 66, 4. AV. 7, 14, 3. 14, 1, 33. 19, 8, 4. yathā sindhurnadīnāṁ sāmrājyaṁ suṣuve 14, 1, 43. suṣuvāṇa “in der Weihe begriffen, geweiht” TS. 2, 1, 9, 1 (P. 3, 2, 106, Schol., wo suṣuvāṇam zu lesen ist). 5, 6, 3, 4. 7, 5, 15, 2. TBR. 1, 8, 1, 1. ŚAT. BR. 5, 4, 3, 23. 4, 8. 5, 2, 1. PAÑCAV. BR. 18, 9, 1. 10, 1. pass.: yo vai somena sūyate (= niṣpadyate Comm.) TBR. 2, 7, 5, 1. sūyate ha vā asya kṣatram AIT. BR. 8, 5. ŚAT. BR. 5, 3, 1, 3. 3, 11. 15. 9, 3, 4, 6. agnisavena suto bhavati 9. sarvaṁ vastatsutam “zu all diesem seid ihr ermächtigt” 13, 4, 2, 17. sūyate vā eṣa yo ‘gniṁ cinute TS. 5, 6, 3, 1. yasmādeveme candraṛkṣagrahasaṁvatsarādayaḥ sūyante (= abhiṣūyante āpyāyante Comm.) so v. a. “in Thätigkeit gesetzt werden” MAITRJUP. 6, 16. mā na sāvīrmahāstrāṇi so v. a. “schleudere” BHAṬṬ. 9, 50. — prajāpateḥ sutaṁ rayiṣṭham N. eines Sāman Ind. St.3,225,a. — Vgl. 2. sava, 2. savana, 1. savitar, savīman. anu “nach Andern antreiben” u. s. w.: paśūn ŚAT. BR. 5, 5, 4, 19. anu ṣva (vgl. unter nis) TAITT. ĀR. 2, 6, 4 falsch; vgl. AV. 6, 121, 4. 117, 3. apa “wegschicken, vertreiben” ṚV. 10, 37, 4. apāmīvāṁ savitā sāviṣat 100, 8. yattatraino apa tatsuvāmi AV. 6, 119, 3. VS. 35, 11. abhi, -ṣuvati, abhyaṣuvat P. 8, 3, 63. 65. “weihen für” (acc.): oṣadhīḥ ŚAT. BR. 5, 2, 3, 9. “begaben mit”: pāpmanaivainamabhiṣuvati KĀṬH. 13, 2. — desid. -susūṣati P. 8, 3, 64, Vārtt. 1, Schol. ā “zutheilen, zusenden, schicken”: von Savitar ṚV. 1, 110, 3. a smabhyamā suva sarvatātim 3, 54, 11. 56, 6. saubhagam 4, 54, 6. 5, 82, 5. dāśuṣe vāmam 6, 71, 4. vasūni 7, 45, 3. 10, 35, 7. vayaḥ 100, 3. AV. 2, 29, 2. 7, 14, 3. 4, 24, 5. ŚAT. BR. 13, 4, 2, 9. med. ṚV. 7, 38, 2. PAÑCAV. BR. 21, 10, 15. ā suvorjam (agne) ṚV. 9, 66, 19. (indraḥ) ā sāviṣadarśasānāya śarum “sende” so v. a. “werfe auf” 10, 99, 7. “herbeischaffen, hercitiren”: ā te prāṇaṁ suvāmasi AV. 7, 53, 6. — Vgl. 1. āsava, āsavitar und 1. āsuti. ud “aufwärts gehen heissen”: ūrdhvāmeva varuṇamenimutsuvati KĀṬH. 19, 5. ni, partic. -ṣuta “hineingegeben, eingeworfen”: camase ‘ṣṭātayāni niṣutāni bhavanti AIT. BR. 8, 5. nis “fortscheuchen, fortgehen heissen”: duḥṣvapnyaṁ duritaṁ niḥ ṣvāsmat (suva) AV. 6, 121, 1. 7, 83, 4. 19, 57, 2. 1, 81, 1. 2. niritastatsuvantu ṚV. 7, 50, 3. parā “wegscheuchen” u. s. w.: parā ṛṇā sāvīḥ ṚV. 2, 28, 9. duritāni parā suva 5, 82, 5. 10, 137, 4. AV. 6, 127, 3. 7, 53, 6. 19, 39, 10. VS. 16. 5. TS. 1, 3, 14, 4. pari, -ṣuvati, paryaṣuvat P. 8, 3, 63. 65. partic. “geheissen, (heraus) getrieben” (vom Grase): devānāṁ pariṣūtamasi varṣavṛddhamasi TS. 1, 1, 2, 1. TBR. 3, 2, 2, 4. iti (“bei Gelegenheit dieses Spruches”) darbhānpariṣauti ĀPAST. in TS. Comm. 1, 53, 3 v. u. so v. a. “zusammenraffen.” — Vgl. pariṣūti. pra “in Bewegung bringen, erregen, zur Thätigkeit rufen” (namentlich von Savitar gesagt); “heissen, veranlassen; Jmd Etwas verstatten, überlassen”: niveśayaṁ ca prasuvaṁ ca bhūma ṚV. 7, 45, 1. 77, 1. 4, 53, 3. 5, 82, 9. prāsāvīddevaḥ savitā jagatpṛthak 1, 157, 1. arthamityai 124, 1. bhadraṁ dvipade 5, 81, 2. matim 9, 21, 7. pra vo grāvāṇaḥ savitā suvatu 10, 175, 1. AV. 1, 10, 2. saubhāgyāya 18, 2. yajñam TBR. 3, 1, 1, 9. dānam VS. 18, 33. jīvātave 67. ŚAT. BR. 1, 7, 4, 8. adhvaryum 5, 2, 1. 8, 3, 20. 2, 5, 2, 30. omiti brahmā prasauti TAITT. UP. 1, 8. auṣṇyaṁ prāsuvat MAITRJUP. 2, 6. sanim TS. 2, 1, 6, 3. annam ŚAT. BR. 9, 3, 4, 1. vahvannaṁ prasuvīran “zur Verfügung stellen” ĀŚV. ŚR. 2, 18, 8. puruṣān ŚAT. BR. 13, 6, 2, 9. yamu dviṣmastamu te pra suvāmasi “hingeben” AV. 12, 2, 3. śvānaṁ prasauti “überlassen” (zum Todtschlagen) TBR. 3, 8, 4, 1. prasuhi (v. l. -sūhi, in paralleler Stelle -suva) KĀTY. ŚR. 9, 14, 19. so v. a. “schleudere” Comm. zu BHAṬṬ. 9, 50. — partic. prasūta “angetrieben, gesandt, geheissen; verstattet, dem es verstattet ist” ṚV. 1, 113. 1. arṣantvāpastvayeha prasūtāḥ 3, 30, 9. dūta 54, 19. janāḥ sūryeṇa prasūtāḥ 7, 63, 4. pṛṣṭhe ninaddho jayati prasūtaḥ “entsandt” (Pfeil) 6, 75, 5. 11. prasūto bhakṣamakaram 10, 167, 4. AV. 6, 63, 1. 19, 51, 2. savitṛ- AIT. BR. 1, 7. 2, 38. 7, 22. ŚAT. BR. 1, 1, 2, 17. 5, 1, 1, 4. TS. 2, 5, 2, 6. 5, 3, 4, 4. – ĀŚV. GṚHY. 1, 15, 1. varuṇa- KAUŚ. 3. a- “keine Erlaubniss habend” ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 14, 7, 2. “nicht gestattet, nicht erlaubt” ŚAT. BR. 4, 1, 4, 3. – AV. 3, 1, 4 ist (vgl. ṚV. 3, 30, 6) zu verstehen pra sū te. — Vgl. 2. prasava, 1. prasavitar, 1. prasūti, indraprasūta, bṛhaspati-, brahma-, vāja-, haryaśva-. adhipra “wegschicken von” (abl.): prajāpatirindraṁ vajrādadhi prasuvati KĀṬH. 14, 7. abhipra “hintreiben zu”: yadenāmabhiprasuvanti nadyaḥ NIR. 9, 26. – sūta “veranlasst, geheissen” 11, 12. pratipra, partic. -sūta “wieder verstattet” Schol. zu KĀTY. ŚR. 6, 6, 23. vi, -ṣuvati, vyaṣāvīt VOP. 8, 45. 13, 1. su adj. in dāvasu vielleicht auf 2. su zurückzuführen. su (sū), sūte DHĀTUP. 24, 21 (prāṇigarbhavimocane). P. 6, 1, 186. VOP. 9, 39. suve 1. sg. ṚV. 10, 125, 7. suvai VOP. 9, 40. suvāte, suvate 3 pl., suvāna; asūta, sūta; später auch sūyate DHĀTUP. 26, 23 (prāṇiprasave). savati und sauti s. u. pra. suṣuve, susāva, sasūva (P. 7, 4, 74) ṚV. 4, 18, 10. 10, 86, 23. AV. 10, 1, 23. asaviṣṭa und asoṣṭa (CHĀND. UP. 3, 17, 5) VOP. 8, 40. 46.11, 5. savitā und sotā P. 7, 2, 44. soṣyate und soṣyati (CHĀND. UP. 3, 17, 5); sūṣyantī und soṣyantī ŚAT. BR. 14, 9, 4, 22. sūtave ṚV. 10, 184, 3. AV. 1, 11, 2. savitave 6, 17, 1. sūtvā KĀŚ. zu P. 7, 2, 44. TS. 2, 1, 5, 4. partic. sūta, suta (s. besonders; nur wegen suta und suṣuti ist die Annahme von su mit kurzem u gerechtfertigt) und sūna (P. 8, 2, 45. VOP. 26, 88. fg.). “zeugen, gebären” ṚV. 1, 135, 8. 164, 17. 168, 9. nārī naryaṁ susāva 7, 20, 5. sūṣyantī 5, 78, 5. asūta pūrvo vṛṣabhaḥ “wurde geboren” 3, 38, 5. yadīṁ suvāte uṣasā 5, 1, 1. 2, 2. starīryatsūta 10, 31, 10. suvānā putrān AV. 2, 36, 3. “brüten” (von Vögeln) ṚV. 1, 164, 22. pass. wohl hierher: asāvanyo asura sūyata dyauḥ 10, 132, 4. — In der späteren Sprache meist in der Bed. “gebären”: āyuṣmantaṁ sutaṁ sūte M. 3, 263. 9, 9. 10, 39. Spr. (II) 1748. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 51, 41. suvāte R. 1, 23, 14. asūta RAGH. 3, 13. 15, 13. KUMĀRAS. 1, 20. KATHĀS. 23, 64. 28, 66. 42, 70. PRAB. 11, 10. BHĀG. P. 3, 1, 30. 17, 18. 26, 19. 4, 1, 34. 38. 13, 15. 24, 8. 9, 20, 17. 24, 47. sūyate CŪLIKOP. in Ind. St. 9, 12. asūyata MBH. 1, 2599. BHĀG. P. 4, 1, 39. 51. suṣuve MBH. 1, 2539. 5908. 3, 8844. 16638. R. 2, 90, 11. 92, 21. R. GORR. 2, 99, 14. 5, 36, 57. RAGH. 5, 36. 7, 54. MĀRK. P. 104, 8. RĀJA-TAR. 1, 74. BHĀG. P. 3, 23, 48. 4, 13, 18. 6, 18, 11. 9, 11, 11. PAÑCAT. 238, 6 (suṣūve gedr.). suṣuvire KATHĀS. 39, 18. suṣāva MBH. 1, 4765. R. GORR. 1, 39, 16. MĀRK. P. 104, 6. suṣuvus 49, 9. soṣyate KATHĀS. 21, 35. 34, 43. sūtvā BHĀG. P. 5, 2, 19. sūya MBH. 3, 10004. pass.: kausalyayāsāvi sukhena rāmaḥ prāk BHAṬṬ. 1, 14. “erzeugen”: sūte M. 10, 32. 34. suṣuve (subj. Mann und Weib) ŚĀK. 186. pass.: akrūraḥ suṣuve tasmāt HARIV. 1916. “erzeugen” uneig.: prakṛtiḥ sūyate sacarācaram BHAG. 9, 10. phalaṁ sūte pādapaḥ KATHĀS. 27, 99. asūta sadyaḥ kusumānyaśokaḥ KUMĀRAS. 3, 26. khanibhiḥ suṣuve ratnaṁ kṣetraiḥ sasyaṁ vanairgajān (bhūḥ) RAGH. 17, 66. payaḥ sūte ‘dya medinī, ratnaṁ vaiḍūryabhūḥ RĀJA-TAR. 4, 300. sūṣyant BHĀG. P. 3, 8, 13. dhūmāt – payaḥ sūte ghanasyodgamaḥ Spr. (II) 3162. dharmaṁ sūyanti prajāḥ MBH. 3, 11298. — partic. sūta mit act. Bed. = prasūta H. an. 2, 208. MED. t. 72. fg. sūtā “gekalbt habend” M. 8, 242. vanye sattve sūte “wenn ein wildes Thier Junge geworfen hat” VARĀH. BṚH. S. 91, 3. — Vgl. savitrī. nis vgl. niḥṣūti. pra 1) “gebären”: prasūte sma sutam KATHĀS. 39, 19. 56, 287. MĀRK. P. 51, 114. prāsūta R. 7, 35, 21. KATHĀS. 17, 65. kanyā prasūyate MBH. 3, 13057. 4, 71. ṢAḌV. BR. 5, 11. SUŚR. 1, 367, 18. Spr. (II) 1403. VARĀH. BṚH. 5, 8. 11. 16. PAÑCAR. 1, 8, 34. gauryā prativarṣaṁ prasūyate Schol. zu P. 5, 2, 12. prasūyante mithunānyeva tāḥ MĀRK. P. 49, 10. prasavanti MBH. 1, 6077. prasavantī M. 4, 44. prasuṣuve BHĀG. P. 3, 17, 2. prāsoṣṭa RĀJA-TAR. 3, 106. 4, 39. BHAṬṬ. 1, 14. prasaviṣyasi R. 7, 9, 24. MĀRK. P. 51, 113. 77, 6. BHĀG. P. 3, 21, 29. prasoṣyantī 11, 1, 15. prasūya ŚĀK. 94. 95, v. l. KATHĀS. 14, 38. PRAB. 11, 10. prasotum BHAṬṬ. 1, 13. “erzeugen”: prasūyate M. 10, 27. 30. fg. anena prasaviṣyadhvam “Nachkommenschaft haben” BHAG. 3, 10. “erzeugen” in uneig. Bed.: (buddhiḥ) prasūte hi phalaṁ śrīmadaraṇīva hutāśanam KĀM. NĪTIS. 13, 2. Spr. (II) 7062. dhūmaṁ prasauti (agniḥ) RĀJA-TAR. 5, 125. aṣṭamāsadhṛtaṁ garbham – dyauḥ prasūyate R. 4, 27, 3. prasūyate saṁgatiḥ śriyam PRAB. 86, 18. (drumāḥ) śayanāni prasūyante citrāstaraṇavanti R. 4, 44, 99. MĀRK. P. 49, 30. 59, 19. dīpaḥ kajjalaṁ prasūyate Spr. (II) 2816. taravaḥ prāsūyanta “trugen Früchte” BHĀG. P. 4, 19, 8. yathā prasūyamānastu phalī dadyātphalaṁ bahu MBH. 14, 498. (śāstraviṭapī) phalaṁ prasūya Spr. (II) 5426. — 2) “geboren werden, entspringen, entstehen”: kārāvaro niṣādāttu carmakāraḥ prasūyate M. 10, 36. tiryagyonau prasūyate MBH. 3, 12500. asyāmeva prasūyadhvam 1, 2502. 2504. etasmācca jagatsarvaṁ prasūyeta janārdanāt HARIV. 11053. prasūyatas 2. du. MBH. 13, 2565. prasūyāmas HARIV. 173 = VP. 1, 15, 128. sarveṇa khalu martavyaṁ martyaloke prasūyatā Spr. (II) 6949. sindhoḥ prasūya kamalā RĀJA-TAR. 6, 317. pra keśāḥ suvate TBR. 2, 7, 17, 1. śabdaḥ u. s. w. vedādeva prasūyante M. 12, 98, v. l. — 3) partic. prasūta a) mit act. Bed. f. ā “geboren habend, niedergekommen” (die Ergänzung im acc.; hier und da statt des verbi finiti) AK. 2, 6, 1, 16. MED. t. 124. HALĀY. 118. 285. 345. AV. 12, 1, 62. YĀJÑ. 2, 145. SUŚR. 2, 180, 8. devasadṛśānputrān HARIV. 4625. R. 7, 66, 3. UTTARAR. 38, 7 (52, 1). WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 249. 282. fg. 289. KATHĀS. 21, 117. 29, 137 (śatapadī). MĀRK. P. 51, 101. Schol. zu P. 2, 1, 65. PAÑCAT. 218, 21. HIT. 72, 14. a- Spr. (II) 2055. pratyagra- Schol. zu KĀTY. ŚR. 24, 6, 8. jananī prasūtatanayā “deren Tochter niedergekommen ist” Spr. (II) 6033. prasūtamātrā “eben niedergekommen” KATHĀS. 28, 67. — b) “geboren, erzeugt, entsprungen, entstanden” H. an. 3, 273. MED. mit gen. oder loc. (auch abl.) P. 2, 3, 39. VOP. 5, 29. ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 5, 2. KAUṢ. UP. 1, 2. tasyām M. 3, 19. tataḥ MBH. 1, 35. mama kāyāt R. 2, 74, 21. tadanvaye RAGH. 1, 12. nīcakule Spr. (II) 6475. yasya tasya 5369. MĀRK. P. 104, 8. R. 1, 16, 26. ŚĀK. 178, v. l. Spr. (II) 1431. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 48, 11. BṚH. 23, 14. MĀRK. P. 76, 17. WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 266. 284. etaddeśa- M. 2, 20. kālanemi- ŚĀK. CH. 144, 4. KATHĀS. 50, 139. BHĀG. P. 6, 6, 24. 9, 6, 3. kula- R. 2, 82, 31 (Pferde) Spr. (II) 5970. BHĀG. P. 9, 3, 21. nandakula- PAÑCAT. 45, 2. veda- PRAB. 86, 19. vindhyapāda- (nadī) MĀRK. P. 57, 25. BHĀG. P. 9, 9, 14. PAÑCAR. 1, 7, 40. kalpavṛkṣa- (madhu) MEGH. 67. matprasūtaṁ bhayam MBH. 3, 2844. matprasūtena tejasā 11970. bhīṣma- (duḥkha) 5, 7029. dharmaviśeṣa- KAṆ. 1, 1, 4. saraladrumāṇāṁ srutakṣīratayā prasūto gandhaḥ KUMĀRAS. 1, 9. prasūtaṁ tarhi saukhyaṁ naḥ Z. f. d. K. d. M. 2, 426. — c) n. als Synonym von avyakta TATTVAS. 5. — 4) partic. prasūna a) = prasūta H. an. 3, 388. = jāta MED. n. 87. — b) n. “Blüthe, Frucht”; s. u. prasūna. In der Bed. “Blüthe” auch Spr. (II) 7411, v. l. UTTARAR. 98, 6 (129, 12). MĀLATĪM. 57, 13. BHĀG. P. 3, 18, 8 (“engendre” BURNOUF). PAÑCAR. 1, 7, 50. — Vgl. 3. prasava, prasavana, 2. prasavitar, 2. prasavin, prasūta, 2. prasūti, prasūna, devaprasūta (hierher oder zu 2. su). anupra, partic. -sūta “darauf entstanden”: sṛṣṭistathaiveyamanuprasūtā MBH. 13, 7361. abhipra, partic. -sūta “erzeugt, geboren”: mātuḥ pituḥ karmaṇābhiprasūtaḥ saṁvardhate vidhivadbhojanena MBH. 5, 964. saṁpra 1) “erzeugen”: -sūte MBH. 13, 2582. -sūyate M. 10, 33. — – sūyate MBH. 13, 5850 fehlerhaft für -ṇūyate, wie die ed. Bomb. liest. — 2) “geboren werden”: tadāhaṁ saṁprasūyāmi gṛheṣu śubhakarmaṇām MBH. 3, 12978. — 3) partic. -sūta “erzeugt, geboren”: bahvīḥ prajāḥ puruṣāt MUṆḌ. UP. 2, 1, 5. śarmiṣṭhayā MBH. 5, 5044. brahmāsyatas, bāhubhyām 12, 11814. 13, 4426. guṇavipuleṣu kuleṣu R. 4, 41, 79. māyā guṇasaṁprasūtā BHĀG. P. 11, 10, 13. — Vgl. saṁprasūti. vi “gebären”: sumatyapi garbhaṁ tumbaṁ vyasūyata R. GORR. 1, 40, 17. sam dass.: śāradvatasya (so die neuere Ausg.) dāyādamahalyā samasūyata HARIV. 1784. “erzeugen” in uneig. Bed.: dattaṁ śreyāṁsi saṁsūte (Conj.) Spr.(II) 4252. su 5 savati v. l. für sru (gatau) DHĀTUP. 22, 42. VOP. 8, 95. asāvīt, suṣavitha, suṣuviva, savitā und sotā 96. su adv. gaṇa cādi zu P. 1, 4, 57. VOP. 1, 8. über die euphonischen Veränderungen des Wortes (ṣu, ṣū), über die Dehnung eines vorangehenden Vocals und über den Wandel eines nachfolgenden na in ṇa handeln VS. PRĀT. 4, 183. TS. PRĀT. 3, 7. 14. P. 6, 3, 134. 8, 3, 107. 4, 27. “wohl, gut”; überhaupt verstärkend oder versichernd: “gewiss, leichtlich, völlig” u. s. w. wie “wohl” in älteren deutschen Liedern. Die indischen Lexicographen geben dem Worte folgende Bedeutungen: pūjana (pūjā) AK. 3, 5, 5. MED. avj. 79. nirbhara AK. 3, 5, 2. H. 1535, Schol. MED. bhṛśa, anumati, kṛcchra, samṛddhi MED. anāyāsa BHAR. zu AK. nach ŚKDR. 1) selbständig; nie am Versanfang; im AV. selten und meist in Verbindung mit u. u ṣu ṚV. 1, 26, 5. 4, 6, 2. 20, 4. vidmo ṣvasya mātaram AV. 1, 2, 1. 6, 84, 3. mo ṣu ṚV. 2, 18, 3. 3, 55, 2. AV. 5, 11, 7. mā su VS. 11, 68. uta su ṚV. 8, 2, 42. itsu 4, 22, 10. ā su 8, 34, 12. pra su 1, 136, 1. 8, 6, 32. vi ṣū 2, 28, 7. 8, 32, 19. ni ṣu 5, 13. adhi ṣū 8, 24, 7. paryū ṣū 9, 110, 1. asmāntsu 1, 9, 6. 17, 7. asmabhyaṁ su 3, 30, 21. asmākaṁ su 31, 14. asmābhiḥ su 8, 70, 8. tvaṁ su VS. 4, 14. asme su 4, 32, 14. sa su 12, 1. imaṁ su 2, 35, 2. idaṁ su AV. 14, 2, 8. yaṁ svaśnaṁ jaghāna ṚV. 2, 14, 5. sakṛtsu 16, 8. 8, 1, 14. namaḥ su te VS. 12, 63. vasvī ṣu te ṚV. 7, 20, 10. jīvātave su 10, 59, 5. ni māmṛje pura indraḥ su sarvāḥ ṚV. 7, 26, 3. su kam am Ende 1, 191, 6. 3, 53, 2. nāsmāllokātsvetavyamiva “nicht wohl” TS. 6, 1, 1, 1. bodhā su ṚV. 7, 22, 3. juṣasva sū 3, 24, 2. mandasvā su 8, 6, 39. pibā su 17, 4. AV. 6, 32, 1. jarāṁ su gaccha 19, 24, 5. na vai su viduriva manuṣyā nakṣatram KĀṬH. 8, 3 bei WEBER, Nax. 2, 296. su veda KENOP. 9. sūrmī jvalantīṁ svāśliṣyet M. 11, 103. su virājate sma MBH. 4, 2089. svanuyāsyanti 8, 1321. su śakyante R. 2, 33, 4. su samīkṣyatām Spr. (II) 1402. su saṁdadhīta 1961, v. l. su śobhante 4157. svanuṣṭhīyatām 6275. svaśikṣayat RĀJA-TAR. 4, 51. – MBH. 3, 14392 und 7, 8603 hat die ed. Bomb. tu und hi st. su. Vor einem absol. MBH. 7, 5783 (so ‘bhidrutya st. svabhidrutya ed. Bomb.). vicintya MṚCCH. 103, 16. baddhvā 176, 1. cintya und vicārya Spr. (II) 7100. snātvā WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 291. — 2) am Anfange eines comp. vor Adjectiven und Substantiven (über solche compp. handelt P. 1, 4, 94. 2, 1, 6. 5, 4, 69. 6, 2, 117. fgg, 145. 172. fgg. 195. 7, 1, 68. 8, 1, 67. fg. Vārtt. 4 zu 1, 4, 60. Vārtt. 1 der SAUNĀGA zu 2, 2, 18. VOP. 6, 88). svalaṁkṛta “schön geschmückt” MBH. 3, 2114. surakṣita “wohl gehütet” 2144. suprīta “hocherfreut” R. 1, 1, 76. sūcchritadhvaja 2, 43, 10. susaṁrabdhatara 6, 31, 44. susādhya “gut zu handhaben” PAÑCAR. 1, 8, 33. sumanohara “überaus reizend” MBH. 1, 5976. sudāruṇa R. 1, 8, 12. susūkṣma VARĀH. BṚH. S. 11, 44. sunikhilam “ganz vollständig” HARIV. 7034. suprākṛta “ganz gemein” R. GORR. 2, 11, 24. susita “schön weiss” PAÑCAR. 3, 11, 8. susugandha “sehr wohlriechend” VARĀH. BṚH. S. 48, 32. suduṣkara “sehr schwer zu vollbringen” MBH. 1, 6118. sunistriṁśa “ein schönes Schwert” MBH. 6, 5639. subhakṣya “eine prächtige Speise” Spr. (II) 7113. susahāya “einen guten Gefährten habend” M. 7, 31. sulalāṭa “eine schöne Stirn habend” R. 1, 1, 12. sukara (s. d.) “leicht auszuführen”, sulabha (s. d.) “leicht zu erlangen”, susaṁtoṣa (s. d.) “leicht zu befriedigen.” — su verhält sich wohl zum demonstrativen sa wie ku zum interrogativen ka. Vgl. sutarām. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 su 1. su, i. 1, and ii. 2, Par., and sū sū, ii. 4, suya (properly pass. refl. of su), and ii. 2, Ātm. 1. To beget, Man. 10, 32. 2. To bear, to bring forth, Man. 10, 39; Pañc. pr. d. 5. ii. 5, sunu, Par. Ātm. (the act of expressing the Soma juice being compared to the act of generating, cf. Rigv. i. 28), To express the Soma juice, Chr. 294, 3 = Rigv. i, 92, 3. Ptcple. of the pf. pass. I. suta, 1. m. A son, Pañc. i. d. 185. 2. f. tā, A daughter, Chr. 3, 9. 3. m. pl. Cildren, Man. 2, 28. Comp. giri-, f. tā, Pārvatī, Pañc. i. d. 175. jahnu-, f. tā, the Gaṅgā, MBh. 1, 3913. jīva-, adj. one who has living children, Bhāg. P. 6, 19, 25. dāra-, m. wife and son, Yājñ. 2, 175. dāsī-, m. a base man, Rājat. 5, 179. dharma-, m. (the son of the god Dharma), epithet of Yudhiṣṭhira, Bhāg. P. 1, 7, 49. bhū- and mahī-, m. the planet Mars. bhṛgu-, m. 1. Śukra or Venus. 2. Paraśurāma. rādhā-, m. Karṇa. śaila-, f. tā, Pārvatī, Vikr. d. 128. II. sūla, 1. Engendered. 2. Born. f. tā, 1. A daughter, Pañc. 181, 5. 2. A woman lying in; see s.v. Comp. sūra-, m. Aruṇa, the dawn. III. sūna, 1. Born, produced. 2. Blown, budded (as a flower). m. A son, Pañc. 198, 2. f. nā, A daughter. n. 1. Bringing forth, parturition. 2. A flower. — With the prep. abhi abhi, ṣu, 1. To express the Soma juice, Rām. 1, 13, 5 (cf. Sclegel’s translation). 2. To extract juice, Man. 5, 10. 3. To sprinkle, Bhaṭṭ. 9, 90. — With ud ud, ii. 5, To agitate, Bhāg. P. 3, 20, 35 (cf. 2. sū). — With pra pra, 1. To beget, Man. 10, 30. 2. To bring forth, Man. 4, 44. 3. Pass. To be brought forth, Man, 10, 36; with the termination of the Par. (i. 4, Par.), MBh. 12, 5687. prasūta, 1. Engendered, Hit. pr. d. 23, M.M. 2. Born, Pañc. 45, 2. 3. Produced, Chr. 294, 8 = Rigv. i. 92, 8. 4. Engendering, Man. 3, 19. 5. Having brought forth, delivered, Hit. 72, 14; Utt. Rāmac. 52, 1 (she has brought forth). Comp. a-, adj. one who has not brought forth, Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 809. kula-, adj. descended from a respectable family, Pañc. pr. d. 6. prasūna, Born, produced. n. 1. A bud, a blossom, Utt. Rāmac. 129, 12; flower, Mālat. 57, 13. 2. Fruit. Comp. visa-, n. a lotus. — With saṁpra sam-pra, 1. To beget, Man. 10, 33. 2. Pass. To be brought forth, MBh. 3, 12978 (with the termination of the Par.). — Cf. [greek] Goth. sunus; A.S. sunu (cf. sūnu). su 2. su, i. 1, and ii. 2, Par. † To possess power or supremacy (cf. the last). su 3. su, i. 1, Par. Ātm. † To go. su 4. su (for original vasu, cf. [greek] = Zend. vaṅhvām = Sskr. *vasvām), I. adv. ved. Beautifully, Chr. 296, 1 = Rigv. i. 112, 1. II. Very seldom combined and compounded with a verbum finitum; e. g. Pañc. i. d. 205, but cf. Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 647; but very often with nouns, 1. Good, well, Rām. 3, 53, 6; Ṛt. 6, 2; Lass. 15, 5. 2. Beautiful, beautifully, Rām. 3, 52, 35. 3. Much, very, Chr. 4, 12. 4. Easily, Daśak. in Chr. 185, 2. Comparat. sutarām, 1. Better. 2. With na, Very badly, Pañc. 199, 24; with mā, In no way, Megh. 108. 3. More, Śiś. 9, 67; Pañc. 163, 3. 4. Exceedingly, Śiś. 9, 55. 5. Consequently, of course. — Cf. [greek] Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 su sunoti sunute v pp. suta1 (q.v.) press out, extract, esp. the Soma. — adhi = S. abhi press out, prepare or win by extracting. ā & vi = S. sam & abhisam press out together. — Cf. prasuta. su [2] (sū) adv. well, indeed (strengthening and assevering); often °– in adj., adv., & subst. = Gr. ‘eu (opp. dus). Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 su 1. SU, V.P. suno, sunu, (sts. Ā.) press out, extract (Soma; V., rare in E.): pr. pt. sunvāna, suvāna; pp. suta, pressed, extracted. abhi (-ṣuṇoti), press out; ps. -ṣūyate, be extracted: pp. abhiṣuta (V.). ā, press out, extract (V.); boil, prepare (ghee). pra, pp. prāsuta (V.), pressed continuously; having continuously pressed. su 2. SU (= 1. sū), in sauti, suhi, and pp. suta, urged, instigated (ŚB.). su 3. SU (= 2. sū), in pra-savati (rare), pra-sauti (rare), pp. suta, son, and suṣuti. su su (in V. also sū), ad. [perh. for vasu = Gk.[greek]: cp. uṣu, ū shu, and u loka] good, well, indeed, right, very, thoroughly (never used independently at the beginning of a verse; rarely as an independent ad. in C.; very common °- with a. or N., in C. also with gd.). Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 su gatau . aiśvarye . prasave . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (bhvā°-para°-saka °-aniṭ .) savati . iti durgādāsaḥ .. su ña gatau . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (bhvā°-ubha°saka°-aniṭ .) ña, susāva suṣuve . iti durgādāsaḥ .. su vya, nirbharam . ityamaraḥ . 3 . 4 . 2 .. (yathā, mahābhārate . 1 . 158 . 16 . viditvā vyavasiṣyāmi yadyapi syāt suduṣkaram ..) pūjā . ityamaraḥ . 3 . 4 . 5 .. (śobhanam . yathā, manuḥ . 7 . 31 . praṇetuṁ śakyate daṇḍaḥ susahāyena dhīmatā ..) anumatiḥ . kṛcchram . samṛddhiḥ . iti medinī .. anāyāsaḥ . iti bharataikārthasaṁgrahaḥ .. upasargaviśeṣaḥ . yathā . supūjānāyāsātiśayeṣu . iti mugdhabodhaṭīkāyāṁ durgādāsaḥ .. saptamyā vahuvacanavibhaktiḥ . iti vyākaraṇam .. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 su avya° su–ḍu . 1 pūjāyām 2 atiśaye amaraḥ . 3 kṛcche 4 anumatau 5 mamṛddhau medi° 6 anāyāse ca anekārthako° . pūjāyāmasya nopasargatvam tena sustutamityādau na ṣatvam . atiśayādau tu suṣṭuta ityādi . gaṇaratne’rthaviśeṣānuktakrameṇodāhṛtam yathā su praśaṁsānumatipūjābhṛśakṛcchraśubheṣu . surūpaḥ sukṛtaṁ susādhuḥ sutaptaḥ suduḥ karaṁ sugandhaḥ . |
सुवर्ण – suvarṇa | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899suvarṇa “su-varṇa” &c. see s.v.
suvarṇa “su-varṇa” mf (“ā”) n. of a good or beautiful colour, brilliant in hue, bright, golden, yellow &c. &c. mf (“ā”) n. gold, made of gold mf (“ā”) n. of a good tribe or caste suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. a good colour suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. a good tribe or class suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. a kind of bdellium suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. the thorn-apple suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. a kind of metre suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. N. of a Deva-gandharva suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. of an ascetic suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. of a minister of Daśa-ratha suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. of a son of Antarīkṣa, Vp. suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. of a king of Kāśmīra suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. of a poet suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. (rarely n.) a partic. weight of gold (= 1 Karsha, = 16 Māṣas, = 80 Raktikās, = about 175 grains troy) &c. suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. a gold coin suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. a kind of bulbous plant (= “suvarṇālu”) suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. a kind of aloe suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. a kind of sacrifice suvarṇa “su-varṇa” mf (“ā”) n. (“ā”) f. turmeric suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. Sida Rhomboidea or Cordifolia suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. another plant (= “svarṇakṣīrī”) suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. a bitter gourd, colocynth suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. N. of one of the seven tongues of fire suvarṇa “su-varṇa” m. of a daughter of Ikṣvāku (the wife of Su-hotra) suvarṇa “su-varṇa” mf (“ā”) n. (“ī”) f. the plant Salvinia Cucullata (perhaps w.r. for “sukarṇī”). suvarṇa “su-varṇa” n. gold (of which 57 synonyms are given) &c. &c. suvarṇa “su-varṇa” n. money, wealth, property, riches suvarṇa “su-varṇa” n. a sort of yellow sandal-wood suvarṇa “su-varṇa” n. the flower of Mesua Roxburghii suvarṇa “su-varṇa” n. a kind of vegetable (= “gaura-suvarṇa”) suvarṇa “su-varṇa” n. red ochre (= “suvarṇagairika”) suvarṇa “su-varṇa” n. the right pronunciation of sounds suvarṇa “su-varṇa” n. N. of a Tīrtha suvarṇa “su-varṇa” n. of a partic. world Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 suvarṇa a. [śobhano varṇo’sya] (1) Of good or beautiful colour, brilliant in hue, bright, yellow, golden. (2) Of a good tribe or caste. (3) Of good fame, glorious, celebrated. –rṇaḥ (1) A good colour. (2) A good tribe or caste. (3) A sort of sacrifice. (4) An epithet of Śiva. (5) The thorn-apple. –rṇā (1) One of the seven tongues of fire. (2) Black aloe-wood. (3) Turmeric. (4) Colocynth. –rṇaṁ (1) Gold. (2) A golden coin (–m. also); nanvahaṁ daśasuvarṇān prayacchāmi Mk. 2. (3) A weight of gold equal to 16 Māṣas or about 175 grains Troy (m. also). (4) Money, wealth, riches. (5) A sort of yellow sandal-wood. (6) A kind of red chalk. (7) N. of a tree (nāgakeśara). — Comp. –akṣaḥ N. of Śiva. –ākhyaḥ 1. N. of a tree (nāgakeśara). –2. the thorn-apple. –abhiṣekaḥ sprinkling the bride and bridegroom with water into which a piece of gold has been dropped. –kadalī a variety of plantain. –kartṛ, –kāra, –kṛt m. a goldsmith. –gaṇinaṁ a particular method of calculation in arithmetic. –gairikaṁ a kind of red-halk. –jīṁvikaḥ N. of a tribe; (gāṁcikaḥ śāṁkhikaścaiva kāṁsyako maṇikārakaḥ . suvarṇajīvikaścaiva paṁcaitevaṇijaḥ smṛtāḥ .. –puṣpaḥ the globe-amaranth. –puṣpita a. a bounding in gold; e. g. suvarṇapuṣpitāṁ pṛthvīṁ vicinvaṁti trayo janāḥ . śūraśca kṛtavidyaśca yaśca jānāti sevituṁ Pt. 1. 45. –pṛṣṭha a. coated with gold, gilded. –biṁduḥ 1. N. of Viṣṇu. –2. a form of Śiva. –mākṣikaṁ a kind of mineral substance. –yūyī yellow jasmine. –rūṣyaka a. abounding in gold and silver. –retas m. an epithet of Śiva. –vaṇij m. N. of a mixed caste –varṇaḥ N. of Viṣṇu. –varṇā turmeric. –siddhaḥ an adept who has acquired gold by magical means. –steyaṁ stealing of gold (one of the five Mahāpātakas q. v.). Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch suvarṇa 1) adj. (f. ā) a) “schönfarbig, schön aussehend”, insbes. “von schimmernder Farbe, goldig” (Gegens. durvarṇa) ṚV. 10, 68, 3. Wasser AV. 1, 33, 1. stokāḥ 12, 3, 28. 13, 1, 22. 3, 16. TBR. 3, 7, 6, 1. darbha KĀṬH. 31, 14. ṢAḌV. BR. 4, 7. ṚV. PRĀT. 17, 9. Ind. St. 8, 273. dāsī MBH. 3, 14695. 13, 3427. ŚRUT. 22. mārjāra MBH. 5, 5437. Besonders von der Farbe des Goldes: suvarṇaṁ hiraṇyam TBR. 1, 4, 7, 4. 8, 9, 1. 2, 2, 4, 5. 3, 3, 4, 5. 8, 2, 4. ŚAT. BR. 12, 7, 1, 7. 13, 1, 1, 3. 2, 3, 2. MBH. 3, 2262. R. 1, 74, 5. hiraṇyaṁ ca suvarṇaṁ ca 2, 76, 15. nach dem Comm. zu R. soll suvarṇa “Gold” und hiraṇya “Silber” bedeuten. — b) “golden”: suvarṇarajatābhyāṁ kuśībhyām TBR. 1, 5, 10, 1. 7. ŚAT. BR. 10, 4, 5, 2. 12, 8, 3, 11. CHĀND. UP. 1, 6, 6. 3, 19, 1. bhūṣaṇāni R. GORR. 2, 99, 34. — c) “zu einer guten Kaste gehörig” MBH. 13, 2607. — 2) n. “Gold” AK. 2, 9, 94. H. 1043. an. 3, 231. MED. ṇ. 84. fg. HALĀY. 2, 18. RATNAM. 87. RĀJAN. 13, 8. AV. 15, 1, 2. sarvaṁ suvarṇaṁ (?) haritam TBR. 3, 12, 6, 6. ŚAT. BR. 11, 4, 1, 8. PĀR. GṚHY. 1, 16. KĀTY. ŚR. 20, 7, 2. M. 8, 131. 321. 11, 250. -caura 49. -steya 98. fg. 101. MBH. 13, 3936. fgg. -rajataiḥ R. 2, 32, 14. SUŚR. 1, 142, 17. 227, 19. -cūrṇa 369, 4. durjanahutāśataptaṁ kāvyasuvarṇaṁ viśuddhimāyāti Spr. (II) 2858. 4074. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 41, 7. 42, 6. WEBER, RĀMAT. UP. 356. BHĀG. P. 5, 16, 21. PAÑCAT. 191, 25. -maṇikulyā RĀJA-TAR. 1, 97. -muṣṭi LALIT. ed. Calc. 202, 4. -bhasmana Verz. d. B. H. No. 994. -dāna Verz. d. Oxf. H. 87,a,36. fg. suvarṇāṅkuśa “aus Gold” R. 1, 53, 17. 2, 81, 2. RAGH. 3, 64. HIT. 10, 9. 11, 5 -rūpakaśata RĀJA-TAR. 6, 45. zu den werthvollen Gaben gehören: -dhenu Verz. d. Oxf. H. 35,a,33. -medinī 45,a,24. -vṛṣabha 26. fg. — 3) m. (seltener n.) “als Gewicht ein” Karsha “Gold” AK.2,9,87. TR.3,3,141. H. 884. H. an. MED. M.8,134. fg. YĀJÑ.1,362. COLEBR. Alg. 2. SUŚR.2,175,13. ŚĀRÑG. SAṁH.1,1,17. WEBER, JYOT. 83. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 307,b,4. PRĀYAŚCITTEND.7,a,8. M.8,213. 220. 361. śataṁ śatasahasrāṇi suvarṇasya MBH. 3, 483. RĀJA-TAR. 6, 102. sāṣṭe śate suvarṇānām AK.3,4,1,13. MṚCCH. 34,13. 18. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 151,a,10. PAÑCAT. 134,3. fgg. HIT. 98,11, v. l. dvisuvarṇadhanam P. 6, 2, 55, Schol. adhyardha-, dvi- adj. 5, 1, 29, Vārtt., Schol. VET. in LA. (III) 23, 18. 28, 4. ṭaṅkasahasrasuvarṇa 24, 4 schwerlich richtig (suvarṇa wohl zu streichen). BURNOUF, Intr. 238. HIOUEN-THSANG 2, 29. — 4) n. “Geld, Reichthum” H. an. — 5) Bez. verschiedener Pflanzen: = suvarṇālu (suvarṇānu MED.) und kṛṣṇāguru, n. H. an. m. MED. n. = haricandana MED. = nāgakesara RĀJAN. 6, 179. = gaurasuvarṇa 7, 152. m. = kaṇaguggulu (vgl. suvarṇakaṇa) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. “Stechapfel” ŚKDR. nach AK. (vgl. 2, 4, 2, 58). — 6) n. “eine Art Röthel” (svarṇagairika) RATNAM. im ŚKDR. — 7) n. “richtige Aussprache der Laute” ŚAT. BR. 14, 4, 1, 28. -vid 11, 4, 1, 8. — 8) “eine Art Opfer”, n. H. an. m. MED. — 9) m. “ein best.” Daṇḍaka-“Metrum” Ind. St. 8, 408. — 10) f. ā Bez. verschiedener Pflanzen: = haridrā RĀJAN. 6, 198. = vāṭyālaka ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. = svarṇakṣīrī RĀJAN. 5, 53. — 11) f. ī “eine best. Pflanze”, = ākhukarṇī RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. richtig sukarṇī unsere Hdschrr. — 12) N. pr. a) m. a) eines Devagandharva MBH. 1, 4814. — b) pl. einer Klasse von Göttern unter dem 12ten Manu MĀRK. P. 94, 23. — g) eines Büssers MBH. 13, 4678. fgg. — d) eines Rathgebers des Fürsten Daśaratha R. GORR. 2, 82, 11. — e) eines Sohnes des Antarīkṣa VP. 463. — z) eines Fürsten der Kāśmīra RĀJA-TAR. 1, 97. — b) f. ā einer Tochter Ikṣvāku’s und Gattin Suhotra’s MBH. 1, 3787. — c) n. a) eines Tīrtha MBH. 3, 7096. — b) einer Erde: savurṇākhyaṁ jagat MBH. 5, 3551. — Nach gaṇa ardharcādi zu P.2,4,31. TRIK.3,5,10 und SIDDH. K. 249,a,5 ist suvarṇa m. n. Vgl. sauvarṇa u. s. w. und svarṇa. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 suvarṇa 1 I A Devagandharva. A famous celibate, he attended the birthday celebrations of Arjuna. (Anuśāsana Parva, Chapter 122, Verse 58). suvarṇa 2 II A Brahmin sage with his body golden in colour. He once held a talk with Manu about meritorious acts and sins. (Anuśāsana Parva, Chapter 98). suvarṇa (m) (M) A unit of measurement in ancient India Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 suvarṇa a. of a beautiful colour or appearance, glittering golden; belonging to a good caste. n. gold, riches; m. (n.) a cert. weight of gold. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 suvarṇa su-varṇa, a. V. E.: having a beautiful colour, brilliant, glittering, golden; made of gold (rare); belonging to a good caste (E., rare); n. (V., C.) gold; wealth; m. (rarely n.) a weight = one Karṣa of gold; m. N.: – kaṅkaṇa, n. glod bracelet; -kartṛ, m. goldsmith; -kāra, m. id.; -cūla, m. a bird; -dāna, n. gift of gold; -dvīpa, m. n. gold island, perhaps Sumatra; -pārśva, N. of a locality; -puṣpa, a. having gold as flowers (earth); -bindu, N. of a temple; -maya, a. (ī) consisting of gold; -roman, m. (golden-fleeced), ram; -lekhā, f. streak of gold (on a touchstone); -vat, 1. ad. like gold; 2. a. containing or possessing gold, opulent: -ī, f. N. of a town in Dakṣiṇā-patha; -vas-tra+ādhi, n. money, clothes, etc.; -sānūra, N. of a locality; -siddha, m. adept in the magical obtainment of gold. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 suvarṇa na° suṣṭhu varṇo’sya . 1 svanāmakhyate dhātubhede amaraḥ 2 haricandane medi° . 3 svarṇagairike ratnamā° 4 dhane hemaca° . 5 nāgakesare rājani° . karṣaṁ suvarṇasya suvarṇasaṁjñam ityukte karṣamite 6 kāñcane pu° līlā° . 7 yajñabhede 8 dhustūre 9 kaṇaguggulau ca pu° rājani° . suṣṭhu varṇo rūpasakṣaraṁ vāsya . 10 surūpe 11 sundarākṣarayukte ca tri° . na suvarṇamayī tanuḥ paraṁ nanu vāgapi tāvakī tathā naiṣa° . 12 karṣaparimāṇe vaidyaka° . agniretasśabde 59 pṛ° kanakaśabde ca 1644 pṛ° suvarṇadhātūvapattiguṇādikaṁ dṛśyaṁm . tavya śodhanasāraṇaprakārādikaṁ bhāvapra° uktaṁ yathā tatra pāraṇāya yogya suvarṇamāha dāhe raktaṁ sitaṁchede niṣake kuṅkumaprabham . tāraśulvotthitaṁ snigdhaṁ komalaṁ guru hema sat (sat uttamam) chede tu kaṭhinaṁ rūkṣaṁ vivarṇaṁ samalaṁ dalam . dāhe chede’sitaṁ śvetaṁ kaṣe tyājyaṁ sphuṭaṁ laghu . dalaṁ (doyata) iti loke sphuṭaṁ yad ghanāhataṁ sphuṭati . śodhanavidhiḥ pattalīkṛtapatrāṇi hemno vahnau pratāpayet . niṣiñcet taptataptāni taile takre ca kāñjike . gomūtre ca kulatthānāṁ kaṣāye tu tridhā tridhā . evaṁ hemnaḥ pareṣaḥñca dhātanāṁ śodhanaṁ bhavet . athāśuddhasya dodhaḥ valaṁ savīryaṁ harate narāṇāṁ rogavraja poṣayatīha kāye . asaukhyakāryeva sadā suvarṇamaśuddhametanmaraṇañca kuryāt . svarṇasya māraṇavidhiḥ svarṇamya dviguṇaṁ sūtamamlena saha mardayet . tadgolakasamaṁ gandhaṁ nidadhyādadharottaram . svarṇasya atitanūkṛtapatrasya . gandham gandhakacūrṇam . golakañca tato ruddhvā śarāvadṛḍhasapuṭe . triṁśadvanopalairdadyāt puṭānyeva caturdaṁśa . nirutthaṁ jāyate bhasma gandho deyaḥ punaḥ punaḥ . ruddhvā savastrakuṭṭitacikvaṇamṛttikayā vanopalaḥ (goghaṭhāḥ iti loke) nirutthaṁ yat punarna jīvati . athānyaprakāraḥ kāñcane galite gandhaṁ ṣoḍaśāṁśena niḥkṣipet . cūrṇayitvā tathāmleta ghṛṣṭvākṛtvā tu golakam . golakena samaṁ gandhaṁ dattvā caivādharottaram . śarāvasaṁpuṭe dhṛtvā puṭettriṁśad vanopalaiḥ . evaṁ saptapuṭairhema nirutthaṁ bhasma jāyate . atrāpi pūrvavadgandhaḥ . anyacca kāñcanārarasairghṛṣṭā samasūtakagandhayoḥ . kajjalīṁ hemapatrāṇi lepayet samayā tayā . samayā hemapatra samayā kāñcanāratvacaḥ kalkairmūṣāyugnaṁ prakalpayet . dhṛtvā tatsampuṭe golaṁ mṛnmūṣāsampuṭe ca tat . nidhāya sandhirodhañca kṛtvā saṁśovya golakam . vahniṁ kharataraṁ kuryādevaṁ dattvā puṭatrayam . nirutthaṁ jāyate bhasmasarvakarmasu yojayet . kāñcanāraprakāreṇa lāṅgalī hanti kāñcanam . lāṅgalī (karihārī) jvālāmukhī tathā hanyāt tathā hanti manaḥśilā . śilāsindūrayoścūrṇaṁ samayorarkadugdhakaiḥ . saptaghā bhāvanān dadyācchoṣayecca punaḥ punaḥ . tatastu galite hemni kalko’yaṁ dīyate samaḥ . punardhamedatitarāṁ yathā kalko vilīyate . evaṁ velātrayaṁ dadyāt kalakaṁ hemamṛtirbhavet . evaṁ māritasya suvarṇasya guṇāḥ suvarṇaṁ śītalaṁ vṛṣyaṁ valyaṁ guru rasāyanam . svādu tiktaṁ ca tuvaraṁ pāke ca svādu picchilam . pavitraṁ vṛṁhaṇaṁ netryaṁ medhāsmṛtimatipradam . hṛdyamāyuṣkara kāntivāgviśuddhisthiratvakṛt . viṣadvayakṣayonmādatridoṣajvaraśoṣajit . vṛṣyaṁ vṛṣāya kāmukāya hitam . asamyaṅmāritaṁ svarṇaṁ valaṁ vīryañca nāśavet . karoti rogānmṛtyuñca taddhanyād yatnatastataḥ tadbhedādikaṁ rājani° uktaṁ yathā dāhe’tiraktamatha yacca sitaṁ chidāyāṁ kāśmīrakānti ca vibhāti nikāṣapaṭṭe . snigdhañca gauravamupaiti ca yattulāyāṁ jānīta devakanakaṁ mṛdu raktapītam . tatraikaṁ rasavedhajaṁ tadaparaṁ jātaṁ svayaṁbhūmijaṁ kiñcānyadbahulohasaṅkarabhavaṁ ceti tridhā kāñcanam . tatrādyaṁ kila pītaraktamapara raktaṁ tato’nyat yathā gaurābhaṁ taditi krameṇa gaditaṁ syāt pūrvapūrvottamam . tatra rasavedhajasya karaṇaprakāraḥ ānīya pāradaṁ devi! sthāpayet prastaropari . tasyopari japenmantraṁ sarvabandhamayātmakam . sāṣṭasahasraṁ deveśi! prajapet sādhakāgraṇīḥ . svayambhūpuṣpasaṁyukte vastre cāruṇasannibhe . saṁsthāpya pāradaṁ devi! mṛtpātra yugale śive! . puṣpayuktena sūtreṇa badhnīyāt bahuyatnataḥ . mṛttikayā rajenaiva dhānyasya parameśvari! . lepayedbahuyatnena raudre śuṣkāṇi kārayet . punaśca lepayeddhīmān tato vahnau viniḥkṣipet . aṣṭamīnavamīrātrau kṣipennaiva sureśvari! . atha vā parameśāni! mṛtpātre sthāpayedrasam . vallīrasena taddravyaṁ śodhayed bahuyatnataḥ . ghṛtanārīrasenaiva tathaiva śodhanaṁ caret . evaṁ kṛte tu guṭikā yadi syāt dṛḍhabandhanā . dhustūrañca samānīya madhye śūnyañca kārayet . kṛṣṇākhyatulasīyoge tathā ghṛtakumārikā . evaṁ kṛte vahniyoge bhasmasāt jāyate dhruvam . bhasmayāge bhavet svarṇaṁ dhanadāyāḥ prasādataḥ . vivarṇaṁ jāyate dravyaṁ yadi pūjāṁ na cācaret mātṛkā bhedatattre 5 pa° . bahulohasaṅkarabhavasya karacavidhiḥ gāruḍe 188 a° . suvarṇakaraṇaṁ śṛṇu ityupakrame pītaṁ dhustūrapuṣpañca sīsakañca palonmitam . pāṭhālāṅgalaśākhā ca mūlamāvartanāṅbhavet . suvarṇaṁ cāmbau dahyamānaṁ na kṣoyate yathoktaṁ yājña° agnau suvarṇamakṣīṇam . karṣamitabrāhmaṇasvāmikakāñcanarūpasuvarṇaharaṇaṁ mahāpāta t . mahāpātalanirūpaṇe pāyaścittavivekaḥ . |
सुवर्णक – suvarṇaka | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899suvarṇaka mfn. golden
mfn. of a beautiful colour suvarṇaka m. Cathartocarpus Fistula suvarṇaka m. (ifc.) a Karsha of gold suvarṇaka n. gold suvarṇaka n. yellow brass suvarṇaka n. lead suvarṇaka m. or n. (?) a kind of plant (v.l. “-ṇa-kṣīrī”) Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch suvarṇaka gaṇa pakṣādi zu P. 4, 2, 80. 1) m. “Cathartocarpus (Cassia) fistula” AK. 2, 4, 2, 4. RATNAM. 21. BHĀVAPR. 5. — 2) n. “Gold”: labhedbahu suvarṇakam MBH. 3, 5021. 13, 5384. am Ende eines adj. comp.: bahu- “wobei viel Gold gespendet wird” R. 1, 1, 91 (98 GORR.). 7, 99, 8. — 3) am Ende eines adj. comp. “ein” Karsha “Gold”: niṣkaṁ (so lesen wir st. niṣka der ed. Bomb.) pañcasuvarṇakam MBH. 18, 306. — 4) n. “gelbes Messing” H. 1047. “Blei” 1041. — 5) “eine best. Pflanze” WISE 147. suvarṇakṣīrī st. dessen SUŚR. — Vgl. bahu- und sauvarṇakāyana. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 suvarṇaka na° suvarṇamiva kāyati kai–ka . 1 pikṣe hemaca° . suṣṭhu varṇo’sya kap . 2 sundaravarṇayakte tri° . |
हरि – hari | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899hari mfn. (for 2. see col.3) bearing, carrying (see “dṛti” and “nātha-h-“).
hari mfn. (prob. fr. a lost “hṛ”, “to be yellow or green”; for 1. “hari” see above, col.2) fawn-coloured, reddish brown, brown, tawny, pale yellow, yellow, fallow, bay (esp. applied to horses), green, greenish &c, &c. hari m. yellow or reddish brown or green (the colour) hari m. a horse, steed (esp. of Indra) &c. &c. hari m. a lion &c. hari m. the sign of the zodiac Leo hari m. the sun hari m. = “hari-nakṣatra” hari m. a monkey &c. hari m. ( also, a ray of light; the moon; Phaseolus Mungo; a jackal; a parrot; a peacock; the Koil or Indian cuckoo; a goose; a frog; a snake; fire) hari m. the wind or N. of Vāyu (god of the wind) hari m. of Indra &c. hari m. (esp.) N. of Viṣṇu-Kṛiṣṇa (in this sense thought by some to be derived from “hṛ”, “to take away or remove evil or sin”) &c. hari m. of Brahmā hari m. of Yama hari m. of śiva hari m. of śukra hari m. of Su-parṇa hari m. of a son of Garuḍa hari m. of a Rākṣasa hari m. of a Dānava hari m. of a son of Akampaua (or Anukampana) hari m. of a son of Tārakākṣa hari m. of a son of Parājit hari m. of a son of Parāvṛit hari m. of a worshipper of Viṣṇu hari m. of various authors and scholars (esp. of the poet Bhartṛi-hari as the author of the Vākya-padīya; also with “miśra, bhaṭṭa, dīkṣita” &c.) hari m. of a mountain hari m. of a world (cf. “hari-varṣa”) hari m. of a metre hari m. of a partic. high number hari pl. men, people (= “manuṣyāḥ”) mfn. a partic. class of gods under Manu Tāmasa hari mfn. (“ī”) f. N. of the mythical mother of the monkeys ‘holus’, ‘helvus’, ‘fulvus’; Lith. ‘zalias’, ‘zelti’; Slav. ‘zelenu’; Germ. ‘gelo’, ‘gelb’; Eng. ‘yellow’.] hari ind. (for 1. see p.1289, col.2; for 2. an exclamation (“alas!”) Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 hari a. [hṛ-in] (1) Green, greenishyellow. (2) Tawny, bay, reddishbrown (kapila); hariyugyaṁ haristasmai prajibāya puraṁdaraḥ R. 12. 84, 3. 43. (3) Yellow. –riḥ (1) N. of Viṣṇu; hariryathaikaḥ puruṣottamaḥ smṛtaḥ R. 3. 49. (2) N. of Indra; R. 3. 55, 68, 8. 79. (3) N. of Śiva. (4) N. of Brahman. (5) N. of Yama. (6) The sun. (7) The moon. (8) A man. (9) A ray of light. (10) Fire. (11) Wind. (12) A lion; Bv. 1. 50, 51. (13) A horse. (14) A horse of Indra; satyamatītya harito harīṁśca vartaṁte vājinaḥ S. 1, 7. 7. (15) An ape, a monkey; U. 3. 45, R. 12. 57. (16) The cuckoo. (17) A frog. (18) A parrot. (19) A snake. (20) The tawny green or yellow colour. (21) A peacock. (22) N. of the poet Bhartṛhari. — Comp. –akṣaḥ 1 a lion. 2. N. of Kubera. 3. of Śiva. –aśvaḥ 1 Indra. –2. Śiva. –kāṁta a. 1. dear to Indra. –2. beautiful as a lion –kelīyaḥ the country called vaṁga q. v. –keśaḥ N. of Śiva. –gaṁdhaṁ a kind of sandal. –caṁdanaḥ –naṁ 1. a kind of yellow sandal (the wood or tree); R. 3. 59, 6. 60; S. 7. 2; Ku. 5. 69. –2. one of the five trees of paradise; paṁcaite devataravo maṁdāraḥ pārijātakaḥ . saṁtānaḥ kalpavṛkṣaśca puṁsi vā haricaṁdanaṁ Ak. ( –naṁ.) 1. moonlight. –2. saffron. –3. the filament of a lotus. –tālaḥ (by some regarded as derived from harita) a kind of yellow-coloured pigeon. ( –laṁ) yellow orpiment; H. D. 1; Śi. 4. 21; Ku. 7. 23, 33. ( –lī) (1) the Dūrvā grass. –2. a streak or line in the sky. –3. = haritālikā (1). –tālakaḥ a kind of yellow-coloured pigeon. (–kaṁ) 1. yellow orpiment. –2. a theatrical de coration. –tālikā 1. the fourth day of the bright half of Bhādrapada. –2. the Dūrvā plant. –turaṁgamaḥ N. of Indra. –dāsaḥ a worshipper or votary of Viṣṇu. –dinaṁ a particular day sacred to Viṣṇu. –devaḥ the asterism Śravaṇa. –dravaḥ 1. a green fluid. –2. powder of the blossoms of the Nāgakeśara tree. –druḥ a tree. –dvāraṁ N. of a celebrated Tīrtha or sacred bathing-place. –netraṁ 1. the eye of Viṣṇu. –2. the white lotus. (–traḥ) an owl. –padaṁ the vernal equinox. –parṇaṁ a radish. –priyaḥ 1. the Kadamba tree. –2. a conch-shell. –3. a fool. –4. a madman. –5. Śiva. (–yaṁ) the root Uśīra. –2. a sort of sandal. –priyā 1. Lakṣmī. –2. the sacred basil. –3. the earth. –4. the twelfth day of a lunar fortnight. –bhaktaḥ a worshipper of Viṣṇu. –bhuj m. a snake. –maṁthaḥ, –maṁthakaḥ a chick-pea. –locanaḥ 1. a crab. –2. an owl. –vaṁśaḥ N. of a celebrated work by Vyāsa supplementary to the Mahābhārata. –varṣaḥ N. of one of the nine divisions of Jambudvīpa. –vallabhā 1. Lakṣmī. –2. the sacred basil. –vāsaraḥ ‘Viṣṇu’s day,’ the eleventh day of a lunar fortnight (ekādaśī). –vāhanaḥ 1. Garuḍa. –2. Indra. -diś f. the east. –vījaṁ yellow orpiment. –śaraḥ an epithet of Śiva (Viṣṇu having served Śiva as the shaft which burnt down ‘the three cities’ or cities of the demon Tripura). –sakhaḥ a Gandharva. –saṁkīrtanaṁ repeating the name of Viṣṇu. –sutaḥ, –sūnuḥ N. of Arjuna. –hayaḥ 1. Indra; R. 9. 18. –2. the sun. –3. N. of Skanda. –4. of Gaṇeśa. –haraḥ a particular form of deity consisting of Viṣṇu and Śiva conjoined. -ātmakaḥ 1. N. of Garuḍa. –2. of Śiva’s bull. –hetiḥ f. 1. the rain-bow; kathamavalokayeyamadhunā harihetimatīḥ (kakubhaḥ) Māl. 9. 18. –2. the discus of Viṣṇu. -hūtiḥ the ruddy goose; Śi. 9. 15. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch hari UṆĀDIS. 4, 118. 1) adj. “fahl, blassgelb, gelblich” (namentlich als Farbe des Rosses); “grünlich” AK. 3, 4, 25, 177. H. 1396. an. 2, 470. fg. MED. r. 100. fg. HALĀY. 4, 50. ṚV. 4, 15, 7. 8. 5, 27, 2. Agni heisst vṛṣā hariḥ 7, 10, 1. 8, 25, 23. VS. 13, 42. insbes. der Rosse des Indra NAIGH. 1, 15. du. ṚV. 1, 20, 2. 35, 2. 55, 7 u.s.w. 2, 18, 4. TS. 6, 5, 9, 2. pl. ṚV. 3, 44, 1. 50, 2. 4, 16, 1 u.s.w. 6, 47, 18. des Vāyu 4, 48, 5. harīṇāṁ patiḥ 8, 24, 14. als Farbe des Soma 1, 121, 8. 8, 58, 5. 9, 30, 5. 32, 2. 50, 3. divā harirdadṛśe naktamṛjraḥ 97, 9. 10, 96, 2. 6. VS. 8, 11. der Soma – Steine ṚV. 3, 44, 1. 5. des Indra – Keils 4. Indra’s selbst (nach Comm.) 3. des Feuers 8, 43, 4. des suparṇa AV. 19, 65, 1. der Sonne ṚV. 10, 96, 1. 1, 95, 1. des haṁsa AV. 10, 8, 18. vṛṣā hariḥ VS. 38, 22; vgl. ŚAT. BR. 14, 3, 1, 26 und vārṣāhara. Haare ŚAT. BR. 1, 1, 4, 2. 3, 2, 1, 3. pitā hariḥ heisst Varuṇa AV. 5, 11, 1. — Rosse (subst. s. bes.) MBH. 3, 1720. R. 3, 9, 5. 10. 5, 12, 34. RAGH. 3, 43. 12, 84. -śmaśrujaṭādhara MBH. 13, 2660. -locana R. 4, 16, 9. candana (vgl. haricandana) MBH. 7, 2922. -madhyā (zugleich Viṣṇu) RĀJA-TAR. 3, 416. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 34, 2. śaṣpa BHĀG. P. 10, 20, 11. -dhūmrakeśa HARIV. 12949. -piṅga MBH. 1, 8080. -piṅgala 13, 7414. R. GORR. 1, 60, 12. 4, 20, 21. 7, 23, 4, 32. — 2) m. a) “Ross”, insbes. Indra’s (s. auch unter 1) AK. H. 1233. TRIK. 2, 8, 41 (hariḥ krāntaḥ zu lesen). H. an. MED. HALĀY. 2, 281. 5, 70. MBH. 3, 11903. 11921. 12003. 13, 4896. HARIV. 4943. RAGH. 12, 103. KATHĀS. 19, 108. harito harīṁśca “die Rosse des Sonnengottes und” Indra’s ŚĀK. 6, 5. 166. BHĀG. P. 8, 11, 16. — b) “Löwe” AK. 2, 5, 1. 3, 4, 25, 177. H. 1283. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 2, 59. 5, 70. MBH. 3, 15645. 7, 7634. R. 2, 97, 5. RAGH. 2, 59. VIKR. 16. ZdmG.27, 96. SĀH. D. 237, 16. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 11, 47. Spr. (II) 3366. BHĀG. P. 3, 21, 44. 8, 2, 6. 10, 9. 10, 53, 56. — c) “der Löwe im Thierkreise” VARĀH. BṚH. 18, 16. 19, 2. 24, 14. — d) “Affe” AK. 3, 4, 25, 177. H. 1292. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 2, 76. 5, 70. MBH. 1, 2624. 2628. 3, 16275. R. 1, 16, 6. 2, 96, 22. 3, 20, 26. 78, 19. 4, 28, 28. 38, 26. 30. 7, 91, 10. UTTARAR. 65, 14 (84, 9). RAGH. 12, 57. 15, 99. WEBER, RĀMAT. UP. 299. — e) “Schakal” (bhīru) NĀNĀRTHADHVANIM. in Verz. d. Oxf. H. 194,a, No. 445. — f) “Papagei” AK. H. an. MED. “Pfau, der indische Kuckuck” und “Gans” ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — g) “Frosch” AK. H. 1354. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 3, 40. 5, 70. “Schlange” AK. H. an. MED. — h) “Phaseolus Mungo” (mudga) H. 1172. — i) “die Sonne” AK. TRIK. 1, 1, 99. H. an. MED. HĀR. 11. HALĀY. 1, 35. 5, 70. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 24, 18. — k) “Lichtstrahl” AK. TRIK. 1, 1, 86. H. an. MED. — l) “der Mond” AK. H. an. MED. HĀR. 13. HALĀY. 5, 70. — m) “Wind” AK. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 1, 76. 5, 70. “der Gott des Windes” R. ed. Bomb. 1, 32, 23. vāyu v. l. im Comm. — n) ein Name a) Indra’s AK. TRIK.1,1,57. H. 171. H. an. MED. HALĀY.1,52.5,70. JAṬĀDH. in Verz. d. Oxf. H. 191,a,29. Spr. (II) 207. R.1,15,26. RAGH.3,43. 55. 68.9,57. 12,103. ŚĀK. 95,1. 156. 162. BRAHMA-P. in LA. (III) 53,19. SĀH. D. 237,16. — b) Viṣṇu’s oder Kṛṣṇa’s AK. TRIK. 1, 1, 28. H. 214. H. an. HALĀY. 1, 23. 5, 70. Ind. St. 1, 79. 2, 7. 92. 9, 81. BHAG. 11, 9. 18, 77. MBH. 1, 1167. 3, 15553.6, 301. HARIV. 10. 2382. 7447. R. 1, 31, 13. 45, 23. RAGH. 3, 49. KUMĀRAS. 7, 44. ŚĀK. 165. WEBER, RĀMAT. UP. 286. KṚṢṆAJ. 222 u.s.w. Spr. (II) 671. 3452. 6408. 6859. 7173. 7369. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 98, 5. 99, 1. RĀJA-TAR. 3, 126. 416 (zugleich adj.). 451. PRAB. 54,12. BHĀG. P.1,2,23.4,30,24.7,10,24.8,1,30. PAÑCAT. Pr. 1. VET. in LA. (III)1,14. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 45,b,31. SĀH. D. 237,16. HALL 126. SARVADARŚANAS. 46,3. 57. 16. 66,15. 67,9. 69,13. 17. 72,4. BURNOUF, Intr. 131. — g) Jama’s AK. H. 184. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 1, 72. 5, 70. — d) Brahman’s und Śiva’s MED. hariṁ (= Brahman Comm.) harantamanuyanti devāḥ TAITT. ĀR. 10, 49. — e) Śukra’s und Suparṇa’s (vgl. unter 1) NĀNĀRTHADHVANIM. a. a. O. — z) “des Feuers” ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. KĀLAC. 1, 15. — o) “ein best. Metrum: metrical sequence”COLEBR. Misc. Ess. 2, 162 (XII, 8). — p) elliptisch für -nakṣatra “das” Nakshatra Śravaṇa VARĀH. BṚH. S. 60, 21. 98, 17; vgl. harideva. — q) pl. = apatya NAIGH. 2, 2. — r) “eine best. hohe Zahl” bei den Buddhisten VYUTP. 182. Mel. asiat. 4, 638, N. — s) N. pr. a) pl. einer Klasse von Göttern unter Manu Tāmasa VP. 262. MĀRK. P. 74, 57. BHĀG. P. 8, 1, 28. = jayāḥ in einer früheren Geburt Verz. d. Oxf. H. 56,b,33. — b) eines Sohnes des Garuḍa MBH. 5, 3598. — g) eines Rākṣasa MBH. 3, 16365. — d) eines Dānava HARIV. 2283. 14284. — e) verschiedener Männer: ein Sohn Akampana’s (Anukampaka’s) MBH. 7, 2030. fgg. 12, 9151. fgg. Tārakākṣa’s 8, 1417. fgg. Parājit’s HARIV. 1980. Parāvṛt’s VP. 421, N. 12. ein Verehrer Viṣṇu’s BHĀG. P. 5, 4, 11. = bhartṛ- TRIK.2,7,26. ZdmG.7,164. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 161,b,9. 162,b,30. 247,b,13. Verz. d. Tüb. H. 13. SARVADARŚANAS. 140,1. 144,5. 146,5. — Verz. d. B. H. No. 969. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 320,b, No. 760. 335,a, No. 787. 352,b,7 (sein Geschlecht). RĀJA-TAR. 6, 166. HALL 31. 50. 75. — z) einer Welt H. an. MED.; vgl. harivarṣa. — 3) f. harī N. “der Urmutter der Affen” MBH. 1, 2624. 2628. R. 3, 20, 26. — Vgl. nara-, nṛ-, bhartṛ-, vana-, śrī-, sarva-. hari (von 1. har) adj. “tragend” u. s. w. in dṛti- und nātha- P. 3, 2, 25. hari1 1) Adj. “fahl, blassgelb, gelblich” (namentlich als Farbe des Rosses) ; “grünlich.” 2) m. a) “Ross”, insbes. Indra’s. b) “Löwe.” c) “der Löwe im Thierkreise.” d) “Affe.” e) “Schakal.” f) “Papagei” g) Pfau ; der indische Kuckuck. (!) h) Gans i) “Frosch.” k) “Schlange.” l) “Phaseolus Mungo.” m) “die Sonne.” n) “Lichtstrahl.” o) “der Mond.” p) “Feuer.” q) “Wind, der Gott des Windes.” r) Bein. a) Indra’s. b) Viṣṇu-Kṛṣṇa’s. g) Jama’s. d) Brahman’s. e) *Śiva’s. z) Śukra’s. h) Suparṇa’s. s) “ein best. Metrum.” t) elliptisch für harinakṣatra “das Mondhaus Śravaṇa” u) “eine best. hohe Zahl” (buddh.). v) Pl. = apatya. w) N.pr. a) Pl. einer Klasse von Göttern unter Manu Tāmasa und = jayās in einer früheren Geburt. b) eines Sohnes des Garuḍa. g) eines Rākṣasa. d) eines Dānava. e) verschiedener Männer. z) eines Berges VP.2,4,41. h) einer Welt. 3) f. harī N.pr. “der Urmutter der Affen.” hari2 Adj. “tragend” u.s.w. in dṛti- und nātha-. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 hari 1 I A synonym of Viṣṇu. (See under Viṣṇu). hari 2 II A warrior of Subrahmaṇya. (Śalya Parva, Chapter 45, Verse 61). hari 3 III A warrior who fought on the side of the Pāṇḍavas and was killed by Karṇa. hari 4 IV An asura, the son of Tārakākṣa, who got from Brahmā a boon enabling him to prepare Mṛtasaṅjīvanī. (a medicine to revive dead people). (Karṇa Parva, Chapter 33, Verse 27). hari 5 V Son of King Akaṁpana. Though he was as powerful and proficient in archery as Mahāviṣṇu, and equal in prowess to Indra in war he got into the hands of his enemies and was killed. (Droṇa Parva, Chapter 52, Verse 27). hari 6 VI A particular sect of the attendants of Rāvaṇa. They attacked the army of monkeys. (Vana Parva, Chapter 285). hari 7 VII A very powerful bird born in Garuḍa’s dynasty. (Udyoga Parva, Chapter 101, Verse 13). hari 7i VIII A particular species of horses. They possess long hairs on the neck and are golden in colour. (Droṇa Parva, Chapter 23, Verse 13). hari 1x IX A daughter born to Kaśyapaprajāpati by his wife Krodhavaśā. Lions and monkeys originated from this Hari. (Vālmīki Rāmāyaṇa, Araṇyakāṇḍa, Canto 14). hari x X A son of Dharmadeva. Dharmadeva begot four sons, Hari, Kṛṣṇa, Nara and Nārāyaṇa of the daughters of Dakṣa. (Devi Bhāgavata, 4th Skandha). hari xi XI A sect of Devas. During the Tāmasamanvantara there were four such sects, viz. Haris, Satyas, Supāras and Sudhīs. (See Manvantara). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 hari hari (curtailed harit), I. adj. 1. Green. 2. Tawny. 3. Yellow, Indr. 1, 7; Arj. 4, 12. II. m. 1. Green, tawny, yellow, the colour. 2. Viṣṇu or Kṛṣṇa, Hit. pr. d. 28, M. M.; Pañc. pr. d. 1. 3. Indra, Śāk. d. 156. 4. Śiva. 5. Yama. 6. The sun, Mālat. 149, 1. 7. The moon. 8. A ray of light. 9. Fire. 10. Wind. 11. A horse (of Indra; cf. the ved. use of harit, and Śāk. 6, 5); Arj. 4, 32. 12. A lion, Vikr. d. 16. 13. A parrot. 14. The Indian cuckoo. 15. A peacock. 16. A goose. 17. An ape, Utt. Rāmac. 84, 9. 18. A frog. 19. A snake. 20. One of the varṣas, or divisions, into which the continent is divided. — Comp. nara-, and nṛ-, m. Viṣṇu, in his fourth avatāra, as a lionheaded man, Bhāg. P. 5, 18, 7; 7, 8, 27. — Cf. A. S. growan; O.H.G. groen, groni; A. S. groen, grene; also geal, gealla; Lat. gilvus; [greek] and probably [greek] cf. harit. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 hari a. fallow, yellowish, greenish. m. horse, esp. the steeds of Indra (2, but also 20-200), lion, ape, the sun, fire, wind, E. of Viṣṇu, Indra etc. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 hari har-i, a. [3. hṛ, be yellow] tawny, yellow (esp. of horses); greenish (rare, C.); m. (C.) steed (sp. of Indra); lion; monkey; N. of Indra and (more commonly) of Viṣṇu-kṛṣṇa; N. of a various men; (hari)-keśa, a. tawny-haried; -gaṇa, m. troop of horses; N.; -ghoṣa, m. N.; -candana, m. (?) Indra’s sandal tree (one of the five trees in Indra’s paradise); kind of sandal tree; n. yellow sandal; -candra, m. N.; -cāpa, m. n. Indra’s bow, rainbow. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 hari pu° hṛ–in . 1 viṣṇau 2 siṁhe 3 sarpe 4 vānare 5 bheke 6 śukakhage amaraḥ . 7 cadre 8 sūrye 9 vāyau 10 aśve 11 yame 12 hare 13 brahmaṇi 14 kiraṇe jambudvīpasya 15 varṣabhede 16 indre ca medi° 17 mayūre 18 kokile 19 haṁse 20 vahnau śabdara° . bhartṛharināmake vākyapradīya granthakārake 21 paṇḍite trikā° . 22 piṅgalavarṇe 23 hari dvarṇe hemaca° 24 tadvati tri° . hariṁ viditvā haribhiśca vājibhiḥ raghu . 25 pīte anekārthako° . |
हरिक – harika | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899harika m. (for 2. see p.1291, col.2) a thief, gambler
harika m. (for 1. see p.1289, col, 2) a horse of a yellowish or reddish brown colour Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch harika (von 1. hari) 1) m. “ein gelbliches Ross” H. 1242. — 2) am Ende eines adj. comp. (f. ā) in a- “nicht das Wort” hari “enthaltend” (Gegens. harivant) LĀṬY. 3, 1, 18. harika (von 1. har) m. “Dieb” und “Würfelspieler” ŚABDĀRTHAK. bei WILSON. harika1 *harika m. “ein gelbliches Ross.” Vgl. aharika harika2 *harika m. 1) “Dieb.” 2) “Würfelspieler.” Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 harika hari + ka, m. A horse of a yellowish-blue tint. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 harika pu° hari + saṁjñāyāṁ kan . pītaharidvarṇāśve hemaca0 |
हरिकः – harikaḥ | Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890
harikaḥ [hari-saṁjñāyāṁ kan] 1. A horse of a yellowish or tawny colour. (2) A thief. (3) A gambler (with dice) harikaḥ A diamond. Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 harikaḥ puṁ, (harireva . hari + svārthe saṁjñāyāṁ vā kan .) pītaharitavarṇāśvaḥ . tatparyāyaḥ . hālakaḥ 2 . iti hemacandraḥ .. cauraḥ . akṣakrīḍakaḥ . iti kecit .. |
हरिण – hariṇa | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899hariṇa mf (“ī”) n. (the fem. “hariṇī” belongs to “harita”) fawn-coloured,
yellowish, tawny (also said of unhealthy complexion), greenish, green hariṇa m. yellowish (&c.) the colour hariṇa m. a deer, antelope, fawn, stag (one of 5 kinds, others being called “ṛṣya, ruru, pṛṣata, mṛga”) &c. &c. hariṇa m. an ichneumon hariṇa m. a goose hariṇa m. the sun hariṇa m. a minor division of the world hariṇa m. N. of Viṣṇu or śiva hariṇa m. of a Gaṇa of śiva hariṇa m. of a serpent. demon hariṇa m. of an ichneumon (v.l. “harita”) hariṇa mf (“ī”) n. (“ī”) f. see below. Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 hariṇa a. (ṇī f.) [hṛ-inan] (1) Pale, whitish. (2) Reddish or yel lowish white. –ṇaḥ (1) A deer, an antelope; (said to be of five kinds: –hariṇaścāpi vijñeyaḥ paṁcabhedo’tra bhairava . ṛṣyaḥ khaḍgo ruruścaiva pṛṣataśca mṛgastathā Kalikā P.); api prasannaṁ hariṇeṣu te manaḥ Ku. 5. 35. (2) The white colour. (3) A goose. (4) The sun. (5) Viṣṇu. (6) Śiva. — Comp. –akṣa a. deer-eyed, fawn-eyed. ( –kṣaḥ) N. of Śiva. ( –kṣī) ‘deer-eyed’, a woman with beautiful eyes. –aṁkaḥ 1. the moon. –2. camphor. –kalaṁkaḥ, –dhāmanu m. the moon. –nayana, –natre, –locana a. deereyed, fawn-eyed. –nartakaḥ a Kinnara. –hṛdaya a. deer-hearted, timid. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch hariṇa UṆĀDIS. 3, 46. 1) adj. proparox. ŚĀNT. 2, 10. “fahl, gelblich” (vgl. hari, harit, harita) AK. 1, 1, 4, 23. 3, 4, 13, 53. H. 1392. an. 3, 233. MED. ṇ. 87 (lies viśade). HALĀY. 4, 47. VIŚVA bei UJJVAL. die Sonne PRAŚNOP. 1, 8 = MAITRJUP. 6, 8. ein siecher Mann MBH. 2, 1741. 5, 3742. 13, 4828. 5886. 5889. fgg. f. ī s. u. harita. — 2) m. a) “Gazelle (Antilope cervicapra” MOLESWORTH s. v. haraṇa) AK. 2, 5, 8. 3, 4, 3, 24. H. 1293. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 2, 75. VIŚVA a. a. O. ṚV. 1, 163, 1. 5, 78, 2. gehörnt AV. 3, 7, 1. 2. 6, 67, 3. yaddhariṇo yavamatti VS. 23, 30. TS. 5, 5, 19, 1. ŚAT. BR. 13, 2, 9, 8. -carman KAUŚ. 16. MBH. 3, 11342. 15629. R. 2, 34, 50. SUŚR. 1, 46, 20. 73, 6. 200, 8. 15. VĀGBH. 6, 44. RAGH. 9, 57. KUMĀRAS. 5, 15. ad ŚĀK. 78. Spr. (II) 7368. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 104, 28. KATHĀS. 22, 128. 96, 26 (arthahariṇāḥ “Reichthümer als Gazellen”). BHĀG. P.3,21,44.8,2,21. PAÑCAT. 140,23. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 123,a,1. v. u. – lolākṣī R. 5, 25, 45. -locanā 33, 17. hariṇākṣa adj. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 68, 65. f. hariṇākṣī Spr. (II) 637. 2509. 6519. KATHĀS. 33, 88. PRAB. 40, 12. hariṇekṣaṇā Spr. (II) 6408. śiśuhariṇadṛś 3801. — b) “die Sonne; Gans”; ein N. Viṣṇu’s und Śiva’s ŚABDĀRTHAK. bei WILSON. — c) N. pr. a) eines Schlangendämons MBH. 1, 2152. — b) eines Gaṇa Śiva’s Journ. of the Am. Or. S. 6, 523. — g) eines Ichneumons (nakula) MBH. 12, 4942 nach der Lesart der ed. Bomb.; harita ed. Calc. — 2) f. ī gaṇa gaurādi zu P. 4, 1, 41. a) “Gazellenweibchen” AK. 3, 4, 13, 53. TS. 7, 4, 19, 2 (v. l. zu VS. 23, 20). MBH. 3, 2424. 11342. HARIV. 4827. R. 3, 62, 37. RAGH. 2, 11. 9, 55. 14, 69. Spr. (II) 1456. 7370. CAURAP. 28. BHĀG. P. 5, 8, 1. 9, 23, 8. cakitahariṇīprekṣita MEGH. 102. cakitahariṇīprekṣaṇā 80. — b) Bez. “zweier Pflanzen”: = mañjiṣṭhā und svarṇayūthī RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) Bez. “einer best. Schönen” H. an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. śukābhā HALĀY. 4, 53. — d) “eine Statue von Gold” AK. H. 1464. H. an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. HALĀY. 1, 131. Spr. (II) 5497. — e) “ein best. Metrum” H. an. (vṛtta st. vṛnta zu lesen). MED. VIŚVA. a. a. O. metrical sequenceCOLEBR. Misc. Ess. 2, 162 (XII, 4). ŚRUT. 39. CHANDOM. 93. Ind. St. 8, 394. fg. — f) Bez. “einer best.” Svarabhakti Comm. zu TS. PRĀT. 21, 15. WEBER, PRATIJÑĀS. 108. — g) N. pr. a) einer Apsaras RAGH. 8, 78. — b) einer Yakṣiṇī SCHIEFNER, Lebensb. 297 (67). — g) der Mutter Hari’s (Viṣṇu’s) BHĀG. P. 8, 1, 30. — Vgl. mandara-, vegi-, hāriṇa, hāriṇika. hariṇa 1) Adj. (f. hariṇī) gehört zu harita “fahl, gelblich” (auch von der Farbe siecher Männer) ; “grünlich, grün.” 2) m. a) “Gazelle”, wohl “Antilope cervicapra” ŚIŚ.6,9.13,56. b) “Ichneumon” MAITR.S.3,9,3 (116,17). Vgl. f)greek). c) die Sonne. d) “Gans.” e) Bein. Viṣṇu’s und Śiva’s. f) N.pr. a) eines Schlangendämons. b) eines Gaṇa Śiva’s. g) eines Ichneumons MBH.12,138,31. vgl. 20 “b).” 3) f. ī a) “Gazellenweibchen” ŚIŚ.12,30. b) “Rubia Munjista” RĀJAN.6,192. c) “gelber Jasmin” RĀJAN.10,99. d) Bez. “einer best. Schönen.” e) “eines Statue von Gold.” f) Pl. Bez. “der Verse” AV.18,2,11-18 KAUŚ.80,3.5.82.83. VAITĀN.37,24. g) “ein best. Metrum.” h) “eine best. Svarabhakti.” i) N.pr. a) einer Apsara’s. b) einer Yskṣṇī. g) der Mutter Hari’s (Viṣṇu’s). Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 hariṇa A nāga which belonged to the Airāvata family. It was burnt to death at the Sarpasatra of Janamejava. (Ādi Parva, Chapter 57, Verse 11). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 hariṇa (akin to harit, cf. hari), I. adj., f. ṇī, Yellowish-white, MBh. 13, 5893; Rājat. 5, 482. II. m. 1. Yellowish-white (the colour). 2. White. 3. A deer, an antelope, Pañc. 140, 23. 4. A goose. 5. Viṣṇu, Śiva. 6. A minor division of the world. III. f. ṇī. 1. A doe, Megh. 80; 102. 2. Yellow jasmine. 3. A beautiful woman. 4. A golden image, Rājat. 5, 15. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 hariṇa a. fallow, pale, yellowish, green; m. a kind of antelope (f. -ṇī), ichneumon, N. of a serpent-demon etc. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 hariṇa hariṇa, a. (ī) yellowish, tawny (also of unhealthy complexion); m. antelope, gazelle: -ka, m. dim. gazelle; -dhāman, m. abode of the antelope, moon; -nayanā, f. gazelle-eyed woman; -lakṣman, m. (marked with an antelope), moon; -lāñchana, m. id.; -locana, a. gazelle-eyed; -śiśu, m. fawn; -akṣa, a. (ī) gazelle-eyed: -ī, f. — woman. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 hariṇa puṁstrī° hṛ–inan . svanāmakhyāte 1 paśau amaraḥ striyāṁ ṅīṣ . 2 śive 3 viṣṇau 4 haṁse 5 śuklavarṇe 6 pāṇḍuvarṇe ca . 7 tadvati tri° amaraḥ . hariṇaḥ śītalo vaddha° viṇmūtro dīpano lathuḥ . rase pāke ca madhuraḥ sugandhaḥ sannipātahā rājava° tanmāṁsaguṇāḥ . hariṇaścāpi vijñeyaḥ pañcabhedo’tra bhairava! . ṛṣyaḥ khaṅgo ruruścaiva pṛṣataśca mṛgastathā . ete balipradāneṣu carmadāne ca kīrtitāḥ kālikāpu° 66 a° . |
हरिणी – hariṇī | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899hariṇī f. a female deer, doe &c. &c.
f. Rubia Munjista f. yellow jasmine f. one of the four kinds of beautiful women (corresponding to the kind of man termed “mṛga”) f. a golden image f. a kind of metre (four times -, ) f. a kind of Svara-bhakti (q.v.) f. N. of an Apsaras f. of a Yakṣiṇī f. of the mother of Hari (Viṣṇu) pl. N. of the verses Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 hariṇī (1) A female deer, doe; cakitahariṇīprekṣaṇā Me. 82, R. 9. 55, 14. 69. (2) One of the four classes of women (also called citriṇī q. v.) (3) Yellow jasmine. (4) A good golden image. (5) N. of a metre. (6) The green colour. (7) Turmeric. (8) Madder. — Comp. –dṛś a. deer-eyed. (–f.) a deer-eyed woman; kimabhavadvipine hariṇīdṛśaḥ U. 3. 27. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch hariṇī s. u. hariṇa und harita. hariṇī s.u. hariṇa und harita. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 hariṇī A daughter of Hiraṇyakaśipu, also called Rohiṇī. She was married to Viśvapati, an Asura. Vana Parva, 211, 18). Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 hariṇī -> hariṇa & harita. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 hariṇī hariṇī, f. (of hariṇa) V., C.: female deer, gazelle; C.: golden image; N. of an Apsaras: -dṛś, f. gazelle-eyed woman; -nay-anā, f. id.; -rūpā-ya, den. Ā. resemble a gazelle. Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 hariṇī strī, (hariṇa + ṅīṣ .) mṛgī . (yathā, raghuḥ . 2 . 11 . dhanurbhṛto’pyasya dayārdrabhāvamākhyātamantaḥkaraṇairviśaṅkaiḥ . vilokayantyo vapurāpurakṣṇāṁprakāmavistāraphalaṁ hariṇyaḥ ..) svarṇapratimā . ityamaraḥ . 3 . 4 . 50 .. (harita + ṅīṣ . tasya naḥ .) haritā . nārībhedaḥ . vṛttabhedaḥ . iti medinī .. (tallakṣaṇaṁ yathā — nasamaralā gaḥ ṣaḍvedairhayairhariṇī matā .. vistārastu chandaḥśabde draṣṭavyaḥ ..) mañjiṣṭhā svarṇayūthī . iti rājanirghaṇṭaḥ .. taruṇī . varastrī . iti śabdaratnāvalī .. (surāṅganābhedaḥ . yathā, raghuḥ . 8 . 79 . carataḥ kila duścaraṁ tapastṛṇavindoḥ pariśaṅkitaḥ purā . prajighāya samādhibhedinīṁ harirasmai hariṇīṁ surāṅganām ..) Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 hariṇī strī haritavarṇā strī ṅīṣ tasya naḥ . 1 haritadvaṇāṁyāṁ striyāṁ medi° 2 svarṇapratimāyām amaraḥ . 3 svarṇayuthyāṁ 4 mañjiṣṭhāyāṁ rājani° . 5 taruṇyāṁ 6 varastriyāṁ śabdara° vasuyugahayainarsau mnau mlo go yadā hariṇī tadā vṛ° ra° uktalakṣaṇake 7 saptadaśākṣarapādake chandomede hariṇasya strī ṅīṣ . 8 mṛgyāñca 9 apsarogede . carataḥ kila duścaraṁ tapaḥ pṛṇavindīḥ pariśaṅkitaḥ purā . prajighāya samādhibhedigīṁ harirasmai hariṇīṁ surāṅganām raghuḥ . |
हरित् – harit | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899harit mfn. fawn-coloured, pale yellow, yellowish, pale red, fallow, bay,
tawny, greenish &c. &c. harit m. pale yellow, reddish, bay (the colour) harit m. a horse of the Sun (“harito harīṁś ca”, acc pl. “the horses of the Sun and of Indra”) harit m. emerald harit m. a lion harit m. the sun harit m. N. of Viṣṇu harit m. Phaseolus Mungo (prob. w.r. for “hari”) harit f. a female horse of a reddish colour, a bay mare (applied to the horses of Soma, Indra, and Tvaṣṭṛi, and esp. to “sapta-haritaḥ”, “the 7 horses of the Sun”, thought to symbolize the days of the week) harit f. a quarter of the sky &c. harit pl. rivers (= “nadyas”) mfn. grass or a species of grass mfn. turmeric Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 harit a. [hṛ-iti] (1) Green, green ish. (2) Yellow, yellowish. (3) Greenish-yellow. –m. (1) The green or yellow colour. (2) A horse of the sun, a bay horse; satyamatītya harito harīṁśca vartate vājinaḥ S. 1.; diśo haridbhirharitāmiveśvaraḥ R. 3. 30, Ku. 2. 43. (3) A swift horse. (4) A lion. (5) The sun (6) Viṣṇu. (7) The kidneybean. –m. n. (1) Grass. (2) A quarter, region. (3) A quarter or point of the compass; R. 3. 30. (4) Turmeric (usually f. only in the last 3 senses). –COMP. –aṁtaḥ the end of the quarters (digaṁta); Bv. 1. 60. –aṁtaraṁ different regions, various quarters; Bv. 1. 15. –aśvaḥ (1) the sun; Ki. 2. 46; R. 3. 22, 18. 23; Śi. 11. 56. –2. the arka plant. –garbhaḥ green or yellowish Kuśa grass with broad leaves. –parṇaṁ a radish. –maṇiḥ (harinmaṇiḥ) an emerald; Śi. 3. 49. –varṇa a. greenish, green-coloured. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch harit UṆĀDIS. 1, 99. ŚĀNT. 2, 10. 1) adj. “falb, gelblich, grünlich” (m. “gelbe” u. s. w. “Farbe”) AK. 1, 1, 4, 24. 3, 4, 23, 145. 6, 2, 19. TRIK. 3, 3, 194. H. 1394. an. 2, 210. MED. t. 174. HALĀY. 4, 49. VIŚVA bei UJJVAL. f. “eine falbe Stute” ṚV. 10, 33, 5. (agneḥ) yukṣvā hyaruṣī rathe harito deva rohitaḥ 1, 14, 12. 4, 6, 9. 7, 5, 5. 42, 2. der Sonne (vgl. 2) a) NAIGH. 1, 15. sieben ṚV. 1, 50, 8. 115, 3. fgg. 121, 13. 4, 13, 3. 5, 45, 10. 7, 60, 3. svasāraḥ 66, 15. zehn 9, 63, 9 (vgl. jedoch SV. II, 5, 1, 8, 3). sūraścidā harito asya rīramat 10, 92, 8. AV. 13, 2, 4. 6. 28. 3, 17. TS. 2, 3, 8, 2. Indra’s du. ṚV. 3, 44, 3. des Tvaṣṭar 6, 47, 19. Soma 9, 69, 9. seine Rosse suparṇyaḥ 86, 37. die Finger 38, 3. – PAÑCAR. 1, 7, 31. – śmaśru MBH. 7, 7894 (hari- ed. Bomb.). R. GORR. 1, 15, 4. haridbhūtaṁ jalam 4, 40, 50. marakata (vgl. harinmaṇi) BHĀG. P. 8, 2, 4. — 2) m. a) “Sonnenross” TRIK. 2, 8, 42. H. an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. KUMĀRAS. 2, 43. RAGH. 3, 30. ŚĀK. 6, 5. — b) = harinmaṇi “Smaragd” BHĀG. P. 10, 41, 21. — c) “Löwe; die Sonne”; ein N. Viṣṇu’s ŚABDĀRTHAK. bei WILSON. — d) “Phaseolus Mungo” (mudga) schlechte v. l. für hari H. 1172. — 3) f. a) “Weltgegend” NAIGH. 1, 6. AK. 1, 1, 2, 2. TRIK. 3, 3, 194. H. 166. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 1, 100. VIŚVA a. a. O. pavamāno harita ā viveśa ṚV. 8, 90, 14 (vgl. v. l. AV. 10, 8, 3). ŚAT. BR. 2, 5, 1, 5. pratīcī R. 7, 75, 10. RAGH. 3, 30. Spr. (II) 4758. aindrī (vom Vorhergehenden zu trennen) KATHĀS. 103, 204. dhanapateḥ RĀJA-TAR. 1, 43. uttara- 290. SĀH. D. 79,13. 312,1. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 255,b,19. — b) pl. so v. a. nadyaḥ “Flüsse” NAIGH. 1, 13. — 4) “Gras” MED. (m. n.). VIŚVA; “ein best. Gras” H. an. Dūrvā-“Gras” VIŚVA. — Vgl. hari und harita. harit 1) Adj. “falb, gelblich, grünlich”, 2) m. a) “Sonnenross.” b) “Smaragd.” c) “Löwe.” d) “die Sonne.” e) Bein. Viṣṇu’s. f) “Phaseolus Mungo.” Richtig hari 3) f. a) “eine falbe Stute.” b) “Weltgegend.” c) Pl. “Flüsse.” 4) m. n. “Gras oder ein best. Gras, Dūrvā-Gras.” Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 harit harit (for original harant, cf. hiraṇa), I. adj. Green. II. m. 1. Green, the colour. 2. A horse of the sun (properly, his rays), Chr. 287, 8 = Rigv. i. 50, 8. 3. A lion. 4. The sun, Śāk. 6, 5. 5. Viṣṇu. 6. Kidney bean. III. m. and n. Grass. IV. f. 1. A quarter, or point of the compass, Śiś, 9, 28. 2. Turmeric. — Cf. [greek] Goth. gulth; A. S. gold (see hari, Yellow, and hiraṇa); akin is also Goth. glitmunjan, To shine; cf. also [greek] Goth. gras; A. S. graes. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 harit a. fallow, yellowish, greenish. m. a fallow horse, esp. of the Sun- god, emerald; f. a fallow mare; region, quarter of the sky. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 harit har-it, a. [3. hṛ] yellowish, tawny; greenish (rare, P.); m. (C.) horse of the sun; emerald (rare, P.); f. tawny mare (V.); quarter of the sky (V., C.). Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 harit puṁ, (harati nayanamanāṁsīti . hṛ + hṛsṛruhiyuṣibhya iti . uṇā° 1 . 99 . iti itiḥ .) nīlapītamiśritavarṇaḥ . sabujaraṅ iti bhāṣā .. tatparyāyaḥ . pālāśaḥ 2 haritaḥ 3 . ityamaraḥ . 1 . 5 . 14 .. śyāmaḥ 4 . iti śabdaratnāvalī .. aśvaviśeṣaḥ . iti medinī .. sūryāśvaḥ . iti trikāṇḍaśeṣaḥ .. yathā, kumāre . 2 . 43 . utpāṭya meruśṛṅgāṇi kṣuṇṇāni haritāṁ khuraiḥ . ākroḍaparvatāstena kalpitāḥ sveṣu veśmasu ..) mudgaḥ . iti hemacandraḥ .. siṁhaḥ . sūryaḥ . viṣṇuḥ . iti kecit .. haridvarṇaviśiṣṭe, tri .. harit strī, (hṛ + itiḥ .) dik . ityamaraḥ . 1 . 3 . 1 .. (yathā, raghuḥ . 3 . 30 . tatāra vidyāḥ pavanātipātibhirdiśo haridbhirharitāmiveśvaraḥ ..) haridrā . iti rājanirghaṇṭaḥ .. harit puṁ, klī, (hṛ + itiḥ .) tṛṇam . iti medinī .. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 harit pu° hṛ–iti . 1 nīlapītamiśritavarṇe (pātāraraṅga palāśavarṇa ca amaraḥ 2 tadvati tri° . 3 sūryāśve trikā° 4 mudge hemaca° . 5 siṁhe 6 sūrye 7 viṣṇau ca pu° 8 diśi strī amaraḥ . 9 haridrāyāṁ rājani° 10 tṛṇe na° medi° . |
हरित – harita | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899harita mf (“ā” or “hariṇī”) n. yellowish, pale yellow, fallow, pale red, pale
(also, “pale with fright”), greenish, green (also; “verdant” as opp. to “śuṣka” “dry”) &c. &c. harita m. yellowish (the colour) harita m. Phaseolus Mungo qr Lobatus harita m. a lion harita m. N. of a son of Kaiśyapa harita m. of a son of Yadu harita m. of a son of Rohita harita m. of a son of Rohitāśva harita m. of a son of Yuvanāśva harita m. of a son of Parāvṛit harita m. of a son of Vapushmat harita m. of an ichneumon (v.l. “hariṇa”) harita m. pl. the descendants of Harita (also called “harītāḥ”), āśvśr. (cf. mf (“ā” or “hariṇī”) n. N. of partic. verses of the (also “haretā mantrāḥ”) mf (“ā” or “hariṇī”) n. of a class of gods in the 12th Manvantara harita mf (“ā” or “hariṇī”) n. (“ā”) f. Dūrvā grass (= “nīla-dūrva” mf (“ā” or “hariṇī”) n. turmeric mf (“ā” or “hariṇī”) n. a brown-coloured grape mf (“ā” or “hariṇī”) n. Sesbana Aegyptiaca mf (“ā” or “hariṇī”) n. a kind of Svara-bhakti harita n. a yellowish or greenish substance harita n. gold harita n. greens, vegetables (“unripe grain” harita n. a kind of fragrant plant (= “sthauṇcyaka”) Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 harita a. (tā or hariṇī f.) [hṛ-itac] Green, of a green colour, verdant; ramyāṁtaraḥ kamalinīharitaiḥ sarobhiḥ S. 4. 10; Ku. 4. 14; Me. 21; Ki. 5. 38. (2) Tawny. (3) Dark-blue. –taḥ (1) The green colour. (2) A lion. (3) A kind of grass. — Comp. –aśman m. 1. an emerald. –2. blue vitriol. –chada a. green-leaved. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch harita UṆĀDIS. 3, 93. 1) adj. (f. ā und hariṇī ŚĀNT. 2, 20. P. 4, 1, 39. VOP. 4, 27. AK. 3, 4, 13, 53. H. an. 3, 233. MED. ṇ. 87. VIŚVA bei UJJVAL. zu UṆĀDIS. 2, 46. hariṇī in der älteren, haritā in der späteren Sprache) “falb, gelblich; grünlich, grün” (daher auch im Gegensatz zu śuṣka dem “verdorrten Kraut”) AK. 1, 1, 4, 24. 3, 4, 13, 53. H. 1395. MED. t. 175. HALĀY. 4, 49. mṛga ṚV. 10, 86, 3. Rosse MBH. 13, 4923. Bart des Indra ṚV. 10, 23, 4. Wagen u. s. w. 3, 44, 1. 4. 10, 96, 3. 9. Soma und was dazu gehört: śṛṅge śiśāno hariṇī 9, 70, 7. ruc 111, 1. 10, 94, 2. AV. 6, 49, 2. dhānāḥ 18, 4, 34. Frosch ṚV. 7, 103, 4. 6. 10. takman AV. 1, 23, 2. 5, 22, 2. 6, 20, 3. śocañchuṣkāsu hariṇīṣu jarbhurat ṚV. 10, 92, 1. vanaspati 9, 5, 10. AV. 10, 8, 31. kuśa ŚAT. BR. 4, 5, 10, 6. Gras LĀṬY. 2, 11, 15. KĀṬH. 32, 1. KAUṢ. UP. 2, 8. HARIV. 3574. R. GORR. 2, 65, 16. 3, 73, 39. KIR. 5, 38. AK. 2, 1, 10. 9, 16. TRIK. 3, 3, 297. H. 955. HALĀY. 2, 4. BHĀG. P. 3, 22, 30. Bohne SUŚR. 1, 197, 18. kamalinīharitaiḥ sarobhiḥ ŚĀK. 86. – ŚAT. BR. 14, 7, 1, 20. ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 4, 4. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 5, 54. 8, 17. 9, 44. 30, 12. fg. 54, 30. 34. 67, 5. 68, 91. BṚH. 2, 5. LAGHUJ. 1, 6. WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 270. -puṣpa KAUŚ.10. 26. 116. vaiḍūryamaṇiratnābhaḥ prāsādo haritaprabhaḥ HARIV. 8985. -pāṇḍu SUŚR. 1, 159, 19. -kapiśa MEGH. 21. haritāruṇa KUMĀRAS. 4, 14. – gomaya wohl “frischer Kuhmist” KAUŚ. 19. GOBH. 4, 8, 12. “gelb” als Farbe des Goldes AV. 4, 37, 4. 7, 99, 1. 10, 2, 33. 3, 3. 11, 2, 12. 15, 2, 1. ŚAT. BR. 12, 4, 4, 6. rukma KĀṬH. 10, 14. VS. 23, 37. AIT. BR. 1, 23. TS. 6, 2, 3, 1. TBR. 1, 8, 9, 1. 2, 2, 9, 8. 3, 9, 6, 5. “gelb” (vor Schrecken), “bleich” (vgl. hariṇa) TS. 6, 5, 5, 2. hariṇī śyāvā “gelbbraun” (ohne Röthe) als Farbe der Schwangeren TBR. 2, 3, 8, 1. — 2) m. a) “Phaseolus Mungo” (mudga) H. 1172. “ein best. Gras”, = manthānaka RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — b) “Löwe” ŚABDĀRTHAK. bei WILSON. — c) pl. Bez. eines Abschnittes des AV. 19, 22, 5. hierher vielleicht haritā mantrāḥ (so trennen wir) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 93,a,1 v. u. — d) N. pr. a) pl. einer Klasse von Göttern im 12ten Manvantara MĀRK. P. 94, 23. BHĀG. P. 8, 13, 29. — b) verschiedener Männer P. 4, 1, 100. PRAVARĀDHY. in Verz. d. B. H. 56, 7 (haritakutsa- zu lesen; vgl. ĀŚV. ŚR. 12, 12, 3). Kaśyapa ŚAT. BR. 14, 9, 4, 33. ein Sohn Jadu’s HARIV. 4206. Rohita’s 758. BHĀG. P. 9, 8, 1. Rohitāśva’s VP. 373. Yuvanāśva’s 369. Parāvṛt’s (vgl. hari) 420. 421, N. 13. Vapushmant’s MĀRK. P. 53, 27. pl. Harita’s Nachkommen (vgl. hārita) P. 2, 4, 67, Vārtt. ĀŚV. ŚR. 12, 12, 3 (im comp.). — g) eines Ichneumons (nakula) MBH. 12, 4942. hariṇa ed. Bomb. — 3) f. haritā a) Dūrvā-“Gras” TRIK. 3, 3, 194. MED. = haridrā “Gelbwurz” DHANV. 1, 17. RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. = jayantī, kapiladrākṣā, pācī und nīladūrvā RĀJAN. ebend. — b) “eine best.” Svarabhakti (v. l. haritā und hā-) Comm. zu TS. PRĀT. 21, 15. — 4) f. hariṇī s. u. hariṇa — 5) n. a) “Gold” AV. 5, 28, 5. 9. 11, 3, 8. KĀṬH. 8, 5. — b) “Grünes” so v. a. “Gemüse” CARAKA 1, 27. — c) “eine best. wohlriechende Pflanze”, = sthauṇeyaka RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — Vgl. pīta- und hārita. harita 1) Adj. (f. haritā) in der älteren Sprache hariṇī “falb, gelblich” (von der Gesichtsfarbe eines Erschrockenen) ; “grünlich, grün” 304,23. 2) m. a) “Phaseolus Mungo.” b) “eine best. Grasart”, = manthānaka RĀJAN.8,135. c) “Löwe.” d) Pl. Bez. “bestimmter Sprüche.” Auch haritā mantrāḥ. e) N.pr. a) Pl. einer Gruppe von Göttern unter dem 12ten Manu. b) verschiedener Männer. g) eines Ichneumons. 3) f. haritā a) “Dūrvā- Gras” ŚIŚ.4,21 (am Ende eines adj. Comp. f. ā) = nīladūrvā RĀJAN.8,108. b) “Gelbwurz.” c) “grüne Traube” RĀJAN.11,104. d) “Sesbania aegyptiaca” RĀJAN.4,133. e) “eine best. Svarabhakti.” 4) n. a) “gelblicher oder grünlicher Stoff” ŚAT.BR.14,7,1,20.2,12. b) “Gold.” c) “Grünes”, so v.a. “Gemüse” VIṢṆUS.5,85 (nach dem Comm. “unreifes Getraide).” d) eine best. wohlriechende Pflanze, = sthauṇeyaka. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 harita 1 I A King who was the grandson of Hariścandra and son of Rohita. (Bhāgavata, 10th Skandha). harita 2 II A King, who was the son of Vapuṣmān and grandson of Svāyambhuvamanu. He was King of Haritavarṣa in the island of Śālmali. (Mārkaṇḍeya Purāṇa 50, 28; Brahmāṇḍa Purāṇa, 2, 3). harita 3 III A son born to Yadu of the nāga woman called Dhūmravaṇā. He founded an independent kingdom in the Nāga island and became a prominent leader of the Madgura tribe. (Hari Vaṁśa, 2, 38; 29, 34). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 harita harita, I. adj., f. tā, or iṇī (cf. hariṇa), 1. Green, Megh. 21; Hit. i. d. 178, M. M. (in haritī-kṛta, adj. Made green) 2. Dark blue, Kir. 5, 38. 3. Grassy. II. m. 1. Green, the colour. 2. A lion. III. f. tā. 1. Bent grass. 2. Turmeric. 3. A brown grape. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 harita (f. ā, older hariṇī fallow, pale, yellow, green. m. N. of sev. men etc.; f. haritā Dūrvā grass; n. gold, greens, any yellowish or greenish substance. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 harita har-ita, a. (ā, C.: hariṇī, V.) yellowish, tawny; pale (with fright); greenish, green (C.); n. gold (V.); vegetable (C.): -ka, a. green; n. grass; vegetable; -kapiśa, a. yellowish brown; -cchada, a. having green leaves; -dhānya, n. green = unripe corn; -pattra-maya, a. (ī) formed of green leaves; (harita) -sraj, a. bearing yellow (or green) festoons (trees; AV.); adorned with a golden chain (steed; Br.). Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 harita pu° hṛ–itac . 1 siṁhe 2 manthānatṛṇe rājani° 3 haridvarṇe 4 tadvati tri° amaraḥ striyāṁ ṅīp tasya naśca . 5 dūrvāyāṁ medi° 6 jayantyāṁ 7 haridrāyāṁ 8 kapiladrākṣāyāṁ 9 pācyāṁ 10 nīladūrvāyāñca strī rājani° ṭāp . 11 sthauṇeyake na° rājani° . |
हरितत्व – haritatva | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899haritatva “harita-tva” n. yellowish green (the colour)
Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch haritatva n. Nom. anstr. zu harita 1) CARAKA.124,6. |
हरिताल – haritāla | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899haritāla m. a kind of pigeon of a yellowish green colour, Columba
Hurriyals haritāla n. yellow orpiment or sulphuret of arsenic (described as the seed or seminal energy of Viṣṇu = “harer vīryam”) Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 haritāla &c. See under hari. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch haritāla (von harita) 1) m. “eine Taubenart, Columba Hurriyala” (s. HAUGHTON unter hariyāla) RĀJAVALLABHA im ŚKDR. — 2) f. ī a) = dūrvā “Panicum Dactylon” H. 1193. an. 4, 300. MED. l. 167. HĀR. 240. HALĀY. 2, 36. — b) “Schwertklinge” H. an. VIŚVA im ŚKDR. — c) Bez. “des 4ten (3ten) Tages in der lichten Hälfte des” Bhādrapada RĀJAMĀRTAṆḌA im ŚKDR. — d) “eine best. Linie am Himmel” H. an. MED. “der Luftraum” (chāyāpatha) HĀR. — 3) n. AK. 3, 6, 3, 32. “Auripigment, Arsenicum flavum” TRIK. 2, 9, 35. H. 1058. MED. RATNAM. 287. RĀJAN. 13, 67. dhātavo haritālasya MBH. 3, 11617. haritālārdrapīta HARIV. 4083. -darī R. 4, 37, 7. 5, 5, 12. SUŚR. 1, 132, 17. 133, 5. 2, 66, 2. 252, 5. 536, 16. ārdra KUMĀRAS.7,23. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 44,9. 54,30. 110. 81,7. HEM. YOGAŚ.3,108. Inschr. in Journ. of the Am. Or. S.6,505, Śl. 16. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 320,b, No. 760. — Vgl. āla und tāla. haritāla 1) m. “eine Taubenart, Columba Hurriyala.” 2) ī a) “Panicum Dactylon.” b) “Schwertklinge” c) “der 4te (oder 3te) Tag in der lichten Hälfte des Bhādrapada.” d) “*eine best. Linie am Himmel.” e) “*der Luftraum.” 3) n. “Auripigment, Arsenicum flavum” RĀJAN.13,2.65. ŚIŚ.4,21. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 haritāla (Ṃ) A mineral (yellow orpiment) got from mountains, which is red like the clouds at dusk. (Vana Parva, Chapter 158, 94). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 haritāla haritāla, i. e. harita + āla, I. n. Yellow orpiment. II. f. lī. 1. Bent grass. 2. A line in the sky. 3. A sort of creeper. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 haritāla n. auripigment; -maya, f. ī made of it. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 haritāla haritā-la, n. yellow orpiment: -maya, a. (ī) formed of yellow orpiment. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 haritāla na° harivarṇasya pītavarṇasya tālaḥ pratiṣṭhā yatra . 1 pītavarṇe upadhātubhede sa haritālasamānanavāṁśukaḥ māghaḥ . 2 pītavarṇapakṣibhede puṁstrī° rājani° . striyāṁ ṅīṣ . svārthe ka . haritāle na° amaraḥ . haritālaṁ dvidhā proktaṁ patrākhyaṁ piṇḍasaṁjñakam . tayorādyaṁ guṇaiḥ śreṣṭhaṁ tato hīnaguṇaṁ param . svarṇavarṇaṁ guru snigdhaṁ sapatraṁ ābhrapatravat . patrākhyaṁ tālakaṁ vidyād guṇādyaṁ tadrasāyanama . niṣpavaṁ piṇḍasadṛśaṁ svalpasatvaṁ tathā guru . strīpuṣpahārakaṁ svalpaguṇaṁ tat piṇḍatālakam . hapati ca haritālañcārutā dehajātām sṛjati ca bahutāpāmaṅgasaṅkocapīḍām . vitarati kaphavātau kuṣṭharogaṁ vidadhyādidamaśitamaśuddham māritañcāpyasamyak . tālakaṁ kaṇaśaḥ kṛtvā taccūrṇaṁ kāñjike pacet . dolāyantreṇa yāmaikaṁ tataḥ kūṣmāṇḍajadravaiḥ . tilataile pace dyāma yāmañca triphalājale . evaṁ yantre caturyāmaṁ pakva śuddhyati tālakam . atha tālasya māraṇavidhiḥ sadalaṁ tālakaṁ śuddhaṁ paunarnavarasena tu . khalve vimardayedekaṁ dinaṁ paścādviśāṣayet . tataḥ punarnavākṣāraiḥ sthālyāmūrdhaṁ prapūrayet . tatra tadvolakaṁ dhṛtvā punastemaiva pūrayet . ākaṇṭhaṁ piṭharaṁ tasya pidhānaṁ dhārayenmukhe . sthālīṁ culyāṁ samā ropya kamādvahni vivardhayet . dinānyantaraśūnyāni pañca vahniṁ pradāpayet . evaṁ tanmriyate tālaṁ mātrā tasyaikaraktikā . anupānānyanekāni yathāyogyaṁ prayojayet . evaṁ śodhitasya māritasya tālakasya guṇāḥ . haritālaṁ kaṭu snigdhaṁ kaṣāyoṣṇaṁ haredviṣam . kaṇḍū kuṣṭhāsyarogāmrakaphapittakacavraṇān . tālakaṁ harate rogān kuṣṭhamṛtyujvarāpaham . śodhitaṁ kurute kāntiṁ vīryavṛrdhiṁ tathāyuṣam bhāvapra° . haritālakhagamāṁsaguṇāḥ haritālo’lpaviṭkaḥ syāt kaṣāyo madhuro laghuḥ . raktapittapaśamanastṛṣāghno vātakopanaḥ rājani° . |
हरिद्रा – haridrā | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899haridrā f. see below.
haridrā f. Curcunia Longa, turmeric or its root ground to powder (46 synonyms of this plant are given) &c. f. N. of a river Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 haridrā [hariṁ pītavarṇaṁ dravati dru-gatau-ḍa] (1) Turmeric. (2) The root of turmeric powdered; see Malli. on N. 22. 49. — Comp. –āna a. of a yellow colour. ( –bhaḥ) 1. the yellow colour. –2. Zedoary. –gaṇapatiḥ, –gaṇeśaḥ a particular form of the god Gaṇeśa. –rāga, –rāgaka a. 1. turmeric-coloured. –2. unsteady in attachment or affection, fickle-minded (as a lover); (thus defined by Halayudha: –kṣaṇamātrānurāgaśca haridrārāga ucyate). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 haridrā haridrā, f. Turmeric, Sch. ad Vikr. d. 53; MBh. 3, 12880; Rājat. 5, 381. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 haridrā haridrā, f. turmeric: -rāga, a. whose affection lasts only as long as the colour of turmeric. Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 haridrā strī, (haritaṁ pītavarṇaṁ rātīti . harit + rā + kaḥ . ṭāp .) oṣadhiviśeṣaḥ . haluda iti bhāṣā . tatparyāyaḥ . niśāhvā 2 kāñcanī 3 pītā 4 varavarṇinī 5 . ityamaraḥ . 2 . 9 . 41 .. kāverī 6 umā 7 varṇavatī 8 gaurī 9 pīñjā 10 . iti jaṭādharaḥ .. pītavālukā 11 hemanāśā 12 bhaṅgavāsā 13 gharṣiṇī 14 . iti śabdaratnāvalī .. pītikā 15 rajanī 16 niśā 17 mehaghnī 18 bahulā 19 varṇinī 20 rātrināmikā 21 . iti ratnamālā .. harit 22 rañjanī 23 svarṇavarṇā 24 suvarṇā 25 śivā 26 dīrgharāgā 27 haladdī 28 varāṅgī 29 janeṣṭā 30 varā 31 varṇadātrī 32 pavitrā 33 haritā 34 viṣaghnī 35 piṅgā 36 maṅgalyā 37 maṅgalā 38 lakṣmīḥ 39 bhadrā 40 śiphā 41 śobhā 42 śobhanā 43 subhagāhvayā 44 śyāmā 45 jayantikā 46 . asya guṇāḥ . kaṭutvam . tiktatvam . uṣṇatvam . kaphavātāsrakuṣṭhamehakaṇḍuvraṇanāśitvam . dehavarṇavidhāyitvañca . iti rājanirghaṇṭaḥ .. * .. anyacca . haridrā kaphapittāsnaśothakaṇḍuvraṇāpahā . iti rājavallabhaḥ .. api ca . haridrā kāñjanī pītā niśākhyā varavarṇinī . kṛmighnā haladī yoṣitpriyā harivilāsinī .. haridrā kaṭukā tiktā rūkṣoṣṇā kaphapittanut . varṇyātvagdoṣamehāsraśothapāṇḍuvraṇāpahā .. * .. atha vanaharidrā . araṇyahaladīkandaḥ kuṣṭhavātāsranāśanaḥ . * . atha karpūraharidrā . dārvī bhedāmragandhā ca surabhiścāru dāru ca . karpūrā padmapatrā syāt surabhiḥ suranāyikā .. āmragandhiharidrā yā sā śītā vātalā matā . pittahṛnmadhurā tiktā sarvakaṇḍavināśinī .. iti bhāvaprakāśaḥ .. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 haridrā strī hariṁ pītavarṇaṁ dravati dru–gatau ḍa . svanāmakhyāte opadhibhede . haridrā kaṭukā tiktā rūkṣoṣṇā kaphapittanut . varṇyā tvagdoṣame hāsraśothapāṇḍuvraṇāpahā . (vanaharidrā) araṇyahaladdīkandaḥ kuṣṭhavātāsranāśanaḥ . (karpūraharidrā) dārvī bhedāmragandhā ca surabhiścārudāru ca . karpūrā padmapatrā syāt surabhiḥ suranāyikā āmragandhirharidrā yā sā śītā vātalā matā . pittahṛnmadhurātiktā sarvakaṇḍūvināśinī bhāvapra° . |
हरिद्राभ – haridrābha | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899haridrābha “haridrā-bha” (“-drābha”) mfn. resembling turmeric; of a
yellow colour ; m. Curcuma Zerumbet or Terminalia Tomentosa Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch haridrābha (haridrā + ābhā) 1) adj. “gelb” AK. 1, 1, 4, 24. — 2) m. “Curcuma Zerumbet Roxb.” und “Terminalia tomentosa W. et. A.” ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. haridrābha *haridrābha 1) Adj. “gelb.” 2) m. a) “Curcuma Zerumbet.” b) “Terminalia tomentosa.” Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 haridrābha pu° haridreva ābhāti ā + bhā–ka . 1 pītasāle (piyāsāla) 2 karvurake 3 pītavarṇe ca . 4 tadvati tri° amaraḥ . |
हरिद्वर्ण – haridvarṇa | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899haridvarṇa “harid-varṇa” mfn. green-coloured, of a yellowish golden
colour |
हरिनेत्र – harinetra | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899harinetra “hari-netra” n. the eye of Viṣṇu
n. a white lotus n. an eye of a greenish colour harinetra “hari-netra” mfn. having yellow eyes harinetra “hari-netra” m. an owl Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch harinetra n. 1) Hari’s d. i. Viṣṇu’s “Auge” MĀRK. P. 81, 52. — 2) “eine weisse Lotusblüthe” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. harinetra 1) adj. “gelbäugig”: Śiva MBH. 14, 194. — 2) m. “Eule” TRIK. 2, 5, 14. HĀR. 185. harinetra1 n. 1) “Hari’s ~, d.i. Viṣṇu’s Auge.” 2) “*eine weisse Lotusblüthe” RĀJAN.10,182. harinetra2 1) Adj. “gelbäugig.” 2) *m. “Eule.” Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 harinetra a. yellow-eyed (Śiva). Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 harinetra na° harernetramiva . 1 śvetapadme rājani° . 6 ta° . 2 viṣṇorlocane . hareḥ siṁhasyeva netramasya dīrṣatvāt . 3 pecake puṁstrī° trikā° striyāṁ ṅīṣ . |
हरिपिङ्ग – haripiṅga | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899haripiṅga “hari-piṅga” mfn. yellowish-brown
Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch haripiṅga Adj. “gelblich braun” MBH.1,222,31. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 haripiṅga a. yellowish-brown. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 haripiṅga hari-piṅga, a. yellowish brown: -la, a. id.; -prabha, a. tawny-coloured. -bhakti, f. worship of Viṣṇu; -bhaṭa, m. N.; -bhaṭṭa, m. N. of various scholare; -madhyā, a. f. having a tawny waist; having a waist reminding of Viṣṇu. |
हरिमन् – hariman | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899hariman m. (for 2. see p.1292, col.1) death, illness
m. time hariman m. (for 1. see p.1289, col.2) yellow colour, yellowness (as a disease), jaundice Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 hariman m. (1) Yellowness. (2) Paleness. (3) Time. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch hariman (von hari) UṆĀDIS. 4, 147. m. “gelbe Farbe, Bleichheit, Gelbsucht” ṚV. 1, 50, 11. fg. AV. 1, 22, 1. 9, 8, 9. 19, 44, 2. “die Zeit” (kāla) UJJVAL. hariman m. “gelbe Farbe, Bleichheit, Gelbsucht.” Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 hariman hariman, m. I. i. e. hari + iman, Paleness, Chr. 289, 11 = Rigv. i. 50, 11. II. i. e. hṛ + iman, Time. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 hariman m. yellowness, a kind of disease. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 hariman hari-man, m. yellowness, jaundice (V.). |
हरिम्भर – harimbhara | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899harimbhara “hari-m-bhara” mfn. bearing the yellow-coloured
(thunderbolt) |
हरिय – hariya | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899hariya m. a horse of a reddish or bay colour
Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch hariya (von hari) m. “ein falbes Ross” H. 1238. hariya *hariya m. “ein falbes Ross.” Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 hariya hariya (derived from hari), m. A horse of yellow colour. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 hariya pu° hariṁ harivarṇaṁ yāti yā–ka . pītavarṇaghaṭake hemaca° . |
हरियः – hariyaḥ | Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890
hariyaḥ A yellow-coloured horse. Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 hariyaḥ puṁ, (hariṁ pītavarṇaṁ yāti prāpnotīti . yā + kaḥ .) pītavarṇaghoṭakaḥ . iti hemacandraḥ .. |
हरिवर्पस् – harivarpas | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899harivarpas “hari-varpas” (“hari-“) mfn. having a yellowish or greenish
appearance Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch harivarpas adj. “gelbliches –, grünliches Aussehen darbietend”: die Erde ṚV. 3, 44, 3. Indra 10, 96, 1. harivarpas Adj. “gelbliches ~, grünliches Aussehen habend.” Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 harivarpas a. green-coloured. |
हरिश्चन्द्र – hariścandra | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899hariścandra “hari-ścandra” (“hari-“) mfn. (see “candra”) having golden
splendour ; m. N. of the 28th king of the solar dynasty in the Tretā age (he was son of Tri-śaṅku, and was celebrated for his piety; accord. to the Mārkaṇḍeya-Purāṇa he gave up his country, his wife and his son, and finally himself, to satisfy the demands of Viśvāmitra; after enduring incredible sufferings, he won the pity of the gods and was raised with his subjects to heaven; accord. to see under “śunaḥśepa”, p.1082, col.3: in later legends Hari-ścandra is represented as insidiously induced by Nārada to relate his actions with unbecoming pride, whereupon he was degraded from Svarga, one stage at each sentence, till stopping in time and doing homage to the gods he was fixed with his capital in mid-air; his aerial city is popularly believed to be still visible in the skies at particular times; cf. “saubha”) &c.; N. of various authors &c. m. or n. (?) N. of a place ; n. N. of a Liṅga ; “-caritra” n. N. of wk.; “-tīrtha” n. N. of a Tīrtha ; “-pura” n. the city of Harikandra (= “saubha”) ; a mirage ; “-purāṇa” n. “-yaśaś-caudra-candrikā” f. “-ścandrākhyāyikā”, f. “-ścandropākhyāna” n. N. of wks. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch hariścandra (hari + ścandra) 1) adj. “gelb –, golden schimmernd” ṚV. 9, 66, 26. — 2) m. N. pr. eines Fürsten mit dem patron. Vaidhasa aus dem Geschlecht des Ikṣvāku AIT. BR. 7, 13. ŚĀÑKH. BR. 15, 17. MAITRJUP. 1, 4. ein Ṛṣi (Rājarṣi?) P. 6, 1, 153. im Epos ist Har. ein Sohn Triśañku’s, der für seine Frömmigkeit und Freigebigkeit mit seinen Unterthanen in den Himmel erhoben, aus diesem aber wegen seines Hochmuths wieder vertrieben wird und mit seiner Stadt (vgl. saubha) im Luftraum schweben bleibt, H. 701. MBH. 2, 294. 484. 488. fgg. 12, 614. 13, 187. 3290. 5663. fg. 18, 106. HARIV. 754. fgg. 11110. Spr. (II) 4830. VP. 372 nebst N. 9. WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 252. MĀRK. P. 7, 1. fgg. BHĀG. P. 9, 7, 6. 16, 31. 10, 72, 21. RĀJA-TAR. 4, 648. 7, 798. DAŚAK. 8, 1 v. u. WILSON, Sel. Works 1, 181. 362. Verz. d. B. H. No. 1198. als Autor No. 941. N. pr. eines historischen Fürsten Journ. of the Am. Or. S. 7, 35. fg. eines Sohnes des Bharahapāla Verz. d. Oxf. H. 276,a,8. — 3) N. pr. eines Wallfahrtsortes Verz. d. Oxf. H. 39,b,16. 42,a,11. — Vgl. haricandra. hariścandra 1) Adj. “gelb ~, golden schimmernd.” 2) m. N.pr. verschiedener Fürsten. Im Epos ist es ein Sohn Triśañku’s, der für seine Frömmigkeit und Freigebigkeit mit seinen Unterthanen in den Himmel erhoben, aus diesem aber wegen seines Hochmuths wieder vertrieben wird und mit seiner Stadt im Luftraum schweben bleibt. 3) N.pr. einer Oertlichkeit. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 hariścandra 1 I A King of the solar dynasty very much reputed for his unique truthfulness and integrity. He was the son of the famous Triśaṅku. hariścandra 2 II An emperor of ancient times, to whom Brahmā gave as a gift a palace which automatically produced everything desired by its owner. He was lord over the seven islands. About his former birth and the plenitude of his riches the Padma Purāṇa (Uttara khaṇḍa, Chapter 32) has the following story to say:- hariścandra 3 III A Sanskrit poet who lived in the 9th century A.D. The mahākāvya called “Dharmaśarmābhyudaya” is his main work. This mahākāvya comprises of 21 contos. He has composed another work called “Jīvandharacampū”. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 hariścandra hari-ścand + ra (see cand), m. The name of a king. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 hariścandra a. having a golden-coloured splendour; m. N. of sev. kings. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 hariścandra hari-ścandra, a. having a yellow or golden lustre (Soma, RV.1); m. N. of a king of the race of Ikṣvāku; in E. a son of Trisaṅku, who having been elevated with his subjects to heaven and expelled thence owing to his pride, remained suspended in mid-air with his city (Saubha): (hari) -śmaśāru, a. having a tawny beard (RV.1); -śmaśru, a. id. (E.); -siṁha, m. N. of a king; -soma, m. N.; -svāmin, m. N.; -haḍaukasa, m. N.; -haya, a. having tawny steeds, ep. of Indra; -hara, m. sg. Viṣṇu and Śiva in person; du. or °-, Viṣṇu and Śiva; N. of a various men; -kathā, f. discourse about viṣṇu and Śiva; -heti, f. Indra’s weapon, rainbow; Viṣṇ’s weapon, discus: -mat, a. adorned with a rainbow, -hūti, m. (called after the discus or cakra), the, Cakravāka or ruddy goose (Anas casarca). Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 hariścandra pu° hariḥ candra iva ṛṣau suṭ . sūryavaṁśye triśaṅguputre nṛpabhede . ṛṣibhinne tu na suṭ . haricandra eva . |
हरिश्री – hariśrī | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899hariśrī “hari-śrī” mfn. beautifully yellow, gold-coloured
mfn. blessed with Soma mfn. blessed with or abounding in horses Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch hariśrī adj. 1) “schön gelb, goldfarben”: Heerde VĀLAKH. 2, 10. PAÑCAV. BR. 15, 3, 10. — 2) Soma – “beglückt”: mada ṚV. 8, 15, 4. hariśrī Adj. 1) “schön gelb, goldfarben.” 2) “Soma-beglückt.” Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 hariśrī a. shining or beautiful as gold. |
हारिद्र – hāridra | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899hāridra mfn. (fr. “haridrā”) coloured with turmeric, yellow &c. &c.
hāridra m. a yellow colour hāridra m. the Kadamba tree hāridra m. a kind of vegetable poison hāridra m. a kind of fever (also of animals) Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch hāridra 1) adj. “mit” Haridrā (“Gelbwurz) gefärbt, gelb” überh. P. 4, 2, 2, Vārtt. 5 (proparox.). H. 1394. HALĀY. 4, 50. MED. r. 241. Kleid ĀŚV. GṚHY. 1, 19, 11. KĀTY. ŚR. 25, 8, 3. ŚAT. BR. 13, 4, 4, 8. SUŚR. 1, 111, 7. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 5, 58. TATTVAS. 12. varṇa MBH. 4, 1331. 12, 10058. 10065. meha CARAKA 8, 4. mūtra SUŚR. 2, 525, 10. saṁnipāta Verz. d. Oxf. H. 319,b, No. 758. — 2) m. a) “Nauclea Cadamba” (kadamba) “Roxb.” HĀR. 96. MED. — b) “ein best. vegetabilisches Gift”: haridrātulyamūlo yo hāridraḥ sa udāhṛtaḥ BHĀVAPR. im ŚKDR. hāridra 1) Adj. “mit Gelbwurz gefärbt, gelb” überh. GAUT. ĀPAST. hāridraudana VARĀH.JOGAJ.6,17. 2) m. a) “Nauclea Cadamba.” b) “ein best. vegetabilisches Gift” med. 97. BHĀVAPR.1,270. RASENDRAC.42,11.21. c) “ein best. Fieber” BHĀVAPR.3,79. “beim Büffel” GAL. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 hāridra hāridra, i. e. haridrā + a, I. adj. 1. Stained with turmeric. 2. Yellow. II. m. 1. Yellow, the colour. 2. The Kadamba tree. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 hāridra a. dyed with turmeric, yellow. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 hāridra hāridra, a. coloured with turmeric (haridrā), yellow. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 hāridra pu° haridrayā raktaḥ aṇ . 1 kadambavakṣe tatpuṣpasya pītaprāyatvāt tathātvam . 2 haridrayā rakte tri° medi° . |
हारिद्रः – hāridraḥ | Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890
hāridraḥ (1) A yellow colour. (2) The Kadamba tree. Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 hāridraḥ puṁ, kadambavṛkṣaḥ . (haridrayā raktam . haridrā + haridrāmahārajanābhyāmañ vaktavyaḥ . 4 . 2 . 2 . ityasya vārtikoktyā añ .) haridrārañjite, tri . iti medinī .. haridrāvarṇaḥ . iti hemacandraḥ .. (yathā, bṛhatsaṁhitāyām . 5 . 58 . dūrvākāṇḍaśyāme hāridre vāpi nirdiśenmarakam ..) viṣabhedaḥ . yathā — haridrātukhyamūlo yo hāridraḥ sa udāhṛtaḥ . iti bhāvaprakāśaḥ .. |
हालक – hālaka | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899hālaka m. a horse of a yellowish brown or tawny colour
Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch hālaka m. “ein Pferd von bestimmter Farbe” (pītaharitacchāya), = harika H. 1242. — Vgl. upa-, avahālikā. hālaka *hālaka m. “ein Pferd von bestimmter Farbe” pītaharitacchāya. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 hālaka pu° hāla + saṁjñāyāṁ kan . pītaharitavarṇāśve hamaca° . |
हालकः – hālakaḥ | Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890
hālakaḥ A horśe of a yellowishbrown colour. Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 hālakaḥ puṁ, potaharitavarṇāśvaḥ . yathā — haritaḥ pītaharitacchāyaḥ sa eva hālakaḥ . iti hemacandraḥ .. |
हेमगौर – hemagaura | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899hemagaura “hema-gaura” mfn. of a golden yellow colour (“-rāṅga” mfn.
having golden yellow limbs) hemagaura “hema-gaura” m. a kind of tree (= “kiṁkirāta”) Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch hemagaura 1) “goldgelb”: -gaurāṅga SKĀNDA-P. im ŚKDR. — 2) m. “ein best. Baum”, = kiṁkirāta RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. hemagaura 1) Adj. “goldgelb.” 2) *m. “ein best. Baum”, = kiṁkirāta. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 hemagaura pu° hemeva gauraḥ pītaḥ puṣpeṇa . 1 aśokavṛkṣe rājani° 2 svarṇatulyapīte tri° . |
हैम – haima | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899haima mfn. wintry, brumal, caused or produced by snow or ice
mfn. covered with snow mfn. relating to or coming from the Himālaya (as pearls) haima m. N. of a mountain haima n. hoar-frost, dew haima mf (“ī”) n. (fr. 3. “heman”, of which it is also the Vṛiddhi form in comp.) golden, consisting or made of gold &c. mf (“ī”) n. of a golden yellow colour haima m. N. of śiva haima m. Gentiana Cherayta haima m. (scil. “kośa”) the lexicon of Hema-candra haima mf (“ī”) n. (“ā”) f. yellow jasmine haima mf (“ī”) n. (“ī”) f. id. haima m. Pandanus Odoratissimus haima “haimana” &c. see col.1. Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 haima a. (mī f.) [hima-heman-aṇ] (1) Cold, wintry, frigid. (2) Caused by frost; mṛṇālinī haimamivoparāgaṁ R. 16. 7. (2) Golden, made of gold; pādena haimaṁ vililekha pīṭhaṁ R. 6. 15; Bk. 5. 89; Ku. 6. 6. (3) Of a golden yellow colour. –mā –mī Yellow jasmine. –maṁ Hoar- frost, dew. –maḥ An epithet of Śiva. — Comp. –mudrā, –mudrikā a golden coin. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch haima (von hima) 1) adj. a) “von Schnee” oder “Eis herrührend”: uparāga RAGH. 16, 7. Wasser RĀJAN. 14, 63. MADAN. 8, 19. “mit Schnee bedeckt”: himavataḥ pādaḥ MBH. 7, 2172. — 2) “vom” Himālaya “kommend”: Perlen VARĀH. BṚH. S. 81, 2. 5. “zum” H. “in Beziehung stehend”: Śiva MBH. 13, 1178. — 3) m. N. pr. eines Berges MBH. 13, 1434. haima (von hema) adj. “von” Hema d. i. Hemacandra “verfasst”; m. “ein von ihm verfasstes Wörterbuch” (kośa) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 183,a,5. 185,b,32. 44. 194,a,2. 195,b,2. 211,a,9. Schol. zu VĀSAVAD. S. 15. haima (von hema = 2. heman) 1) adj. (f. ī) “von Gold, golden” VOP. 7, 19. M. 1, 9. MBH. 3, 10207. 15719 (heman ed. Bomb.). 16654. 13, 4437. R. 2, 92, 32. 3, 48, 11. 4, 33, 25. 5, 45, 3. CARAKA 10, 9. MEGH. ed. ST. 73. IV. RAGH. 6, 15. VIKR. 157. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 1, 6. 26, 9. 73, 2. KATHĀS. 59, 9. AK. 2, 8, 1, 32. H. 717. HALĀY. 2, 268. VOP. 6, 14. WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 277. fg. PRAB. 71, 3. BHĀG. P. 3, 33, 16. 6, 2, 44. 7, 10, 53. 10, 50, 53. PAÑCAR. 3, 11, 7. BHAṬṬ. 5, 89. — 2) m. “Gentiana Cherayta Roxb.” RĀJAN. 9, 15. — 3) f. ā “gelber Jasmin” ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — 4) f. ī dass. ebend. “Pandanus odoratissimus” RĀJAN. 10, 70. = kṣīriṇī 5, 5. haima1 1) Adj. a) “von Schnee oder Eis herrührend.” b) “mit Schnee bedeckt.” c) “vom Himālaya kommend, zum H. in Beziehung stehend.” 2) m. N.pr. eines Berges. haima2 Adj. “von Hema-, d.i. Hemacandra verfasst” ; m. “das von ihm verfasste Wörterbuch.” haima3 1) Adj. (f. ī) “von Gold, Golden.” 2) *m. “Gentiana Cherayta.” 3) *f. ā “gelber Jasmin.” 4) *f. ī a) das. b) “Pandanus odoratissimus.” Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 haima haima, i. e. heman + a, I. adj. 1. Cold. 2. Golden, Vikr. d. 157. II. n. Hoar-frost. III. f. mī, Yellow jasmine. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 haima [1] a. of snow or ice. haima f. ī2 golden. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 haima haima, a. 1. caused by snow, ice, or frost (hima); covered with snow; 2. composed by Hema (-candra); m. Hemacandra’s dictionary; 3. (ī) made of gold (hema), golden. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 haima tri° hime bhavam aṇ . 1 himajātamātre 2 prātaḥkālīnahimajāte jale na° rājani° . 3 bhūnimbe pu° rājani° . hemno vikāraḥ aṇ ṭilopaḥ . 4 svarṇavikāre 5 svarṇamayapadārthe ca tri° . |